Whole-body X-Ray CT System

Pronto-VE/SE/XE

TECHNICAL GUIDE
- Principle of Operation -

Tokyo, Japan
L1E-BW1346-3

CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of

Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001, 2002. All rights reserved.
 Contents

Page
Section 1 Introduction.......................................................................................................1 - 1

Section 2 Basic principle of system ..................................................................................2 - 1

2.1 Xe detector data collection (Pronto-XE) ........................................................................... 2 - 1
2.2 Solid detector data collection (Pronto-VE/SE) .................................................................. 2 - 2
2.3 Offset detector ................................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.4 Image reconstruction ......................................................................................................... 2 - 3
2.5 System configuration......................................................................................................... 2 - 8
2.6 Communication control ..................................................................................................... 2 - 9

Section 3 Operation principle of X-ray system.................................................................3 - 1

3.1 X-ray control circuit .......................................................................................................... 3 - 1
3.2 Anode rotation drive circuit............................................................................................3 – 6A
3.2.1 System with Hitachi-made 1.5M/2MHU X-ray tube assembly ..........................3 – 6A
3.2.2 System with Varian-made 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly..................................... 3 - 9
3.3 X-ray main circuits (primary).......................................................................................... 3 - 21
3.4 kV, mA error detection circuit......................................................................................... 3 - 29

Section 4 Operation principle of X-ray detection system.................................................4 - 1

4.1 Xe gas ionization chamber detector (Pronto-XE).............................................................. 4 - 1
4.2 Solid detector (Pronto-SE/VE) .......................................................................................... 4 - 4
4.3 Preamplifier (Pronto-XE, Pronto-SE)................................................................................ 4 - 7
4.4 Preamplifier (Pronto-VE) ................................................................................................ 4 - 17

Section 5 Central Operation Console................................................................................5 - 1

5.1 Hardware ........................................................................................................................... 5 - 1
5.2 Measurement processing ................................................................................................. 5 - 16

Section 6 Summary of image processing software ...........................................................6 - 1

6.1 Software configuration ...................................................................................................... 6 - 1
6.2 Disk map............................................................................................................................ 6 - 2
6.3 OS...................................................................................................................................... 6 - 3

(1) 1 L1E-BW1346
Section 7 Operation principle of scanner unit...................................................................7 - 1
7.1 Structure and summary of scanner unit ............................................................................. 7 - 1
7.2 Scan drive unit................................................................................................................... 7 - 8
7.3 Gantry tilt unit ................................................................................................................. 7 - 11
7.4 Collimator device ............................................................................................................ 7 - 16
7.5 Slip ring ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 22
7.6 Summary of electric control device of scanner................................................................ 7 - 24
7.7 Power distribution board ................................................................................................. 7 - 32
7.8 Stationary side control unit.............................................................................................. 7 - 34
7.9 PCB unit II (Rotation plate PCB unit) ............................................................................. 7 - 53
7.10 Tube current control circuit ............................................................................................. 7 - 56
7.11 Slip ring ........................................................................................................................... 7 - 62
7.12 Preamplifier signal........................................................................................................... 7 - 63
7.13 Tube shift Mechanism ..................................................................................................... 7 - 64
7.14 Shutter mechanism .......................................................................................................... 7 - 72

Section 8 Operation principle of patient table mechanism ...............................................8 - 1

8.1 Structure of mechanism ..................................................................................................... 8 - 1
8.2 Longitudinal move device ................................................................................................. 8 - 2
8.3 Vertical move device ......................................................................................................... 8 - 4
8.4 Electric control of patient table.......................................................................................... 8 - 7

(2) 2 L1E-BW1346
 Section 1 Introduction

This technical guide has been edited for the persons who are engaged in installation, adjustment and maintenance of the
whole body X-ray CT system to enable them to fully understand the mechanisms and functions of this system.
The X-ray CT system is a diagnostic method indispensable for clinical diagnosis of the head, and the clinical application
fields have been extended by the development of the system for diagnosing the whole body by shortening the scan time.
The scan system in the initial development period of the CT system was the pencil beam type to scan the surrounding of
the head by means of fine X-ray beams while repeating the linear move and rotary move. (See Fig.1.1 (a))
On the other hand, a system has been developed to reduce the traverse count and reduce the scan time to 20 ~ 30
seconds by increasing the number of detectors and transmitting corresponding 3o ~ 10o sector X-ray beams a shown in
Fig. 1.1 (b) for the purpose of shortening the scan time. This system is called the second generation system. The
pencil beam type is called the first generation system. Since this second generation system can obtain good images at
comparatively low costs when it is applied to such inspection objects as their internal movement is negligible like the
head, it serves as a leading scanning system of the CT system for the head and neck as the translate/rotate system.
In order to accelerate the scan to be higher, a system has been developed to terminate the scan by rotating the X-ray tube
and detector group only without any linear scan as a result of widening the X-ray beam open angle and preparing the
number of detectors covering the sections of a patient (object). (See Fig.1.1 (c)) This system uses 300 ~ 1000
o
detectors and rotates the X-ray tube and detector group by 360 in 0.8 ~ 4 seconds. This system is called the third
generation CT system as compared with the preceding two systems. In addition, a system has also been developed to
execute scanning by rotating the X-ray tube only while arranging about 800 detectors around the patient as shown in Fig.
1.1 (d).
This system is called stationary/rotate system or the fourth generation system.
The first stage of developing this system was advantageous over the third generation system from the viewpoints of the
image quality.
However, as a result of improving the image quality by increasing the number of the detector in the third generation
system, the rotate/rotate system (the third generation system) plays a leading role as the scan system of the whole body
CT system at present. Our whole-body CT system also adopts the rotate/rotate system.

This technical guide was originally drafted, approved and supplied by Hitachi Medical Corporation in the English
language.

1−1A L1E-BW1346
 1°rotation by every translation scan
Rotate every
3°∼10°scan
X-ray source

X-ray source

走査
1
an

120
Sc

Patient

Patient Head
tor
te c
De Detector
(8 ~ 30 elements)
Linear move

(a) Translate/Rotate system (b) Translate/Rotate system

(First generation) (Second generation)

X-ray source Detector

Patient

Patient
Rotation

X-ray source

Data sampling every degree

Detector
(300 ~ 1000 devices)

(c) Rotate/Rotate system (d) Stationary/Rotate system

(Third generation) (Fourth generation)

Fig.1.1 Principle of various scan systems

1−2 L1E-BW1346
Features of CT
Difference of CT from conventional system X-ray radiography and tomography
In the conventional X-ray radiography, a patient (object) is put in the X-ray beam flux irradiated from the X-ray
source as a spot irradiation source to record an image on the two-dimensional recording medium provided at the
back of the object as shown in Fig.1.2. Accordingly, the density at each point on the film is determined by the
total absorption quantity when the X-ray beams are passing through the object in the system consisting of the
intensifying screen as a recording medium and films. In other words, an image obtained by the above
radiographic method is a two-dimensional projection image of a three-dimensional body, so that all pieces of
information in the thickness direction of the object are recorded by overlapping them with each other.
In the tomographic method, on the contrary, only an image of a section perpendicular to the X-ray beams is
obtained by synchronously moving the X-ray source and recording system. In the rotary traverse tomographic
method, a tomographic image can be obtained in the direction perpendicular to the long axis of the human body.
In these conventional tomographic methods, however, (1) out-of-focusing depending upon the distance from the
focal plane occurs, (2) the image on the film is overlapped with out-of-focus images before and after the focal
plane to cause the reproduction of the low contrast information to be difficult even in case of focus image, and (3)
the images other than the image on the focal plane are produced as intrinsic artificial out-of-focus images
according to the radiation source and moving direction and moving quantity of films to cause the image quality to
be limited.
In the CT system, the X-ray fine beams thinly collimated to
X-ray source
the direction perpendicular to the long axis of the human
body are projected in multi-directions and the transmitted
X-ray intensity is measured by high sensitivity X-ray
detectors every projection to produce and display a
distribution image of the X-ray absorption coefficient of the
Object (patient) layer based on individual measured values. Accordingly,
the overlap of images other than the layer does not occur
basically in CT images, so that a precise layer image is
obtained. This is the greatest feature of the CT system.
Image contrast is improved due to the absence of
overlapping of images from those other than the layer. Since
the X-rays are finely (or thinly) collimated, the sharpness of
Recording medium
images is improved without being noticeably affected by
scattered rays.

Fig.1.2 Normal X-ray radiography

1−3 5 L1E-BW1346
 Section 2 Basic principle of system

2.1 Xe detector data collection (Pronto-XE)

2.1.1 Measuring geographic system
The measuring geographic system of X-ray tube
this system is shown in Fig.2.1.1.
The X-ray source can irradiate X-rays
continuously, and Xe ionization box

606
type detectors are arranged to be a
ng are
suri
opposite to the X-rays to measure the Mea 20

998
φ4
X-ray intensity distribution.
Out of the total number of channels of
these detectors, 4 channels each on Xe gas ionization
chamber detector
both ends are used as reference Ref
4ch Ref
channels. The expansion ratio of the 4ch
568ch
X-ray source is 1.65, and the opening
576ch
size per channel at the measuring area
center is 0.75mm.
Fig.2.1.1 Measuring geographic system

2.1.2 No. of measuring data

Data are measured by irradiating continuous X-rays.
The measuring view quantity in this system is as shown in Table 2.1.1 according to each scan time, and
an image is reconstructed based on these data.

Table 2.1.1 Measuring view quantity

Scan time (sec) 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
View number 499 800 1,200 1,600 2,400
Rotating angle 225o 360o

2−1 L1E-BW1346
2.2 Solid detector data collection (Pronto-VE/SE)
2.2.1 Measuring geographic system
The measuring geographic system of this CT X-ray tube

is shown in Fig.2.2.1.
The X-ray source can irradiate sectorial
X-rays and solid type detectors are arranged to 606

be opposite to the sectorial X-rays to measure a

are
1037 ring
the X-ray intensity distribution. asu
Me 0
43
φ
The total number of channels of these
detectors is 752 channels. Of these channels,
Solid type
4 channels each on both ends are used as detector
Ref
reference channels. The expansion ratio of 4ch
Ref
the X-ray source is 1.71, and the opening size
4ch
per channel at the measuring area center is 744ch

0.58 mm. The spatial resolution depends 752ch

upon these factors together with the focus size.
Fig.2.2.1 Measuring geographic system

2.2.2 No. of measuring data

Data are measured by irradiating continuous X-rays.
The measuring view quantity in this system is as shown in Table 2.2.1 according to each scan time, and
an image is reconstructed based on these data.

Table 2.2.1 Measuring view quantity

Pronto-SE

Scan time (sec) 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0

View number 499 800 1,200 1,600 2,400
o o
Rotating angle 225 360

Pronto-VE

Scan time (sec) 0.5 0.8 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0

View number 450 720 900 1,350 1,800 2,400
o o
Rotating angle 225 360

2−2 L1E-BW1346
2.3 Offset detector
The X-ray source is opposed to the detectors as shown in Fig.2.1.1. This system adopts the offset detector
system to displace the detectors by 1/4 sample in the 1/4 offset

channel direction for reducing streak artifacts.

180°data
As is understood from Fig.2.3.1, the sampling of
opposite addition data becomes twice apparently to be
able to reduce streak artifacts in this offset detector
system.
0°data

Opposed
addition data

Conventional system Offset detector

Fig.2.3.1 Offset detector

2.4 Image reconstruction

2.4.1 Image reconstruction principle
Coordinate system x0y fixed to an object as shown in Fig.2.4.1 is defined.
In this coordinate (x, y), the distribution of the X-ray absorption coefficient is represented by f (x, y).
By defining new coordinate X0Y tilted by angle “θ” to coordinate x0y, the conversion between
coordinates (x, y) and (X, Y) becomes as shown below

x＝Xcosθ−Ysinθ
y＝Xsinθ＋Ycosθ (2.1)

When the X-ray beams having intensity Io are irradiated in parallel to the X-axis, the X-ray intensity I
after penetrating an object f (x, y) is given by

I / I0
∞
＝exp − f (Xcosθ−Ysinθ), (Xsinθ＋Ycosθ) dY (2.2)
∞

The logarithmic conversion g (X, θ) of the damping factor of this X-ray intensity (called projection
data) is given by
g (X, θ)
∞
＝ f (Xcosθ−Ysinθ), (Xsinθ＋Ycosθ) dY (2.3)
∞

Image reconstruction is executed to obtain the absorption coefficient distribution f (x,y) by giving g (X,
θ) shown in the above relation within a range of 0≦θ≦2π.

2−3 L1E-BW1346
 X
1
g（X, θ） g（X, θ 1） X θ

k（
in
1+
ys

x1,
θ

X=

θ
0 os

co
0 xc y

1
y =

）
sθ
Y X
f（x, y）

1
X 0

+y
sin
P（x, y）

θ
θ 0

1
0 x （x, y） x
x

Fig.2.4.1 Object f (x,y) -to-projection data Fig.2.4.2 Image reconstruction by back

g (X, θ) relation projection method

Back projection
Back projection is available as a simple and intuitive method to estimate the distribution (x,y) of the
absorption coefficient from projection data g (X, θ).
We can obtain a distribution close to (x, y) when reversely projecting the values on projection data by
means of X-ray beams which pass the target point (x, y) ,and then, overlapping them with each other in
all directions as shown in Fig.2.4.2.

The X coordinate of coordinate system XOY tilted by angle θfrom coordinate system x0y to point (x,
y) is represented by;

X=Xcos θ+Ysin θ (2.4)

Thus, the image reconstructed by the back- projection method is represented by;

P (x, y)＝1 / 2π 2π g (Xcosθ＋Ysinθ, θ) dθ (2.5)

0
The intensity distribution of plotted images is reconstructed as the intensity distribution being radially
extended around the points to cause the image to be out of focus. In order to eliminate this out-of-focus,
this system executes the out-of-focus correction using filter. This system adopts the filter correction
back projection method.

2−4 L1E-BW1346
2.4.2 Image reconstruction flow
As described above, this system executes high-speed arithmetic operation with improved image quality
by adopting the [angle arrange method] and [filter correction back projection method] as the methods of
obtaining the CT value at each part in the image processor from projection data obtained by the detectors
This image reconstruction flow is explained below, referring to Fig.2.4.3.
In the pre-processing of raw projection data obtained by scan measurement, the sensitivity correction of
detectors and preamplifier and offset correction are executed, and the arrangement processing is executed
to rearrange the fan beams into parallel beams. These results are processed by Fourier transformation to
obtain frequency spatial data. Filtering (equivalent to the convolution operation on the actual space) is
executed by multiplying these data and filter function on the frequency space to correct the out-of-focus
condition, and then, projection data are returned to the actual space by Fourier inverse transformation.
Data returned on the actual space are back-projected on the parallel beam to obtain a CT image.

Frequency
spatial Parallel
Scan Pre- Fourier
Fourier data Filtering beam CT
measu- processing Arrangement inverse
transformation (Multiplication) back image
rement (correction) transformation
Filter projection
function

RAW Data
Parallel beam
X-ray source conversion
G
Sensitivity correction
and offset correction W G

Logarithmic X
Detector
transformation W
G
Filter function
W

Actual space Frequency space Actual space

Fig.2.4.3 Image reconstruction flow

2.4.3 Image display

In back projection, the absorption coefficient distribution of each pixel of 512 x 512 matrix is obtained,
and an image is created in a gray scale of 256 stages based on the above value. The relation between the
X-ray absorption value and CT value is represented by equation (2.6 ). In this system, the scale factor is
specified as K= 1000. An image distributed over a range from -1000 to +4000 as CT values is cut out by
the function called window in a certain range only as shown in Fig.2.4.5, and the range is displayed in
gray scale of max. 256 gradations. The center level of the cut off range is set by the function called
window level. Fig.2.4.4 shows the CT values at each part of the human body.
In the head, the white matter and gray matter are major diagnostic objects.
Accordingly, an easy-to-diagnose image is obtained by selecting the window level to about 35. For
diagnosing abnormal symptoms of bone regions caused by a traffic accident, a fairly high CT value is set
as the window level.

2−5 L1E-BW1346
 K（μ−μw） μ
CT−No＝ ＝K −1 ................... (2.6)
μw μw

where
K : Scale factor (1000)
μ : X-ray absorption coefficient value of the tissue as an object
μw : X-ray absorption coefficient value of water
Assume that K=1000.
CT-No (air) ≒−1000 (μ≒0)
CT-No (water) ＝0 (μ＝μw)
CT-No (bone) ≒＋1000 (μbone≒2μw)

（Air） （Water）
− 1000 − 200 − 100 0 40 80 4000

Breasts − 114 − 50 50 1870

Bone
Fat − 220 − 20 30 58 Spleen

− 400 − 180 6 38
Lung Pancreas
32 58 Kidney

26 84 Blood

40 76 White matter

68 104
※ By X-ray tube voltage of 120kVp Gray matter
16 56 Heart

16 80 Liver

2 32 Small intestine

20 66 Primary tumor or
metastasized tumor

Fig.2.4.4 CT value of various human body tissues

2−6 L1E-BW1346
 4000

（White）

60 White

50
Window width

35
CT value range

10 Black

（Black）
− 30

− 1000

Fig.2.4.5 CT image display method

2−7 L1E-BW1346
 2.5

Scanner
table
control Starter
System configuration

X-ray control unit

HV HV
generator generator
Fig.2.5.lshows the system configuration.

Detector

Preamplifier

2−8
AC200V

Table Central operation console

Fig.2.5 1 Pronto configuration

L1E-BW1346
2.6 Communication control
2.6.1 Summary
A microcomputer (hereinafter abbreviated to as μ-CPU) is used in the CT system described in this
chapter for controlling each unit as shown in Fig.2.6.1 (a), and each unit is uniquely controlled by μ
-CPU. As a means of connecting the entire CT system systematically, the image processing unit and
scanner μ-CPU are connected by memory shared controller MKY28, while the scannerμ-CPU and
X-ray control unit as well as the scannerμ-CPU and the rotation plate control unit are connected by
using a serial communication cable conforming to RS-232C standard.
Each unit can be divided into (1) image processing system composed of operation unit and image
processing unit and (2) scanner system composed of the scanner, table, rotation plate, and the X-ray
control unit. The operation unit plays an interface role between the CT system and an operator to
transfer the operator’s desired operation to the image processing unit. Accordingly, the image
processing unit and operation unit communicate with each other frequently. (See Fig.2.6.1 (b)) On the
other hand, the scanner system is connected by the μ-CPU called scanner μ-CPU as a pivotal unit
The scanner μ-CPU shares the information of individual units collected by the scanner, table, rotation
plate, and μ-CPU of X-ray control unit by means of communication, and it offers the information as
occasion demands according to the demand of the image processing unit. (Fig.2.6.1 (b))

2−9 L1E-BW1346
 Image processing unit Communication cable Scanner μ-CPU Rotation plate μ-CPU
(shared memory)

SH7032 8085
Pentium

Communication cable(RS-232C)
Internal
communication
X-ray control μ-CPU

8085
Pentium

Communication cable (RS-232C)

Operation unit

[Image processing system] [Scanner system ]

μ-CPU type

Fig.2.6.1 (a) Connections through communication cables

Entire information
Scanner system information
Operation unit information Scanner information
Image processing information X-ray control information
Scanner system information Table information

Table information

X-ray control information

Operation unit information

Rotation plate control information

Fig.2.6.1 (b) Connections through information

2−10 L1E-BW1346
2.6.2 Communication method
An RS232C cable and memory shared controller MKY28 are used for communication. Serial
communication will be described below.
(1) RS-232C
The circuit between scanner μ-CPU and the rotation plate control unit as well as the circuit
between the scanner μ-CPU and X-ray control unit are connected through serial communication.
Fig.2.6.2 shows the hardware configuration.
Since the input/output signal cables of μ-CPU are parallel signal cables, while the communication
cables are serial signal cables, the basic hardware configuration is composed of a conversion circuit
for matching the difference of these signal cables. When μ-CPU signals are sent to the
communication lines, μ-CPU inputs parallel data into a communication IC. This communication
IC sends these parallel data sequentially one by one at specified time intervals according to the
transmission instruction to convert them into serial data and then, sends these data to the
communication cables. On the other hand, the serial signals being input through communication
cables are stored into the communication IC sequentially, and read into μ-CPU after they have
been converted into specified parallel signals.
(2) Memory shared controller MKY28
The image processing unit and scanner μ-CPU are connected to each other by memory shared
controller MKY28. Its configuration is shown in Fig.2.6.3.
This controller executes high-speed high-quality serial transmission by its unique 2-signalss level
synchronous system. If communication is in error, this MKY28 re-sends signals automatically to
ensure enhanced reliability of communication. This MKY28 is provided with a memory to be able
to store the information equivalent to 256 characters to reduce the burden of each μ-CPU.

2−11 L1E-BW1346
 Parallel data

Parallel data bus

μ-CPU

Send/receive control signal

Serial data

[Communication cable]
Parallel data

Communication IC

D1

Start marker

Serial data
Stop marker

D1 D8

D8

0 t1 2t1 t

0 t0

Parallel data Serial data

Fig.2.6.2 Hardware configuration

2−12 L1E-BW1346
 Feed side Bit No 7 8 8 12 15 Receive side
PASS STP ADDRESS DATA CRC - 12 clock SEE

SEE clock ANSWER PASS

Image processing unit Scanner

MKY28 MKY28
(For send) (For receive)

MKY28 MKY28
(For receive) (For send)

Fig.2.6.3 Shared memory MKY28 configuration

2.6.3 Communication control

Fig.2.6.4 shows the communication between each unit during measurement.

When the measurement standby is selected from the image unit, measuring conditions are sent from the
image unit to the scanner, so that the scanner controls the scanner rotation speed and collimator position,
and also sets each scan condition through the communication with the rotation plate and WB.
By selecting the measurement start, a measurement start instruction is sent from the image unit to the
scanner, so that the scanner executes X-ray high voltage control, measuring data input, and patient table
position control through the communication with the rotation plate and WB. The status of each unit is
sequentially checked through the communication.

2−13 L1E-BW1346
 Rotation Rotation
Image unit Scanner plate WB Image unit Scanner plate WB
89
C4 07 C3 : X-ray high voltage ON
C4 :Error reset

BE
Offset
06 measurement
87 CC :Status read
07
97 04
08 Regular
measurement
81 05
E1 :Projector goes out
C1 :Preparation for measurement Table feed start
C6 :Measurement end
Scanner rotation CC :Status read
start or X-ray 07
C3 : X-ray high voltage ON
tube positioning

Offset
Collimator setting measurement
06 Waiting for table feed end
CC : ステータスリード

87 CC : ステータスリード

97 8A

87 CC :Status read

97
Shared memory RS - 232C
MKY28 B0
80 C0 : X-ray tube high voltage OFF
CC :Status read
C4 :Error reset

Shared memory RS - 232C

MKY28

a) Measurement standby a) Normal scan

Fig.2.6.4 Communication between each unit

2−14 19 L1E-BW1346
 Section 3 Operation principle of X-ray generation system

The X-ray generator system is composed of the X-ray control unit, plus (+) and minus (-) side high-voltage
generators, filament control unit and, X-ray tube assembly mounted on the scanner rotation plate.
This X-ray generation system is characterized with the following features.
① It adopts the micro computer (hereinafter referred to as μ-CPU) as a major control element, and all circuits
are controlled by this μ-CPU directly or indirectly.
② The high voltage generator is designed to be compact by adopting a high frequency resonance type inverter
system on the primary side of main circuit.

3.1 X-ray control circuit

3.1.1 Functions of μ-CPU
(1) Sequential control from the generation of X-rays to the stop
The μ-CPU of the X-ray control unit is connected to μ-CPU of the scanner unit through a
communication line, and it functions according to the operation commands from the scanner unit.
The following table shows the operation commands from the scanner unit and the operation of μ
-CPU operation of the corresponding X-ray control unit.

Operation commands Corresponding operation

Status request
Standby request and select the
SCANO, SCAN mode
X-ray ON request
X-ray OFF request
(Continuous scan)
X-ray OFF request
Returns the X-ray control unit status
X-ray generation is prepared according to the X-ray conditions
being transmitted together with the standby request. By this
standby request, the X-ray tube anode rotates to operate the
primary rectifier circuit of the main circuit to charge the
rectifier capacitors to the specified voltage.
The inverter is operated by an X-ray trigger signal sent from
the scanner unit as an individual signal to generate X-rays
continuously.
X-rays are interrupted, but the operation of the primary
rectifier circuit of main circuit and the X-ray tube anode
rotation are continued to be ready for the next scan.
All X-ray generation operations are stopped to return to the
condition obtained after turning on the current. X-ray tube
anode rotation is continued for a certain time.

3−1 L1E-BW1346
 X-ray control unit Scanner rotation plate unit

Hospital power High voltage

distribution board Power generator X-ray tube
supply Filter Rectifier unit Inverter unit assembly
unit

High voltage
generator
Anode
rotation
Filament drive

3−2
Filament
control unit
kV,mA signals

Anode
rotation
Control unit drive unit

kV signals

Communication line
Main power line
Control power line
Scanner unit
Signal line
(Emergency, X-ray trigger signal, X-ray start/abort, kV signals, and kV,
mA abnormal signals are sent as individual signals)

Fig.3.1 Block diagram of X-ray generator system

L1E-BW1346
 As described above, X-ray generation sequential control is mainly executed by μ-CPU. If the
tube voltage, tube current, or main circuit primary is abnormal, the system is stopped by hardware
logic for a quick and secure response.

(2) Main circuit DC voltage, tube current, and tube voltage control
Control parameters are output from μ-CPU according to the selected kV, mA conditions. The
main circuit DC voltage, tube current, and tube voltage are feedback-controlled based on these
control parameters. And DA converter is indispensable for controlling them based on the control
parameters from μ-CPU, and a DA converter trouble causes the generated X-ray trouble. For
DA-converted parameters, DA converted analog value parameters are read into μ-CPU through an
AD converter again, and compared with output parameters to monitor the DA converter for its
troubles.

3.1.2 Control circuit structure

Fig.3.2 shows the block diagram of control circuit. The lines in the figure show major signal flows.
(1) XCONT1 circuit
● μ-CPU circuit
This circuit comprises CPU8085 and its peripheral circuit.
● Communication circuit
This RS232C communication circuit is connected to the communication circuit of the scanner
unit in case of the X-ray control unit. In addition to the RS232C communication lines,
emergency, X-ray trigger, X-ray start/abort, and kV mA error signal lines are connected to the
interface circuit without passing μ-CPU circuit as individual signal lines.

● Maintenance circuit
This maintenance circuit is provided with a maintenance program start switch for interrupt
processing, a digital switch for selecting the maintenance program, and a status indicator.
● Data input interface circuit
This circuit is provided to interface between μ-CPU circuit and peripheral control circuit to
enable μ-CPU to read data obtained by DA-converting analog values such as X-ray generation
system status, main circuit DC voltage, etc.

3−3 L1E-BW1346
 ● Data output interface circuit
This circuit is provided to interface between μ-CPU circuit and peripheral control circuit to
give the control information from μ-CPU to each control circuit. The control information
comprises parameters of tube voltage and main circuit DC voltage. These parameters are
DA-converted in this circuit and sent to the control circuit. This circuit is also provided with
counter type timers that can be mode-set and preset from CPU. These timers are used for the
following purposes.

Uses Setting
Anode rotation hold timer This timer is set to 10 minutes from CPU in
standby, X-ray ON, and X-ray off (continuous
scan) modes.
In case of Varian 3.5MHu Timer is set to
250sec.
Backup timer This timer is set to 110% of the scan time from
CPU when X-ray is turned on
Scan counter clock A reference clock corresponding to the scan time
is set from CPU when the scan without stop time
is selected

(2) XCONT3 circuit will be described together with the drive circuit by function.

3−4 L1E-BW1346
 Scanner unit Communication μ -CPU
circuit circuit

Data input
interface Anode rotation drive circuit
Control circuit
circuit Power supply circuit

Maintenance
circuit
DATA
output
interface Rectifier circuit Inverter
circuit

3−5
XCONT1 circuit XCONT3 circuit

Fig.3.2 Block diagram of control circuit

L1E-BW1346
3.2 Anode rotation drive circuit
3.2.1 System with Hitachi-made 1.5M / 2 / 3MHU X-ray tube assembly
System with Varian-made 2MHU X-ray tube assembly
The anode rotation drive circuit (hereinafter referred to as starter) is exclusively used for low speed. It
drives the X-ray tube anode at 50 or 60Hz.
Fig.3.3 shows the operation sequence, and Fig.3.4 shows its main circuit.
When ROTOR START signal turns on, the rotor starts running, and when it turns off, the rotor is braked
to terminate the sequence. When 2DR turns on, a gate current flows through the route shown by arrow
② in Fig.3.4, so that 201FLS ignites at almost zero phase to cause a start voltage close to the power
voltage to be applied between stator coils 7-9 of the X-ray tube assembly. This condition remains
unchanged until 5DR is turned on by BOOST TIMER (1VR start time adjustment). When 5DR turns on,
the status is transferred from the start condition to the steady-state condition. In this case, the gate
current flows through the route shown by arrow ③ in Fig.3.4.
Since the gate current does not flow until the 15C voltage exceeds the break-over voltage of 1TD (trigger
diode), 201FLS ignites with the phase delayed by the time constant by CR. The steady-state voltage can
be changed by the phase control angle of 201FLS. (3VR Steady-stage voltage adjustment)
When ROTOR START signal turns off and 222DR turns on, the gate current flows through the route
shown by arrow ① in Fig.3.4, so that 201FLS turns on in its half wave only and a half-wave rectified
DC voltage is applied to the stator main coil to cause braking. This condition continues until 222DR is
turned off by the brake timer. (2VR braking time adjustment)
1SCR and 2SCR are provided to detect the stator coil (phase coil, main coil) current, while 3SCR is
provided to detect a steady-state voltage failure. (over-voltage) If the ignition angle of the current
flowing to the stator coil is detected to be excessive by 1, 2 SCR under the steady-state condition or if
3SCR turns on, error detection relay 7DR is turned on and held. As a result, main relay 203DR turns off
to stop feeding power to the stator coil. The hold condition of 7DR is reset when ROTOR START
signal turns off to transfer to the brake condition.

3−6A L1E-BW1346
1DR

2DR

3DR

203DR

5DR

6DR

4DR

222DR

ROTOR START ON ROTOR START OFF

7DR

Turns on when RUN voltage is abnormal ( over-voltage)

STATOR
COIL

BOOST RUN BRAKE

STATOR
COIL

shows the operation

when an error was
detected

Fig.3.3 Starter operation sequence

3−7 L1E-BW1346
 203DR 1

(during 37R 5∼6ZD

222DR 15C
braking) 2

7∼8ZD
2DR 5DR (at boost time)
201FLS

5DR 3
(Steady-state) 1TD
3VR
AC200V 9 36R
38R
PHASE MAIN
14C 39R
8 7
201C1, 2
222DR

212R
Stator current detection

Fig.3.4 Starter main circuit

3−8 L1E-BW1346
3.2.2 System with Varian-made 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly
3.2.2.1 Control circuit
Function of microcomputer (μ-CPU)
(1) Sequence control from starting to stopping rotation of the X-ray tube anode
Theμ-CPU of the driving device is connected with the control circuit of the X-ray control unit
through the signal line. Thisμ-CPU works according to control signal from the X-ray control unit.
The table below shows operation of theμ-CPU of the driving device responding to control signal
from the X-ray control unit.

Operation command Responding operation

Rotor start Data of operation mode (HIGH/LOW speed) is set in the waveform
generation circuit to execute sequence control of starting and running
operation.
High speed With Rotor start signal and High speed signal set to ON, theμ-CPU executes
the sequence control of high speed starting operation and high speed running
operation.

As shown in the above table, the anode drive sequence is controlled mainly by theμ-CPU. If an
abnormal drive voltage or current occurs, putting emphasis on responsibility and reliability, stop
operation system by hard logic is employed.

Note : High speed is not used.

(2) Drive voltage control

Following the selected operation mode, the μ-CPU outputs control parameters.
Starting voltage, running voltage and braking voltage are controlled by software feedback (PWM)
based on these control parameters.

3−9 L1E-BW1346
 Inverter output
transformer
Phase delay capacitor

Rectification Current
Power supply unit Inverter
and detection
1φ circuit X-ray tube unit
smoothing circuit High / Low circuit
AC200V / 208V starter coil
Power speed relay
supply selection
circuit circuit

3−10
Control unit

(Signal) Control
circuit
Setting block

Display block

Anode rotation drive

Fig. 3.4.1 System Block Diagram of Anode Rotation Drive

L1E-BW1346
 3.2.2.2 Composition of control circuit
The composition of the control circuit is shown in Fig. 3.4.2.

Inverter
Inverter circuit
control
circuit

Abnormality
detection circuit

μ− CPU
circuit A/D
converter
Voltage and current
detection circuit

A / D circuit
Control signal Input / Output
To control circuit of circuit High / Low speed
X-ray control unit selection relay

DSW and RSW setting

Display unit

Fig. 3.4.2 Control Circuit

● μ-CPU circuit
H8 micro computer and its peripheral circuits
This circuit also incorporates the counter-type timer that can set and preset mode by theμ-CPU for
the following purposes.

Inverter controlled interval time μ-CPU sets 1/4 cycle time for High/Low speed

Inverter controlled reference clock μ-CPU sets the reference clock for High/Low speed.

Sequence control timer μ-CPU sets time necessary for sequence control

3−11 L1E-BW1346
● Input / Output circuit
<Functions>

(1) Transmission and reception of signals to and from X-ray control unit (Rotor start, High speed, Rotor
up, High speed verified)
(2) Output of selection signal to relay circuit (High speed selection relay, Brake selection relay)
(3) Input of hard lock signal from A/D circuit (Overvoltage, Overcurrent)
(4) Output of prohibition signal to inverter control circuit
(5) Input of DIP switch signal
(6) Input of rotary switch signal
(7) Output of LED display signal
As shown above, this is the interface circuit between theμ-CPU and its peripheral circuits, the
circuit outputs control signals from theμ-CPU to each control circuit and inputs data from those
peripheral circuits.

● A/D circuit
<Analog signals to be input>

(1) Output voltage

(2) Input current

(3) Main coil current
(4) Sub-coil current

(5) Variable resistance for setting timer

(6) Variable resistance for setting output voltage

Note: The signals of (1) ~ (4) are also input to abnormal detection circuit. (Overvoltage and
overcurrent)
The abnormal detection circuit is provided, as shown in Fig. 3.4.3, with the variable
resistor for setting abnormality detection. If voltage exceeds the set value, the
circuit prohibits the operation of the inverter, reads the abnormality into the μ-CPU
and displays an error through the input/output circuit.
Analog signals such as set voltage, current and variable resistance values is also
A/D-converted and read into the μ-CPU as data.

3−12 L1E-BW1346
 High speed

Low speed

VR setting

Inverter operation
prohibit Inverter control circuit
Voltage / Current Full wave Comparator F/F
detection rectification
circuit

3−13
Input / Output
Display circuit
circuit

A/D
μ− CPU
converter

Fig. 3.4.3 A/D Circuit

L1E-BW1346
 As shown in Fig. 3.4.4, the output voltage is stabilized by software feedback control (PWM control).

Output voltage
detection

μ -CPU
Full wave
A/D

3−14
rectification circuit

Output voltage > Set voltage

Inverter control Inverter
: Inverter is turned ON and pulse width Inverter
circuit output
becomes narrower. circuit
（PWM control） transformer

Output voltage < Set voltage

A/D ：Inverter is turned ON and pulse width
becomes wider.
Variable resistor
for voltage setting

Fig. 3.4.4 PWM Control

L1E-BW1346
● Inverter control circuit
By setting each data by theμ-CPU, inverter waveforms shown in Fig. 3.4.5 and 3.4.6 are output.
① Phase 1 data (ON time data)
② Phase 2 data (ON time data)
③ Dead time data (to prevent short-circuit of arm)
④ Segment data (By dividing the basic clock, count frequency is produced.)

3−15 L1E-BW1346
 Dead time Dead time Dead time Dead time

GTR1 ON Phase 1
(Upper arm) data
OFF

GTR1 ON
(Lower arm)
OFF

Dead time Dead time Dead time Dead time

GTR2 ON

3−16
Phase 2
(Upper arm) data
OFF

GTR2 ON
(Lower arm)
OFF
Segment data Segment data

1 cycle 1 cycle

Fig. 3.4.5 During Boosting Period Fig. 3.4.6 During Running Period

L1E-BW1346
3.2.2.3 Anode rotation drive sequence
Inputting Rotor start signal starts rotation according to the High/Low speed mode.
When High speed is selected, High speed verified signal is output. If the output voltage, input current
and output current exceed the reference values after a starting period passes, Rotor up signal is output and
the running operation mode is selected.
Turning off Rotor start signal selects the braking mode after the preset internal hold-on time.
After the braking time passes, the braking operation ends and the sequence is completed.
The operation time charts are shown in Fig. 3.4.7 and 3.4.8.

Note: High speed is not used.

3−17 L1E-BW1346
 Power ON Power ON
Hold ON Hold ON
time time

Rotor start 11LD

High speed 10LD

Rotor up 14LD

High speed verified 12LD

Low speed Relay ON 19LD

Rotor start Relay On 20LD

3−18
Inverter drive 15-18LD

Output

Boost Running Brake Boost Running Brake

＜ Low speed ＞ ＜ High speed ＞

Value display LED

Fig. 3.4.7 Operation Time Chart

L1E-BW1346
 Power ON
Hold ON
Hold ON time

Rotor start 11LD

High speed 10LD

Rotor up 14LD

High speed verified 12LD

Low speed Relay ON 19LD

Rotor start Relay On 20LD

3−19
Inverter drive 15-18LD

Output

Boost Running Brake Running Brake

Low speed High speed

＜ Low → High speed ＞

Value display LED

Fig. 3.4.8 Operation Time Chart

L1E-BW1346
3.2.2.4 Error codes list
Error Detection
Error code Cause Remedy
release method
ROM SUM check error Turn off the power once and then turn it on Power Software
again. down.
Or replace EPROM.
RAM write error Turn off the power once and then turn it on Power Software
again. down.
When powered up, Rotor Turn off Rotor start signal. Same Software
up signal is not turned on. as left.
Over-output voltage Check input voltage. Power Hardware
down. (T2)
Over-input current Check inverter circuit. Hardware
(CT1)
Over-output current in Check coil resistance of main coil of X-ray Power Hardware
main coil tube unit. down. (CT2)
Over-output current in Check resistance of sub-coil of X-ray tube Power Hardware
sub-coil unit. down. (CT3)
Zero output voltage Check F1 fuse for blown down. Power Software
down. (T2)
Zero input current at Check F1 fuse for blown down. Power Software
starting down. (CT1)
Zero input current at Check F1 fuse for blown down. Power Software
braking down. (CT1)
Zero current in main coil Check connection of output cable and Power Software
during operation resistance of main coil. down. (CT2)
Zero current in main coil Check connection of output cable and Power Software
at braking resistance of main coil. down. (CT2)
Zero current in sub-coil Check connection of output cable and Power Software
during operation resistance of sub- coil. down. (CT3)
Insufficient output current Check connection of output cable and Power Software
at starting resistance of both main coil and sub-coil. down. (CT2)
Insufficient output Check connection of output cable and Power Software
voltage and current at resistance of both main coil and sub-coil. down. (CT1, T2)
starting Check input and output voltage

3−20 L1E-BW1346
3.3 X-ray main circuits (primary)
Fig.3.5 shows the X-ray main circuits. The main circuits consist of the power filter circuit, rectifier circuit, DC
smoothing circuit, inverter circuit, serial resonance capacitors, and resonance circuit correction coil.
(1) Rectifier circuit
The rectifier circuit adopts the three-phase full-wave thyristor rectification system. It controls the DC
voltage to the inverter by controlling the thyristor ignition angle.
(2) DC smoothing circuit
The rectified DC voltage is smoothed by an LC filter and supplied to the inverter circuit. The DC voltage
output is feedback-controlled to eliminate an error to its set value.
(3) Inverter circuit
The IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) full bridge inverter is composed of INV1 ~ 4. This
resonance type inverter uses the leak inductance of a high voltage transformer, the inductance connected in
series, and the capacitor of serial resonance capacitors as resonance elements. The tube voltage is
feedback-controlled by using the output voltage of the high voltage divider of positive and negative high
voltage generators mounted on the scanner rotation plate by connecting the output voltage to the X-ray
control unit via a control circuit.
The feedback control of the tube voltage is performed by controlling the INV4, INV2 turn-on phase
difference when paired INV1 and INV4 turn on or paired INV3 and INV2 turn on. In other words, the
feedback control is performed by controlling the overlapped phase of INV1 and INV4 or the overlapped
phase of INV.3 and INV.2. Fig.3.6 shows the inverter control method.
An inverter circuit over-current is detected by utilizing such a symptom as the IGBT collector ~ emitter
voltage VCE and the gate ~ emitter voltage VGE become high when an over-current flows. The inverter
output current is detected by a current transformer to detect an over-current when it flows.

3−21 L1E-BW1346
3.3.1 DC voltage control circuit
Fig.3.7 shows the DC voltage control. Since the X-ray tube voltage is feedback-controlled by the inverter,
DC voltage does not directly affect the X-ray tube voltage, but its voltage value is controlled according to
the X-ray conditions for the purpose of reducing the switching loss of the inverter. The DC voltage is
controlled by controlling the ignition angle of the thyristor by means of the thyristor gate drive signal
being synchronized with the three-phase power supply. Also, the DC voltage is input to the control
circuit from the smoothing circuit via an isolated amplifier and feedback controlled based on DAC output
REC reference. The thyristor gate drive signal is output when REC START signal is input, and the
output is stopped if kV, mA, INV operation, or DC voltage is abnormal. Also, the DC voltage is read
into μ-CPU by ADC, and the output is stopped, if abnormal.
3.3.2 Inverter control circuit (X-ray tube voltage feedback control circuit)
Fig.3.8 shows the inverter control circuit. The X-ray tube voltage is controlled by controlling the
overlap phase of the inverter. The X-ray tube voltage is input to the control circuit of X-ray control unit
via the control circuit mounted on the scanner rotation plate from the output of the high voltage divider of
positive and negative high voltage generators, and feedback-controlled based on the DAC output kV
reference. INV.1,3 ON signal is obtained by using the reference clock of the oscillator. The error
amplification output of kV reference and high voltage divider output is pulse width-modulated. This
pulse width is used as a phase difference to obtain a phase-shift clock. An INV2,4 ON signal is obtained
by using this phase shift clock. The inverter IGBT drive circuit comprises a delay circuit to delay the
IGBT ON signal, and also, it provides an interlock function to prevent a short-circuit of upper and lower
inverter arms. Accordingly, a pause time to prevent a short-circuit failure of the arms is not provided in
the control circuit.
If the error amplification output of kV reference and high voltage divider output is large, the pulse width
becomes narrow. In other words, the phase difference decreases, while the overlapped phase of the
inverter increases, causing the inverter output to increase and also, causing the X-ray tube voltage to
increase.

3−22 L1E-BW1346
3.3.3 Inverter IGBT drive circuit
Fig. 3.9 shows the inverter IGBT drive circuit. The control circuit and drive circuit are connected to
each other by optical fiber. A circuit to delay the turn-on signal of inverter IGBT is connected to the
arms of inverters INV 1 ~ 4.
When INV ON signal is not input (INV OFF), hybrid IC applies an OFF gate voltage (reverse bias
voltage) to the inverter IGBT by the gate drive circuit. When INV ON signal is input from the control
circuit, the hybrid IC applies the ON gate voltage (forward bias voltage) to the inverter IGBT by the gate
drive circuit after a slight delay to turn on IGBT. The IGBT over-current detection circuit of hybrid IC
becomes effective to detect the inverter IGBT collector ~ emitter voltage VCE and the gate ~ emitter
voltage VGE.
If an over-current flows to IGBT to cause VCE and VGE to be higher than the over-current detection setting
voltage, the over-current detection circuit functions to apply an OFF gate voltage to IGBT to turn off
IGBT.
When the over-current detection circuit operates, an INV OC error detection signal is fed to the control
circuit through optical fiber to stop the sequence. This inverter over-current detection is done for the
purpose of detecting a short-circuit failure of the inverter arms. If the drive circuit power supply drops,
an error signal is sent to the control circuit to stop the sequence.

3−23 L1E-BW1346
 DC smoothing circuit
Power filter circuit Rectifier circuit INV.1

2FFB 1KP
INV.1 INV.2 INV.2
Drive Drive

Discharge
3φ resistor
AC200V

INV.3 INV.4
INV.3 Drive INV.4
Drive

Series resonance
capacitor
CT

REC

3−24
Drive

T2 T2

DC voltage
feedback
T1 T1
CONT Main INV output current
UNIT IF

Neutral X-ray tube

point assembly
circuit3

T2
Optical fiber
FBL
INV ON / INV OC

T1

High voltage generator

Fig. 3.5 X-ray main circuits

L1E-BW1346
 Phase difference Phase difference

INV. 1 Drive signal

INV. 2 Drive signal

INV. 3 Drive signal

INV. 4 Drive signal

Transistor
INV. 1 current current
Diode
current

INV. 2 current

INV. 3 current

INV. 4 current

High voltage generator

primary current

X-ray tube voltage

:shows overlapped phases.

Fig.3.6 Inverter control

3−25 L1E-BW1346
 Rectifier circuit Smoothing circuit

DC
3 φ power supply Inverter circuit

Thyristor gate drive signal

Power phase detection

DC voltage
REC
DRIVE (primary voltage)

Thyristor gate MAIN IF

drive signal

Insulated amplifier

Power phase detection

31E,
33E, 29E 27E 18C Input buffer
33F

Phase control Level shift Error amplifier

inversion amplifier REC
Reference

START REC START

kV, mA ABNORMAL XCONT3（2/3）

17C
Gate 25E

DC voltage ＜ 50V
Error detection
DC voltage ＞ 250V

INV. ABNORMAL

Fig.3.7 DC voltage control

3−26 L1E-BW1346
 Rise-time Level shift Oscillator pulse Inverter operation
constant circuit inversion amplifier width modulation Buffer M. M phase F.F Gate

kV reference 23C
18D 16D 20D 21E 21F 23F INV. 1 ON
23E

Error amplifier
Reference clock

High voltage 6E
Synchronous circuit
divider output 201VR INV. 3 ON
22C
kV
Via scanner turn plate
control circuit Buffer Limiter
6E
Phase-shift clock

INV. 2 ON
Inverter operation
M.M phase F.F

3−27
21F 23F
Gate
X-RAY TRIG INV. 4 ON
REC START
INV. ON
kV, mA ABNORMAL
INV. ABNORMAL
REC ABNORMAL INV. 1, 4 ON phase difference

INV. 1 ON

INV. 2 ON

INV. 3 ON
INV. 3, 2 ON phase difference

INV. 4 ON

L1E-BW1346
Fig.3.8 Inverter control circuit XCONT3 circuit (2/3)
 ＋ Vcc1

+Vcc2
Optical fiber
receiver ON/OFF control

1RXD Delay
INV. ON
(101RXD) circuit
(FBL PCB)
VCE

G
0V Gate drive
OFF

INV. ON INV. IGBT

0V
IGBT over-current
detection

3−28
Hybrid IC VGE detection
1IC

VCE detection

− Vcc

Error
detection 1TXD
(101TXD) INV. OVER CURRENT
circuit (TO FBL PCB)

Optical fiber
Drive power error transmitter
+VCC1, +VCC2, -VCC

L1E-BW1346
Fig.3.9 Inverter IGBT drive circuit
3.4 kV, mA error detection circuit
An error of the tube voltage or tube current is detected by +kV, -kV (tube voltage divider output) and NE+, NE-,
N+, N- (neutral point current) shown in Fig.7.31 in Chapter 7. All kV, mA errors are detected by the error
detection circuit of the scanner rotation plate. A part of kV errors is also detected on the X-ray control unit side
Fig.3.10 shows the kV error detection circuit.
The tube voltage is detected as follows
● An excessive tube voltage (higher than 150kV across positive and negative terminals) is detected.
● A tube voltage lowering waveform error (The tube voltage does not become lower than 75kV when 47ms at
least has passed from INV stop) is detected.
● Inverted polarity of the kV signal sent from the scanner is detected.

Comparator Gate circuit

kV signal polarity IVNERSE kV

kV inversion error

Tube voltage
lowering waveform VT WIDE
error
Tube voltage detection 75kV
47ms after INV stop

Tube voltage OV VT
is excessive
Tube voltage higher than 150kV

Fig.3.10 kV error detection circuit XCONT3 circuit (3/3)

3−29 48 L1E-BW1346
 Section 4 Operation principle of X-ray detection system

The X-ray detection system accurately measures the X-ray absorption quantity at the object corresponding to individual
X-ray beams, converts them into electric signals, and inputs these signals to the image processor. This system is
divided roughly into the X-ray detector and the preamplifier as shown in Fig.4.1.

Preamplifier

X-rays X-ray Current

detector Δ-Σ ADC Digital filter
To image
processor

Fig.4.1 Block diagram of X-ray detection system

4.1 Xe gas ionization chamber detector (Pronto-XE)

4.1.1 Principle
The X-ray detector is an ionization chamber being sealed with high-pressure Xe gas and composed of
independent 576-channel detection elements to the fan X-ray beams, and its basic principle is as
described below.
Rf
H
Is
S
X-rays

Vs

Fig.4.2 Basic principle of X-ray detector (Xe gas ionization chamber)

Flat electrode plates are arranged in parallel and used as high-voltage electrode plates (H) and signal
electrode plates (S) alternately as shown in Fig.4.2.
A high voltage (Vs) of several hundreds volts is applied to the high voltage electrode plates to form an
electric fields between the high-voltage electrode plates and the signal electrode plates.
When X-rays are incident to these spaces, the ion pairs generated by the ionization of Xe gas move to the
signal electrode plate and high-voltage electrode plates according to the signs of electric charge to
become an output current (Is). As is understood from Fig.4.2, the output current is the sum of the
ionization currents at respective spaces surrounded by two high voltage electrode plates on both sides of
one signal electrode. The ratio of X-ray absorption along the incident direction in the detector after
passing the object (patient) is given by equation (1).

4−1A L1E-BW1346
 I (L)=Io(1−e-μPL) (1)
where, Io ； X-ray dose at the front end of detector electrode
I (L) ； Absorption quantity of X-rays along detector electrode length (L)
μ ； X-ray absorption coefficient of Xe
P ； Pressure
L ； Detector electrode length
Xe gas is characterized with a large X-ray absorption coefficient as compared with other gases. In order
to improve the detection sensitivity, Xe gas is sealed at 2.45MPa (absolute pressure) to absorb the greater
part of the incident X-rays and convert them into an ionization current.
The fluorescent X-ray escape and output characteristics are important factors when the Xe ionization
chamber is used as a detector of the X-ray CT system.

4.1.2 Fluorescent X-ray escape

Xe has a K absorption edge at 34.6keV, and incident X-ray photons having higher energy excite K shell
to return the excited atoms to the ground state, causing the fluorescent X-rays to be irradiated.
The average energy of the fluorescent X-rays of K shell is about 30keV to be slightly lower than the
energy at the K absorption edge. Accordingly, it is hardly absorbed in Xe to cause crosstalk to the
adjacent channels to result in a drop of the spatial resolution of the detector. Accordingly, it is necessary
to separate each detector channel by an electrode plates having a high X-ray absorption coefficient.
This detector adopts 150μm thick molybdenum (Mo) plates having a high X-ray absorption coefficient
to suppress the transmittance of the fluorescent X-rays to be less than 1.3 % in the direction perpendicular
to the electrode plate.

4−2 L1E-BW1346
4.1.3 Output characteristics
When the incident X-ray intensity is kept constant, the output current depends on the applied voltage (V)
between electrodes and gradually increases starting from 0 to saturated current (is) at a voltage higher
than a certain value as shown in Fig.4.3. The generated ion pairs reduce due to ionic rebinding in a
weak electric field, but they reach the electrode plates without ionic rebinding as the electric field
becomes intense sufficently and all the ionization 10
currents generated in the electrode spaces can be 9
8
X-ray tube current：200mA
taken out by the signal electrodes. This area is 7
called saturated area. It is necessary for assuring the 6 X-ray tube current：150mA
5
linearity of the output current to the incident X-ray 4 X-ray tube voltage ：120kV
intensity to operate the detector in the saturated area, 3 Xe gas pressure ：2.45MPa
2
so that 500V is applied. (all ion pairs are collected by
1
the electrodes at higher than 300V.) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8（× 100）

Between the inter-electrode voltage (V)

Fig.4.3 Relation between the inter-electrode voltage

4.1.4 Structure and output current of Xe gas ionization chamber

Fig.4.4 shows the actual structure. The high voltage electrode plates and signal electrode plates are
alternately arranged on the insulator supports and the entire assembly is housed in an aluminum vessel
being internally filled with Xe gas. Output signals are taken out of the vessel every signal electrode
plate by using a specially air-tight processed printed circuit board without any necessity of internal check
of the detector.

Vessel

Insulator support

High voltage
electrode plate

Signal electrode
X-rays incident window plate

Fig.4.4 Xe gas ionization chamber structure

The high voltage electrodes and signal electrodes are arranged alternately, and the high voltage electrodes
on both sides of each signal electrode correspond to one channel of measuring data.

4−3 L1E-BW1346
4.2 Solid detector (Pronto-SE/VE)
4.2.1 Principle
The X-ray detector is a solid state detector consisting of independent 752-channel detection elements to
the fan X-ray beams, and its basic principle is as described below.

Grid Visible light Photo receptor

Rf

Is

X-rays

Separator plate Scintillator Photo diode

Fig.4.5 Basic principle of X-ray detector (solid type)

This unit consists of a scintillator to convert X-rays into visible light, a separator plate to guide the visible
light to a photo diode, a photo diode to convert visible light into a current, and a grid to eliminate
scattered X-rays.
Assume that X-rays are incident to the scintillator and absorbed, now.
The visible light produced by the fluorescent action is converged to the light receptor of the photo diode
to become an output current (Is) after photoelectric conversion. The ratio of X-ray absorption along the
incident direction (痕) in the detector after passing the object (patient) is given by equation (1).

I (痕) =Io (1−e−μ痕) ............................................................................. (1)

where, Io ; X-ray dose at the scintillator tip of detector

I (痕) ; Absorption quantity of X-rays at scintillator height (痕) of detector
μ ; X-ray absorption coefficient of scintillator of detector
痕 ; Height of scintillator of detector
The scintillator absorbs the greater part of the incident X-rays due to its large density. Since its
conversion efficiency is large, the scintillator can obtain a high output as compared with conventional Xe
ionization chamber.
The fluorescent X-ray escape and luminescence characteristic serve as important factors when the solid
state detector is used as a detector of the X-ray CT system.

4−4 L1E-BW1346
4.2.2 Fluorescent X-ray escape
The scintillator in this detector has a K absorption edge at 47keV, and incident X-ray photons having
higher energy than the K absorption ease excite K shell to return the excited atoms to the ground state,
causing the fluorescent X-rays to be irradiated.
The average energy of the fluorescent X-rays of K shell is about 45keV to be slightly lower than the
energy at the K absorption edge. Accordingly, it is not easily absorbed in the scintillator to cause
crosstalk to the adjacent channels to result in a drop of the spatial resolution of the detector.
Accordingly, it is necessary to separate each detector channel by a plate having a high X-ray absorption
coefficient. This detector adopts a molybdenum (Mo) plate having a high X-ray absorption coefficient
to suppress the transmittance of the fluorescent X-rays to be less than 2% in the direction perpendicular
to the electrode plate.

4.2.3 Luminescence characteristic

The wavelength of the light (fluorescence) generated by the scintillator depends upon the materials of the
scintillator. Fig.4.6 shows the luminescent wavelength of various scintillators and the spectral
sensitivity of the photo diode. The highest output can be obtained when the wavelength where the
scintillator luminescence becomes peak coincides with the wavelength where the photo diode sensitivity
becomes the highest. However, the luminescence of the scintillator is generally much on the short
wavelength side, and also the photo diode sensitivity has the peak on the long wavelength side generally.
This solid state detector uses a scintillator having the peak of the first fluorescent output at 510nm and the
peaks of the second and third luminescent output at 680nm and 780nm.
The luminescence quantity on the long wavelength side is much more than in conventional scintillators.
The scintillator sensitivity at the luminescence wavelength is improved by shifting the maximum
sensitivity wavelength of the photo diode toward the short wavelength side.

Luminescence wavelength of
the scintillator for this
Luminescence wavelength detector Spectral sensitivity of
of conventional scintillator photo diode for this
detector
Spectral sensitivity of
conventional photo diode

NaI CdW04 Csl:TL

10
Relative luminescence output

Relative sensitivity

0 400 500 600 700 800

Wavelength （nm）

Fig.4.6 Luminescence wavelength of scintillator and the spectral sensitivity of photo diode

4−5A L1E-BW1346
4.2.4 Structure
X-ray Scintillator

Mo separator plate

Photo diode mounting PCB

Photo diode

Fig.4.7 Basic structure of solid state detector

Fig.4.7 shows the basic structure of the solid state detector. The scintillators and molybdenum separator
plates which separate the elements from each other are mounted on the photo diode consisting of plural
elements according to the element patterns of the photo diode. Incident X-rays are converted into
visible light by the scintillators, and the visible light reach the photo diodes through the scintillator and
converted into a current. The molybdenum separator plates introduce the visible light to the photo
diodes efficiently and also prevent the crosstalk of X-rays to adjacent channels. The current generated
by the photo diodes is sent to the preamplifier through the PCB pattern, connector and cable.

4−6 L1E-BW1346
4.3 Preamplifier (Pronto-XE, Pronto-SE)
4.3.1 General
The preamplifier is mounted between the X-ray detector and the image processor as shown in Fig.4.8. It
receives the control signal from the preamplifier control unit in the scanner to convert current signals
obtained by the X-ray detector into digital codes, and then, transfers these signals to the image processor.
Fig.4.9 shows the entire block diagram.
The preamplifier is composed of the +5V power supply for 3 analog, digital, and interface systems, the
DSC1 PCB, and IFCON2 PCB, and arranged as shown on Fig.4.10 and Fig.4.11. The preamplifier is
standing by to be ready for receiving VIEW TRIG signal from the control unit of scanner after its power
supply has been turned on. When the CT system is set to the measuring condition (in scan mode,
scanogram mode, etc.), the control unit of scanner generates the VIEW TRIG signal with which the
preamplifier starts measuring operation when starting the measurement, signal current from the detector
is AD-converted every channel in the DSC1 PCB and sent to the image processor via IFCON2 PCB.
The preamplifier executes this series operation every VIEW TRIG and returns to be ready for receiving
the VIEW TRIG signal again when this signal is interrupted.

X-ray tube
Control unit of scanner

Patient

Detector Control signal

Image processor
Pre-Amp Unit

Detector output current

(analog signal)

CRT（Image）

Digital signal

Fig.4.8 Positioning of preamplifier

DSC1 PCB IFCON2 PCB

Current ⊿-∑ Digital data Image processor
Detector
ADC Control unit of scanner

Control signal

Fig.4.9 Block diagram of preamplifier

4−7 L1E-BW1346
 Detector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213141516171819 20 212223242526272829303132333435 36 Power supply unit

+5VA

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 +5VD
DSC1 No.1 DSC1 No.3 DSC1 No.5
ISO+5V

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
DSC1 No.2 DSC1 No.4 DSC1 No.6

IFCON2
2CN
To control unit of
scanner and image 1CN
processor
Preamplifier

Fig.4.10 Preamplifier structure (Pronto-XE)

Detector
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 31 32
ABCABCABCABC ABCABCABC ABCABCABCABC ABCABC

Power supply unit

1 4 19 21 31 34 46
DSC1 No.1 DSC1 No.4 DSC1 No.6
+5VA
2 5 20 22 32 35 47
DSC1 No.2 DSC1 No.5 DSC1 No.7 +5VD

3 6 33 36 48 ISO+5V
DSC1 No.3 DSC1 No.8

IFCON2
To control unit of
scanner and image 1CN 2CN
processor
Preamplifier

Fig.4.11 Preamplifier structure (Pronto-SE)

4−8 L1E-BW1346
4.3.2 DSC1 PCB
DSC1 PCB is composed of the △-ΣADC to convert the current from the detector into 20-bit digital
signals, the reference unit to feed a reference voltage to △-ΣADC, and the serial-parallel converter to
convert serial data from △-ΣADC into parallel data.

48IC 47IC 2IC 1IC

Serial-paral
Δ−Σ Δ−Σ Serial data Δ−Σ Δ−Σ Parallel data
lel To IFCON2
ADC ADC ADC ADC
converter

Reference unit

Fig.4.12 DSC1 PCB block diagram

The reference unit feeds a 4.1V reference voltage to △-ΣADC. The △-ΣADC can collect data of 2
channels per IC. Since one DSC1 PCB is provided with 48△-ΣADC, DSC1 PCB can collect data of
96 channels in total.
The △-ΣADC is provided with two QV converter and an ADC every channel, and data are collected
into two phases A,B. In phase A, detector data integrated by the A side QV converter are converted into
digital data by ADC, and the data from the detector are integrated by the B side QV converter. In phase
B, detector data integrated by the B side QV converter are converted into digital data by ADC, and the
data from the detector are integrated by the A side QV converter.
Phase A and phase B are executed once per VIEW, and 20-bit data are sent from DSC1 PCB to IFCON2
PCB each time, and then, stored into IFCON2 PCB memory.
Average values of phase A data and phase B data are sent to the image processor.
Data output from △-ΣADC are serial data. In order to improve the data transfer efficiency, these data
are converted into parallel data by the serial-parallel converter before they are output from the DSC1
PCB. The △-ΣADC output is daisy-chain data, so that 2IC data of △-ΣADC are input into the shift
register in 1IC while the 1IC output of △-ΣADC is being sent to the serial-parallel converter. In the
next sequence, 2IC data are sent to the serial-parallel converter through the 1IC output.
By repeating the above procedure, data of all 96 channels are sent to the serial-parallel converter and sent
to IFCON2 PCB.

4−9 L1E-BW1346
 A phases

-
+
QV converter A
From detector △-Σ To serial-parallel
ADC converter

-
+
QV converter B

B phases

-
+
QV converter A
From detector △-Σ To serial-parallel
ADC converter

-
+
QV converter B

Fig.4.13 △-ΣADC A,B phases

4−10 L1E-BW1346
4.3.3 IFCON2 PCB
IFCON2 PCB is composed of the interface unit to receive control signals from the control unit of scanner
and feed AD-converted data to the image processor, the control unit to control each block every view of
preamplifier, the memory unit to temporarily store data from DSC1 PCB, and the data converter unit to
process the stored data to be fed to the image processor.
Memory unit
Memory 1 Interface unit
Data converter
A

B 16 bit To image
Averaging 16-bit data
20-bit conversion processor
parallel data Memory 2 circuit unit
circuit

DSC1 PCB From control

control Control unit unit of scanner

Fig.4.14 IFCON2 PCB block diagram

(1) Interface unit

This interface unit is divided into the control signal receiver, the selector to switch the ADC output
and check data output from each other, and the sender unit to feed data to the image processor. The
preamplifier side and scanner side of the send-receive unit are insulated from each other by a photo
coupler to prevent ingress of noises.

Preamplifier side Scanner/ image processor side

Sender

D0∼D15
ADC To image
processor
Check data

Selector
Photo coupler

Control signal receiver

DATA MODE
From control unit
VIEW TRIG of scanner
Control circuit

Photo coupler

Fig.4.15 Interface circuit block diagram

4−11 L1E-BW1346
 When the measuring operation is started, the control unit of scanner issues DATA MODE signal to designate
whether the signal being required to the preamplifier is ADC output data or check pattern data. Then, it issues
VIEW TRIG signals of necessary number of views to the preamplifier. When the preamplifier receives the
VIEW TRIG signal, it issues RTN TRIG to output data by channels together with DATA CLK of the synchronous
signal data. The image processor reads data at the positive edge of this DATA CLK as shown in the time chart
given below

DATA MODE

VIEW TRIG

RTN TRIG Up to 752 in case

of Pronto SE

DATA 1 2 3 525 576

DATA CLK

Fig.4.16 Measuring time chart

Table 4.1 and Table 4.2 show the kinds and functions of preamplifier input/output signals.
When DATA MODE signal is H, the test data shown in Table 4.3 and 4.4 are output.

4−12 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.1 Input signals of preamplifier

Signal names Functions Kinds of signals Remarks

DATA MODE Outputs pattern data when H : TEST
checking the preamplifier. L : MEASURE
VIEW TRIG Starts a series of data
acquisition of 576 or 752
channels.

Table 4.2 Output signals of preamplifier

Signal names Functions Kinds of signals Remarks

RTN TRIG Response signal to VIEW
TRIG
DATA CLK Informs of the data input
timing.
DATA0 ~ 15 Outputs gain code 2 bits +
Level
14-bit data

4−13 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.3 Test data (Pronto XE)

DATA WORD SEQUENCE BINARY DATA BITS HEX DATA

1, 33, 65,....545 0000-0000-0000-0000 0000
2, 34, 66,....546 0000-1111-0000-1111 0F0F
3, 35, 67,....547 1111-0000-1111-0000 F0F0
4, 36, 68,....548 0000-0000-0000-0000 0000
5, 37, 69,....549 1111-1111-1111-1111 FFFF
6, 38, 70,....550 1010-1010-1010-1010 AAAA
7, 39, 71,....551 0101-0101-0101-0101 5555
8, 40, 72,....552 1111-1111-1111-1111 FFFF
9, 41, 73,....553 1000-0000-1000-0000 8080
10, 42, 74,....554 0010-0000-0010-0000 2020
11, 43, 75,....555 0000-1000-0000-1000 0808
12, 44, 76,....556 0000-0010-0000-0010 0202
13, 45, 77,....557 0100-0000-0100-0000 4040
14, 46, 78,....558 0001-0000-0001-0000 1010
15, 47, 79,....559 0000-0100-0000-0100 0404
16, 48, 80,....560 0000-0001-0000-0001 0101
17, 49, 81,....561 0111-1111-0111-1111 7F7F
18, 50, 82,....562 1101-1111-1101-1111 DFDF
19, 51, 83,....563 1111-0111-1111-0111 F7F7
20, 52, 84,....564 1111-1101-1111-1101 FDFD
21, 53, 85,....565 1011-1111-1011-1111 BFBF
22, 54, 86,....566 1110-1111-1110-1111 EFEF
23, 55, 87,....567 1111-1011-1111-1011 FBFB
24, 56, 88,....568 1111-1110-1111-1110 FEFE
25, 57, 89,....569 0011-0011-0011-0011 3333
26, 58, 90,....570 0110-0110-0110-0110 6666
27, 59, 91,....571 1100-1100-1100-1100 CCCC
28, 60, 92,....572 0011-1100-0011-1100 3C3C
29, 61, 93,....573 1100-0011-1100-0011 C3C3
30, 62, 94,....574 1001-1001-1001-1001 9999
31, 63, 95,....575 1100-0101-1100-0101 C5C5
32, 64, 96,....576 0101-1100-0101-1100 5C5C

4−14 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.4 test data (Pronto SE)

DATA WORD SEQUENCE BINARY DATA BITS HEX DATA

1, 33, 65,...,705, 737 0111-1111-0111-1111 7F7F
2, 34, 66,...,706, 738 1101-1111-1101-1111 DFDF
3, 35, 67,...,707, 739 1111-0111-1111-0111 F7F7
4, 36, 68,...,708, 740 1111-1101-1111-1101 FDFD
5, 37, 69,...,709, 741 1011-1111-1011-1111 BFBF
6, 38, 70,...,710, 742 1110-1111-1110-1111 EFEF
7, 39, 71,...,711, 743 1111-1011-1111-1011 FBFB
8, 40, 72,...,712, 744 1111-1110-1111-1110 FEFE
9, 41, 73,...,713, 745 0011-0011-0011-0011 3333
10, 42, 74,...,714, 746 0110-0110-0110-0110 6666
11, 43, 75,...,715, 747 1100-1100-1100-1100 CCCC
12, 44, 76,...,716, 748 0011-1100-0011-1100 3C3C
13, 45, 77,...,717, 749 1100-0011-1100-0011 C3C3
14, 46, 78,...,718, 750 1001-1001-1001-1001 9999
15, 47, 79,...,719, 751 1100-0101-1100-0101 C5C5
16, 48, 80,...,720, 752 0101-1100-0101-1100 5C5C
17, 49, 81,...,721 0000-0000-0000-0000 0000
18, 50, 82,...,722 0000-1111-0000-1111 0F0F
19, 51, 83,...,723 1111-0000-1111-0000 F0F0
20, 52, 84,...,724 0000-0000-0000-0000 0000
21, 53, 85,...,725 1111-1111-1111-1111 FFFF
22, 54, 86,...,726 1010-1010-1010-1010 AAAA
23, 55, 87,...,727 0101-0101-0101-0101 5555
24, 56, 88,...,728 1111-1111-1111-1111 FFFF
25, 57, 89,...,729 1000-0000-1000-0000 8080
26, 58, 90,...,730 0010-0000-0010-0000 2020
27, 59, 91,...,731 0000-1000-0000-1000 0808
28, 60, 92,...,732 0000-0010-0000-0010 0202
29, 61, 93,...,733 0100-0000-0100-0000 4040
30, 62, 94,...,734 0001-0000-0001-0000 1010
31, 63, 95,...,735 0000-0100-0000-0100 0404
32, 64, 96,...,736 0000-0001-0000-0001 0101

4−15 L1E-BW1346
(2) Control unit
The control unit is composed of the start control circuit and control signal generator circuit. The start
control circuit controls the generation timing of control signals.
It generates an internal trigger automatically to operate DAS automatically to prevent the detector and
preamplifier from being charged up when the measuring operation is not executed. When the measuring
operation is started and VIEW TRIG signal is input from the control unit of scanner, the start control circuit
resets the auto run of DAS and starts normal data input operation. This circuit judges as the measuring end
if VIEW TRIG signal is not input for longer than 5ms, and resets the mode to the auto run mode again.
The control signal generator circuit is composed of an address counter and an ROM whose addresses are
counted up by the address counter output, and it generates various control signals from the data of ROM. It
issues a CONV signal to designate either phase A or B to the DSC1 PCB and also issues DMIT signal to
demand the data output to △-ΣADC. Then, it issues DCEN signal to transfer the output to the shift
register every bit and also issues LACK signal to latch data to the register of each DSC1 PCB register when
the data of one channel have been stored into the shift register and converted into parallel data. Pronto-XE
selects signals from BEN1 signal to BEN6 signals (from BEN1 signal to BEN8 signal in case of Pronto-SE)
sequentially to output 20-bit data from each DSC1 PCB to store data into the memory of IFCON2 PCB.
This operation is repeated 96 times every phase (A, B).
This circuit reads data being input by the previous VIEW from the memory and sends them to the image
processor via the data converter together with DATA CLK signal.

(3) Memory unit

It is necessary for this amplifier to store data from △-ΣADC into the memory for the purpose of outputting
an average of measuring data of phases A and B.
In order to simplify the write and read control, this unit has two memory units to switch the read and write
operation from each other every view. Accordingly, data written by a view are read by the next view, so
that the last view data are output.

(4) Data converter

The data converter unit converts the △-ΣADC data read out of the memory into an average value of phases
A and B and then, it converts 20-bit data into 16-bit data having a 2-bit gain code plus 14-bit data part.
Table 4.5 shows the gain code to gain relation.

Table 4.5 Correspondence of gain codes

D15 D14 Gain

0 0 1 time
0 1 8 times
1 0 64 times
1 1

4−16 L1E-BW1346
4.4 Preamplifier (Pronto-VE)
4.4.1 General
The preamplifier is mounted between the X-ray detector and the image processor as shown in Fig.4.17.
It receives control signals from the preamplifier control unit in the scanner to convert current signals
obtained by the X-ray detector into digital codes, and then, transfers these signals to the image processor.
Fig.4.18 shows the entire block diagram.

X-ray tube
Control unit of scanner

Patient

Detector Control signal

Image processor
Pre-Amp Unit

Detector output current

(analog signal)

CRT（Image）

Digital signal

Fig.4.17 Positioning of preamplifier

Converter PCB
Interface PCB
Digital
Detector Δ-Σ data Image processor
Digital filter Interface
ADC Control unit of scanner

Control signal

Terminator PCB

Fig.4.18 Block diagram of preamplifier

4−17 L1E-BW1346
 A current signal from the detector is converted into a digital signal through converter PCB △-ΣADC
and sent to the interface after eliminating its unwanted high-frequency components in the next digital
filter. The interface PCB sends digital signals to the image processor and transfers signals to and from
the control unit of scanner to control the other PCB of the preamplifier.
The terminator PCB aids the signal transfer between interface PCB and converter PCB. The
preamplifier unit is composed of a DC power supply having three outputs of analog ±5V and digital
+5V, 33 converter PCB (24 channels/PCB), interface PCB, and terminator PCB. These components are
arranged as shown in Fig.4.19.

DC power
supply

Analog ±5V, Digital +5V

I/O

Left unit Right unit

1CN
ISO+5V
X51

X52
4CN

①, ②∼⑰ ○
18 ∼○
34 , ○
35
3CN

2CN
X49

X50

13 14 15 58 59 60 61 62 63 106 107 108 109 110 111

A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C

1 16 17 32 33

Detector

① ：Interface PCB
②∼○
34 ：Converter PCB
○
35 ：Terminator PCB

Fig.4.19 Mounting layout of preamplifier components

4−18 L1E-BW1346
 Analog ±5V and digital +5V are supplied to the right and left preamplifier units. Also, the ISO+5V
for interface is supplied to the left unit through a power cable, and control signals and data bus line are
connected between the right and left units through two flat cables.
The interface PCB is mounted in one slot at the left end of the left unit.
An external I/O signal cable is connected to this PCB to control the measuring mode corresponding to
plural units by setting the plug pins inside PCB.
Converter PCBs are arranged in the right and left units separately and 16 PCB are mounted on the left
unit, while 17 PCB are mounted on the right unit. (33 PCB in total) The terminator PCB is mounted
at the right end of the right unit, and this PCB provides a terminator function to securely transmit the
signals from the interface PCB to the converter PCB. Each of respective converter PCBs is provided
with three detector signal input connectors corresponding to 8 channels, and one PCB can input signals of
24 channels.
A detector cable is connected between this connector and the detector connector.
Since each of total 33 right and left converter PCB can input 24-channel measuring data, these PCBs can
input signals corresponding to 24 x 33 = 792 channels. Of these data, data of 768 channels are sent to
the interface PCB and then, sent to the image processor. (Of these data, first 752-channel data are used
in the image processor)

4.4.2 Converter PCB

One converter PCB is provided with △-Σsystem AD converters of 24 channels and digital filters. The
△-Σsystem AD converters continuously execute AD conversion to convert an input current from the
detector into digital signals.
Next digital filters eliminate unwanted high-frequency components from the digital signals. The
converted digital signals are sent to the interface PCB each time, and temporarily saved into the memory
in the interface PCB.
The converter PCB repeats this operation. Since data output control is executed by the daisy chain
control, no channel output is executed after a PCB if the PCB is removed before starting operation.

4.4.3 Interface PCB

The interface PCB provides an interface function to transfer signals to and from the preamplifier control
unit and image processor and a control function to send control signals to the converter PCB. Table 4.4
and Table 4.5 show the kinds of input/output signals and their functions.

4−19 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.4 Input signals of △-Σpreamplifier

Signal names Function Kinds of signals Remarks

DATA MODE Outputs pattern data when checking the H : TEST
preamplifier. L : MEASURE
VIEW TRIG Starts a series of data acquisition of 768
channels.
EXT CAL Executes calibration.

SCAN MODE Switches the normal scan and scanogram H : NORMAL

from each other. L : SCANOGRAM
EXTRST Resets △-Σ preamplifier.

Table 4.5 Output signals of △-Σ preamplifier

Signal names Function Kinds of signals Remarks

RTN TRIG Response signal to VIEW
TRIG
DATA CLK Informs of the data input
timing.
IDATA0∼15 Outputs gain code 2 bits +
Level
14-bit data
DAS TEST Data valid signal during
test

These input/output signals are electrically separated from the other units by a photo coupler and ISO +5V
independent power supply for the purpose of preventing ingress of noises to the preamplifier.
From the converter PCB, 21-bit digital data are sent to the interface PCB periodically. The interface
PCB converts these 21-bit digital data into 16-bit data of floating point (data having a 14-bit data part and
2 gain bits).

4−20 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.6 Correspondence of gain codes

D15 D14 Gain

0 0 1 time
0 1 8 time
1 0 64 time ※ Errors comprise an overflow error
1 1 ERROR and an underflow error.

The interface PCB is provided with a memory by two views to save 16-bit data and data are saved by one
view alternately. If the data transmission to the image processor is demanded by a view trigger signal,
saved data are sent. If not, the next new view data are written into the memory. On the other hand, if
the data mode signal is H, and the image processor demands a test pattern output, the interface PCB
outputs data shown in Table 4.7 repeatedly.

4−21 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.7 Test patterns

Data Word Sequence

Binary Data Bits HEX Data
(Channel)
1, 33, 65,･････737 0000-0000-0000-0000 0000
2, 34, 66,･････738 0000-0000-1111-1111 00FF
3, 35, 67,･････739 1111-1111-0000-0000 FF00
4, 36, 68,･････740 0000-0000-0000-0000 0000
5, 37, 69,･････741 1111-1111-1111-1111 FFFF
6, 38, 70,･････742 1010-1010-1010-1010 AAAA
7, 39, 71,･････743 0101-0101-0101-0101 5555
8, 40, 72,･････744 1111-1111-1111-1111 FFFF
9, 41, 73,･････745 1000-0000-0000-0001 8001
10, 42, 74,･････746 0010-0000-0000-0100 2004
11, 43, 75,･････747 0000-10000-0001-0000 0810
12, 44, 76,･････748 0000-0010-0100-0000 0240
13, 45, 77,･････749 0100-0000-0010-0000 4020
14, 46, 78,･････750 0001-0000-0000-1000 1008
15, 47, 79,･････751 0000-0100-1000-0000 0480
16, 48, 80,･････752 0000-0001-0000-0010 0102
17, 49, 81,･････753 0111-1111-1111-1111 7FFF
18, 50, 82,･････754 1101-1111-1111-1111 DFFF
19, 51, 83,･････755 1111-0111-1111-1111 F7FF
20, 52, 84,･････756 1111-1101-1111-1111 FDFF
21, 53, 85,･････757 1111-1111-0111-1111 FF7F
22, 54, 86,･････758 1111-1111-1101-1111 FFDF
23, 55, 87,･････759 1111-1111-1111-0111 FFF7
24, 56, 88,･････760 1111-1111-1111-1101 FFFD
25, 57, 89,･････761 1011-1111-1111-1111 BFFF
26, 58, 90,･････762 1110-1111-1111-1111 EFFF
27, 59, 91,･････763 1111-1011-1111-1111 FBFF
28, 60, 92,･････764 1111-1110-1111-1111 FEFF
29, 61, 93,･････765 1111-1111-1011-1111 FFBF
30, 62, 94,･････766 1111-1111-1110-1111 FFEF
31, 63, 95,･････767 1111-1111-1111-1011 FFFB
32, 64, 96,･････768 1111-1111-1111-1110 FFFE

This preamplifier prepares a calibration signal and a reset signal. When the calibration is input, the preamplifier
executes correction operation (about 2 seconds) to be set to an optimum condition. When the reset signal is
input, the preamplifier initializes its all portions, and then, executes calibration.
Accordingly, it takes about 12 seconds until it is ready for operation.

4−22 L1E-BW1346
The interface PCB is provided with jumper plugs (The number of measuring channels and the measuring cycles
are switched by combined setting) and LED. These function as follows.

Table 4.8 Jumper plug setting

No. Conditions
W1 SHORT
W2 OPEN
W3 SHORT
W4 OPEN
W5 OPEN
W6 SHORT

Table 4.9 Functions of switches and LED of interface PCB

LED or SW Functions Contents

S2 Set this switch to Sl side normally.
Selector switch
S2 The opposite side is not used at present.
By pressing this switch when S2 is set to the S1
S1 S1 Calibration switch
side, the preamplifier executes calibration.
DS7 DS7
DS1 ISO+5V POWER Lights when ISO+5V power is supplied.
DS6 (GREEN)
DS3
DS2
DS1 FPGA
Lights during FPGA configuration.
DS5 (RED) CONFIGURATION
DS4
DS6
EXTRST Goes out when a reset signal is input.
(GREEN)
DS3 Lights during normal scan and goes out during
SCAN MODE
(GREEN) scanogram.
DS2
EXTCAL Goes out when a calibration signal is input.
(GREEN)
Flickers when a view trigger signal is input.
DS5 Since the view trigger signal is a short negative
VIEWTRIG
(GREEN) pulse, this LED is seen as if it were lighting during
standby as well as during measurement.
DS4 Lights during test pattern output and goes out
DATAMODE
(GREEN) during measuring data output.

4−23 L1E-BW1346
 Table 4.10 Functions of LED of terminator PCB

LED Functions Contents

DS2 -5V (ANALOG) Lights when analog -5V is supplied.
DS2
(GREEN) POWER
DS1
DS1 +5V (ANALOG) Lights when analog +5V is supplied.
(GREEN) POWER
DS3 DS3 +5V (DIGITAL) Lights when digital +5V is supplied.
(GREEN) POWER

4.4.4 Terminator PCB

Since this preamplifier is operated with a very high speed clock, the waveforms of its control signals are
deformed as it is separated from the interface PCB, so that it cannot function under this condition.
Accordingly, this terminator PCB is mounted at the farthest place from the interface PCB to prevent
erroneous operation.

4−24 72 L1E-BW1346
 Section 5 Central Operation Console

5.1 Hardware
5.1.1 Block diagram

LCD monitor CRT

touch panel monitor

Scanner control system Image analysis system

Program MD Program MD
CD-
Raw Data Image ROM

Fast Ether Net

Scanner control Common Pentium Pentium
memory CPU CPU

PCI-bus PCI-bus

Measuring data IM
DSP DSP BP DSP
I/F

Arithmetic unit Arithmetic unit

Imager

AC200V
POWER DC POWER

(Basic configuration does not include any option.)

Keyboard

Mouse

Fig.5.1 Block diagram of central operation console

5−1 L1E-BW1346
5.1.2 Comparison table

Table 5.1 Comparison table

No. Items Pronto Carino Remarks

1 Cubicle profile Desk side type Desk side type Same size
2 Operation panel LED with touch panel LED with touch panel Design
change
3 Keyboard and mouse Marketed PC parts Marketed PC parts
4 Exclusive window Not provided Not provided
controller

5 PC employed Marketed mother board 2 sets Marketed mother board 2 sets

6 CPU INTEL PentiumIII AMD K6
7 Inter-CPU Fast-Ether Ether
communication

8 Scan system (Q’ty) (Q’ty)

arithmetic unit FR-MK2 1 PC-IP 1
9 Reconstruction FR-MK2 2 Not provide (Scan system is
unit used)
10 （BP） PC-BP-RV 1 PC-BP 1
11 RAW-dataMD Provided Not provided Common to
program MD

12 Scanner Common memory system Conforms to RS-232C

communication

13 CRT display 17-inch monitor 17-inch monitor

14 Imager interface Exclusive display card Exclusive display card EXP signal
is provided
15 Auto film Provided ( DICOM print) Not provided (EXP signal
only)

5−2 L1E-BW1346
5.1.3 Scanner control system (CPU#0)
The scanner control system (CPU#0) is provided with a scanner I/F circuit, a touch panel, an LCD display,
and a sound source circuit.
Neither keyboard nor mouse is mounted However, START key and other hardware keys are processed as
the keyboard.

Panel unit

Touch panel LCD

INTER
-COM Hardware switch
LCD exclusive
signal

To CPU#1
LINK

TO SCANNER LCD
SCIF1 FR-MK2 FR-MK2 display

PCI BUS

LINK

from Pre. Amp MOTHER. BOARD ETHER-NET

FR-MB2 ETHER
SOUND I/F
To CPU#1
IDE#0

MD MEM
Bold frame shows internal products

N.C.

Fig.5.2 Scanner control system (CPU#0) block diagram

5−3 L1E-BW1346
○ Component parts of scanner control system (CPU#0)
<CPU>
Mother board RICOH FB2LST INTEL440BX 6PCI
CPU INTEL PentiumIII 850MHz
Memory 128MB DIMM

<PCB>
Display PCB RICOH FB2VT AGP 4MB
Ether PCB 100BASE-T 82559 (PCI connection in mother board)
Sound PCB ESS Mwareo-3 (PCI connection in mother board)
Scanner I/F board SCIF1 internal product
DSP PCB FR-MK2 internal product
M-BUFF PCB FR-MB2 internal product

<Panel>
Touch panel LCD RICOH FL1
Molded panel unit Maker: Wako Rubber Co.
Intercom PCB Internal product (IAMP)

<Others>
Hard disk 20GB or over IDE
Power supply 300W ATX V2 specifications

Table 5.2

Bus
Slot No. PCB names Remarks
specifications
1 Not specified FR-MB2 M-BUFFER
2 ISA
3 PCI FR-MK2 DSP for pre-processing
4 PCI
5 PCI FR-MK2 Arrangement DSP
6 PCI SCIF1 Scanner I/F
7 AGP FB2VT Display
8 Not specified LCD I/F LCD monitor connector

5−4 L1E-BW1346
5.1.4 Image analysis system (CPU#1)
The arithmetic analytical processor (CPU1) is provided with an FR arithmetic unit, a display, a keyboard,
a mouse, an imager I/F, an SCSI I/F, and Ether I/F.

17"
MONITOR

Video signal
To external network

OPTION

From CPU#0 side PC-BP LINK FR-MK2 DISPLAY SCSI ETHER PC-IMG
-RV (DSP) I/F I/F to IMAGER

AGP BUS

PCI BUS

To CPU#0 ETHER MOTHER. BOARD

I/F

IDE#0 IDE#1 PS/2

signal
CD
MD MOD MEM
ROM

OPTION

KEYBORD
MOUSE

Fig.5.3 Image processing system (CPU#1) block diagram

5−5 L1E-BW1346
○ Component parts of image processing system (CPU#1)
<CPU>
Mother board RICOH FB2LST INTEL440BX 6PCI
CPU INTEL PentiumIII 850MHz
Memory 256MB DIMM

<PCB>
Display PCB G450 AGP
DSP PCB Internal product (FR-MK2)
BP PCB Internal product (PC-BP-RV)
Imager I/F PCB Internal product (PC-IMG)
Extended Ether PCB For external Ethernet
Extended SCSI PCB For external SCSI

<Others>
Hard disk 20GB or over IDE
CD-ROM 20X speed or over
FD 3.5FD 1.44MB
Monitor Monitor 17” TRINITRON system
Keyboard 104 keys arrangement PS/2
Mouse PS/2 mouse
Power supply 300W ATX V2 specifications

Table 5.3

Bus
Slot No. PCB names Remarks
specifications
9 ISA PC-BP-RV (No bus is used)
10 PCI PC-IMG Imager I/F
11 PCI FR-MK2 DSP for after-processing
12 PCI SCSI External SCSI (option)
13 PCI ETHER External Ether
14 AGP DISPLAY Display
15 − − −

5−6 L1E-BW1346
 5.1.5 Arithmetic unit configuration
The arithmetic unit is composed of FR-MB2 PCB, three FR-MK2 PCB, and PC-BP-RV PCB. Data
connections among these PCB are executed by DSP-LINK signal and PCI buses.

Measuring system Reconstruction system

M-Buffer DSP DSP FFT, BP DSP

FR-MB2 FR-MK2 FR-MK2 PC-BP-RV FR-MK2

PCB PCB PCB PCB PCB

(1) (3) (5) (9) (11)

FROM LINK LINK LINK

SCANNER cable cable cable
PCI-BUS
PCI-BUS
Measuring CPU bus Analytical CPU bus

RAW IMAGE
DATA DATA

Measuring Analytical
MD MD
CPU CPU

Fig.5.4 Arithmetic unit block diagram

Table 5.4

PCB DSP quantity Kind Others VE SE/XE

Slot#
names (Q’ty) of Bus (Q’ty) Memory size Memory size
1 FR-MB2 None None
16MB 16MB
3 FR-MK2 ADSP21062 (2M) 2 pcs PCI
(4MB SIMM×4) (4MB SIMM×4)
16MB 12MB
5 FR-MK2 ADSP21062 (2M) 2 pcs PCI
(4MB SIMM×4) (4MB SIMM×3)
9 PC-BP-RV ADSP21062 (2M) 4 pcs None ASIC 4pcs
4MB 4MB
11 FR-MK2 ADSP21062 (2M) 1 pcs PCI
(4MB SIMM×1) (4MB SIMM×1)

5−7 L1E-BW1346
5.1.6 Scanner interface
(1) Communication through common memories
Two independent common memories are arranged between the scanner and image processor without
any conventional RS232C cable. (An interrupt function is provided)

Common memory
A
Commu- Commu-
Scanner unit nication nication
I/F I/F
Common memory
B

PCI-BUS

Measuring
CPU

Fig.5.5 Common memories

(2) Hard wires
In addition to common memory communication, five hard wires are arranged (Same specifications
as in CARINO)
1. Emergency signal wire
Emergency wire to scanner for an emergency stop.
2. Deadman AUTO/MANUAL signal wire
Used for operating the mechanical system by means of software, such as table move in serial
scan, etc.
3. Set signal wire
Used for operating the mechanical system by an operator, such as index feed, SCANO remote tilt,
etc.
4. Start signal wire
Used for generating and stopping the X-rays during SCANO, scan mode, etc.
5. X-RAY TRIG signal wire
Used for recognizing the X-ray generation on the image processing side.

Scanner table Emergency signal wire Image processor

Deadman auto/manual wire

Set wire (level)

Start wire (level)

X-ray TRIG wire

Hard wire

Fig.5.6 Hard wires

5−8 L1E-BW1346
○ Details of connection specifications

Inside the image processor cubicle

232C port

Output only
To scanner
SCIF1
AUTO/MANUAL PCB
PCI-BUS
SCANNER RESET

START

TIMING A（auxiliary wire） Scanner control

system
CPU#0

START SW LED

SET SW LED

LED BLINK Keyboard

encoder Keyboard port
PCB

SET

START
SW.
（ Note1）

SET SW.

From scanner
X-RAY TRIG

EMERGENCY

X-RAY ON LED
X-RAY ON
X-RAY ON BUZZER

BZ

Note 1) Start signal serves as an OR signal of hardware switch and software I/O

Fig.5.7 Scanner I/F

5−9 L1E-BW1346
5.1.7 Imager interface
(1) The imager is connected from the exclusive PCB (PC-IMG PCB). Two kinds of signals (analog
video signal and digital video signal) are provided as signal modes. The PCB is connected by the
image analyzing system CPU bus and image data only are transferred to PC-IMG board.

Image processing cubicle

Video signal
DISPLAY PC-IMG
PCB PCB Imager
multi-camera

PCI BUS

EXP signal

Image analyzing system Printer port

The same image as a

display image is
transferred

Fig.5.8 Imager I/F

(2) DICOM I/F

This is provided to connect the external ETHER I/F of the image analyzing system and imager.
Its protocol is DICOM.

Image processor

ETHER-NET
Image processing
DICOM
system CPU
100BASE-T Imager
External
ETHER I/F

Fig.5.9 DICOM I/F

5−10 L1E-BW1346
5.1.8 Interphone auto voice configuration
A sound output of CPU#0 is used as auto voice. It can be recorded by using a microphone inside the
panel unit. An exclusive power supply is used for amplifier. (analog power supply)

Panel unit
Image processor cubicle
Speaker Microphone

For auto voice

Interphone SOUND
amplifier I/F
VOL. CPU#0
MOTHER BOARD
1. Operation console-scanner
2. Auto voice-scanner
3. Scanner-operation console TALK
VOL. switch

Exclusive amplifier
Scanner power supply
microphone
Scanner
Speaker

Fig.5.10 Auto voice block diagram

5−11 L1E-BW1346
5.1.9 Power supplies and reset specifications
(1) Power supplies
The image processor power supply is turned on by pressing POWER switch on the front panel of
image processor, and turned off by pressing POWER switch after the end of software. (Power
supply can be turned off without terminating software However, the memory contents are not held)
The gantry power supply is turned on or off by the momentary switch. CPU ON signal is
connected to the scanner.

Monitor power supply

POWER POWER BUS A

NOISE
SUPPLY CPU#0
FILTER
A
300W
ISOLATE ATX
TRANS
POWER POWER BUS B
SUPPLY CPU#1
AC200V B
FFB
300W CPU ON
ATX
To scanner
SW. SW.
CPU ON/OFF GANTRY ON/OFF
hardware switch hardware switch
(alternate) (momentary)

Fig.5.11 Power supply block diagram

(2) Reset
CPU#0, CPU#1, and scanner are reset by RESET switch on the rear panel of the panel unit. Also,
I/O reset to the scanner can be done from CPU#0.

5−12 L1E-BW1346
5.1.10 Connection signal specifications
(1) Connection diagram

①Measuring data
Scanner Image processor
<S> <C>

②Scanner control

X-ray controller ③Power supply

<B>

Fig.5.12 Signal and power supply connection diagram

(2) Signal contents

○ Measuring data cable 50conductors DDK connector

Signal name Direction Specifications

Preamplifier signal S→C 16BIT DATA
VIEW, CLOCK

○ Scanner control cable 50 conductors DDK connector

Signal name Direction Specifications

Scanner control S⇔C Common memory
signal communication, safety signal,
interphone, power ON/OFF

○ Power cable 3 conductors Terminals

Signal name Direction Specifications

AC power supply B→C 200VAC
GND ―

5−13 L1E-BW1346
(3) Connector block diagram

CPU#0
50PIN DDK
Scanner control
To scanner
50PIN DDK
Measuring data

50PIN HALF PITCH

LCD panel data

To panel unit
Switches
intercommunication

CPU#1
15PIN D-SUB
Monitor signal To monitor
PS/2
Keyboard To keyboard
PS/2
Mouse To mouse

34PIN MIL
Digital video
BNC
Analog video
To imager
BNC
Pixel clock
Exclusive cable EXP signal 9PIN D-SUB
Printer port

100BASE-T
ETHER-NET DICOM I/F

9PIN DSUB To UPS

RS-232C

SCSII/F To 5” optical disk

Option

EMC core Seal clamp Clamp

PCB connector Interconnecting connector PCB connector

Fig.5.13 Connectors

5−14 L1E-BW1346
Imager interface specifications

Signal names Connector types Specifications

Video Out BNC Analog video output containing composite synchronous signal
Pixel CLK BNC Pixel clock output (SN75123 output level)
Digital Out HIF3BA-2.54DS (Hirose) Digital output (ECL level)
Exp Out DE-9S-UL (JAE) EXP control signal (Contact signal to inform the imager of filming
start)
Horizontal frequency 33.534KHZ
Vertical frequency 59.67HZ
Pixel clock 28.5714MHZ
No. of image pixels 512x512
Output level Analog video, 1Vp-p 75-ohm Digital video: ECL
Pixel clock: TTL(SN75123)
White Level

0.660V

Black Level
0.054V
Blank Level

0.286V

Sync Level

b c d e

Analog output (horizontal)

3H 4H 43H 512H

Front porch Vertical sync Back porch Display range

562H

Vertical sync. cycle

Analog output (vertical)

Fig. 5.14 Video signal

Table 5.5 Timing parameters

Parameters Time(μs) No. of clocks
a 29.82 852
b 2.45 70
c 6.37 182
d 17.92 512
e 3.08 88

5−15 L1E-BW1346
5.2 Measurement processing
5.2.1 Summary of measurement and image reconstruction arithmetic operation
Fig.5.15 shows the scan measuring sequence. After setting a patient to the table
(initial slice position), set the scan conditions by the touch panel.
By pressing the standby switch, the OC side scan control task starts the scanner control task to set
parameters to FR-MK2 and PC-BP-RV. The scanner CPU instructs the rotation start to the starter.
The X-ray generator starts the X-ray tube voltage control and the scanner unit starts clockwise rotation.
When the image processing, X-ray generator system, and scanner move are set to be ready, the green
lamp of the start switch flickers to show that the start switch is effective. By pressing this switch, the
image processor starts offset measurement and waits for inputting X-ray data after the end of
measurement.
Next, an X-ray data input start signal is input to the scanner CPU. By scanner CPU control, the rotary
encoder signal of the scanner unit sends a data input control signal to the preamplifier unit. The
preamplifier unit sends data to the image processor after executing the AD conversion through a low-pass
filter. When data are input by one scan angle, the scanner control task sends an X-ray off command to
the X-ray control unit to turn off X-rays.
The image processor starts the reconstruction operation and displays an image on the monitor of the
central operation console at the end of reconstruction operation.
Fig.5.16 shows the details of the measuring and arithmetic operation sequences.
Offset data measurement and X-ray data measurement are executed by FR-MK2. Variously corrected
and log-converted data are saved into an HD after total-angle sampling. X-ray measuring data are
parallel-beam converted by FR-MK2, and transferred to PC-BP-RV. PC-BP-RV executes filtering
processing and back projection operation by using this data , and transfers data to the FR-MK2 in the
subsequent stage. FR-MK2 executes after-processing to obtain a CT image. These arithmetic
operations are executed after inputting X-ray data.

5−16 L1E-BW1346
 Table slice Start switch
position Scan Condition Standby Start lamp Start switch lamp End
ON setting ON flickering ON
setting extinction

Operation console Initial setting

Starter rotation

Steady-state rotation

OK
X-ray X-ray generation
preparation

X-rays

Scanner rotation

5−17
Scanner Clockwise rotation
control
task
start
Data input signal

Scanner OK
preparation

Scanner

Offset
Image measurement
processing OK Measurement Arithmetic Image
preparation processing operation display
HD
Waiting for X-ray data transfer
Image processor

L1E-BW1346
Fig.5.15 Scan measuring sequence (in single scan mode)
 Measurement
Standby start

Clockwise rotation
Scanner rotation

X-ray exposure

Offset measurement X-ray data measurement

Scattered rays correction and inter-channel correction Arrangement After-processing CRT display
of image

Filtering Back
projection

5−18
Offset data measurement
437 samples are measured and averaged.
X-ray data measurement Arrangement processing
The following items are executed in Filtering processing
parallel with data input ● FFT calculation
● Data angle addition ● Filter function
● Offset correction ● FFT-1 calculation
● Log conversion ● Data interpolation
● Reference correction The above processing results are
● Air calibration correction transferred to BP sequentially.
● Non-linearity correction
● Scattered rays correction
● Inter-channel correction

Fig.5.16 Single scan measurement and arithmetic operation sequence

L1E-BW1346
5.2.2 Measuring data flow
(1) CAL measurement
For obtaining a good image by scan measurement and scanogram measurement, measuring data
must be corrected by using calibration data. For this purpose, calibration data are obtained by CAL
measurement. Fig.5.17 shows the data flow.
This CAL measurement is divided into AIR CAL measurement and phantom CAL measurement
Observe the following procedures.

(a) AIR CAL measurement

Obtain AIR CAL data by measuring AIR.

AIR CAL data = Log (Air measuring data)

(b) Phantom CAL measurement
Plot the data obtained by measuring CAL phantom and ideal data obtained by automatically
calculating the X-ray attenuation quantity of CAL phantom on the Y-axis and X-axis
respectively, and approximate them by quadratic curve

Y = αX + βX2 The primary and secondary coefficients α and βobtained by the

approximation show non-linearity correction data. Correct measuring data by
AIR CAL data and non-linearity correction data in scan measuring mode or correct measuring
data by AIR CAL data obtained by AIR CAL measurement in the scanogram measuring mode.
(2) Scan measurement
Measuring data from the detector are processed according to the flow shown in Fig.5.18. A
reconstructed image is displayed and saved into the magnetic disk.

(3) Scanogram measurement

Fig.5.19 shows the scanogram measuring data. An X-ray fluoroscopic image data can be obtained
by arranging data sampled at each table move position in order However, since this image is out of
focus, it is displayed on the CRT monitor after its image profile emphasizing processing and then,
saved into the magnetic disk.
This scanogram measurement is executed in parallel with data input and an image is displayed in
real time.

5−19 L1E-BW1346
 X-ray tube CAL measurement

Scanner rotation （0 data are set during air measurement） ・Offset measurement
・X-ray measurement
・Offset correction
・Log conversion
Air measuring data
・Reference correction
・AIR CAL correction
（No correction is done in
AIR measuring mode.）
Log table

Detector
HD

5−20
FR-MK2(1) Measuring data Measuring data
Preamplifier AD

CAL phantom
(No phantom is inserted during air measurement)

Fig.5.17 CAL measuring data flow (AIR CAL and phantom CAL measurement)

L1E-BW1346
 X-ray tube ● Offset measurement
Scan measurement ● X-ray measurement
Scanner rotation ● Data angle calculation
● Offset correction
● Log conversion
CAL data ● Reference correction
● AIR CAL correction
● Phantom calibration correction
● Non-linearity correction
● Scattered X-ray correction
Detector Log table ● Inter-channel correction HD

Measuring
FR-MK2(1) Measuring
Preamplifier AD data
data

Filtering processing
Angle
parameter Back projection results

5−21
Arrangement
parameters Filter weight FR-MK2(3)
CRT monitor
Image data
PC-BP-RV Display
Filtering
PC-BP-RV memory
Arrangement processing results
FR-MK2(2)
results

Image after-processing
Expansion HD image loading area
weight
Image
data
FR-MK2(3)

Fig.5.18 Scan measuring data flow

L1E-BW1346
 ● Offset measurement HD
● X-ray measurement
X-ray tube ● Data angle addition
Measuring
● Offset correction data
● Log conversion
Scanogram measurement ● Reference correction
AIR CAL ● AIR CAL correction
Table move data Interpolation
weight

Detector Log table FR-MK2(1)

Measuring
FR-MK2(1) data
Preamplifier AD

5−22
Image after-processing
Expansion
weight FR-MK2(1)
CRT monitor
Image data

Display
FR-MK2(1) memory
Filtering
results

HD image loading area

Image
data

Fig.5.19 Scanogram measuring data flow

L1E-BW1346
 5.2.3 Scan measuring mode
The scan measuring mode comprises the kinds shown in Table 5.6 and 5.7.
As the scan time becomes longer, data samples increase to be able to obtain a good image, but the
exposure dose and HU wait time increase, on the contrary.

Table 5.6 Scan measuring mode (Pronto-SE, Pronto-XE)

Scan time 0.6sec. 1.0sec. 1.5sec. 2.0sec. 3.0sec.

No. of measuring samples. 499 800 1200 1600 2400
Angle addition quantity 1 angle 1 angle 1 angle 4/3 angle 2 angle
No. of back projection angles 400 800 1200 1200 1200

Table 5.7 Scan measuring mode (Pronto-VE)

Scan time 0.5sec. 0.8sec. 1.0sec. 1.5sec. 2.0sec. 3.0sec.

No. of measuring samples. 450 720 900 1350 1800 2700
Angle addition quantity 1 angle 1 angle 1 angle 1 angle 4/3 angle 2 angle
No. of back projection angles 450 720 900 1350 1350 1350

5.2.4 Measuring data processing

The following processing is executed in the image processor after exposing X-rays to the patient.

(1) Offset correction

(2) Log conversion
(3) Reference correction
(4) Air calibration correction
(5) Phantom calibration correction
(6) Inter-channel correction (Ring correction)
Processing from (1) to (6) is expressed by the following formula.

XD : AD conversion results when X-rays were exposed

OFD : Value obtained by offset measurement
CAL : Air calibration data
n : Phantom calibration data
CHD : Ring correction data
XR : AD conversion results in reference channel when X-rays were exposed
OFR : Offset data of reference channel

5−23 L1E-BW1346
 [{log (XD-OFD)−log (XR-OFR)−CAL}* (1＋n) ]−CHD

(1) (1)

(2) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(1) Offset correction

The AD conversion result of detector output is not zero even if X-rays are not irradiated, but it has a
certain value (offset value).
This is caused by a leak current from the detector and an offset voltage of the circuits inside the
preamplifier Accordingly, this offset must be subtracted from the detector output when measuring
X-rays.

(2) Log conversion

Since the intensity of X-rays passing through the patient reduces according to the exponential
function (ex), it is necessary for obtaining the X-ray intensity after transmission to convert the value
after offset correction by the logarithmic function of inverse function of the exponential function.
This conversion is called log conversion.
In log conversion, a parameter called log table is prepared and the log function value in log
conversion is read from this parameter.
Fig.5.20 shows the log table.

Log conversion output

Maximum value of offset correction

Fig.5.20 Log table

5−24 L1E-BW1346
(3) Reference correction
Four channels at both ends of the detector are out of the measuring visual field, and no substance
other than air exists on the X-ray path received by 4 channels at both ends. These four channels at
both channel are called reference channels.
The intensity of the X-rays irradiated from the X-ray tube is not kept constant at all times, but it
fluctuates every irradiation (every view).
This fluctuation is corrected every view, and the X-ray fluctuation between views must be corrected.
This is called reference correction.
This correction is executed by dividing the reference channel output.

(4) Air calibration correction

Even if the intensity of the X-rays being irradiated to all detectors is kept constant, the preamplifier
output voltage differs, because the detector channel differs every channel. Accordingly, this
sensitivity difference must be corrected, and this is called air calibration correction. Air calibration
correction is executed by subtracting the data (air calibration data) measured by using air only as an
object from the reference correction results.
Air calibration data obtained by air calibration measurement are saved into the system, and the
values read out of the system are used for correction.

(5) Phantom calibration correction

The sensitivity relative to the X-ray intensity of respective detectors is not kept constant with
reference to the input X-ray intensity. Accordingly, data obtained by passing through the object in
practice must be corrected even if the air calibration correction is done.
For this purpose, the data obtained by measuring a specified phantom are obtained by calculation
and the scaling is done every channel variously to the air calibration results of the data obtained by
phantom measurement so as to set the calculated values to be equal to the phantom-measured values.
This is called phantom calibration correction. The parameters for phantom calibration correction
are loaded into the system during phantom calibration measurement.

(6) Ring correction

If an extreme sensitivity difference is detected when comparing a specified detector with
surrounding detectors, a circular ring profiled artifact is seen as image reconstruction results. In
order to eliminate this ring-profiled artifact, the value of the detector having an extreme sensitivity
difference must be corrected.
This is called ring correction.

5−25 L1E-BW1346
5.2.5 Image reconstruction calculation
The processing from offset correction to ring correction is generally called pre-processing. The
following processing is done to the data after pre-processing.
(1) Parallel beam conversion
(2) Filtering processing
(3) Back projection calculation
These three processing are called image reconstruction processing. After-processing is done to the
image reconstruction results.

(1) Parallel beam conversion

X-rays are irradiated to the object through the path being spread radially at a beam limiting angle
from the X-ray tube. Accordingly, the X-rays received by detectors are profiled to be sectorial at a
collimator angle with the X-ray tube focus positioned at the center. This is called fan beam. Fan
beam data are converted into parallel X-ray path data by parallel beam conversion.

(a) Fan beam (b) Parallel beam

Fig.5.21 Parallel beam conversion

For obtaining the parallel beams of one view, data are necessary by the opening angle of the
detector.
In the parallel beam conversion, fan beam data are interpolated to convert them into parallel beam
data.

5−26 L1E-BW1346
(2) Filtering processing
Filtering is done to the data converted into parallel beams by parallel beam conversion. The system
contains loaded filter parameters which have been adjusted every image reconstruction part, and the
filters being set on the operation panel are used for filtering processing.
The filter values change according to filter numbers and the filter function has the following profile,
in general.

Fig.5.22 Filter parameter

Filtering is to obtain the composite product of the filter parameters and parallel beam conversion
results. Composite product is calculated by weighting each element of one-dimensional
arrangement data to peripheral data and then converting these data. It is calculated by the
following equation

N-1
R[k] : Σ＝ΣFilter[i]*Para[k-i]
i=0

where
R[k] : Filtering results
Filter[i] : Filter parameter
Para[k-i] : Parallel beam conversion results

Since it takes time to calculate the above composite product, filtering is practically done by the
Fourier transformation as shown in Fig.5.23. Fourier transformation results of filter parameter are
loaded into the system first. Then, parallel beam results of one view are Fourier-transformed to
copy into a frequency space.
In the frequency space, the above composite product is a simple multiplication method. Composite
product of filter parameters and parallel beam conversion results is obtained by a simple
multiplication method. Then, these multiplication results are inverse Fourier-transformed finally.

5−27 L1E-BW1346
 Parallel beam conversion Filter parameter
results

Fourier transformation
MD

Composite product Inverse Fourier

Fourier transformation
(Frequency space) transformation

Filtering results

Trigonometric function table for Fourier transformation

Fig.5.23 Filtering processing

(3) Back projection calculation

Since data after filtering processing are projected data obtained by plotting No. of channels on the
abscissa and No. of views on the ordinate.
These data are converted into image data by plotting No. of pixels on the abscissa and ordinate by
means of back projection calculation.

Channel direction
View direction

Filtering results Back projection results

Fig.5.24 Back projection calculation

5−28 L1E-BW1346
Back projection calculation is done by adding the filtering results of each view on the image.
Fig.5.25 shows an example of back projection operation of only 3 views at 0o, 45o, and 90o.

0o data 45o data 90o data

3-view back projection results

Fig.5.25 An example of back projection

In actual system, this back projection calculation is done over all number of views.
Since back projection results are obtained as data where air part is 0, the CT value is adjusted after
back projection calculation to correspond to a CT value where the air part is -1000.
Processing to be executed to an image after back projection calculation is called after-processing,
and after-processing results are loaded into an HD.

5−29 101 L1E-BW1346

 Section 6 Summary of image processing software

6.1 Software configuration

As viewed from the computer, software is composed of the following elements.
(1) BIOS (ROM)
(2) OS：Windows NT Workstation
(3) Application program

BIOS(ROM) OS Application
WinNT program

・Ｔ＆Ｄ ・Kernel ・Various applications

・OS loader ・Process control ・CT program
・Object control
・GUI utility
・Etc

Fig.6.1 Software hierarchy

The CT system is internally provided with two computers for scanner control and image analysis.
The scanner control system and image analysis system computers execute various control and processing by
incorporating with the scan, image reconstruction, and image display through TCP/IP communication.

Scanner control Image analysis

system system

TCP/IP communication

Fig.6.2 Scanner control system and image analysis system computers

The scanner control system computer executes (controls) scan according to the touch panel operation by a user.
Scanner control system monitor display is done on the touch panel. This touch panel also serves as a pointing
device (simulated mouse). No keyboard is provided.

6−1 L1E-BW1346
 Scanner,
Table

Monitor display

Scanner control
Touch panel To image analysis system
system computer

HD

Fig.6.3 Scanner control system computer

The image analysis system computer receives an image from the image reconstruction operator
(DSP/reconstructor), and executes writing into HD, image display and analysis, patient reservation, etc. The
image analysis system is provided with monitor display and keyboard, and operated in almost the same way as in
general computers.

DSP/reconstructor

CRT monitor
Scanner control system
Analysis system
computer

Keyboard/
mouse

HD

Fig.6.4 Image analysis system computer

6−2 L1E-BW1346
6.2 Disk map
A magnetic disk just after entering a program into the system is mapped as follows.

Drive name Drive name

C Program area C Program area

Measuring data buffer area I Image data area

H Measuring data area

Scanner control system computer HD Image analysis system computer HD

Fig.6.5 Disk map

6.3 OS
Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (manufactured by Microsoft Co.) is used as an OS for CT. For details, refer to the
marketed instruction manual.
The basic instructions of OS are described below.
The following figure shows an internal structure of OS. Various utilities of OS are sorted as applications.
Windows NT can be sorted into the following modes
User mode ･･･ Subsystem (Offering API to the application) operates.
Kernel mode (privilege mode) ･･･ Basic parts of operating system operates.
Kernel mode is called NT Executive System Service, and it provides basic functions of the operating system.
NT Executive System Service can be subdivided into various managers, Kernel, and HAL. Seven kinds of
managers offer basic functions of OS. Kernel is called nuclei of the OS which assists various managers.
HAL offers the codes depending upon the hardware platform.

6−3 L1E-BW1346
 Application

USR32.DLL
Stub client DLL
GDI32.DLL

CSR subsystem User mode

Kernel mode

NT Exective System Service

Security
Win32K Object Process LPC function VM manager I/O manager
reference
(USER, GDI) manager manager
monitor

Kernel
Graphic
device driver
Hardware abstraction layer (HAL)

Hardware

Fig.6.6 Windows NT OS structure

This system maintains the independency from hardware by means of HAL, enhances OS rigidity by dividing NT
executive and subsystem operation mode from each other, and divides the subsystem and application from each
other to prevent the OS from being affected by applications.

6−4 105 L1E-BW1346

 Section 7 Operation principle of scanner unit

7.1 Structure and summary of scanner unit

The scanner unit is composed of the mechanism to rotate the X-ray tube assembly and detector around the patient
to be able to execute vertical and tilted diagnostic measurement. Its components and summary of functions are
described below.

7.1.1 Scanner unit structure

Fig.7.1 shows the scanner unit structure.
Rotary plate ② is equipped with X-ray tube assembly ⑤, its cooler, detector ⑥ and preamplifier ⑦
around the open section. Collimator ⑧ is mounted below the X-ray tube assembly to switch the slice
thickness of 2, 3, 5, 7, 10mm, while 1mm collimator ⑨ is mounted above the detector ⑥ to switch the
slice thickness of 1mm. (1mm collimator ⑨ is option)
A high voltage generator is mounted on the right and left sides of the rotation plate. Projector ⑩
showing the slice position and projector ⑪ showing the center height are mounted around the open
section. Also projector ⑳ for determining the median line is mounted on the collimator. Large
pulley ④ is coupled to rotation plate ② and supported to frame ① by means of a bearing ③.
Frame ① is provided with the scan drive unit ⑯ for rotating the rotation plate and scan control unit ⑰
for controlling the X-ray irradiation timing and rotation.
Frame ① is supported by stand ⑫ by means of tilt link ⑬, and it is tilted by tilt drive unit ⑭.
The stand is provided with tilt control unit ⑮ for controlling the gantry tilt and vertical position of the
patient table. Also, positioning projector ⑱ is mounted on the front upper frame. Power and signals
are transferred between electric units on the rotating rotation plate and the electric units on the stationary
frame via slip ring ⑲ mounted to the rotation plate.

7−1 L1E-BW1346
 ⑤X-ray tube assembly ⑱ Projector (for positioning) ⑲Slip ring
Front upper frame
Projector ⑳
(for median line)
③Bearing
⑩Projector
Frame ① (for slice position)
④Large pulley
②
Rotation plate

High voltage generator （−）

⑧Collimator ⑪Projector
(for center height)

7−2
⑨1mm collimator High voltage generator（＋） ⑭Gantry tilt drive unit
(option)

⑮ ⑰Scan control unit

Tilt control unit

⑯Scan drive unit

⑫Stand
⑥Detector
⑦Preamplifier ⑬Tilt link

Fig.7.1 Scanner unit structure

L1E-BW1346
7.1.2 X-ray geometric system
The X-ray geometric system is shown in Fig. 7.2.1 and Fig. 7.2.2.
Fig. 7.2.1 shows the X-ray geometric system when gas (Xe) detector is mounted, while Fig.7.2.2 shows
the X-ray geometric system when solid detector is mounted.

(1) When Xe detector is mounted;

The maximum effective field of view (max. FOV) is φ420mm, the number of detection channels is
568ch, and the X-ray utilization angle is 40.5°
(2) When solid detector is mounted;
The maximum effective field of view (max. FOV) is φ430mm, the number of detection channels is
744ch, and the X-ray utilization angle is 41.1°

7−3 L1E-BW1346
 Collimate plate
(X-ray tube side)

241.3
998（Detection plane）

606.3

Collimate plate space d1

Max. FOV φ 420

Slice thickness S

d2

Unit mm
7−4

Collimate plate
(Detector side)

40.5°（※ 2）
Slice thickness Collimate plate space mm
41.1°（※ 3）
S mm d1 d2
43°（※ 1） (1) 0.8 1.7 (※4)
2 0.8 −
※1 : X-ray beam angle 43°
3 1.2 −
※2 : Effective number of channels for image 568ch
5 2 −
※3 : No. of all channels 576ch
7 2.8 −
(568ch + right and left channels for reference 4ch each)
※4 : Tube side collimator uses a 2mm slice when 1mm slice is used 10 4 −
L1E-BW1346

Fig.7.2.1 X-ray geometric system (Xe detector)

 Collimate plate
(X-ray tube side)

241.3
1037（Detection plane）

606.3

Collimate plate space d1

Max. FOV φ 430

Slice thickness S

d2

Unit mm
7−5

Collimate plate
(Detector side)

（※ 2）
41.1° Slice thickness Collimate plate space mm
S mm d1 d2
（※ 3）
41.5°
(1) 0.7 1.5 (※4)
（※ 1）
43°
2 0.7 −
3 1.0 −
5 1.8 −
※1 : X-ray beam angle 43°
7 2.6 −
※2 : Effective number of channels for image 744ch
10 3.8 −
※3 : No. of all channels 752ch
(744ch + right and left channels for reference 4ch each)
L1E-BW1346

※4 : Tube side collimator uses a 2mm slice when 1mm slice is used

Fig.7.2.2 X-ray geometric system (Solid detector)

7.1.3 Operation
Scan operation during measurement is described below

E
D A 15°

45°
CW
CW Note : Rotation plate rotates in clockwise
direction only.

C B F

Measurement start point Measurement start point

in case of 2-point or 4- in case of 3-point input
point input

Rectifier
voltage
Measurement

ta min. 120s td Time (s)

ti
Note : ti≒1s

Measurement starts
Press standby Press start switch
switch

Pronto XE, SE Unit s

Scan speed ta td
0.6, 1.0 6.0 Less than 14
1.5 4.0 Less than 12
2.0 3.0 Less than 11
3.0 2.0 Less than 10

Pronto VE Unit s
Scan speed ta td
0.5, 0.8 8.0 Less than 16
1.0 6.0 Less than 14
1.5 4.0 Less than 12
2.0 3.0 Less than 11
3.0 2.0 Less than 10

7−6 L1E-BW1346
The X-ray tube assembly stops at just above (12 o’clock) normally. The rotation plate starts clockwise
rotation when pressing standby button. Measurement is started by pressing start button. Seven
A ~ ○
measurement start points (○ G ) are provided as shown below, and they are set automatically

according to the conditions.

Pronto XE, SE

Measurement start point

Scan speed
Normal scan Volume scan

0.6s, 1s Point ○
A, ○
B, ○
C, ○
D Point ○
A, ○
C

1.5s Point ○
E , ○
F , ○
G Point ○
E , ○
F , ○
G

2s Point ○
A, ○
B, ○
C, ○
D −

3s Point ○
E , ○
F , ○
G −

Pronto VE

Measurement start point

Scan speed
Normal scan Volume scan

0.5s, 0.8s Point ○

A, ○
B, ○
C, ○
D Point ○
A, ○
C

1.0s Point ○
A, ○
B, ○
C, ○
D Point ○
A, ○
C

1.5s Point ○
E , ○
F , ○
G Point ○
E , ○
F , ○
G

2s Point ○
A, ○
B, ○
C, ○
D −

3s Point ○
E , ○
F , ○
G −

After the rotation plate has started rotating, it stops rotating automatically in 120 seconds if the start key
is not pressed.

7−7 L1E-BW1346
7.2 Scan drive unit
The scan drive system and the detection unit for drive control will be described.

7.2.1 Scan drive unit structure

Fig.7.3 shows the scan drive unit structure. The drive unit rotates the rotation plate equipped with the
X-ray tube assembly, detector, etc. The drive unit is mounted at the lower left on the rear panel of the
scanner.

Large pulley
6
65

Small pulley
Drive timing belt

V-belt reduction gears

Electromagnetic brake

I／O CPU
Inverter
control unit Speed command rotating
direction command
Induction motor Drive pulley
V-belt

Fig.7.3 Scan drive unit

7−8 L1E-BW1346
The large pulley connected to the rotation plate rotates by means of the combination of an induction motor
(1.5kW), single-stage V-belt reduction gears, and drive timing belt.
For drive transmission, the induction motor and small pulley are coupled with each other by a V-belt, while the
small pulley of reduction gears output shaft is coupled with the large pulley by a drive timing belt. The rotating
direction and speed to the induction motor are controlled by a general-purpose inverter.
The number of revolutions N of the rotary plate during 1-sec scan is related to the number of revolutions of the
induction motor as shown below.

Drive pulley diameter Small pulley diameter

N = Number of revolutions of motor (φ55) (φ142.6)
(1411r/min) × × = 60r/min
Reduction gear side pulley diameter large pulley diameter
(φ207) (φ891.3)

An electromagnetic brake is mounted on the reduction gears shaft. This electromagnetic brake normally
operates when the panel power supply is turned off and the X-ray tube assembly is set to the just above position
under the stop condition. It is also operated by the emergency button to stop rotating the rotation plate.

7.2.2 Scan control detector

(1) Zebra signal generator (See Fig.7.4)
When the small pulley rotates, the rotary encoder ① rotates to generate zebra pulses to determine
the X-ray irradiation and data input timing.
Number of generation pulses P per rotation of the rotation plate can be obtained by the following
equation.

<Pronto-XE, SE>
30 (No. of timing pulley teeth Z1) 891.3 (Large pulley diameter)
P = 1024 pulses× × = 9600 pulses
20 (No. of timing pulley teeth Z2) 142.6 (Small pulley diameter)

<Pronto-VE>
24 (No. of timing pulley teeth Z1) 891.3 (Large pulley diameter)
P = 1800 pulses× × = 10800 pulses
25 (No. of timing pulley teeth Z2) 142.6 (Small pulley diameter)

The photo sensor (tube upside sensor) ② detects the light shielding plate ③ mounted on the large
pulley. The X-ray tube assembly is positioned just above when the sensor ② detects the light
shielding plate ③.

7−9 L1E-BW1346
 X-ray tube assembly large pulley

③
Detail of part A

Photo sensor② ON
⑤ (just above)
① ②

7−10A
Small pulley

<Rear view of scanner>

① Rotary encoder (1024 pulses/rotation) Pronto XE/SE

(1800 pulses/rotation) Pronto VE
② TUBE UPSIDE sensor
③ Light shielding plate
④ Timing pulley (No. of teeth Z1)
⑤ Timing pulley (No. of teeth Z2)

Fig.7.4 Scan control

L1E-BW1346
7.3 Gantry tilt unit
The scanner tilt unit consists of the gantry tilt link mechanism to support and tilt the gantry, the tilt drive device to
tilt the gantry, and the angle detector to detect the tilt quantity. Fig.7.5 shows the gantry tilt unit structure.

Frame
0 (Tilt center)

Angle detector

Angle detector

Link mechanism

Stand

Tilt drive device

Fig.7.5 Gantry tilt unit structure

7.3.1 Gantry tilt link mechanism

The tilt link mechanism is provided to support and tilt the gantry with the intersecting point of the
rotation center of the rotation plate and the X-ray center employed as the tilt center. The tilt link
mechanism structure is shown in Fig.7.6.
Links A and B are coupled with each other by shafts A, B on the right and left side faces of the frame
supporting the rotation plate, etc. Links C and D are supported to the stand by shafts C and D. Links A,
B and links C, D are coupled with each other by shafts E, F, G respectively, so that parallel links of shafts
A-E and B-F and shafts C-F and D-G are constructed

7−11 L1E-BW1346
 X-ray center

Frame

Tilt center
I O
0
J
I J

Stand D
C D
C
H A
A B

Link A
B

Link
Link D

E
Hydraulic cylinder Link C
E F G G
F Link B

Fig.7.6 Tilt link mechanism

Part H of link D is supported by a hydraulic cylinder. As the cylinder expands and contracts link D
rotates around the shaft D being supported by the stand. Link C also rotates around fixing shaft C. As
a result, the point of shaft B of link B coupled by shafts F, G moves with the same curvature radius as the
curvature of link D (inter-shaft distance of shafts D and G). Also, the point of shaft A of link A moves
with the curvature radius (inter-shaft distance of shafts C and E) by the parallel link structure of shafts
B-F. Accordingly, the gantry supported by shafts A and B is tilted around the rotation plate tilt center at
the intersecting point O of the circle (I-I) drawn with the D-G distance as the radius around shaft A as the
center and the circle (J-J) drawn with the C-E distance as the radius around shaft B as the center. Point
0 is set to meet the intersecting point of the rotation center of the rotation plate and the X-ray center.

7.3.2 Tilt drive unit

Each hydraulic cylinder is supported by the stand, and its one end is coupled to link D with shaft H. As
the cylinder expands and contracts, link D rotates to tilt the gantry. As the cylinder expands, the gantry
tilts forward and as the cylinder contracts, the gantry tilts backward. The hydraulic cylinder is mounted
on both right and left stands. Fig.7.7 shows the structure of hydraulic cylinder.
When the gantry tilts forward, oil is sucked from the tank by a motor pump and injected into the cylinder.
When the gantry tilts backward, the electro-magnetic valve opens so that the oil inside the cylinder is
pushed out by the net weight of gantry to return to the reservoir tank. The tilt angle of gantry is 25°
forward and backward. The hydraulic cylinder and hydraulic circuit on one side are set as follows.
Relief valve setting pressure : 4.5MPa {45kgf/cm2}, Thrust : 3.5kN {350kgf}, Load resistance : 9kN
{900kgf}

7−12 L1E-BW1346
 Motor pump

Shaft（H）

Electro-magnetic valve

Link（D）
Check valve

Throttle valve
Pump
M
Relief valve
Filter

Tank

Stand

Fig.7.7 Hydraulic cylinder

7.3.3 Angle detector

Fig.7.8 shows the angle detector structure. A drive pulley is fixed to shaft C of the stand. When the
gantry tilts, its rotation is transmitted to the potentiometer via a belt to detect the tilt angle. The
potentiometer rotates 6° when the gantry tilts by 1°. A cam is mounted to the drive pulley. If the
gantry tilts abnormally more than 25.5°, limit switches function to turn off the hydraulic circuit.

Cam

Drive pulley
backward tilt limit switch

Belt
Forward tilt limit switch

Driven pulley

Potentiometer

Fig.7.8 Angle detector

7−13 L1E-BW1346
 Gantry tilt opetation of rotation plate and the vertical operation of patient table secure their positionaly
relation by mean of vertical move detection potentiometer assembled in the patient table.
Fig.7.9 and Fig.7.10 show the interlock between the gantry tilt and the patient table height.

250 1000

140 890
130 880
Height indication (mm)

120 870

Table height (mm)

110 860
Operable range
100 850
90 840
80 830
70 820
60 810
50 800
40 790
30 780
20 770
10 760
0 750

-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25

Tilt angle

− 25° ＋ 25°

1000 250

750 0

380

Unit :mm

Fig.7.9 Interlock of gantry and patient table (when Xe detector is mounted)

7−14 L1E-BW1346
 250 1000

130 880
Height indication (mm)

120 870

Table height (mm)

110 860
Operable range
100 850
90 840
80 830
70 820
60 810
50 800
40 790
30 780
20 770
10 760
0 750

-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25

Tilt angle

− 25° ＋ 25°

1000
250

750 0

380

Unit :mm

Fig.7.10 Interlock of gantry and patient table (when solid detector is mounted)

7−15 L1E-BW1346
 7.3.4 Positioning projector
A positioning side projector is mounted on the front upper frame of the scanner (See Fig.7.1).
The projection position is 290mm from the slice position (X-ray irradiation center).

7.4 Collimator device

The collimator is composed of the X-ray tube side collimator and detector side collimator. Six kinds of slice
thickness (1mm, 2mm, 3mm, 5mm, 7mm, and 10mm) and shutters can be selected by their combinations (1mm
slice is option). Fig.7.11 shows the mechanism.

7.4.1A X-ray tube side collimator (Applies to Pronto-XE and Pronto-SE ( ~ S/N 2024) )
(1) Compensation filter
Compensation filter ① made of aluminum is mounted below the X-ray irradiation port.
(2) Slice thickness selector
The slice thickness is selected by the crank mechanism shown below.
Reversible motor ② rotates gears (1) ③. Gears (1) ③ rotate gears (2) ④.
Rod ⑥ being set to the rotary contraposition relation with gears (2) ④ pushes collimator plate ⑧
to cause rod ⑤ to pull the collimator plate ⑦.
Five-stage grooves are provided on collimator plates ⑦, ⑧, respectively.
These collimator plates move through the guide of fixed bearing ⑨, and the distance between
collimator plates ⑦, ⑧ forms five kinds of slit width by the aid of this groove guide.
The collimator plate ⑦, ⑧ positions corresponding to the above conditions are detected by
sensors ⑩ ~ ⑭ and shield plate ⑯. When sensor ⑩ detects the hole of gears (2)④, 10mm
slice is selected. Sensor ⑪ applies to 7mm slice, sensor ⑫ applies to 5mm slice, sensor ⑬
applies to 3 mm slice, and sensor ⑭ applies 1, 2mm slices.

7−16A L1E-BW1346
 A. In case of Pronto-XE

① Compensation filter ⑨ Bearing

② Reversible motor ⑩ Photo sensor PC5

(for 10mm slice)
③ Gear (1)P.C.D=φ5.5
②
⑪ Photo sensor PC4
④ Gear (2)P.C.D=φ104.5
(for 7mm slice)
⑤ Rod
④
⑫ Photo sensor PC3
⑤ ⑥ Rod (for 5mm slice)
①
⑦ Collimator plate ⑬ Photo sensor PC2
(for 3mm slice)
⑧ Collimator plate
⑭ ⑭ Photo sensor PC1
7−17

(for 1, 2 mm slices)

⑦ ⑬

③
A ⑫
CB ⑩ ⑪ Slice thickness 10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1, 2mm
ED ⑥
Collimate plates distance
(when Xe detector is mounted) 4mm 2.8mm 2mm 1.2mm 0.8mm

Stop position E D C B A
⑨ Photo sensor ⑩ ON − − − −
Table side

⑧
Photo sensor ⑪ − ON − − −
Photo sensor ⑫ − − ON − −
Photo sensor ⑬ − − − ON −
Photo sensor ⑭ − − − − ON
L1E-BW1346

Fig.7.11 X-ray tube side collimator

 B. In case of Pronto-SE ( ~ S/N 2024)

① Compensation filter ⑩ Photo sensor PC5

(for 10mm slice)
② Reversible motor
②
⑪ Photo sensor PC4
③ Gear (1)P.C.D=φ5.5 (for 7mm slice)

④ Gear (2)P.C.D=φ104.5 ⑫ Photo sensor PC3

(for 5mm slice)
④
⑤ Rod
⑤ ⑬ Photo sensor PC2
①
⑥ Rod (for 3mm slice)
⑮
⑭ Photo sensor PC1
⑦ Collimator plate
(for 1, 2 mm slices)
7−18

⑭ ⑧ Collimator plate ⑮ Photo sensor PC6

⑨ Bearing (for shutter)
⑦ ⑬

③
A ⑫ Slice thickness 10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1, 2mm Shutter
CB ⑩ ⑪
ED ⑥ Collimate plate distance
F 3.8mm 2.6mm 1.8mm 1.0mm 0.7mm close
(when Solid detector is mounted)
Stop position E D C B A F

⑨ Photo sensor ⑩ ON − − − − −
Table side
Photo sensor ⑪ − ON − − − −
⑧
Photo sensor ⑫ − − ON − − −
Photo sensor ⑬ − − − ON − −
Photo sensor ⑭ − − − − ON −
Photo sensor ⑮ − − − − − ON
L1E-BW1346

Fig.7.11 X-ray tube side collimator

7.4.1B X-ray tube side collimator (Applies to Pronto-SE S/N 2025 or higher and Pronto-VE)
(1) Compensation filter
Compensation filter ① made of aluminum is mounted below the X-ray irradiation port.
(2) Slice thickness selector
The slice thickness is selected by the crank mechanism shown below.
Reversible motor ② rotates gears (1) ③. Gears (1) ③ rotate gears (2) ④.
Rod ⑥ being set to the rotary contraposition relation with gears (2) ④ pushes collimator plate ⑧
to cause rod ⑤ to pull the collimator plate ⑦.
Six-stage grooves are provided on collimator plates ⑦, ⑧, respectively.
These collimator plates move through the guide of fixed bearing ⑨ and the distance between
collimator plates ⑦, ⑧ forms five kinds of slit width by the aid of this groove guide. The
collimator plate ⑦, ⑧ positions corresponding to the above conditions are detected by sensors ⑩
~ ⑮ and shield plates ⑯. When sensor ⑩ detects the hole of shield plate ⑯, 10mm slice is
selected. Sensor ⑪ applies to 7mm slice, sensor ⑫ applies to 5mm slice, sensor ⑬ applies to
3mm slice, and sensor ⑭ applies to 1 and 2mm slices.
Sensor ⑮ applies to the shutter. In this case, collimator plate ⑧ closes the X-ray radiation port.

7−19A L1E-BW1346
 C. In case of Pronto-SE (having S/N 2025 and higher)
Pronto-VE

① Compensation filter ⑪ Photo sensor PC4

(for 7mm slice)
② Motor
⑫ Photo sensor PC3
② ③ Gear (1)P.C.D=φ5.5 (for 5mm slice)
④ Gear (2)P.C.D=φ104.5 ⑬ Photo sensor PC2
⑤ Rod (for 3mm slice)
⑭ ⑭ Photo sensor PC1
⑤ ⑫ ⑥ Rod
(for 1, 2mm slice)
①
⑦ Collimator plate
⑮ Photo sensor PC6
⑮ ⑧ Collimator plate (for shutter)
⑨ Pin ⑯ Shield plate
⑯
⑩ Photo sensor 5PC
7−20A

(for 10mm slice)

⑦

③ ⑬ 10mm 7mm 5mm 3mm 1, 2mm

A Slice thickness Shutter
CB ⑩ ⑪ (large) (large) (large) (large) (large)
ED ⑥
F Collimate plate distance
3.8mm 2.6mm 1.8mm 1.0mm 0.7mm close
(when Solid detector is mounted)
Stop position F E D C B A
⑨ Photo sensor ⑩ ON − − − − −

⑧ Photo sensor ⑪ − ON − − − −
Photo sensor ⑫ − − ON − − −
Photo sensor ⑬ − − − ON − −
Photo sensor ⑭ − − − − ON −
L1E-BW1346

Fig.7.11.C X-ray tube side collimator

7.4.2 Detector side collimator
The detector side collimator consists of collimator frame ① and mechanical sections ②. The
collimator frame is supported by linear guide ③ on both right and left sides to be able to move in the
Z-axis direction.
The moving range of the collimator frame is restricted by stopper A ④ and stopper B ⑤. The 1mm
slice thickness corresponds to the stop condition of the collimator frame by stopper A, while slice
thickness other than 1mm corresponds to the stop condition of the collimator frame by stopper B. The
rotation of torque motor ⑥ is converted into the linear motion in Z direction of the collimator frame
through pinion ⑦ and rack ⑧. Assume that 1mm slice thickness is selected now.
The motor rotates and the collimator frame moves in the direction. It is stopped by stopper A.
On the other hand, a voltage equivalent to 60% of the rated voltage is continuously applied to the motor.

Accordingly, the collimator frame position is held without any play even when the rotary plate rotates.

Z-axis

④
① Collimator frame
② Mechanical section
③
③ Linear guide
④ Stopper A
⑤ Stopper B
⑥ Torque motor
⑦ Pinion
⑧ Rack
①

⑥
⑦
⑧

Fig.7.12 Detector side collimator

7−21 L1E-BW1346
7.5 Slip ring
This mechanism transfers signals and electricity between the frame or other stationary side and the rotation plate
or other rotation side. It is composed of slip ring ①, power brush block ②, signal brush block ③, and HF
signal brush block ④. The slip ring outer circumference is covered with a shield cover to prevent noise leak
from the brushes. The shield cover is composed of left upper ring cover ⑤, right upper ring cover ⑥, left
lower ring cover ⑨, right lower ring cover ⑩, left ring cover ⑦, left side ring cover ⑪, and right ring cover
⑧.

7.5.1 Slip ring

The slip ring is provided with 23 channels rings in total. Channel 1 ~ 3 are a large current power line,
channels 4 ~ 6 are a small current power line, and channels 7 ~ 23 are a signal line. Of these channels,
channels 21 and 22 are an image data transmission line.

②
③ Ａ

⑪
Ａ
⑱

⑭
⑮ ⑥

④
⑧
①
⑩
⑨

⑰ ⑯

① Slip ring ⑦ Left ring cover ⑬ Left upper mounting bracket

② Power brush block
③ Signal brush block
④ HF signal brush block
⑤ Left upper ring cover
⑥ Right upper ring cover
⑧ Right ring cover
⑨ left lower ring cover
⑩ Right lower ring cover
⑪ Left side ring cover
⑫ Upper mounting bracket
Fig.7.13
⑭ Right upper mounting bracket
⑮ Left lower mounting bracket
⑯ Right lower mounting bracket
⑰ Lower mounting bracket
⑱ Left side mounting bracket

7−22 L1E-BW1346
7.5.2 Brush block
The brush is a bundle of φ0.22 wires.
Fig.7.14 shows an approximate profile of each brush block.

3ch

2ch

1ch

23ch

4ch

23ch

20ch

Fig.7.14

7−23 L1E-BW1346
7.6 Summary of electric control device of scanner
The electrical control device of this third generation CT scanner uses a low-voltage slip ring. The electric
control device of the scanner consists of the stationary control device, rotation plate control, and power
distribution board control device. Signals and power supply of these devices are connected via the slip ring.
The main power supply of the high voltage unit on the scanner rotation plate is also supplied via the slip ring.
The power distribution board control device is composed of chassis 7 (mounted at the bottom of the scanner) and
chassis 3 (mounted on the left base of the scanner), and turned on and off by the gantry power switch of the
operator console.
The stationary control device is composed of the PCB unit 1 (mounted at the upper left of the scanner) and chassis
2 (mounted at the upper right of the scanner), and the electric parts mounted on the lift cover, rear cover, frame,
etc. are controlled by the PCB unit 1. The rotation plate control device is composed of PCB unit II,
chassis 1, etc. and the X-ray tube unit, radiator, high-voltage unit, solid detector (or Xe detector), preamplifier,
and collimators are arranged around.
Electric parts mounted on the rotation plate frame are controlled by PCB unit .II.
Internal control of scanner and communication control to the exterior is executed by Hitachi RISC (Reduced
Instruction Set Computer) (SH micro-computer).
This high-speed computer reduces complicated instructions to simplify the hardware. This CPU is internally
composed of 32 bits, and the basic instructions are operated by one instruction/state (1 system clock cycle), so
that the execution speed inside CPU is high (2 state operation in case of the exterior).
Since CPU is designed as a multiple system to disperse the processing, the processing speed of each function is
improved. This CPU is also provided with serial communication ports, and it can execute RS232C
communication with the exterior via driver/receiver only.
Three CPU are used in the stationary control device Inter-CPU communication of the stationary control device is
executed via dual port RAM. The CPU is composed mainly of a flash memory for loading programs and an
SRAM for loading data.
Major specifications of CPU circuit are described below.

・ CPU : SH7032 (HD6417032F20・QFP 112pin)

Built-in memory contents (RAM・8kB)

・ Clock : 20MHz (CPU interior ; 1-state operation ･ 50ns instructions)

(CPU exterior ; 2-state operation ･ 100ns instructions)

・ Multi (3) CPU (stationary side) : Main CPU (M. CPU/MCPUC PCB)
: Scanner CPU (S. CPU/MCPUC PCB)
: Table CPU (T. CPU/TCPUB PCB)

・ Program area (flush memory) : MBM29F040A-70 (QFJ) x 2

: Memory capacity (1MB)/1CPU

7−24 L1E-BW1346
・ Work memory area (SRAM) : HM628512FLP-7A (QFP) x 2
: Memory capacity (512kW)/M.CPU

・ Work memory area (SRAM) : HM628128FLP-7(QFP) x 2

: Memory capacity (128kW)/Other than M. CPU

Program area Work memory area

(flash memory) (SRAM)
M.CPU 1MB 512kW
S.CPU 1MB 128kW
T.CPU 1MB 128kW

・ Dual port RAM : MB8422-90LP x 2

: Memory capacity (2kB)/inter-CPU

M.CPU∼S.CPU（DPRAM1）
Write use only from the first half 1kB M.CPU
(Read use only from S.CPU)
Write use only from the second half 1kB M.CPU
(Read use only from M.CPU)
M.CPU∼T.CPU（DPRAM2）
Write use only from the first half 1kB M.CPU
(Read use only from TCPU)
Write use only from the second half 1kB M.CPU
(Read use only from T.CPU)

・ Interruption controller (CPU built in)

The interruption controller judges the priority of the interruption source to control the interruption request to
CPU. Interruptions are divided into four interruptions consisting of NMI, user break (UBC), IRQ, and
built-in peripheral module, and three kinds of interruptions excluding UBC are used.

: NMI Mask-disable top priority (level 16) interruption

: UBC Interruption generated when the break condition being preset to the controller is satisfied
: Mask-enable interruption of IRQ0 ~ IRQ7
: Built-in peripheral module Six built-in peripheral module interruptions are provided, and serial
communication (SCI) interruption is used.

The priority sequence of interruptions are represented by priority level values (0 ~ 16). Level 0 is the minimum,
while level 16 (NMI) is the maximum.

7−25 L1E-BW1346
Priority levels of interruptions excluding NMI can be set within a range from 0 to 15.
The interruption sources every CPU are shown below.
(A part of interruption lines (*A~ *D) are used as separate functions)

Interruption Main CPU Scanner CPU Table CPU

NMI Not used Not used Not used
IRQ0 OC MKY28 send Not used（*A） Not used（*C）
IRQ1 Not used（*B） Not used（*D）
IRQ2 OC MKY28 receive AD conversion end
IRQ3 SM／TM MS DATA MT DATA
DATA WR (*1) WR (*2) WR (*4)
IRQ4 Scanner interior LSW(*5)
SW (*3)
IRQ5 WB Sensors(*6)
IRQ6 Operation panel SW (*7)
IRQ7 S pulse input
SCI0 Rotation plate PC
SCI1 PC PC

*1: Interruption occurs when data are written from SCPU/TCPU to SM area/TM area of dual port RAM.
*2: Interruption occurs when data are written from MCPU to the MS area of dual port RAM.
*3: Interruption occurs when the scanner internal switch conditions have changed.

(1); TILT hydraulic unit power supply FFB trip

(2); General-purpose inverter input power supply FFB trip
(3); INV trip
(4); INV thermal relay
(5); TILT hydraulic cylinder thermal relay (R)
(6); TILT hydraulic cylinder thermal relay (L)
(7); Touch switch
(8); Stationary scan switch
(9); Off brake release switch
(10); Lift cover open switch
(11); INV power supply control relay

7−26 L1E-BW1346
*4: Interruption occurs when data are written from MCPU to the MT area of dual port RAM
*5: Interruption occurs when limit switch LSW conditions have changed
・ Table longitudinal operation ・ Table vertical move operation
(1); Forward LSW (1); Table travel up LSW
(2); Backward LSW (2); Table travel down LSW
(3); Forward speed LSW
(4); Backward speed LSW

*6: Interruption occurs when the sensor conditions have changed

・ Gantry tilt operation
(1) TILT forward LSW
(2) TILT backward LSW

*7: Interruption occurs when one of operation panel switches is pressed.

*A: Used in scanner CPU.TCLKA (Scanner Zebra pulse input) Not used for interruption.
*B: Used in scanner CPU.TCLKB (Table Zebra pulse input) Not used for interruption.
*C: Used in table CPU .TCLKA (Rotary encoder A-phase) Not used for interruption.
*D: Used in table CPU .TCLKB (Rotary encoder B-phase) .Not used for interruption.

Fig.7.15 shows the entire configuration diagram, Fig.7.16and 7.17 show the mounting layout of units and sensors,
and. Fig.7.20 shows the entire block diagram.

7−27 L1E-BW1346
 Rotation plate

is
X-ray tube

ss
Chassis

ha
tc

1 sis
PCB unit 2

en

as
m

Ch
I
la
Fi X-ray collimator

II unit

Co
ol
B

e
PC

PC S2

r
FS
TX

D
PC
B
High voltage High voltage
transformer transformer
(−) (＋)

Off
brake

Chassis Detector
3 Scan
motor
Preamplifier

Hydraulic unit Hydraulic unit

(L) Chassis 7 (R)

Inside the scanner

Outside the scanner

Operator X-ray
Foot switch Table
console control unit

Power line (AC200V)

Power line (AC100V)

Signal line

Fig.7.15 Block diagram of whole scanner system

7−28 L1E-BW1346
 4PC:7mm Collimator sensor

5PC:10mm Collimator sensor

2PC:3mm Collimator sensor

6PC:Shutter sensor

3PC:5mm Collimator sensor

1PC:2mm Collimator sensor
Arrow view A
1SW:
Manual scan
push-button switch PB-M17 PCB
21SW:
TILT- TILT+ PB-L17 PCB PB-R17 PCB Stationary/normal selector switch

Rear Front 22SW:

Brake release selector switch
PCB unit I X-ray tube
PCB unit I
Chassis 2
3SW: I s is
it I as Cooler
Manual/normal un is 1t ch
selector switch B ss n FS
PC ha me
C ila D
PC
2SW: F A B
Manual scan

7−29A
push-button switch
SPB2
High PCB High
4SW: voltage voltage
EMG. switch generator generator
(-) (+)

Detector
Hydraulic unit
(L)
Preamplifier Preamplifier
3LS:
Chassis 3 lift cover limit switch

Chassis 7

1M:Scan motor
Cable outlet
Left side view of scanner Front view of scanner

L1E-BW1346
Fig.7.16 Mounting layout of units and sensors-1
 X-IND PCB unit I
TILT+ TILT- Chassis 2 PCB

Front Rear

Chassis 2

SPB2
PCB
1LS:TILT+
limit switch
2LS:TILT-
limit switch

Hydraulic unit
(R)

Chassis 3

Chassis 7
1RE:
1PT:for TILT 1B:OFF brake Rotary encoder for zebra pulse SENS2A
potentiometer PCB
1M:scan motor

Right side view of scanner Rear view of scanner

Fig.7.17 Mounting layout of units and sensors-2

7−30 L1E-BW1346
 Table
Power Stationary side control unit Slip ring Rotation plate side control unit
(WT)
distribution board

・Chassis 7 ・PCB unit I ・PCB unit II

・Chassis 3 ・Chassis 2 ・Chassis 1
・Frame ・Filament chassis
Operator console
・Cover (・X-ray tube)
(OC)
(・Radiator)
(・High voltage generator)
(・Solid detector or Xe
detector)
(・Preamplifier)

7−31
X-ray control unit (・Collimator)
(WB)

Foot switch

Scanner unit

Signal

Fig.7.18 Block diagram of whole scanner system Power supply

L1E-BW1346
7.7 Power distribution board
The power distribution board is composed of chassis 7 and chassis 3. Fig.7.19 shows the block diagram of the
power distribution board.
The functions of each unit are described below.

7.7.1 Chassis 7
Chassis 7 connects cables to the external units. Also, this chassis distributes AC power supply, GND,
and signal cables. Each cable is connected into the scanner via this unit. The composition of external
cables is shown below.
･ AC power supply : 4TN・ 1/2/3............Input (main power supply) ; AC200V
: 4TN・ 6/7...............Output (Table) ; AC200V
: 4TN・ 10/11/12......X-ray control unit output (starter)
; AC70∼200V
: 1TN・ T1/T2........... X-ray control unit inverter output
(High voltage generator input)
; AC100∼250V, 10kHZ
・ Earth : E, E2 (Hospital side power distribution board)
: E3 (Table)
・ Signals : 7CN (X-ray control unit) ; Serial communication / kV control / X-ray abnormal
/ power on
: 9CN (Image processor) ; Serial communication / MIC / SP
: 10CN(Image processor) ; Measuring data transfer
: 4TN (External speaker output)

7.7.2 Chassis 3

Chassis 3 generates AC 100V for scanner power supply on-off control and scanner control by means of a
power transformer This isolation transformer having a high attenuation effect of eliminating power line
noises provides a step-down (AC200V → AC 100V) function.
This unit is composed of the following parts.
・ Circuit protector (31FFB) : PCB unit/shutting off the power supply of rotation plate interior
・ Pilot lamp (31PL) : Lights when main power supply is being fed

7−32 L1E-BW1346
 Chassis 7 PCB unit Ⅰ

External speaker 4TN Speaker output

Foot switch Foot switch

WT (control) WT control

WT(GND)
E3
WT(AC200V)
4TN

OC (Communication) OC communication
OC (Measuring data) Measuring data

Hospital side power

distribution board (GND)
E2

X-ray control unit (AC)

4TN
Hospital side power
distribution board (GND)
E
X-ray control unit (AC)
1TN

High voltage generator power supply (AC)

X-ray tube rotor power supply (AC)

(AC200V)

High voltage generator (GND)

AC200V

AC100V

AC100V

Signal
Power
GND

Chassis 3 Slip ring

Fig.7.19 Block diagram of power distribution board

7−33 L1E-BW1346
 ・ Pilot lamp (32PL) : Indicates that power is being fed to chassis 2/table power supply
・ Power transformer (31T) : AC200V→AC100V (1.8kVA)

Relay 31DR is controlled by the on-off operation of “GANTRY POWER” switch on the operator console.
Electromagnetic contactors 31,32KP are controlled by relay 31DR
・ 31KP: Chassis 2 power supply/table power supply
・ 32KP: PCB unit 1 power supply
・ 31DR: X-ray control unit output (DC 24V)

7.8 Stationary side control unit

The stationary side control unit is composed of PCB unit 1 and chassis 2, and a part of electric parts are mounted
on the frame and cover. Fig 7.20 shows the block diagram of stationary side control unit. The functions of
component units are shown below.

7.8.1 PCB unit 1

PCB unit 1 is composed of two control system PCB (MCPUC/TCPUB), one data resend PCB (TXR2A),
two intercom. amplifiers (MK-GXP, MK-DSP), and the DC power supply employed inside PCB.
Fig.7.21 shows the PCB unit block diagram. Each PCB functions as described below.

(1) MCPUC PCB

This PCB is composed of main CPU (MCPU) block, and scanner CPU (S CPU) block. Fig.7.23
shows the main CPU block diagram, while Fig.7.24 shows the scanner CPU block diagram.

7−34 L1E-BW1346
 Frame Cover

MICX2 (Operation panel )

PB-L17 PB-R17
EMG.SW EMG.SW
Tube position sensor SENS2A
PB-M17
Zebra rotary encoder
SPB2 SPB2
Laser projector cross line (R)
(Traffic light)
SPB2 SPB2
Laser projector cross line (L)

X-IND
TILT potentiometer Touch switch

TILT LSW ( ＋ )

Frame
TILT LSW ( − ) PCB unit I
Scan motor
Inverter communication

7−35
MANU.SW Brake
Chassis 2
Selector switch
Front cover LSW
Push button switch
Stationary Hydraulic unit (R)
Push button switch switch
Brake
release switch Hydraulic unit (L)

AC AC
WT control
Fan Fan
Speaker output

OC communication

OC measuring data SR signal

Signal
Power distribution board block AC

Slip ring Power distribution board block

L1E-BW1346
Fig.7.20 Stationary side control unit block diagram
 OC (SP / MIC)
MIC MIC SP

Potentiometer PC (for T CPU)

Intercom. amplifier
TILT LSW ( ＋ ) MK-GXP,MK-DSP

TILT LSW ( − )
24V
Traffic light (B)
Chassis 2
Traffic light (F)
TCPUB PCB

Operation panel
・Serial port/X-TRG
X - IND ・RESET/EMERGENCY

WT (Control)
Error detection SERI DATA

Resend data/ SERI DATA (*)

sync signal
VIEW TRG

7−36
TXR2A VIEW TRG (*)
OC (Communication)
PCB
OC (measuring data)

Tube position sensor PC (M.CPU)

MCPUC PCB
Z. rotary encoder
PC (S.CPU)
Laser projector (R)
Laser projector (L) MANU.SW

5V・12V・± 15V 5V
24V・5V(B)

AC AC 12V
N.F. DCPS

AC Signal
Fan
AC

L1E-BW1346
Fig.7.21 PCB unit block diagram
 Dual port RAM
(DPRAM1)

MS.AREA
(first-half of memory)

M.CPU →S.CPU

SM.AREA
(second-half of memory)
Scanner CPU
S.CPU →M.CPU (S.CPU)
block

MS F / F OUT

MS F / F SET MS MS DATA WR
F/F
MS F / F RESET
SM F / F OUT
SM DATA
WR SM SM F / F SET
F/F
SM F / F RESET
Main CPU MT F / F OUT RESET
(M.CPU) MT DATA
block MT F / F SET MT WR
F/F
MT F / F RESET
TM F / F OUT
TM DATA
WR TM TM F / F SET
F/F
TM F / F RESET
RESET

Dual port RAM Table CPU

(DPRAM2) (T.CPU)
block
MT.AREA
(first-half of memory)

M.CPU → T.CPU

TM.AREA
(second-half of memory)

T.CPU →M.CPU

Fig.7.22 Stationary side control unit CPU block diagram

7−37 L1E-BW1346
 SRAM I/ O

Shared
Flash F I F O Serial Shared memory
memory
memory memory MKY28(OC)
MKY28

CLK;
20MHz
I/ O

RS232C Serial port

RS232C (Rotation plate)
Main CPU driver/
(M.CPU) receiver RS232C Serial port
RESET
switch (PC)

RESET
I/ O To S.CPU / T.CPU
DIP SW
MS F / F OUT
MS F / F SET
MS F / F
STATUS
LEDS
(SH7032) SM DATA WR
SM F / F
SM F / F RESET
S.CPU
MT F / F OUT
MT F / F SET
MT F / F

FIFO
FIFO TM DATA WR
memory TM F / F
memory
(OC) TM F / F RESET
T.CPU

PCI
I/F Dual port RAM
M.CPU → S.CPU
(OC)

M.CPU ← S.CPU
FIFO (DPRAM1)
memory FIFO
memory
(OC)

Dual port RAM

M.CPU → T.CPU

M.CPU ← T.CPU
(DPRAM2)

Fig.7.23 Main CPU (M CPU) block diagram

7−38 L1E-BW1346
 Stationary switch/inverter error
brake release switch/EMG
switch/release switch/cover open
touch switch/inverter control Chassis 2
I / F PORT
(SRY4)

Projector

I/ O Resend ERR
TXR2A
SRAM
MANUAL
switch

TUBE POSI
sensor
Flash (SENS2A)
memory
Measuring Measuring
system
signal data port
(OC)

I/ O
CLK;
20MHz

DIP SW RS232C
Scanner CPU driver/ RS232C Serial port
I/ O
(S.CPU) receiver (PC)
STATUS
LEDS

M.CPU ZEBRA
rotary encoder
(SH7032)
MS DATA WR
MS F / F
MS F / F RESET

SM F / F OUT Table zebra (after frequency division)

From T.CPU
SM F / F SET
SM F / F

Dual port RAM

(DPRAM1)

RESET
From M.CPU

Fig.7.24 Scanner CPU (S CPU) block diagram

7−39 L1E-BW1346
 Each CPU block functions as described below
1) Main CPU (M. CPU) block
・ Serial communication (2 ports)
: Rotation plate communication (RS232C) ; Data (1 line)
: PC communication for terminals (RS232C)
・ Rotation plate control signal
: EXP. ; X-RAY ON signal (high-voltage unit output)
: RESET ; CPU reset
: X-TRG ; X-ray trigger (high voltage unit input)
: EMERGENCY ; (high voltage unit input)
: +12V ; Communication power supply
・ Shared memory MKY28 communication (1 port)
: OC (Image processor unit) communication
; Through 8-bit serial. OC → Scanner. FIFO memory
; Through 8-bit serial. Scanner → OC. FIFO memory
・ Inter-CPU communication (2 ports)
: Scanner CPU (via dual port RAM)
: Table CPU (via dual port RAM)
・ Status LED display
: X-ray trigger
: View trigger
: ZEBRA SENSOR
: ABORT
: STATUS（8BIT）
・ PCB operation switch read : RESET switch
・ Function setting DIP switch read
・ Measuring sequence control : Measuring sequence setting
・ Status send-receive between OC (image processor) and WS (scanner)
: EMERGENCY ; OC→WS
: X-RAY ON ; WS→OC
: DEADMAN ; OC→WS
(Deadman relay is released when the table is fed automatically)
: RESET ; OC→WS (CPU reset)
: START ; OC→WS

7−40 L1E-BW1346
2) Scanner CPU (S CPU) block
・ Serial communication (1 port) : For PC communication and terminals (RS232C)
・ Inter-CPU communication (1 port) : Main CPU (via dual port RAM)
・ Scanner internal switch (SW) input (via SRY4 PCB)
: MANU switch (Manual rotation switch)
: ST SCAN SW (Stationary scan switch)
: BRAKE REL SW (Brake release switch)
: TAPE SW (Touch switch)
: Lift cover SW (Lift cover open switch)
・ Scanner internal contact (trip) monitoring (via SRY4 PCB)
: General-purpose inverter input FFB ; 21FFB
: Hydraulic unit input FFB ; 22FFB
・ Rotation plate rotation angle/X-ray tube position detection
: Zebra rotary encoder (1RE) input
: Tube position (SENS2A PCB)
・ Measuring sync. signal control
: View trigger signal (VIEW-TRG) ; For data input
: X-ray trigger signal (X-TRG) ; For X-ray synchronization
: Start angle setting (SA0/1) ; Data input start position
: Generation of table sync signal (S PULSE) by volume scan
; 1 pulse/rotation (TUBE UP SIDE detection)
・ Rotation plate rotation (general-purpose inverter) control
: Scan motor on-off ; CW
: Speed selection ; I5 ~ I7
: Brake release ; OFBRK RELESE
: General-purpose inverter power supply release
; INV. POW. REL
・ Resend PCB (TXR2A) error detection
: PCB error display contents read ; LD1∼LD10
: Error read pulse generation ; PSW1∼PSW3

7−41 L1E-BW1346
 ・ Function setting DIP switch read
・ X-ray ON display : PB-M17 PCB (lift cover)
: X-IND PCB (rear cover)
・ Traffic light display : SPB2 PCB
・ Status LED display : Zebra sensor
: X-RAY TRIG
: VIEW TRIG
: ABORT
: 8-bit bus status (D0 ~ D7)

MCPUC PCB
LED

LD1 DO(LSB)
LD2 D1
LD3 D2
LD4 D3
Bus status
LD5 D4
LD6 D5
LD7 D6
LD8 D7(MSB)
LD9
ABORT
TP1
LD10
ZEBRA SENSOR
TP2
LD11
VIEW TRIG
TP3
LD12
X-RAY TRIG
TP4
TP5 VIEW TRIG2
TP6 DEADMAN
DGND DGND
CHECK PIN
RESET SW
SW
(Pushbutton switch)

Note: The above figure shows the MCPUC PCB as viewed from the front of the scanner

Status LED (bus status) of MCPUC PCB indicate the operating conditions of software and mean as described in
the next paragraph.

7−42 L1E-BW1346
Meanings of MCPUC PCB status LED (bus status) display
(Displayed sequentially starting with the numeric value corresponding to the initialization start
･80→81→82→･･････)

・ Scanner initialization in progress (for several tens seconds after power supply has been turned on)
Initialization start Status LED = 80H
RAM check (shift data) Status LED = 81H (built-in RAM)
RAM check (55AAH data) Status LED = 82H (built-in RAM)
RAM check (marching) Status LED = 83H (built-in RAM)
RAM check (shift data) Status LED = 84H (external RAM E000000H)
RAM check (55AAH data) Status LED = 85H (external RAM E000000H)
RAM check (marching) Status LED = 86H (external RAM E000000H)
RAM check (shift data) Status LED = 87H (external RAM ...........SCPU DRAM send area) RAM
RAM check (55AAH data) Status LED = 88H (external RAM ...........SCPU DRAM send area) RAM
RAM check (marching) Status LED = 89H (external RAM ...........SCPU DRAM send area) RAM
RAM check (shift data) Status LED = 8AH (external RAM ..........SCPU DRAM send area) RAM
RAM check (55AAH data) Status LED = 8BH (external RAM...........SCPU DRAM send area) RAM
RAM check (marching) Status LED = 8CH (external RAM...........SCPU DRAM send area) RAM
RAM check Status LED = 8DH
If an RAM is abnormal, the LED corresponding to the RAM remains displayed, and the scanner does not
start.
Initial communication check Status LED = 1FH
(Each LED goes out when initial communication is succeeded)
D0 = LED・OFF ; Rotation side CPU initial communication ends
D1 = LED・OFF ; SCPU initial communication ends
D2 = LED・OFF ; TCPU initial communication ends
D3 = LED・OFF ; WB initial communication ends
(If an LED does not goes out, it shows that a communication error occurs)
If a communication error occurs, the following LED light and the scanner does not start
Rotary plate communication error D4LED・ON
SCPU communication error D5LED・ON
TCPU communication error D6LED・ON
WB communication error D7LED・ON
・ After the scanner has been initialized
* Waiting for a command from OC Status LED = 01H
* A command was received form OC Status LED = (Received command display) H
* An error occurs Status LED = (Internal status display) H
* An emergency occurs Status LED = 1FH
* An abnormal interrupt occurs Status LED = FEH
(+ high-order bit of interrupt No. + low-order but of
interrupt No. flicker)
* Watch dog timer error Status LED= FFH

7−43 L1E-BW1346
(2) TCPUB PCB
TCPUB PCB is composed of table CPU (T CPU) to mainly execute table control and operation panel control.
Since this PCB is provided with LED for operation panel and switches, it can be operated during
maintenance. Fig.7.25 shows the block diagram of table CPU (T CPU).

7−44 L1E-BW1346
 (Tilt) Inverter unit
I / F PORT

(Via MCPU)

Table
(SW / LED) operation
panel
I / F PORT
(LSW /interlock)
(Longitudinal move/
I/ O Table ※
vertical move control)
I / F PORT
SRAM
ETC SIG
(X-RAY/EMG/deadman) PORT
(OC)

TILT LSW
Flash
memory
Tilt sensor

CLK;
I/ O 20MHz

RS232C
Table CPU driver/ RS232C Serial port
receiver (PC)
DIP SW (T.CPU)

I/ O
STATUS
LEDS ※
Rotary encoder
(table)

(SH7032)

Tilt potentiometer
MT DATA WR
MT F / F AD Offset/gain
MT F / F RESET
※
Table height
potentiometer
TM F / F OUT

TM F / F SET
TM F / F To S.CPU
Table zebra (after frequency division)

M.CPU

Asterisk(*) is connected to the table

Dual port RAM

(DPRAM2)

RESET
From M.CPU

Fig.7.25 Table CPU (T CPU) block diagram

7−45 L1E-BW1346
Table CPU block executes the following operation.
1) Table (T CPU) block
・ Serial communication (1 port) : PC communication for terminals (RS232C)
・ Inter-CPU communication (1 port) : Main CPU (via dual port RAM)
・ Scanner operation panel control
: Control of operation panel (LED/SW) mounted on TCPUB PCB
: Gantry side operation panel (LED/SW) control
; PB-L17/PB-R17 PCB (SW)
; PB-M17 PCB (LED)
: Operation panel interface signal
; D0~ D7 (LED display data)
; A0 ~ A3 (I/O address)
; STRB (I/O address strobe signal)
: Operation panel LED signal
; Table position (±1999mm／0.5mm pitch)
; Tilt angle (±25°／0.5°pitch)
; Table height (0∼250mm／1mm pitch)
: Operation panel switch input
; PAT SW (PAT operation switch)
; TILT (+) SW (Forward tilt switch)
; TILT (-) SW (Backward tilt switch)
; TABLE DOWN (↓) SW (Table down switch)
; TABLE UP (↑) SW (Table up switch)
; TABLE HSP (《 》) SW (Table high-speed switch)
; TABLE LF (←) SW (Table low speed forward move switch)
; TABLE LB (→) SW (Table low speed backward move switch)
; HOME POSI SW (Table home position switch)
; PRESET SW (Table preset position switch)
Switch on TCPUB PCB side is called SCAN POSI
; RESET SW (Table position “0” clear/Emergency reset switch)
; LIGHT SW (Projector ON/OFF switch)
; EMERGENCY SW (Emergency switch)

7−46 L1E-BW1346
・ Dual port RAM communication (Main CPU ~ table CPU)
・ Table LSW detection
: FORWARD MOVE LSW (Table forward move limit position detection)
: F MOVE SPEED LOW (Speed switching position in table forward move direction)
: BACKWARD MOVE LSW (Table backward move limit position detection)
: B MOVE SPEED LSW (Table backward move direction speed switching position)
: DOWN LSW (Table down limit position detection)
: UP LSW (Table up limit position detection)
・ Tilt (hydraulic unit) operation control ; TILT+/-
・ Tilt LSW detection
: TILT + (1LS) (Tilt forward limit position detection)
: TILT - (2LS) (Tilt backward limit position detection)
・ AD input
: Tilt angle (potentiometer 1PT) detection
: Table height (potentiometer) detection
・ Table position (longitudinal move position) counter input
: RE-A (rotary encoder 1REA phase)
: RE-B (rotary encoder 1REB phase)
・ Table vertical move control
: Table up control (hydraulic pump)
: Table down control (electromagnetic valve)
・ Table longitudinal move control
: Operating direction signal generation
: Speed command signal generation
: Operation enable signal generation
・ Function setting DIP SW read
・ Emergency processing
・ X-RAY ON LED display
: PB-L17/PB-R17 PCB (lift cover)
: X-IND PCB (Rear cover)
・ EMERGENCY ON LED display
: PB-L17/PB-R17 PCB (lift cover)

7−47 L1E-BW1346
(3) TXR2A PCB
For TXR2APCB, refer to “Preamplifier signals “ (7.12).

(4) MK-GXP, MK-DSP (intercom amplifier)

The intercom amplifier is a one-way communication amplifier for feeding the scanner room side voice to the
image processor side. Voice is input from the scanner microphone into this amplifier via a sub amplifier
and fed to the image processor side. MK-DSP contains noise canceller function.

(5) DC power supply

The DC power supply is composed of the following.

1DPS 5V20A
2DPS 5V7A／＋15V1.2A／−15V0.5A
3DPS 24V2.2A
4DPS 12V4.2A

7.8.2 Chassis 2
Chassis 2 is composed of the general-purpose inverter to drive a scan motor, power supply consisting of
circuit breaker, magnet switch, noise filter, etc., and SRY4 PCB for executing the drive system control for
motor, brake system, etc., drive system error monitoring, tilt control, etc. The brake and tilt control
power supply are turned on or off via an SSR.

Fig.7.26 shows the chassis 2 block diagram.

7−48 L1E-BW1346
 Slip ring

Scan motor

For brake

21SSR

Control signal
Brake
Stationary switch
General-purpose inverter
MCPUC PCB 21SW (INV.)
AC.10KHz
Brake release switch
Touch switch 22SW

SRY4 PCB
Lift cover switch
Tilt thermal (R)

7−49
INV.
Tilt thermal (L) (3 φ )
For hydraulic unit 21NF
Hydraulic unit (R)
SSR INV. FFB To high voltage unit
Hydraulic unit (L) auxiliary contact
22SSR ~ 23SSR INV. 2TN
21KP (T1,T2,E)
TILT. FFB
auxiliary contact
3 φ AC200V

Signal TILT INV.

AC.10KHz
AC 22FFB 21FFB

1 φ AC200V

Power distribution board block

L1E-BW1346
Fig.7.26 Inverter unit block diagram
Each component unit functions as follows

(1) General-purpose inverter

The general-purpose inverter is composed of the following components.
・ Inverter (1INV) ; 3-phase AC 200V, 2.2KW
・ Braking resistor (21R) ; 150W 62 ohm
・ Thermal relay (21THR) ; 1.4A
The inverter operation specifications are 8-stage speed operation. The following table shows the
correspondence between the inverter setting and speed.

I7 I6 I5 Rotating speed Remarks

(Don’t set for Pronto-SE/XE,
0 0 0 0.8 sec/rotation
but set for Pronto-VE only)
0 0 1 1 sec/rotation
0 1 0 1.5 sec/rotation
0 1 1 2 sec/rotation
1 0 0 3 sec/rotation
1 0 1 4 sec/rotation (rotation before stop)
1 1 0 70 sec/rotation (manual scan)
1 1 1 60 sec/rotation (creep speed)

(2) Power supply

The power supply is composed of the following components
・ Circuit protector (for inverter) : 21FFB
・ Circuit protector (for tilt) : 22FFB
・ Magnet switch (for inverter) : 21KP
・ Power relay (for tilt) : 21RY
・ Noise filter (for inverter) : 21NF
(3) SRY4 PCB
SRY4 PCB turns off the power supply if a trouble is detected in the inverter unit or hydraulic unit
for tilting and also controls the power supply shut-off in case of cover open and emergency. This
PCB is connected to MCPUC PCB to control the hydraulic unit operation and transfers the input
information of switches, FFB contacts, etc., to the CPU.

7−50 L1E-BW1346
7.8.3 Frame
(1) SENS2A PCB
This PCB is provided with a transmittance type photo sensor and mounted on the side face of the
large pulley of the mechanism. It outputs a signal when the X-ray tube is positioned just above.
(2) Potentiometer
The potentiometer is set in such a way as the resistance value becomes a half at a tilt angle of 0°,
and the resistance changed due to tilt operation is calculated as an angle by CPU using the above
resistance value as a reference value.
・ Potentiometer : 1PT (5kΩ, 10 turns)
(3) Rotary encoder
The rotary encoder outputs a zebra pulse for detecting the rotating angle of the rotation plate.
・ Rotary encoder : 1RE
In case of Pronto-XE/SE
(RE resolution ; 1024 pulses/rotation ; Rotation plate 9600 pulses/scan)
In case of Pronto-VE
(RE resolution ; 1800 pulses/rotation ; Rotation plate 10800 pulses/scan)
(4) Limit switches
These limit switches detect an overrun during gantry tilt.

・ TILT (+) limit switch (forward tilt) : 1LS

・ TILT (-) limit switch (backward tilt) : 2LS
(5) Laser projectors
These projectors are always fixed at the stationary position irrespective of the gantry tilt. They are
turned on or off by the projector switch. They are also turned off by rotating operation.
(Operating voltage ; DC 5V)
・ Cross line laser projector (Right) : 1LR
・ Cross line laser projector (left) : 2LR

7−51A L1E-BW1346
7.8.4 Cover assembly
(1) SPB2 PCB
This PCB instructs a breathing spell to a patient. It is mounted before and behind the cover and on
both sides of the cover (4 positions in total). It lights in synchronization with scan.
・ Breathing spell is allowable (Green LED lights)
・ Breathing stop is instructed (Orange LED lights)
(2) X-IND PCB
This PCB is mounted on the rear cover and its LED lights during X-ray ON operation
・ “X-RAY ON”
: indicates that X-ray exposure is in progress (Yellow LED lights)
(3) Operation panel PCB
・ PB-L17/PB-R17 PCB
: Table up/down/home switch
・ PB-M17 PCB
: X-ray on/emergency LED
: Emergency switch relaying
(4) Microphone amplifier PCB
This PCB amplifies the input from the condenser microphone for reducing noises between this
amplifier and intercom amplifier, and then, feeds the input to the intercom amplifier. This PCB is
mounted at two upper parts before and behind the gantry open port.

7−52 L1E-BW1346
7.9 PCB unit II (Rotation plate PCB unit)
7.9.1 CPU85A PCB
This PCB is a CPU board composed mainly of microprocessor 8085AC-2, interval timer, ROM and
RAM.
ROM (8kbytes) and RAM (8kbytes) can be mounted up to 6 pieces in total.

7.9.2 COMMU2 PCB

This serial system communication circuit is connected to MCPUC circuit of the scanner unit. In
addition to serial system communication channel, reset, X-ray trigger, view trigger signal, and other
individual signal lines are provided and connected to the interface circuit without passing the μ-CPU
circuit.

7.9.3 MAINTE PCB

This maintenance circuit comprises a maintenance program start switch, a maintenance program selection
digital switch, and a status indicator.

7.9.4 IF B-1 PCB

This is one of the interface circuits between μ-CPU circuit and peripheral circuit to enable μ-CPU to
read the data obtained by AD conversion of analog values such as X-ray generation system status, tube
current, filament primary voltage, etc.

7.9.5 IF B-2 PCB

This is one of the interface circuits between µ-CPU circuit and peripheral circuit to feed the control
information from μ-CPU to each control circuit. This control information comprises the tube current
parameter which is DA-converted in this circuit and sent to the control circuit. This circuit is also
provided with counter type timers whose modes can be set or preset from CPU and used for the following
purposes.

Uses Setting

Basic clock of filament Sets to generate a 5kHz clock from CPU

heating circuit

Backup timer Sets to 110% of the scan time from CPU when X-ray is turned on.

7−53 L1E-BW1346
 Stationary side
COMMU2 CPU85A
PCB unit

CONT
IFB-1 Filament heating circuit
B-1

MAINTE
7−54

IFB-2

CONT
SIFB-2 High voltage generator
D3

Interface circuit Control circuit

Fig.7.27 Block diagram of rotary plate PCB unit

L1E-BW1346
7.9.6 SIF-B2 PCB
This PCB is provided for controlling the rotation plate interior. It sends data detected by each internal
sensor to CPU85A as input data and also sends data being sent form CPU85A PCB to the chassis 1 to
control the collimator.

7.9.7 CONT B-1, D3 circuit is described by function in each paragraph together with the drive circuit.

7−55 L1E-BW1346
7.10 Tube current control circuit
7.10.1 Filament heating circuit
The filament heating circuit is composed as shown in Fig.7.28. The 48V power output is converted into
a necessary DC voltage by the chopper circuit. This chopper circuit is operated at 5kHz to be able to
obtain a DC voltage proportional to the duty of chopper control signal A in TP1 in the figure. This DC
voltage is converted into AC by the inverter consisting of two transistors, and supplied to the X-ray tube
filament through a heating transformer in the high voltage generator. The inverter is operated at 625Hz
with a fixed duty. Accordingly, the heating condition of the X-ray tube filament is variable by the
operating duty of the chopper circuit and all heating condition operations are done by the operating duty
of the chopper circuit. The filament heating circuit is provided with a built-in resistor to divide the DC
output voltage of the chopper circuit and a resistor to detect a current flowing into the filament heating
circuit. An over-current, an over-voltage, and breakage of filament are detected by these resistors.

7.10.2 Filament heating control circuit

(1) Chopper control
Fig.7.29(a) shows the chopper control circuit. The chopper control conditions comprise three
conditions shown below.

・ Pre heating condition

・ Regular heating condition before X-ray irradiation
・ During X-ray irradiation
In the pre heating condition, the chopper circuit is operated by a fixed duty determined by setting
4VR in the figure. When an X-ray ON command is received from the scanner unit, the heating
condition is switched to the regular heating condition for generating X-rays. The operating duty of
the chopper circuit under this condition is determined by setting 3VR and mA reference symbol
obtained by DA-converting the mA parameter output from μCPU. The mA parameter is stored
into ROM of the CPU circuit every combinations of selected kV, mA, and it is set to flow a
previously selected tube current. The 3VR is mounted to shift the entire condition being set by
μCPU. Then, chopper control is done during X-ray irradiation after flowing the tube current.
When a tube current flows, it is converted into voltage and integrated, causing the multiplexer to be
switched to close the feedback control loop of the tube current. The chopper circuit operating duty
during X-ray irradiation is feedback-controlled to equalize the mA reference signal to the mA
integrated value so as to stabilize the tube current.
(2) Inverter drive
Fig.7.29 (b) shows the inverter drive signal generation circuit.
The 5kHz basic clock is processed by a frequency divider and 0.67ms MM to obtain a signal having
a pulse width of 0.67ms at 1.25kHz. This signal is distributed into two inverter drive signals by the
625Hz clock obtained by the frequency divider. Two transistors of the inverter are alternately
turned on or off by these inverter drive signals.

7−56 L1E-BW1346
 Heating transformer
(High voltage generator)

Chopper
TP1

＋
1φ
48V
AC 100V X-ray tube assembly
−
○
A
＋ ＋
○
B ○
C
5kHz
7−57

Inverter
0.1Ω
625Hz

−
− Filament over-current
＋
＋

301VR
＋
Filament disconnect
−

302VR
−
Filament over voltage
＋

Filament chassis 303VR

L1E-BW1346

Fig.7.28 Filament heating circuit

 3VR

before exposure
8B

Multiplexer MM (actual heating) Filament heating

mA X-ray tube

reference
8C 6A

8B ○
A
5kHz
Chopper
Differential amplifier clock

Current-voltag Integration
e conversion circuit 6B

4VR MM (pre-heating)

(a) Chopper control : CONT B-1 circuit

Frequency
divider MM (0.67ms)
1.25kHz
5kHz ON
5B
5C
clock 625Hz ○
B

ON

○
C

Inverter drive signal

(b) Inverter drive

Fig.7.29 Filament heating control circuit : CONTB-1 circuit

7−58 L1E-BW1346
7.10.3 kV, mA error detection circuit
An abnormal tube voltage or an abnormal tube current is detected by +kV, -kV (tube voltage divider
output) and NE+, NE-, N+, N- (high voltage transformer neutral point current) in Fig.7.31.
Fig.7.30 shows the kV, mA error detection circuit.
For the tube voltage

● Unbalance of the tube voltage between anode side and cathode side (Unbalance: Higher than 15kV
and higher than 35kV).
● An excessive tube voltage (The ground voltage is higher than 75kV) are also detected.

For the tube current

● An excessive current (Tube current exceeding 1000mA).
● An excessive center section current (75mA/185mA).
● Over-expansion of the bellows which absorbs a change of the insulation oil quantity of the high
voltage generator are also detected.

7−59 L1E-BW1346
 Comparator

＋kV Tube voltage unbalance

VT＋＞VT−
(kVT＋) (high on + side)
Addition
Unbalance higher than 35kV
−kV
Unbalanced tube voltage
VT＋＜VT−
(kVT−) (high on - side)

Unbalance higher than 15kV

Excessive + tube
OV VT＋
voltage

Excessive - tube
OV VT−
voltage

Over-voltage higher than 75kV

Anode current

NE○
− over-current + side OC IT＋
(IG1)
＋
N○
Addition
(IG3)
over-current - side OC IT−

Over-current
higher than 1A

＋
NE○
(IG2)
−
N○
Addition
(IG4)

Cathode current

Over-current
75/185mA
Excessive center
ICS OC ICS
section current

Current
switching signal

Fig.7.30 kV ,mA error detection circuit CONT D3 circuit

7−60 L1E-BW1346
7.10.4 High voltage generator
This is a single-phase 2-peak rectifying circuit where the anode side and cathode side are independent of
each other. It feeds a composite output to the X-ray tube. It is provided with voltage-dividing resistors
for tube voltage waveform monitors of respective outputs The cathode side is provided with a built-in
filament heating transformer to feed a filament current to the X-ray tube.
Fig.7.31 shows the X-ray high voltage circuit.

T1
100MΩ

T2

NE +kV

NE NE
○
＋ ○
−
5KΩ kV+
5Ω 5Ω
5Ω CS
Anode side

ICS
Cathode side 5Ω 5Ω

N N
−
○ ＋
○ 5KΩ kV−

N
−kV

T1

100MΩ
T2

CL1

C
CL2

X-RAY
H.V.GENERATOR H.V. CABLE TUBE

Fig.7.31 X-ray high voltage circuit

7−61 L1E-BW1346
7.11 Slip ring
All power supply and signals to the scanner rotation plate are supplied through the slip ring. No. of rings amounts
to 23 channels as shown below.

Table 7.1 No. of slip ring channels

Ring No. Signal names Uses

1 T1 Main power supply for X-rays
2 T2 Main power supply for X-rays
3 Earth
4 H7 Starter output
5 H8 Starter output
6 H9 Starter output
7 L0 Power supply in rotation plate
8 L100 Power supply in rotation plate
9 Earth
10 X-TRG X-ray trigger
11 Data Serial communication data for CPU
12 RESET Reset signal for CPU
13 +12V Communication power supply
14 GND Communication power supply
15 kV Out Tube voltage reference signal
16 kV 0V Tube voltage reference signal
17 kVmA-Abnormal X-ray system error detection signal
18 Angle (+) View trigger signal (TXR2A→TXS2)
19 Angle (−) View trigger signal (TXR2A→TXS2)
20 Earth Guard earth
21 Seri Out (+) Preamplifier output (+)
22 Seri Out (−) Preamplifier output (−)
23 Earth Guard earth

7−62 L1E-BW1346
7.12 Preamplifier signal
Conventional 16-bit parallel signal is converted into a serial signal through slip ring. This serial-parallel
conversion is done through slip ring by 2 signal cables consisting of a data cable and a response cable
Serial-parallel conversion PCB (TXR2A, TXS2) provide a function of resending data by VIEW TRIG signal, if
data are abnormal in the course of serial-parallel conversion or data send-receive operation. The block diagram
is shown below.
Fig.7.32 shows the preamplifier output block diagram.

Stationary Rotation plate

MCPUC PCB COMMU2 PCB Data MODE

scanner control rotation plate control
EXT CAL

SCAN MODE

Err Err EXT RST

・LRC error, View TRIG ・Resent
etc. count cover
Data MODE

View TRIG

TXR2A PCB TXS2 PCB

serial-parallel serial-parallel Preamplifier
conversion conversion

Data CLK
IDATA 0 ~ 15
Data CLK serial
IDATA0 ~ 15
IDATA0 ~ 15 parallel
parallel
View TRIG
RTN TRIG

Fig.7.32 Preamplifier output connection block diagram

7−63 L1E-BW1346
7.12.1 Resend function
The preamplifier signal transfers data every view by means of View TRIG signal via serial-parallel
conversion PCB (TXS2, TXR2A).

TT VN DATA LRC

TT : A special pattern showing the start of data of 1 view

VN : View number 16-bit, started with 1 and updated every view
DATA : Data of one view
LRC : Horizontal parity calculated from VN to DATA every 16 bits

Transmission data format

When data sent from TXS2 are normally received by TXR2A during data send-receive, TXR2A sends
View TRIG signal, and sends the next data after the signal has been received by TXS2. TXS2 re-sends
data every view if TXR2A detects a data error and no response returns at the end of data transmission of
one view.
TXR2A sends data to OC by attaching scan start position data SA0, 1 to the first data. Details of
serial-parallel conversion PCB are shown in 7.12.2 and 7.12.3.

7.12.2 TXS2 PCB

TXS2 PCB shows the following contents by LED display.
(1) Resend count : LED1 ~ 4
Indicates a data resend count.

(2) View TRIG correction count : LED5 ~ 8

Indicates the data output count after the end of data receive by suppressing the signal when View
TRIG signal was received during receive of data from the preamplifier.
(3) During View TRIG receiving : LED10
Lights for about 0.1 second when receiving View TRIG signal.
(4) Time-out detection : LED9
Lights when a normal receive response signal does not return from TXR2A after sending data.

7−64 L1E-BW1346
7.12.3 TXR2A PCB
TXR2A PCB provides the following functions by PSW 1 ~ 3.
(1) By pressing PSW1 once, display errors can be selected in 4 kinds.
(2) By pressing PSW2 together with DIP SW, data transfer between TXR2A and TXS2 can be checked.
(3) By pressing PSW3, the error count being stored into TXR2A PCB memory can be cleared.
TXR2A PCB indicates the following contents by LED display.
(1) Display address (LED9, 10)
Indicates four kinds of errors by binary 2 bits.
(2) VN non-coincidence error count (LED 1 ~ 8) (Display address 0)
Indicates an error count if the view number of data sent from TXS2 is not a specified number.
(3) LRC error count (LED1 ~ 8) (Display address 1)
Indicates an error count when LRC is not a specified numeric value.
(4) TAXI VOL error count (LED1 ~ 8) (Display address 2)
Indicates an error count detected by IC in TXR2A.
(5) TT receive count during data receive (LED1 ~ 8) (Display address 3)
Indicates an error count when the start of data of one view does not meet the specified signal.
These pieces of error information are read by MCPUC and sent to the image processor as error log
information.

7−65 L1E-BW1346
7.13 Tube shift Mechanism (In case of Pronto-SE 3.5MHU, Pronto-VE 3.5MHU)
7.13.1 General
When the tube gets warm and cool due to continuous scanning or patient change, expansion and
contraction of the anode or housing itself causes the focal spot position of the tube bulb to change. As a
result, the beam moves in the slicing direction with the collimator being as a fulcrum, and a position of
incidence into a solid detector shifts. Sensitivity characteristic of the solid detector is not uniform, and
when the beam position of incidence shifts the sensitivity characteristic comes to differ from that during
calibration, thereby generating ring artifact.
Focal spot moves.

100%

Collimator

Sensitivity

Solid detector

95%

Beam shift Slicing direction

Fig. 7.13.1 Focal spot move and beam shift Fig. 7.13.2 An example of sensitivity characteristic
in slicing direction of the solid detector

To prevent the artifact from generating, it should be necessary to measure the focal spot position and to
adjust the position by correction depending on the amount of displacement so that the focal spot will
never move. The way to make this correction by letting the tube bulb move in the slicing direction is
the tube bulb shift mechanism.

Focal spot moves. Tube bulb moves.

Beam shift Adjust the beam shift by correction

Fig.7.13.3 Principle of focal spot move correction

7−66 L1E-BW1346
7.13.2 Composition
Fig. 7.13.4 illustrates the composition of the tube bulb shift mechanism. The tube bulb shift mechanism
is mainly comprised of three sections:
Focal spot position detector which detects the focal spot position,
Control section which measures the displacement of the focal spot based on the output from the detector
and controls the movement of the X-ray tube, and Drive section which actually forces to move the tube
bulb by the signals from the control section.
Control section Drive section

Focal spot Displacement Control signal Motor Stepping Mechanism

position measuring generator
detector section section driver motor section

Fig. 7.13.4 Tube bulb shift mechanism block diagram

7.13.3 Focal spot move detector

Detection of the focal spot move of the tube bulb is
carried out by taking out the beam for focal spot
move detector as well as taking out the main fan
beam to the solid detector and by measuring the Beam for detecting
focal spot move Collimator
positional displacement of the beam. 17°

The beam for focal spot move detector is, as shown if

Focal spot move detector
Fig. 7.13.5, taken out in the direction of about 17
Main fan beam
degrees tilted down toward the main fan beam, and
comes in the focal spot move detector through
Fig. 7.13.5 Beam for detecting focal spot move
collimator.
The focal spot move detector uses a single block of solid detector, and is comprised of 24 channels.
Setting is made in such a way that a mask as shown in Fig. 7.13.6 is covered over this detector section so
that the beam for detecting focal spot position may cross the center. This focal spot move detector is
divided by three blocks each having eight channels, each block is referred to as CCW detector, reference
detector, and CW detector.

Opening for beam incidence Beam for detecting focal spot position

Table side Mask Gantry side

CCW detector

Reference detector

CW detector

Fig. 7.13.6 Focal spot detector

7−67 L1E-BW1346
 When the focal spot of the tube is placed at regular position, output from the CW detector equals that
from the CCW detector. But if the focal spot moves in the direction toward the table, the beam shifts
toward the gantry side with the collimator being as the center.
Consequently, the output from the CW detector increases and the output from the CCW detector
decreases. On the contrary, if the gantry moves toward the gantry, the beam shifts toward the table with
the collimator being as the center. As a result, the output from the CCW detector increases and the
output from the CW detector decreases. This change of the outputs is measured by the control section
which the outputs is measured by the control section which the outputs is measured by the control section
which follows, and it sends a command to the tube bulb drive section. Since it is assumed that multiple
solid detectors are used, the last 24th channel has a separator on one side only, which is placed at a
boundary between channels, and the light generated by the scintillator breaks through at the side of no
separator, thereby causing the output sensitivity to be lowered compared with the other channels.
Therefore, in cases that this solid detector is used as a focal spot move detector, the 24th channel with
less output level cannot be used. To balance the CCW and CW detectors, the first channel, the opposite
channel of the 24th channel, is not used.

Separator

1ch 2ch 3ch 4ch 5ch 6ch 7ch 21ch 22ch 23ch 24ch

Light Light

Scintillator
Photodiode

Fig. 7.13.7 Section of the solid detector

7.13.4 Control section

The control section is further divided by two sections; displacement measuring section and control signal
generation section.
In the displacement measuring section, current signal from the focal spot move detector is converted to
voltage signal by the I/V converter. The output difference of the CCW detector and CW detector is
measured by a differential amplifier, which determines the direction in which the tube bulb is moved.
Provided that the operation point is given a hysteresis characteristic since noise component can cause
malfunction if the tube bulb is shifted only by the output from differential amplifier.

7−68 L1E-BW1346
 This hysteresis characteristic is set by the comparator so that it will become valid when the beam
movement on the focal spot detector exceeds the allowable value and will continue to be valid until the
beam position is corrected to the reference position by shifting the tube bulb. The output from
differential amplifier at the moment when the beam movement exceeds the allowable value differs
depending on the tube current and voltage current. So the starting point of operation has been
determined based on the output from the reference detector.
Furthermore, since the output from the focal spot detector differs depending on the tube voltage, the
output difference must be corrected. The gain of the I/V converter is switched by the kV signal from the
scanner to correct the output difference.
In addition, to avoid operation while the X-ray is not generated, a tube bulb shift command is not given
unless the reference output exceeds the specified value.

CCW detector I/V

Differential amplifier Comparator
Move direction
signal (CCW/CW)
GAIN

CW detector I/V
Tube bulb shift Shift enabler
command Operation
starting point
Detection of X-ray output
Reference
I/V
detector
Shift enable
GAIN switching
signal

kV signal I/V

kV checker

Fig. 7.13.8 Displacement measuring section block diagram

The control signal generator section serves to generate pulses to the stepping motor which shifts the tube
bulb.
In controlling the stepping motor, it is necessary to give low frequency pulses to rotate the motor at its
startup, and to give gradually higher frequency pulses. Then the pulses are generated by the V/F
converter. Frequency control is made by using ramp output from the integrator so that it changes the
frequency from lower to higher.
If the stepping motor cannot be started for some reason, the pulse frequency goes high, the stepping
motor is not given by the sufficient torque to rotate it, and it will remain stopped.

7−69 L1E-BW1346
 Since the control section is always giving shift command pulse because the stepping motor remain
stopped, the control system will also be stopped. To avoid this, a timer is provided in the pulse generator
circuit so that the integration circuit is reset at a certain period and the pulses are started to be given again
from lower frequency while the shift command is being given.

Reset signal

Timer

Lamp signal

v − V/F
Pulse signal
＋ converter

Integrator

Fig. 7.13.9 Control signal generator section block diagram

7.13.5 Drive section

The drive section is comprised of motor driver, stepping motor, and mechanism section which shifts the
X-ray tube.
The motor driver is supplied with direction signal CCW / CW from the control section and with driving
pulses, based on which it drives the stepping motor.
When the direction signal CCW / CW is at “H” level, the X-ray tube shifts toward the table side, at “L”
level toward the opposite side of the table.

7−70 L1E-BW1346
7.13.6 Shift mechanism of X-ray tube unit
The shift mechanism is the mechanism to shift the X-ray tube unit in the back-and-forth (Z) direction,
Fig.7.13.10 shows its mechanism.
The shift mechanism of the X-ray tube unit is comprised of the holder ① and drive unit ②.
The holder ① is supported by the linear guide ③ and drive screw ④, allowing the mechanism to
move in Z-direction.
The both ends of the drive screw ④ are supported by the bearing ⑥ and the one end of the drive screw
④ is connected to the stepping motor ⑧ via the coupling ⑦.
Rotation of the stepping motor is transmitted to linear motion in Z-direction of the holder ① through the
drive screw.
As pitch of the drive screw ④ is 2mm, the holders moves by 2mm per one rotation of the drive screw.

③
⑦
⑧
⑤

Turn plate

Z-direction

④
⑥

Fig. 7.13.10

7−71 L1E-BW1346
7.14 Shutter mechanism
7.14.1 General
The correction of X-ray tube focus movement is made by the X-ray tube shift mechanism. This
correction can be done only while X-ray are being exposed. For this reason, if the focus position is
largely changed in such case as the X-ray tube is cooled due to long scan interval, or immediately after
the gantry is tilted, correction of focus position requires much time. Moreover, a ring artifact is apt to
occur from the first to second image due to incomplete correction.
In this case, prevention of ring artifact generation can be performed by preliminary exposing X-ray to
correct the focus movement prior to exposure.
However, these exposures are not mean to take image.
As a countermeasure, the system is provided with a shutter mechanism not to expose the patient to the
harmful X-rays by closing the shutter when the preliminary exposure is effected. With the aid of this
mechanism, the actual scan is possible from the first scan as the correction of focus position is completed
by ignoring those vain exposure.

7.14.2 Composition

Beam for focus

movement detection

Main fan shaped beam

Focus movement detection

Collimator (function as shutter)

Fig. 7.14.1 Collimator during preliminary exposure

7−72 L1E-BW1346
 Collimator (function as collimator)

Fig. 7.14.2 Collimator during actual scan

The shutter composition is described in Fig. 7.14.1 and can shield the main fan shaped beam by sliding
the collimation plate to close position.

7.14.3 Preliminary exposure conditions

Preliminary exposure is made in the following 3 cases.
(1) More than 30min. has passed after the last X-ray emission.
(2) Scanner rotation period [s/rotation] of the next scan is different from that of the last X-ray emission
and difference in scanner rotation period between no more than 1.0 s/rotation and over 1.0 s/rotation.
(3) Tilt angle of the next scan is different from that of the last X-ray emission and absolute difference in
tilt angle between before and after change of tilt angle is 5.0°or more.
(4) Focal spot size of the next scan is different from that of last X-ray emission under the calibration
scan mode.

7−73 L1E-BW1346
7.14.4 Preliminary exposure sequence

Scan selection

Scan condition setting

STANDBY ON

Compared Preliminary exposure needed

with former
scan
Shutter ON

(When the shutter is on, the

Preliminary Preliminary exposure LED on the gantry is turned on
exposure not and the EL display on the
needed control console also indicates
Shutter OFF the shutter status.)

START ON

Scan

Fig. 7.14.3 Preliminary Exposure Sequence

The sequence from the selection of scan to the beginning of the actual scan is described in Fig. 7.14.3.
After the scan condition is set and the STANDBY button is pressed, the measurement control software
compares it with the former scan and checks whether preliminary exposure is necessary or not. In case
the preliminary exposure is necessary, the shutter turns on to effect preliminary exposure. After
completion of preliminary exposure, the shutter turns off to prepare the actual scan. When preparation
to scan is finished, the START button starts to flickers.
In case the preliminary exposure is not necessary, press the STANDBY button to prepare for actual scan.
When preparation is finished, the START button starts to flickers. Pressing the START button effects a
scan.

7−74 179 L1E-BW1346

 Section 8 Operation principle of patient table mechanism

The patient table is a fixed canti-lever support type. Its table top can move vertically and longitudinally. This move
is controlled according to the scanner operation.

8.1 Structure of mechanism

Fig.8.1 shows the mounting layout of structural devices of this mechanism.
The table top is supported by the slide rails of the upper frames on both side faces.
The table top moves forward and backward by means of the longitudinal move drive unit mounted at the rear end
of the upper frame. The move quantity is detected by the longitudinal move rotary encoder. The vertical move
at the center of the mechanism is composed of link plates. The upper parts of the link plates support the upper
frame. The lower parts of the link plates are supported by the base frame. This pantograph mechanism and a
hydraulic cylinder ensures vertical move of the table top. The move quantity is detected by the vertical move
potentiometer of the vertical move detector.
A control circuit system of each operation is provided at the right side of the base frame.

Table top

Control circuit system Longitudinal move drive device

Upper frame Hydraulic cylinder Link plate

Vertical move potentiometer Rotary encoder

Base frame Vertical move device

Fig.8.1 Patient table structure

8−1 L1E-BW1346
8.2 Longitudinal move device
8.2.1 Longitudinal move drive device
Fig.8.2 shows the longitudinal move device structure.
Table top ○
34 is fixed to table top fixing base ○
35 . Chain ⑲ is wound to the sprockets ⑰ ⑱ on the

motor mounting plate ⑫ and front mounting plate ⑬. The drive motor ⑭ output is transferred to
sprocket ⑰ by spur gears ⑮ ⑯ and then, transferred by chain ⑲. Table top 俗 moves
longitudinally when the chain clamper ⑳ fixed on the rear face of the table top fixing base ○
35 is

engaged with chain ⑲. The moving speed is 60mm/sec in high speed feed and 5mm/sec in low speed
feed.
26 25 22 27 23 31 30 24 21 33 28 29

1 13 18 32 19 20 17 12 14
34 35

20

16 10 15

⑫ Motor mounting plate ⑲ Chain 即 Forward move power supply limit switch
⑬ Longitudinal mounting plate ⑳ Chain clamper 息 Backward move deceleration limit switch
⑩ Longitudinal move rotary 蔵 Pulley 捉 Backward move limit switch
encoder
⑭ Drive motor 贈 Pulley 束 Backward move power supply limit switch
⑮ Motor side spur gear 造 Wire rope 測 Cam (mounted on table top fixing base)
⑯ Sprocket side gear 促 Wire rope fixture 足 C-frame
⑰ Sprocket 側 Forward move 速 Reduction gears
deceleration limit switch
⑱ Sprocket 則 Forward move limit 俗 Table top
switch
属 Table top fixing base

Fig.8.2 Longitudinal move device

8−2 L1E-BW1346
 The number of revolutions of drive motor is as specified below.

No of revolutions of motor output shaft（r/min）

High-speed feed 2460
Low-speed feed 209

The Moving speed is obtained by the following equations.

No. of revolutions of drive motor ⑭

High-speed feed = ×Reduction gear ratio of drive motor ⑭
60

No. of teeth of motor side spur gear ⑮

× ×No. of teeth of sprocket ⑰
No. of teeth of sprocket side spur gear ⑯

× Sprocket ⑰ pitch.

2460 1 64
= × × ×18× 9.525 =60mm/s
60 75 100

209 1 64
Low-speed feed = × × ×18× 9.525=5mm/s
60 75 100

8.2.2 Longitudinal feed move quantity detection

21 ○
Pulleys ○ 22 are mounted to the motor mounting plate ⑫ and front mounting plate ⑬, and wire rope

○
23 is wound. Wire rope ○
23 is connected by the wire rope fixture ○
24 on the side face of table top

fixing base ○
35 . As the table top fixing base ○
35 moves longitudinally, pulley ○
21 rotates so that the

table top move quantity is detected by the number of turns of the longitudinal move rotary encoder ⑩
being coupled to pulley ○
21 . Longitudinal move rotary encoder ⑩ generates 1000 pulses per rotation.
Accordingly, 100 pulses are generate per mm of the table move quantity by the following relation.

No .of generation pulses per mm No. of pulses generated per rotation

of table top move quantity = ×reduction gear ratio of reduction gears
π×pulley ○ 21 diameter

1000
= ×8 = 100 pulses
π×25.465

8−3A L1E-BW1346
 By detecting this number of pulses, the longitudinal move speed and move quantity are controlled. The
move stroke of table top is 1470mm. Three limit switches ○
28 ,○ 30 and ○
29 ,○ 25 ,○
26 ,○
27 are mounted at the

rear end and front end of C-frame ○

32 to detect the rear most position and front most position of the table

top. Two-stage cam ○

31 is mounted at the lower part of table top fixing base ○
35 . For securing the
table top stop, the table top is switched to low-speed move (5mm/s) by the first-stage cam detection and
stopped by the second stage cam detection. The low-speed move range is 20mm before stop.

8.3 Vertical move device

Fig.8.3 shows the vertical move device structure.
The vertical move device is composed of the pantograph mechanism and hydraulic cylinder. The table top
moves vertically from 380mm to 1000mm above the floor level.

Upper frame

A D Guide rail
Hydraulic cylinder

C B Guide rail
Link

Base Slide roller

Feedback hose

Solenoid valve (a)

Motor pump Oil tank

Solenoid valve unit
Control valve
Solenoid valve (b)

Fig.8.3 Vertical move device structure

8−4A L1E-BW1346
8.3.1 Vertical move mechanism
The upper frame is supported by A-B and C-D links. These links are coupled to the base by shaft C and
the upper frame by shaft A. By means of a hydraulic cylinder, the slide rollers of links A-B and C-D
slide along their guide rails to move the C-frame vertically. (See Fig.8.3)

8.3.2 Hydraulic drive

The hydraulic cylinder is coupled to link A-B and its one end is supported by the base. As the patient
table moves upward, the solenoid valve does not operate, but the motor pump operates to inject oil into
the cylinder. When the table top moves downward, solenoid valves (a, b) open to return the oil into the
oil tank. Solenoid valve (a) is directly coupled to the hydraulic cylinder without any hose connection.
A feedback hose is connected between the hydraulic cylinder tip and the oil tank to return the operating
fluid being stayed on the rear face of the piston into the oil tank.

8−5 L1E-BW1346
8.3.3 Mounting layout of parts

2 1 4 10
3

2 (Innermost side) 5 (Innermost side)

3 (This side) 1 4 6 (This side)

10

9 7 8 ,11

① 11LS forward move power supply limit switch
② 3LS forward move deceleration limit switch
③ 4LS forward move limit switch
④ 10LS backward move power supply limit switch
⑤ 2LS backward move deceleration limit switch
⑥ 1LS backward move limit switch
⑦ 8LS higher-limit limit switch
⑧ 9LS lower-limit overrun limit switch
⑨ 1VR vertical move potentiometer
⑩ 1RX longitudinal move rotary encoder
⑪ 5LS lower-limit limit switch

Fig.8.4 The mounting layout of each detector and control unit

Fig.8.4 shows the mounting layout of each detector and control device.

8−6 L1E-BW1346
8.4 Electric control of patient table
8.4.1 General
All patient table operation is controlled externally, so that various sensors and motor control PCB only
are mounted inside the patient table. This paragraph describes the motor control PCB and the height
display only. For the other control circuits, refer to each PCB in the scanner.

8.4.2 Table height display and control

Patient table height is displayed by A/D converting the vertical move potentiometer output and then,
executing non-linear correction to the A/D converted output value. The height is displayed starting with
750mm (display 000) above the floor level and the height below 750mm is not displayed selectively.

8.4.3 TDRV1D PCB

The patient table is provided with TDRV1D PCB. This circuit controls the speed of table top
longitudinal feed DC motor, and drives the vertical move hydraulic pump and solenoid valve. The
longitudinal feed motor speed is controlled by the speed command signal (5 bits) and speed correction
signal from the scanner.
The patient table processes these signals in FPGA circuit and sends a digital signal to the DC converter.
This DC converter outputs an analog voltage conforming to the speed command to the low-order circuit.
The speed command signal selects the table top speed within a range of 1.5 ~ 60mm/s. A speed
correction signal is used for correcting the table top speed error every scan rotation in case of volume
scan only. Feedback operation is done for stabilizing the table top speed by an output voltage of the
tacho generator. When this output voltage lowers (speed decreases), the phase control IC control
voltage lowers, so that the SCR ON phase leads to increase the rectifying output average voltage and
resultantly increase the motor speed.

8−7 186 L1E-BW1346

 Whole - body X-ray CT System

Pronto – SE / XE / VE

TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Installation & Adjustment ----

Tokyo, Japan
L2E-BW1348-3

CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of

Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001, 2002. All rights reserved.
This Technical Guide was originally drafted, approved and supplied by Hitachi Medical Corporation in the English
language.

NOTE: The tightening torque of bolts, screws, nuts, and double nuts in the work specified in this manual
shall conform to the values shown in Table 1 and 2.

Table 1 Tightening torque of bolts and screws

Tightening torque N･cm (kgf･cm)

Kinds Sizes
Max. Min.

M3 98 (10) 69 (7)
Flat head screw M4 216 (22) 147 (15)
Pan head screw M5 392 (40) 275 (28)
M6 540 (55) 373 (38)
M3 108 (11) 79 (8)
M4 265 (27) 187 (19)
M5 539 (55) 392 (40)
Hex. head bolt M6 833 (85) 588 (60)
M8 1990 (203) 1392 (142)
M10 3528 (360) 2450 (250)
M12 5586 (570) 3920 (400)

M3 138 (14) 98 (10)

M4 343 (35) 245 (25)
M5 696 (71) 510 (52)
Hex. socket head bolt M6 1078 (110) 765 (78)
M8 2588 (264) 1804 (184)
M10 4587 (468) 3185 (325)
M12 7262 (741) 5096 (520)

( 1A ) 1 L2E-BW1348
 Table 2 Tightening torque of nuts*

M3 108 (11) 79 (8)

M4 265 (27) 187 (19)
M5 539 (55) 392 (40)
Nut M6 833 (85) 588 (60)
M8 1990 (203) 1392 (142)
M10 3528 (360) 2450 (250)
M12 5586 (570) 3920 (400)

*Tightening method of double nuts

(1) Fix the low nut by a spanner.
(2) Tighten the normal height nut by the other spanner. The tightening torque shall conform to the values
specified in the above table.

Normal height nut

Low nut

NOTE: Do not install and store the equipment in the following place.
・ Ambient temperature is below –10℃ or above +40℃.
・ Barometric pressure is below 700hPa or above 1060hPa.
・ The equipment is exposed to harmful gas.
・ Humidity is excessively high.
・ The equipment is exposed to steam.
・ The equipment is exposed to water drops.
・ There is much dust or sand dust.
・ There exists excessive oil mist.
・ The equipment is exposed to saline air.
・ There is explosive gas or dust.
・ The equipment receives excessive vibration or mechanical shock.
・ The floor is inclined more than 10 degree from the horizontal level.
・ The mains voltage fluctuates abnormally (10% or more).
・ The mains voltage excessively drops while the equipment being operated under load.
・ The equipment is exposed to direct sunlight.

(2) 2 L2E-BW1348
 Contents

Page
Section 1 CARRYING - IN, MOUNTING, AND ASSEMBLING ................................................................ 1- 1
1.1 Carrying in and mounting of scanner unit ............................................................................. 1- 1
1.2 Leveling of scanner unit ........................................................................................................ 1- 6
1.3 Carrying in the patient table .................................................................................................. 1- 7
1.4 Leveling and fixing of patient table....................................................................................... 1- 8
1.5 Mounting of other units ......................................................................................................... 1- 12
1.5.1 Image processing unit................................................................................................ 1- 12
1.5.2 X-ray control unit ...................................................................................................... 1- 13
1.6 Mounting of X-ray detector................................................................................................... 1- 14
1.6.1 In case of Pronto-XE ................................................................................................. 1- 14
1.6.2 In case of Pronto-SE,VE ........................................................................................... 1- 16
1.7 Mounting of X-ray Tube and cooler...................................................................................... 1- 19
1.7.1 Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly............................................................ 1- 19
1.7.2A Mounting procedure of cooler................................................................................... 1- 20
1.7.2B Mounting procedure of cooler................................................................................... 1- 21
1.7.2C Cooler mounting procedure....................................................................................... 1- 22
1.7.2D Mounting procedure of cooler................................................................................... 1- 23
1.7.3 X-ray tube assembly mounting procedure (3.5MHU for Pronto SE/VE)
Tube shift mechanism type........................................................................................ 1- 23-1
1.7.4 Cooler mounting procedure....................................................................................... 1- 23-2
1.8 Removal of protective materials for transport ....................................................................... 1- 24
1.9 Internal inspection of patient table ........................................................................................ 1- 25
1.10 Mounting of covers ............................................................................................................... 1- 27
Section 2 WIRING .......................................................................................................................................... 2- 1A
2.1 Wiring of cables between units ............................................................................................. 2- 1A
2.2 Wiring of cables in each unit................................................................................................. 2- 6
2.2.1 Scanner...................................................................................................................... 2- 6
2.2.2 Table wiring .............................................................................................................. 2- 9
A. In case of Pronto XE/SE ........................................................................................................ 2- 10
2.2.3 Mounting of foot switch and electric parts cover of the table. .................................. 2- 10
B In case of Pronto VE.............................................................................................................. 2- 11-1
2.2.3 Mounting of foot switch and electric parts cover of the table. .................................. 2- 11-1
2.2.4 Image processing unit................................................................................................ 2- 12
2.2.5 X-ray control unit ...................................................................................................... 2- 20A
2.2.6 Step down transformer .............................................................................................. 2- 23
2.3 Internal wiring of system....................................................................................................... 2- 25
2.3.1 Wiring on scanner rotary plate .................................................................................. 2- 25
2.3.2 Detector cabling work ............................................................................................... 2- 27
Section 3 ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................................................... 3- 1
3.1 Turning on the power supply................................................................................................. 3- 1
3.2 Operation check of image processing unit in central operator console ................................. 3- 1
3.3 Operation check and adjustment of scanner unit................................................................... 3- 2
3.4 Operation check of patient table and adjustment of scanner gantry tilt................................. 3- 10
3.5 Adjustment of X-ray system
(In case of Hitachi 1.5M/2M/3.5MHU or Varian 2MHU X-ray tube is mounted) ............... 3- 17A
3.5.1 X-ray tube assembly check........................................................................................ 3- 17A

( 3A ) 3 L2E-BW1348
 3.5.2 Anode rotation drive unit (starter) adjustment .......................................................... 3- 17A
3.6 Adjustment of X-ray system (In case of Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is mounted)............... 3- 18
3.6.1 X-ray tube assembly check........................................................................................ 3- 18
3.6.2 Anode rotation drive unit (starter) adjustment .......................................................... 3- 18
3.7 kV, mA waveform check....................................................................................................... 3- 24
3.8 Filament heating conditions adjustment before X-ray exposure ........................................... 3- 25
3.9 X-ray tube aging .................................................................................................................... 3- 26
3.10 kV, mA adjustment and check............................................................................................... 3- 27
3.11 Adjustment of X-ray field ..................................................................................................... 3- 28
3.11.1A Adjustment in X-axis direction (in case of 2 or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly) ... 3- 28
3.11.2A Adjustment in Z-axis direction (in case of 2 or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly).... 3- 28
3.11.1B Adjustment in X-axis direction (in case of 1.5MHU X-ray tube assembly) .......... 3- 29
3.11.2B Adjustment in Z-axis direction (in case of 1.5 MHU X-ray tube assembly).......... 3- 29
3.11.3 R-direction adjustment (Common to each X-ray tube assembly)........................... 3- 30
3.11.3A Additional item to the adjusting method in X, Z, and R directions in case
of Pronto-VE .......................................................................................................... 3- 31
3.11.4 Normal condition of X-ray tube ............................................................................. 3- 31-1
3.11.5 X-ray beam radiation adjustment (slice thickness direction).................................. 3- 32-1
3.11.5A In case of Pronto SE/VE (See Figure .3.11.7) ..................................................... 3- 32-1
3.11.5B In case of Pronto-XE (See Fig.3.11.9) ................................................................... 3- 34
3.12 Preamplifier check................................................................................................................. 3- 37
3.12.1 Bus line check ........................................................................................................... 3- 37
3.12.2 Output sequence check.............................................................................................. 3- 38
3.13 Checking the influences of vibration noises on measuring data............................................ 3- 41
3.14 Center adjustment.................................................................................................................. 3- 45
3.15 Compensator position adjustment ......................................................................................... 3- 48
3.16 Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment .................................................................................. 3- 50A-2
3.17 Phantom calibration............................................................................................................... 3- 51
3.17.1 Procedure................................................................................................................... 3- 51
3.17.2 Mounting method of phantom mounting bracket...................................................... 3- 52
3.17.3 X-ray detection system warming up.......................................................................... 3- 55
3.17.4 X-ray tube warm up and air calibration..................................................................... 3- 55
3.17.5 Phantom position adjustment and phantom calibration............................................. 3- 58
3.18 CT number adjustment .......................................................................................................... 3- 67
3.18.1 Procedure................................................................................................................... 3- 67
3.18.2 CT number adjustment scan ...................................................................................... 3- 68
3.18.3 CT number adjustment calculation............................................................................ 3- 70
3.19 Laser marker adjustment ....................................................................................................... 3- 73
3.20 Inter-phone (intercommunication) check .............................................................................. 3- 76
3.21 Hospital name entry............................................................................................................... 3- 77
Section 4 Reference data ................................................................................................................................. 4- 1
4.1 Service scan ([Phantom Calibration][Maintenance Scan] [CT Number Adjustment]) ......... 4- 1
4.1.1 Service scan display/non-display selection ............................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Stationary scan .......................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2 Detector - preamplifier channels correspondence table......................................................... 4- 3
4.3 Connection of laser imager (L.I.) to the image processing unit ............................................ 4- 5
4.3.1 Connection of imager control cable .......................................................................... 4- 5
4.3.2 Video signal connection ............................................................................................ 4- 6

( 4A ) 4 L2E-BW1348
 Pronto XE SE VE
Heat Storage 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.5 3.5 2.0 3.5 3.5 3.5
Manufacture Hitachi Varian Hitachi Varian Hitachi Varian Varian
Tube Shift - - ○
Section 1 1.1 Carrying in and mounting of scanner unit ○ ○
CARRYING-IN, 1.2 Leveling of scanner unit ○ ○
MOUNTING, AND 1.3 Carrying in the patient table ○ ○
ASSEMBLING 1.4 Leveling and fixing of patient table ○ ○
1.5 Mounting of other unit ○ ○
1.6 Mounting of X-ray 1.6.1 In case of Pronto-XE（CT-WD-5C） ○ -
detector 1.6.2 In case of Pronto -SE（CT-SD-4A）, VE（CT-SD-4） - ○
1.7 Mounting of X-ray Tube 1.7.1 Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly Pronto-XE(1.5/2/3.5MHU), Pronto-SE(2MHU) ○ ○ -
and cooler 1.7.2 A Mounting procedure of cooler （XE：U-5SA-01VS） ○ - -
1.7.2 B Mounting procedure of cooler （XE：UKM-5TA-01V/UK-6TA-01VE(A)） - ○ - -
1.7.2 C Mounting procedure of cooler （SE：UKM-5TA-01TF） - ○ -
1.7.2 D Mounting procedure of cooler 3.5MHU X-ray tube（XE） - ○ -
1.7.3 X-ray tube assembly mounting procedure （3.5MHU for Pronto-SE/VE）Tube shift mechanism type - - ○
1.7.4 Cooler mounting procedure （3.5MHU for Pronto-SE/VE）Tube shift mechanism type - - ○
1.8 Removal of protective materials for transport ○ ○
1.9 Internal inspection of patient table ○ ○
1.10 Mounting of covers ○ ○
Section 2 2.1 Wiring of cables between units ○ ○
WIRING 2.2 Wiring of cables in each 2.2.1 Scanner ○ ○
units 2.2.2 Table wiring ○ ○
A 2.2.3 In case of Pronto XE/SE ○ ○
B 2.2.3 In case of Pronto VE - - ○
2.2.4 Image processing unit CASE 1
CASE 2 （Refer to KGC-0385：S/N A11717201∼）
2.2.5 X-ray control unit ○ ○ ○ Note７）
(5)

2.2.6 Step down transformer ○ ○

2.3 Internal wiring of system 2.3.1 Wiring on scanner rotary plate ○ ○
2.3.2 Detector cabling work Pronto XE (CT-WA-14A) ○ -
Pronto SE (CT-WA-14B) - ○ -
Pronto VE (CT-WA-12G) - - ○
Section 3 3.1 Turning on the power supply ○ ○
3.2 Operation check of image processing unit in central operator console ○ ○
3.3 Operation check and adjustment of scanner unit ○ ○
3.4 Operation check of patient table and adjustment of scanner gantry tilt ○ ○
3.5 Adjustment of X-ray system (In case of Hitachi 1.5M/2M/3.5MHU or Varian 2MHU X-ray tube is mounted) ○ - ○ -
3.6 Adjustment of X-ray system (In case of Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is mounted) - ○ - ○
3.7 kV, mA waveform check
3.8 Filament heating conditions adjustment before X-ray exposure
3.9 X-ray tube aging
3.10 kV, mA adjustment and check
3.11 Adjustment of X-ray field 3.11.1A Adjustment in X-axis direction (in case of 2 or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly) - ○ ○
3.11.2A Adjustment in Z-axis direction (in case of 2 or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly) - ○ ○
3.11.1B Adjustment in X-axis direction (in case of 1.5MHU X-ray tube assembly) ○ - -
3.11.2B Adjustment in Z-axis direction (in case of 1.5MHU X-ray tube assembly) ○ - -
3.11.3 R-direction adjustment (Common to each X-ray tube assembly) ○ ○
3.11.3 A Additional item to the adjusting method in X, Z, and R directions in case of Pronto-SE/VE - - ○
3.11.4 Normal condition of X-ray tube - - ○
3.11.5 X-ray beam radiation 3.11.5 A In case of Pronto-SE/VE (See Figure 3.11.7) - ○
adjustment (slice thickness 3.11.5 B In case of Pronto-XE (See Figure 3.11.9) ○ -
3.12 Preamplifier check 3.12.1 Bus line check ○ ○
3.12.2 Output sequence check ○ ○
3.13 Checking the influences of vibration noises on measuring data ○ ○
3.14 Center adjustment ○ ○
3.15 Compensator position adjustment ○ ○
3.16 Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment - - ○
○ ○
L2E-BW1348

3.17 Phantom calibration 3.17.1 Procedure

3.17.2 Mounting method of phantom mounting bracket ○ ○
3.17.3 X-ray detection system warming up ○ ○
3.17.4 X-ray tube warm up and air 1A In case of Pronto-SE/VE - ○
calibration 1B In case of Pronto-XE ○ -
3.17.5 Phantom position adjustment and phantom calibration ○ ○
3.18 CT number adjustment ○ ○
 Section 1 CARRYING - IN, MOUNTING, AND ASSEMBLING

1.1 Carrying in and mounting of scanner unit

The scanner unit is packaged together with its transport cart. After unpacking, carry in and mount the scanner
unit according to the following procedure.
(1) Scribing the mounting position
Determine the mounting position, referring to the mounting layout of the scanner unit and table shown in
Fig.1.1.1, and scribe the outside dimensions on the floor referring to the dimensions in Fig.1.1.2.

When the foot rest and table top are used：2775

When the foot rest and table top are used：4180

※3950
※2545 （3750） 1405
830 690 （1205）
(In case of (In case of
backward tilting) forward tilting)
800 300
(In case of （100）
backward tilting)

740
（100）
（1090）

250
1240

1980

500

1000
（2380）
2750

500
1035

640 470 1430

1010
（300）
520

※1175 365

※475 1560 1915

（1715）
Scale 1:50
Unit mm

Note 1) Don’t put any obstacle within the two-point dot-dash line when mounting the scanner
unit. Numeric values show the required sizes.
2) Parenthesized dimensions in ( ) show the mounting limit sizes.
3) The dotted line portion shows the required area for opening the front panel and rear
cover of the scanner unit during servicing.
4) The shadowed portion shows the movable range of the patient table.
5) For asterisked sizes (*), their required sizes depend upon the option attachments of
the patient table.

Fig. 1.1.1 Mounting layout of scanner unit and table

1−1 L2E-BW1348
 7250N（725Kgf) 370 633 1414

147

35

105
90

122 672 1286

843

420 64
1980

366
426
640
843

2800N（280Kg)

1980
7250N（725Kgf) φ 22 hole (an extra hole)
Scale 1:30
4-M10 anchor bolt Unit mm
3585

Fig. 1.1.2 Dimensions of scanner table

(2) Bring the scanner unit to the mounting position

For carrying in the scanner unit, the route should have the dimensions specified in Fig.1.1.3. Check if the
route size is as specified.

1980

1800min.

990

Fig. 1.1.3 Required space for carrying in the scanner unit

1−2 L2E-BW1348
 Dimensions and weight when carrying in the scanner and patient table
1) Standard carrying in
Scanner : 1980mm wide×900mm deep×1870mm high, 1480kg (with cart)
Patient table : 650mm wide×2120mm long×740mm high, 280kg
(with cart having a width of 650mm)
(3) The patient table can be positioned by using the attached templates.
After lowering the scanner unit to the specified position, mount the templates according to the scanner
position and scribe the patient table position. (See Fig.1.1.4)

The patient table position shows an approximate reference position when using the templates.
For precise positioning and anchor bolt fixing, observer [1.4 Leveling and fixing of patient
table].

Scanner base plate Template ①

Stand X-ray center

Scanner base plate

Scribe table anchor holes 75

75 (Notched size)

4 positions （Notch）
Scribe L-holes
Align the notch of the scanner
4 positions base plate with the notch of the
template ①
500

① ②

Stand 130 1055 1000

Fig. 1.1.4 Mounting of templates

1−3 L2E-BW1348
(4) Lower the scanner unit onto the floor.
1) After opening the lift cover, lower the scanner unit horizontally by alternately loosening four front, rear,
right, and left caster adjusting screws until its bottom cover touches the floor face.
2) Remove four cart brackets and connecting members 1, 2, 3 connecting the right and left stands.

Connecting member 1

Connecting member 3

Fixing screw

Cart bracket

Connecting member 2

Fig. 1.1.5 Installation of scanner unit

1−4 L2E-BW1348
(5) Remove two suspension jigs and two binding jigs from the scanner unit.

Suspension jig (2 pieces)

Binding jig
(right and left)

Fig. 1.1 6 Removal of transportation jigs

(6) Remove upper and lower rotation stop jigs, six D pieces, the base retaining jig, and link retaining jig.

2-M6x20L
hexagon socket head bolt
(plain washer)
Mount these bolts after
removing the jigs

Remove the upper rotation stop jig

Remove the rotation stop jig

Remove D pieces

6-M8x30L
hexagon socket head bolt
Mount these bolts after removing the jigs
(Caution)Tightening torque shall be 1960N・cm
( 200kg・cm)
Base retaining jig
Link retaining jig

Fig. 1.1.7 Removal of transportation jigs

1−5 L2E-BW1348
1.2 Leveling of scanner unit
Level the scanner unit according to the following procedure before fixing it to the floor with anchor bolts.
(1) Check the level of the scanner gantry by using a level gauge on both front and rear connecting members
provided between the right and left stands and also on both right and left stand bases as shown in Fig.1.2.1.
(2) Level the scanner unit by adjusting the leveling screws of the scanner stand until the bubble of the level
comes to the center. Place an adjusting plate below the stand bottom cover.

Level Bubble tube

Bottom cover

Level Stand base

Bubble deviation within
this range is allowable
Leveling screw Level

Fig. 1.2.1 Leveling of scanner unit during installation

(3) Fixing of scanner unit to the floor

After leveling the scanner unit, fix the stand bases to the floor with anchor bolts at three places of the right
and left stand bases respectively. Use the following accessory anchor bolts selectively depending upon the
floor conditions.
Article names
Floor with mortar layer of 20mm or less in thickness .............. SANBICK ANCHOR (SB-1080) 80mm
(By Sanko Shoji)
Floor with mortar layer of 20mm or more in thickness............ SANBICK ANCHOR (SB-1010) 100mm
(By Sanko Shoji)
1) By using a vibration drill, make holes of 14.5mm in diameter in positions on the floor for fixing the
stand bases. The hole depth should be 70mm for anchor bolts SB1080 or 90mm for SB1010.
2) Insert anchor bolts into these holes and drive them in lightly. (See Fig.1.2.2)
3) Tighten the bolts until dome washers are flattened and closely attached to the stand base surface.

Drive in Tighten
Dome washer Anchor bolt Continue tightening until
dome washer becomes flat
Stand base

Fig. 1.2.2 Anchoring procedure

1−6 L2E-BW1348
1.3 Carrying in the patient table
The patient table is packaged as mounted on a transport cart. After unpacking, carry in and mount it according
to the following procedure.
(1) Bring the patient table to the mounting position.
(2) Mount the patient table on the floor face.
1) Lift the rear portion of patient table by a hydraulic truck.
2) Remove the truck mounted at the rear portion of the patient table from the table base.
(a) Loosen the set screws of the truck.
(b) Remove the fixing screws from L-bracket.
(c) Pull the pin of L-bracket out of the table base and remove the L-bracket.
(d) Draw out the pin on the opposite side of the truck from the table base.
3) Mount the installing jig to the table base.
4) Tighten the supporting bolts in installing jigs.
5) Put the receiving plate on the floor.
6) Lower the patient table in such a way as the supporting bolts meet the groove in the receiving plate to
support the rear portion of the patient table.
7) Lift the front portion of the patient table by a hydraulic truck.
8) Support the front portion of the table according to steps 2) ~ 6).
9) Remove the hydraulic truck from the patient table.
10) After loosening four supporting bolts alternately to lower the patient table horizontally until the table
base touches the floor.
11) After the table base has landed on the floor, loosen the supporting bolts furthermore and remove the
receiving plates.
12) Remove the installing jig from the table base.

Supporting bolt

Installing jig

Hydraulic cart
Pin
Cart cart
Installing jig
Switchboard cover
Supporting bolt
Receiving plate
L-bracket

Installing jig Cart push screw

Supporting bolt
Receiving plate

Installing jig Fig. 1.3.1 Installation of table

1−7 L2E-BW1348
1.4 Leveling and fixing of patient table

Fix the foot switch shown in 2.2.2 temporarily before starting this work, and make sure that the
foot switch can be mounted without any trouble. If the table unit is too close to the scanner side,
it is possible that the foot switch cover cannot be mounted later.

(1) Lift the table to a height of 750mm (display height 0mm) above the floor and turn off the power supply.
(2) Move the tabletop forward up to the extreme front position by turning the manual retreating handle for the
tabletop mounted at the rear of the tabletop. (See Fig.1.4.1)

Tabletop manual retreating handle

Fig. 1.4.1 Manual retreating handle of tabletop

(3) Remove the rear base cover. (See Fig.1.4.6)

1) Remove screws A.
2) After moving the rear base cover in the arrow “a” direction, remove it by slightly moving backward in
arrow “b” direction.
(4) Remove the switch board cover. (See Fig.1.4.6)
1) Remove screws B and then, remove the power distribution board cover.

(5) Put the leveling jig on the rail, and check if the tabletop is leveled properly by putting the level on the rail.
(See Fig. 1.4.2)

X-axis turning
Level Z-axis turning Level

Side cover

leveling jig
Y
X
Leveling jig
Z

Fig. 1.4.2

(6) If the tabletop is not leveled properly, put adjusting plates below the base after lifting the base by turning
the leveling screw, and then, level the patient table. (See Fig.1.4.6)
(7) After the end of horizontal leveling, turn on the patient table power supply.

1−8 L2E-BW1348
(8) Adjust the verticality of the table to the scanner unit by using the scanogram.
1) Take a picture of the tabletop in the scanogram mode.
Set the scano mode to “PA”. (See Fig.1.4.3)

Change if scano mode is not set to PA

Fig. 1.4.3
2) Display a scanogram image of the table top as grid display. (See Fig.1.4.4)
3) Make sure that the scanogram image of the tabletop satisfies the following requirements (a), (b) with
reference to the grid.
(a) Measure the distances (A1-A2, B1-B2) between grid center line and the right and left edges of the
tabletop and make sure that these distances are equal to each other.
(b) Make sure that the right and left edges of the tabletop are parallel to the grid.
4) Adjust the lateral position of the table until the requirements (a) (b) are satisfied, and confirm it by the
scanogram image again.

Distance measuring icon Grid display icon

Grid center line

Make sure that

A1-A2 = B1-B2

Displayed by the distance measuring icon

Fig.1.4.4

1−9 L2E-BW1348
(9) Turn off the table power supply.

(10) Fix the table body by driving in anchor bolts on the floor.

Anchor bolt
Dome washer

Base

Fig. 1.4.5

(11) Mount the removed switchboard cover and rear base cover to the table.

(12) Cover the installing jig screw holes on the side face of the base cover with an installing seal.

(13) Turn on the table power supply.

1−10 L2E-BW1348
 A

Switchboard cover

Screw B

Bar
Leveling screw
Anchor

Installing jig
M10 washer

Ratchet handle

base

Anchor bolt

Washer

Adjusting plate

Leveling screw
M10 x 35L hexagon socket bolt
Anchor tongue

Screw A

Base cover (side face)

a
Seal
b (attachment)

Arrow view A
Base cover (rear)

1−11 L2E-BW1348
 Fig. 1.4.6
1.5 Mounting of other units

1.5.1 Image processing unit

The image processing unit is composed of the following units.
(1) PC console unit
(2) Monitor (17/19 inches) or LCD (15 inches)
(3) Touch panel unit
(4) Keyboard
(5) Mouse
(Note ; The desk is not included in the standard configuration)

Monitor

Mouse

Touch panel unit

PC console unit

Keyboard

1−12 L2E-BW1348
1.5.2 X-ray control unit
(1) Since cooling fans are provided at the back, place the X-ray control unit more than 15cm away
from the wall.
(2) Secure a space for wiring and maintenance work at the front and right side face.
(3) After placing the X-ray control unit in position, insert the attached holders to fix the casters.

15cm or over
Work space
X-ray control unit

Work space

Caster

Caster holder

1−13 L2E-BW1348
1.6 Mounting of X-ray detector
1.6.1 In case of Pronto-XE
If the system is delivered under the standard condition, the detector is assembled into the scanner unit,
so that this work is not necessary. When the detector is delivered under its disassembled condition,
mount it referring to Fig.1.6.1.
(1) Insert the center pin into the center pin mounting plate with its notched part facing downward, and
fix it by M4 hexagon socket head screw.
(2) Push the detector inward after aligning the center hole of the detector with the center pin.

Rotary plate

Center pin

Detector mounting bracket

Detector

Washer

Hexagon socket head bolt

M8x30L

Detector Center pin Detector M4 hexagon socket head screw

Center pin mounting plate

Fig. 1.6.1 Mounting of detector

1−14 L2E-BW1348
(3) Turn the detector clockwise and counterclockwise lightly around the center pin and fix the bolts
securely at the center of the play. (Fix the screws using a spanner so as not to allow the washers
to rotate when fastening the screws.)
(4) Draw the center pin out of the preamplifier fixing bracket, insert the center pin again to the fixing
bracket and fix it with M4 hexagon socket head screw.
(5) Make sure that the rotary switch of the high voltage power supply for detector is turned off.
(6) Connect the HV coaxial cable to 1DCN on the detector PCB.
(7) Turn the rotary switch to “READY” and wait for longer than 10 seconds.
(8) Turn on the rotary switch.
(9) Press the snap switch and make sure that the voltmeter indicator indicates within the green range.
(10) If the indicator does not move in step (9), the battery pack switch is turned off inside the high
voltage power supply. Turn off the rotary switch once, and turn on the battery pack switch.
Then, perform the above steps (7) ~ (9).

For the connection between the detector and the preamplifier, refer to 2.3.2.

Snap switch

Voltmeter
Rotary switch

Left grip of detector

H.V.cable

1DCN on detector PCB

High voltage power

supply for detector

Fig. 1.6.2 Connection of high voltage power supply for detector

1−15 L2E-BW1348
1.6.2 In case of Pronto-SE,VE
Perform the following work by two persons for safety.
An optimum directive position depends upon the detector. Mount the detector at an optimum
directive position by using the designated direction adjusting pin out of five directive positions. The
optimum directive position is indicated on the direction nameplate ⑫. Mount the detector, referring
to Fig.1.6.3 shown below.

⑤
⑩
②

⑧
⑦
①

⑪ ⑫ ④
⑥

① Grip bar ⑦ Mounting bracket CR

② Guide pin ⑧ Mounting bracket CL
③ Rotary plate ⑨ Mounting bracket OR
④ Detector ⑩ Mounting bracket OL
⑤ Shaft ⑪ Direction adjusting pin
⑥ Plain washer ⑫ Direction nameplate

Fig.1.6.3

1−16 L2E-BW1348
(1) Fix grip bar ① to mounting brackets CR ⑦ and CL ⑧, respectively.
(2) Set two guide pins ② to rotary plate ③.
(3) Push the detector ④ against rotary plate ③ by inserting the center hole of detector ④ onto the
shaft ⑤, and fix mounting brackets CR ⑦ and CL ⑧ temporarily to the rotary plate ③ by
using M8 x 35L hexagon socket bolts with plain washer ⑥ each to such an extent as the detector
④ can rotate slightly.
(4) Remove guide pins ② and grip bars ①.
(5) Fix the mounting bracket OL ⑩ temporarily to rotary plate ③ by using M8 x 35L hexagon
socket bolts with plain washer ⑥ each to such an extent as the detector ④ can rotate slightly.
(6) Screw in a direction adjusting pin ⑪ to rotary plate ③ through the hole of mounting bracket
OR ⑨ (Select the direction adjusting pin ⑪ to be used, referring to the direction nameplate
⑫).
(7) Apply the inside of the hole of mounting bracket OR ⑨ to the direction adjusting pin ⑪ by
lightly turning the detector ④ clockwise or counterclockwise around the shaft ⑤ according to
Table 1.6.1.
(8) Fasten three M8 x 35L hexagon socket head bolts being fixed temporarily in step (3) and (5) with
tightening torque of 27N･m , while keeping the angle so as not to allow the detector ④ to get out
of shaft ⑤.
(9) Remove the direction adjusting pin ⑪ from rotary plate ③, and fix detector mounting bracket
OR ⑨ with tightening torque of 27N･m by using M8 x 35L hexagon socket head bolts with
plain washer ⑥ each.

Table 1.6.1

Setting positions Direction adjusting

(Indicated on direction pins used for Detector fixing methods
nameplate) positioning
Fix the detector at the center as viewed from
CENTER φ20
the front
Fix the detector by lowering its left side as
φ18LD φ18
viewed from the front
Fix the detector by lowering its right side as
φ18RD φ18
viewed from the front
Fix the detector by lowering its left side as
φ16LD φ16
viewed from the front
Fix the detector by lowering its right side as
φ16RD φ16
viewed from the front

1−17 L2E-BW1348
 After mounting the detector, connect 552CN of the detector to the temperature controller, referring to
Fig.1.6.4.

Temperature
controller

Detector
552CN

Fig. 1.6.4

It is necessary for stabilizing the performance of the detector (temperature controller) and
preamplifier to apply power to these units for about 4 hours before using them. Continue
feeding power to these units normally.

For the connection between the detector and the preamplifier, refer to 2.3.2.

1−18 L2E-BW1348
1.7 Mounting of X-ray Tube and cooler
Four types of X-ray tube assemblies (1.5MHU, 2MHU, and low focus moving type 2MHU and 3.5MHU) can be
mounted to the scanner. In Pronto SE, either 2MHU or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly being characterized with
its small focus move is mounted. Note : Another X-ray tube can not be used in Pronto SE. X-ray tube
assemblies are classified into the type where the high-voltage bushing is mounted on the X-ray radiation port
side and the type where the high-voltage bushing is mounted on the opposite side of the radiation port. Each
type can be mounted to the scanner by just the same method.
Since the X-ray tube assembly and cooler are connected to each other with hoses, etc., be careful not to scratch
cooler hoses or cables.

1.7.1 Mounting procedure of X-ray tube assembly

The following mounting procedure applies to 1.5, 2, and 3.5MHU X-ray tube assemblies in Pronto XE
and 2MHU X-ray tube assembly in Pronto SE. For details, refer to Fig.1.7.1 ~ Fig.1.7.4.
(1) Turn the rotary plate until collimator case ① comes up to the highest position.
(2) Mount plate ② (with key way) to collimator case ①.
(3) Screw the holder ③ to plate ②. (Bring the key way of holder ③ into contact with the key of
plate ②.)
(4) Fit insulation ring ⑩ to X-ray tube assembly ⑤, and fix it with Mylar tape.
(5) Mount X-ray tube assembly ⑤ to holder ③.
(6) Mount trunnion ⑥ to holder ③ by using four M8 x 50 long hexagon socket head bolts.
(Tightening torque 1960N･cm (200kgf･cm))
(7) Connect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables to the X-ray tube assembly.
(8) Connect the starter cable from the X-ray tube assembly to the terminal ⑦ (7, 8, 9, CS and EX)
and the cable to terminal ⑧ (ED, E, L0, L100, H, and H0).
(9) For wiring and piping, refer to [2.3 Internal wiring of system], too.
(10) Mount pedestal ⑯ and gauge mount ⑰.

Be careful not to forget to use the insulation Mylar sheets (insulation ring) when mounting
the X-ray tube assembly. If they are not applied, secondary electronic parts may be
damaged due to tube arcing. Since holders are used to fix the X-ray tube assembly
during delivery, check if the X-ray tube is correctly insulated by using a circuit tester.

1−19 L2E-BW1348
A : In case of 1.5 MHU X-ray tube assembly (for XE)

6B
6A

15B

10B

10A

⑤
15A
−

＋ ⑫
③
⑰
⑨
②

① ⑬

⑦⑧

① Collimator case ⑦ Terminal ⑬ Plate (B)

② Plate ⑧ Terminal ⑭ Hexagon bolt
③ Holder ⑨ Cooler 15A 15B Insulating ring
④ Mount plate 10A 10B Insulating ring ⑯ Pedestal
⑤ X-ray tube assembly ⑪ Safety band ⑰ Gauge mount
6A 6B Trunnion ⑫ Plate (A)

Fig. 1.7.1

1.7.2A Mounting procedure of cooler.

(1) Mount plate A ⑫ and plate B ⑬ to the side face of cooler ⑨ by hexagon bolts ⑭.
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on the mount plate ④, and fix plate (A)⑫ and plate (B) ⑬ with M6 nuts,
spring washers, and plain washers.
(3) Connect the power cord from the cooler to terminal ⑧ (L0, L100, E).

1−20 L2E-BW1348
B : In case of 2 MHU X-ray tube assembly (for XE)

HITACHI ⑥

⑤
⑩ Varian
−

CS
H7
H8
＋ H9
Power cord
③ ( L0, L100 (HITACHI)
⑰ or L110,H,HO,E(Varian)
②
⑫ ⑨

⑯
⑭

H,H0,L0,L100,E,ED ⑧

⑦ 7,8,9,CS,EX ⑪
④

① Collimator case ⑦ Terminal ⑬ Plate (B)

② Plate ⑧ Terminal ⑭ M6×14L hexagon bolt with
③ Holder ⑨ Cooler spring and plain washer
④ Mount plate ⑩ Insulating ring ⑯ Pedestal
⑤ X-ray tube assembly ⑪ Oil container ⑰ Gauge mount
⑥ Trunnion ⑫ Plate (A)

Fig. 1.7.2

1.7.2B Mounting procedure of cooler

(1) Mount plate A ⑫ and plate B ⑬ to the side face of the cooler by hexagon bolts ⑭.
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on the mount plate ④, and fix plate (A)⑫ and plate (B)⑬ with M6 nuts,
spring washers, and plain washers.
(3) Connect the power cord from the cooler to terminal ⑧ (L0, L100, E).

1−21 L2E-BW1348
C: Low focus shift quantity in case of 2MHU X-ray tube assembly (for SE)

⑤
⑩
＋

CS
H7
− H8
H9  Power cord
（L0,L100,H,H0,E）
③
⑰

② ⑨
⑫

H,H0,L0,L100,E,ED ⑧

⑦ 7,8,9,CS,EX ⑪
④

① Collimator case ⑦ Terminal ⑬ Plate (B)

② Plate ⑧ Terminal ⑭ M6×14L hexagon bolt with
③ Holder ⑨ Cooler spring and plain washer
④ Mount plate ⑩ Insulating ring ⑯ Pedestal
⑤ X-ray tube assembly ⑪ Oil container ⑰ Gauge mount
⑥ Trunnion ⑫ Plate (A)

Fig. 1.7.3

1.7.2C Cooler mounting procedure

(1) Mount plate A ⑫ and plate B ⑬ to the side face of the cooler by hexagon bolts ⑭.
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on the mount plate ④, and fix plate (A)⑫ and plate (B)⑬ with M6 nuts,
spring washers, and plain washers.
(3) Connect the power cord ( L0,L100,E) from the cooler to terminal ⑧

1−22 L2E-BW1348
D : In case of 3.5 MHU X-ray tube assembly (for XE)

⑩ ＋
⑤

CS
H7
− H8
H9
 Power cord
③ （L0,L110,H,H0,E）

② ⑫ ⑨

H,H0,L0,L100,E,ED ⑧
⑬

⑪
⑦ 7,8,9,CS,EX
④

① Collimator case ⑦ Terminal ⑬ Plate (B)

② Plate ⑧ Terminal ⑭ M6x14L hexagon bolt with
③ Holder ⑨ Cooler spring and plain washer
④ Mount plate ⑩ Insulating ring ⑯ Pedestal
⑤ X-ray tube assembly ⑪ Oil container ⑰ Gauge mount
⑥ Trunnion ⑫ Plate (A)

Fig. 1.7.4

1.7.2D Mounting procedure of cooler

(1) Mount plate A ⑫ and plate B ⑬ to the side face of the cooler by hexagon bolts ⑭.
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on the mount plate ④, and fix plate (A)⑫ and plate (B)⑬ with M6 nuts,
spring washers, and plain washers.
(3) Connect the power cord from the cooler to terminal ⑧ (L0 ,L100, E).

1−23 L2E-BW1348
1.7.3 X-ray tube assembly mounting procedure ( 3.5MHU for Pronto SE/VE ) Tube shift mechanism type
The following mounting procedure applies to the X-ray tube assembly having a tube shift mechanism.
For details, refer to Fig.1.7.5.
(1) Rotate the rotary plate until collimator case ① reaches the highest position
(2) Fix the holder ③ to the rotary plate by screws (Bring the key way of holder ③ into contact with
the key of rotary plate)
(3) Fit the insulation ring ⑩ to X-ray tube assembly ⑤ and fix it with a Mylar tape.
(4) Mount the X-ray tube assembly ⑤ to holder ③
(5) Mount the trunnions ⑥ to holder ③ by four M8 × 50痕 hexagon socket head bolts with
tightening torque of 1960N.cm (200kgf-cm)
(6) Connect the anode and cathode high-voltage cables to the X-ray tube assembly
(7) Connect the starter cable from the X-ray tube assembly to terminal ⑦ (7, 8, 9, CS and EX) and
the cable to terminal ⑧ (ED, E, L, L100, H, H0).
(8) For the wiring and piping, refer to [2.3 Internal wiring of system]
(9) Mount pedestal ⑯ and gauge mount ⑰
(10) Mount the retaining band ⑱ to holder ③ by M8 × 20痕 hexagon socket head bolts
(11) Mount the guard fitting 1 ⑲ to the rotary plate by M16 × 35痕 hexagon socket head bolts.
(This item applies to Pronto-VE)

(1) Be careful not to forget to use the insulation Mylar sheets ( insulation ring ) when
mounting the X-ray tube assembly, otherwise secondary electronic parts may be
damaged due to discharge Since holders are mounted to fix the X-ray tube assembly
during delivery, check if the X-ray tube is correctly insulated by using a circuit tester.
(2) Parts 19 and 21 are removed at the delivery time from the Works.
Mount these parts securely
(3) Parts 19 and 21 may be mounted after center adjustment in Chapter 3.

1−23−1 L2E-BW1348
E: In case of 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly (for SE/VE) ...... Tube shift mechanism type
⑱ 4-M8Ｘ20L
Hexagon socket head bolt
(spring, plain washer)
⑥ 2-M16Ｘ35L
Hexagon socket head bolt
a (spring, plain washer)
3-M4Ｘ10L
Hexagon socket head bolt
⑤ ⑲ (plain washer)
21
⑩ ＋

3-M4Ｘ10L
Hexagon socket head bolt
CS
H7 (plain washer)
− H9
H8 ⑳
Power cord
（L0,L110,H,H0,E）

③ a

⑫
⑰

⑯
⑭

H,H0,L0,L100,E,ED ⑧
⑬
⑪
⑦ 7,8,9,CS,EX
④
① Collimator case ⑨ Cooler ⑰ Gauge mount
③ Holder (base plate) ⑩ Insulation ring ⑱ Retaining band
④ Mounting plate ⑪ Oil container ⑲ Guard fitting 1 (Pronto VE)
⑤ X-ray tube assembly ⑫ Plate (A) ⑳ Guard fitting 2 (Pronto VE)
⑥ Trunnion ⑬ Plate (B) 蔵 Guard plate (Pronto VE)
⑦ Terminal ⑭ Hexagon bolt M6×14 痕, spring,
plain washer
⑧ Terminal ⑯ Pedestal
Fig. 1.7.5
1.7.4 Cooler mounting procedure
(1) Mount plate A⑫ and plate B⑬ to the bottom face of the cooler by hexagon bolts ⑭
(2) Put the cooler ⑨ on mounting plate ④, and fix plate A⑫ and plate B⑬ by M6 nuts, spring
washers, and plain washers
(3) Connect the power cord from the cooler to terminal ⑧
(4) Mount guard fitting 2 ⑳ to plate A⑫ by M4×10 痕 hexagon socket head bolts.
(Pronto VE only)
(5) Mount guard plate 蔵 to guard fittings 蔵 ⑳ by M4×10 痕 hexagon socket head bolts. (Pronto
VE only)

After fixing the oil hose and high-voltage cables with tie-lap, mount the guard plate 蔵. Make sure
that guard plate 蔵 does not touch hose or cables. If they touch each other, re-cleat the hose and
cables so that they don’t touch guard plate 蔵.

1−23−2 L2E-BW1348
1.8 Removal of protective materials for transport
Remove the vinyl bag covering the electromagnetic brake of the scan drive unit of scanner, orange rotary plate
transport bracket, and drive unit protective plate.

Drive unit protective plate

M6 hexagon socket head bolt

Fasten again after removing
the protective plate

Fig. 1.8.1

1−24 L2E-BW1348
1.9A Internal inspection of patient table
Make sure that no oil leaks from the hydraulic system and check the oil level in the oil tank according to the
procedure at the end of wiring of patient table.
Observe the following procedure before moving the table.
(1) Remove the link supporting bracket.
1) Remove screws.
2) After lifting the table, remove fixtures A and B.
(2) Set the patient table to 900mm above the floor.
(3) Make sure that no oil leaks from the hydraulic system.
(4) Make sure that the oil level of the oil tank gauge is 60mm ±10mm.
(5) Set the patient table to 700mm above the floor and turn off the power supply.
(6) Lift the upper edge pipe of the bellows cover and fit it to the bellows holders.
(Three bellows holders are mounted below the right and left side covers, respectively.)

1−25−1 L2E-BW1348
 Bellows fixture
Bellows cover
upper edge pipe
Side cover (left)

Side cover (right)

Bellows holder

Bellows fixture

Bellows holder

Oil level when the patient

table is at a height of
900mm

60 ± 10mm
Air vent plug
Link supporting bracket
Lubricant : Daphine Superhydro 22WR
Oil volume: 1.9 liters
Fixture A

Screw
Fixture B

Fig. 1.9.1

(7) Fix the front and rear parts of the upper edge pipe of the bellows cover with the bellows fixtures
(Attachments of patient table) at 2 positions respectively.

1−25−2 L2E-BW1348
1.9B Internal inspection of patient table (in case of the system with CE mark)
Make sure that no oil leaks from the hydraulic system and check the oil level in the oil tank according to the
procedure at the end of wiring of patient table.
Observe the following procedure before moving the table.
(1) Remove the link supporting bracket.
1) Remove screws.
2) After lifting the table, remove fixtures A and B.
(2) Set the patient table to 900mm above the floor.
(3) Make sure that no oil leaks from the hydraulic system.
(4) After removing the tank cover, make sure that the oil level is 60mm±10mm.
(5) Set the patient table to 700mm above the floor and turn off the power supply.
(6) Lift the upper edge pipe of the bellows cover and fit it to the bellows holders.
(Three bellows holders are mounted below the right and left side covers, respectively.)
(7) Mount the L-plate to the right and left side covers while covering the pipe at the upper fringe of the bellows
cover with the L-plate.

1−26−1 L2E-BW1348
 Bellows fixture
Bellows cover
upper edge pipe
Side cover (left)

Side cover (right)

Bellows holder

Bellows fixture

Bellows holder

L-plate

U-plate

Oil level when the patient

table is at a height of
900mm

60 ± 10mm
Air vent plug
Link supporting bracket
Lubricant : Daphine Superhydro 22WR
Oil volume: 1.9 liters
Fixture A
Tank cover

Screw
Fixture B

(8) Fix the front and rear parts of the upper edge pipe of the bellows cover with the bellows fixtures
(Attachments of patient table) at 2 positions respectively.

1−26−2 L2E-BW1348
1.10 Mounting of covers
The scanner covers consist of those illustrated in Fig.1.10.1. When the system is shipped in the standard style
of packaging, the scanner unit is delivered with the top cover, both side covers, stand covers (right, left, front,
rear), rear cover, cone cover, opening covers (right, left, front, and rear), and front lower cover detached.

Top cover

Side cover
Rear cover

Opening cover (rear)

Lift cover Cone cover
Front lower cover

Stand cover
Side cover Stand cover (rear)
Opening cover (front) (Front stand cover on the opposite side)

Fig. 1.10.1 Scanner covers

After completion of wiring and adjustment of the scanner, mount the covers to the scanner referring to Fig.
1.10.2 and Fig. 1.10.3.
(1) Remove four thumb screws and open the lift cover.
(2) Mount the top cover with four M4 truss head screws and toothed washers. Connect the connector 250CN
of the top cooling fan. Connect the grounding wire.
(3) Insert two hooks mounted at the upper part of the side cover into the U-receiving recesses on either end of
the top cover. Fix the side covers to the support base of the scanner gantry with four M4 x 8 痕 truss
screws and toothed washers. Cover the screws with attached screw caps.
(4) Mount the front opening cover to the lift cover.

1−27 L2E-BW1348
 Side cover (left) Top cover

Side cover (right)

Front lower cover

Lift cover

Opening cover (front)

Screw cap Screw cap

Supporting base

Fig. 1.10.2 Mounting of scanner front covers

(5) Mount the stand covers.

17-M4 x 8L truss head screw

(Accessory to scanner unit)

Fig. 1.10.3 Mounting of stand covers

1−28 L2E-BW1348
(6) Mount the cone cover to meet the scribed line of the gantry side mounting bracket in such a way as its
center is aligned with the lift cover center.
Connect the traffic light, microphone and mat switch connectors 32CN, 312CN, and 88CN.

Connect mat switch connector 88CN without fail before starting the scan, tilt, and table
operation. They are not operated unless 88CN connector is connected.

(7) Mount the front rod and cable holder assembly to the stand. The length of front rods and rear rods shall be
as shown in Fig. 1.10.4.

After mounting the covers, tilt the system (±25°) and make sure that no excessive load is
applied to the hinge of the opening cover. If an excessive load is applied, adjust the length
of the front and rear rods so as not to apply any excessive load.

(8) Connect cable 163CN of the rear cover X-ray exposure indicator lamp.
(9) Close the rear cover and fix it with truss head screws (M4 x 8 痕) at 5 places.
Cover these screws with attached screw caps. (Mount the attached rear cover truck to the rear cover in
advance. After mounting the rear cover, remove the rear cover truck and store it.)
(10) Fix the side face of the rear cover to the side cover by using four sems screws M14 x 12 痕, and cover these
screws with the attached screw caps.
(11) Close the lift cover and fix it with thumb screws.
(12) Mount the front lower cover to the lift cover.
(13) Fix the rear opening cover with truss screws (M4 x 8 痕)

Cone cover

Rear cover

Screw cap

Opening cover (rear)

Front rod
Rear rod
Screw cap

Rear cover cart

45mm
135mm Cable holder assembly
(Mount it to the right and left stands while
Height = 135mm taking care of the rear rod position)
from rear face of stand

Fig. 1.10.4 Mounting of scanner rear cover

1−29 L2E-BW1348
(14)-A Mount the X-ray transmission window to the lift cover and cone cover. .....(Pronto XE, SE)
1) Label the convex side of the magic tape to the concave side of the magic tape of the cone cover and
lift cover. (Be careful with the laser projector window position when labeling the tape.)

(1) Mount the X-ray transmission window closely so as not to produce any clearance from
the cover.
(2) Overlap both ends of the X-ray transmission window with each other as illustrated below
so as not to allow any liquid like a vomited substance to enter the scanner interior even if
it flows down from the upper part.

2) Place the adhesive agent side of the belt to the X-ray transmission window side, and fix the belt
center to the lower part of the cone cover (lift cover) with M3 sems screws.
3) Label the belt to the X-ray transmission window by the adhesive agent on the rear face of the belt.
4) Overlap both ends of the belt with each other and fix them to the upper part of the cone cover (lift
cover) by using M3 sems screws.

X-ray transmission window Magic tape of cover (concave part)

∼
Belt

Belt

Table side
Table side

4-M3 x 10L sems screw

Cone cover Magic tape Lift cover

X-ray transmission window

Arrow view A

1−30 L2E-BW1348
(14)-B Mount the X-ray transmission window to the lift cover and cone cover. .....(Pronto VE)
1) Label the convex side of the magic tape to the concave side of the magic tape of the cone cover and
lift cover. (Be careful with the laser projector window position when labeling the tape.)

(1) Mount the X-ray transmission window closely so as not to produce any clearance from
the cover.
(2) Overlap both ends of the X-ray transmission window with each other as illustrated below
so as not to allow any liquid like a vomited substance to enter the scanner interior even if
it flows down from the upper part.

2) Place the adhesive agent side of the belt to the X-ray transmission window side, and fix the belt
center to the lower part of the cone cover (lift cover) with M3 screws.
3) Label the belt to the X-ray transmission window by the adhesive agent on the rear face of the belt.
4) Adjust both ends of the belt with each other and use two press plates to fix them to the upper part of
the cone cover (lift cover) by using M3 sems screws.

X-ray transmission window Velcro of cover (concave part)

Press plate Press plate

Belt

A
Belt

Table side Table side

4-M3x10L SEMS screw
2-M3x8L flat head screw
Cone cover Velcro Lift cover

X-ray transmission window

A arrow direction view

1−30−1 38 L2E-BW1348
 Section 2 WIRING

2.1 Wiring of cables between units

Refer to the wiring diagram and cable list on pages 2-2 and 2-3
Cautions on wiring
・ Cables are classified roughly into four kinds; high voltage (HV) cables, power (POW) cables, signal (SIG)
cables, and grounding (GND) cables.
・ For preventing malfunction of the CT system, isolate the cables from each other by using wiring pits as
shown below. Ground each pit without fail.
If the separation is impossible in the pit, use the zipper tube with shield to isolate. Also, make sure to
ground the shield of zipper tube.

SIG 150
HV POW GND

50 100 100

An example of wiring pits

SIG 100
GND

POW 100

HV 50

Unit : mm
150

2−1A L2E-BW1348
 X-RAY CONTROL UNIT

2TN WL Run #107

WL
(M4) WL
WB-17 2TN DI Run #303
Power distribution board DS
on the hospital side (M4) DI

3TN H7
(M4) H8
H9
Note 1) Since the starter is changed when
LU 4TN Note 1
Run #100 LV (M10) Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is mounted,
HP-PB LW 1TN T1 T2 WB-3CN
U G1 (M8) the external cable is connected to
V Run #105 Run #302

36P
DDK
W H7, H8, H9 of terminal TB1 (M5).
(M10)

Run #003
HP-PB SCANNER GANTRY

36P
DDK
E
(M8) Run #106 E T1 T2 WS-7CN
1TN
10 (M10)
11
12 4TN
(M4)

2−2A
U1 Run #131 1 4TN WS-17
V1 2 (M4)
3
5TN W1
(M4) V8 1SP
W8 *4 4 4TN OPERATOR CONSOLE
5 (M4) Shield clamp
DDK Run #331 DDK
6 4TN WS-9CN 50P 50P 56CN
7 (M4) DDK DDK
WS-10CN 50P Run #362 50P 57CN
E3
(M8)
Run #031 E2 OC-12
HP-PB (M8) TCPU-66CN
E GND (M6)
(M8) *1 *2 *3 1 1TN (M5)
2
PATIENT TABLE
50P
DDK

WT-2CN
R
S 1TN
E (M4) WT-12F
HP-PB
E
(M8) E (M5) Run #061
Run #161

L2E-BW1348
 X-RAY CONTROL UNIT

Power distribution board 2TN WL Run #107

on the hospital side WL
(M4) WL
STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER WB-17 2TN DI Run #303
DS
(M4) DI
TR-4M
3TN H7 Note 1) Since the starter is
(M4) H8
H9
U U1 LU 4TN Note 1 changed when Varian
Run #110 V 1TN 2TN V1 Run #100 LV (M10)
W (M8) (M8) W1 LW 1TN
3.5MHU X-ray tube is
HP-PB T1 T2 WB-3CN
U PE E G1 (M8) mounted, the external
E1 Run #105 Run #302

36P
V

DDK
W cable is connected to H7,
E E
(M10) H8, H9 of terminal TB1
Run #003 (M5).
AUTO VOLTAGE REGURATOR SCANNER GANTRY

36P
DDK
Run #106 E T1 T2 WS-7CN
A. V. R 1TN
10 (M10)
11
12 4TN
(M4)
Run #050 R Run #111 US1 4TN
E S VS1 (M6) U1
HP-PB (M6) (M10) T WS1 Run #131 1 4TN WS-17
V1 2 (M4)
E

2−3A
5TN W1 3
(M8) U Run #112 US2 4TN
V VS2 (M6) (M4) 1SP
(M10) W WS2 V8
W8 *4 4 4TN OPERATOR CONSOLE
5 (M4) Shield clamp
DDK Run #331 DDK
6 4TN WS-9CN 50P 50P 56CN
7 (M4) DDK DDK
WS-10CN 50P Run #362 50P 57CN
E3
(M8)
Run #031 E2 OC-12
(M8) TCPU-66CN
GND (M6)
*1 *2 *3 1 1TN (M5)
2
PATIENT TABLE
50P
DDK

WT-2CN
R
S 1TN
E (M4) WT-12F

E (M5) Run #061

Run #161

(ⅰ) In case of the addition of step down transformer and AVR ( Export specifications)

L2E-BW1348
 X-RAY CONTROL UNIT

Power distribution board 2TN WL Run #107

on the hospital side WL
(M4) WL
STEP DOWN TRANSFORMER WB-17 2TN DI Run #303
DS
(M4) DI
TR-8
3TN H7 Note 1) Since the starter is
(M4) H8
U U1 LU 4TN Note 1H9 changed when Varian
Run #110 V 1TN 2TN V1 Run #100 LV (M10) 3.5MHU X-ray tube is
HP-PB W (M8) (M8) W1 LW 1TN T1 T2 WB-3CN
U PE E G1 (M8) mounted, the external
E1 Run #105 Run #302

36P
V

DDK
W cable is connected to H7,
E E
(M10) H8, H9 of terminal TB1
Run #003 (M5).
SCANNER GANTRY

36P
DDK
Run #106 E T1 T2 WS-7CN
1TN
10 (M10)
11
12 4TN
(M4)
U1 Run #131 1 4TN WS-17
V1 2

2−4A
3 (M4)
5TN W1
(M4) V8 1SP
W8 *4 4 4TN OPERATOR CONSOLE
5 (M4) Shield clamp
DDK Run #331 DDK
6 4TN WS-9CN 50P 50P 56CN
7 (M4) DDK DDK
WS-10CN 50P Run #362 50P 57CN
E3
(M8)
Run #031 E2 OC-12
(M8) TCPU-66CN
GND (M6)
*1 *2 *3 1 1TN (M5)
2
PATIENT TABLE
50P
DDK

WT-2CN
R
S 1TN
E (M4) WT-12F

E (M5) Run #061

Run #161

(ⅱ) CE Marking Type

L2E-BW1348
External cables
Max. Standard Outer Connector dimensions
CABLE Destinations Internal length used Maximum Kinds of cables
permissible length diameter No. of conductors and H×W×D [mm]
RUN external
Wiring Wiring length Wiring Wiring of cable wire thickness Wiring Wiring
No. length POW. SIG. GND
sources destinations [m] [m] sources destinations [mm] sources destinations
003 HP-PB WS 15 12 0 1.0 14.0 4×22 UL1683 6AWG ＊
031 HP-PB WS 15 12 0 0.6 14.4 4×22 UL1683 6AWG ＊
061 HP-PB OC 15 10 0.3 0 14.7 4×22 UL1683 6AWG ＊
NOTE
100 HP-PB WB 15 10 1.5 0 13.5 41.2 ST-SB 4×2AWG
2＊
NOTE
105 WB WS 15 15 0.3 1.0 13.7 35.0 ST-SB 2×2AWG
1＊
106 WB WS 15 12 1.3 0.6 13.1 18.6 UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG ＊
107 WB WL 15 10 1.5 0.0 13.5 6.6 UL2464SB 2×20AWG ＊
131 WB WS 15 12 1.8 0.6 12.6 18.6 UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG ＊
161 WB OC 15 10 1.8 0.3 12.9 13.5 ST-SB 2×14AWG ＊
20 × 20×61.7
302 WB WS 15 12 2.0 0.7 12.3 11.5 UL2464SB 17P×28AWG ＊ 61.7 ×51.5
×51.5
303 WB DS 15 10 1.5 0 13.5 6.6 UL2464SB 2×20AWG ＊
20 × 20×76.8
331 WS OC 15 12 0.7 0.5 13.8 11.5 UL2464SB 25P×28AWG ＊ 76.8 ×51.5
×51.5
20 × 20×76.8
362 WS OC 15 12 0.7 0.5 13.8 11.5 UL2464SB 25P×28AWG ＊ 76.8 ×51.5
×51.5
In case of the addition of step down transformer and AVR ( Export specifications)
050 HP-PB A.V.R 5 3 0 1.5 3.5 4×22 UL1683 6AWG ＊
NOTE
100 TR WB 15 10 0.5 1.5 13 41.2 ST-SB 4×2AWG
2＊
110 HP-PB TR 5 3 0 0.8 4.2 41.2 ST-SB 4×2AWG ＊
111 WB A.V.R 5 3 1.5 0 3.5 25.7 ST 2×6AWG ＊
112 A.V.R WB 5 3 0 1.5 3.5 25.7 ST 2×6AWG ＊
In case of Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is mounted
106 WB WS 15 12 1.5 0.6 12.9 18.6 UL-ST-SB 3×10AWG ＊

NOTE 1. Cable Run No. 105 should be regarded as included in the HV system and laid in a pit
isolated from pits where other power and signal cables are laid.
NOTE 2. Change RUN No. 100 cable when adding the step-down transformer.
NOTE 3. Change RUN No.003, 031, 061 cable’s wiring from HP-PB to TR when adding the step down
transformer.
NOTE 4. Since the starter is changed when Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is mounted, RUN No. 106
cable is changed.
Internal cables (scanner)
Max. Standard Outer Connector dimensions
CABLE Destinations Internal length used Standard Kinds of cables
permissible length diameter No. of conductors and H×W×D [mm]
RUN external
Wiring Wiring length Wiring Wiring of cable wire thickness Wiring Wiring
No. length POW. SIG. GND
sources destinations [m] [m] sources destinations [mm] sources destinations
＊1 WS WT 1.5 1.5 − − − 4×22 UL1683 6AWG ＊
＊2 WS WT 1.5 1.5 − − − 13.5 ST-SB 2×14AWG ＊
7.5×68 20×76.8
＊3 WS WT 5.5 5.5 − − − 11.5 UL2464SB 25P×28AWG ＊
×15.6 ×51.5

2−5A L2E-BW1348
 14.7 × 20×76.8
＊4 WS SP 6.0 6.0 − − − 6.5 UL2464SB 2×18AWG ＊ 21 51.5
×27.6

Table 2.1.1 Cable list

2−6A L2E-BW1348
2.2 Wiring of cables in each unit
2.2.1 Scanner
All the cables for connection to external units should be laid via the power distribution board (chassis
7) at the lower rear part of the scanner. For the block diagram of wiring routes, refer to Page 2-2 For
the wiring routes in detail, refer to Page 2-3. Connect each cable after removing chassis 7 cover.

View A

Chassis 7

Fig. 2.2.1

2−7 L2E-BW1348
 7CN 10CN 9CN

Part B
Part C
Fig. 2.2.2 View A

To foot switch base

120G

*2 003 *1 031 331 362 302

7CN 10CN 9CN

89G
78G
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6
85G 79G
E

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
T2

70G 76G
T1

1TN 75G 83G 73G

105
Fig. 2.2.3 Detail of part B

106 131 *4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
76G

4TN

75G 83G 73G

Fig. 2.2.4 Detail of part C

2−8 L2E-BW1348
RUN NO. 105, 106, 131 RUN NO. 302, 331, 362

RUN NO. 003, 031

Fig. 2.2.5

2−9 L2E-BW1348
2.2.2 Table wiring
All table cables are internally connected from the scanner.
(These cables are enclosed in the scanner and table without any external protrusion.)

Base Table

*3(SIG.)
*1(GND.)

*2(POW.)
WT-2CN

WT-1TN

Cable cleat
1TN

R S

Terminal mounting plate

Fig. 2.2.6 Table wiring

Be careful not to apply any excessive force to the connectors or terminals when holding
the cables, since the cable cleat is mounted to be close to the connectors and terminals.

2−10 L2E-BW1348
A. In case of Pronto XE/SE
2.2.3 Mounting of foot switch and electric parts cover of the table.
(1) Mount the foot switch base to the power distribution board at the front of the table.
(2) Connect cables to the power distribution board.
(3) Connect the foot switch cable connector
(4) Fix cables to the foot switch base properly.

Arrange cables regularly on the stand base at the lower part of gantry as shown in the
following figure so as not to overlap or coil them.
(All cables are internal cables from the scanner)

M4 x 10L screw with spring and plain washer

WS-5CN

121G
Signal cable (WT-2CN)

Foot switch base

120G Table side

Power distribution board

Power cable (WT-1TN)

Details of part D Part D Earth cable (WT-E)

(5) Mount the L-bracket mounted on the scanner side of the foot switch base to the stand base side.

The L bracket can move longitudinally. Position it according to the table position.

Scanner side

Power distribution board cover

M4 x 12L screw with

spring and plain washer

L bracket

M4 nut Stand base

2−11 L2E-BW1348
B In case of Pronto VE
2.2.3 Mounting of foot switch and electric parts cover of the table.
(1) Mount the foot switch base to the power distribution board at the front of the table.
(2) Fix the foot switch base by driving the grip anchor to the floor.
① Prepare a φ10.5×30 deep hole corresponding to the anchor hole on the floor.
② Drive the grip anchor (M6) into the φ10.5 hole
③ Fix the foot switch base to the floor by M6 x 30L hexagon socket head bolt with washer
Scanner side

Power distribution board cover

M6 x 30L hexagon socket head bolt

Washer
Grip anchor（M6）

8mm
Anchor
Stand base

Don’t allow the foot switch base to touch the stand base or stand cover. The clearance
between the foot switch base and the stand base is 8mm, while the clearance between
the foot switch base and the stand cover is 2mm.

(3) Connect cables to the power distribution board.

(4) Connect the foot switch cable connector
(5) Fix cables to the foot switch base properly.

Arrange cables regularly on the stand base at the lower part of gantry as shown in the
following figure so as not to overlap or coil them. (All cables are internal cables from the
scanner)

2−11−1 L2E-BW1348
 M4 x 10L screw with spring and plain washer

WS-5CN

121G
Signal cable (WT-2CN)

Foot switch base

120G Table side

Power distribution board

Power cable (WT-1TN)

Details of part D Part D Earth cable (WT-E)

(5) Mount the power distribution board cover to the base cover.

Foot switch cover

(6) over the screw hole on the side face of the table base cover with the seal (attachment to the table)

Seal

2−11−2 L2E-BW1348
2.2.4 Image processing unit
(1) Method of removing the image processing unit covers
1) Remove the rear cover by shifting it downward after removing two screws.

Rear cover

2) Remove PC cover by removing four screws.

PC cover

2−12 L2E-BW1348
 (2) Cabling work procedure
NOTE: This work differs according to the system versions. Perform the work referring
to CASE 1 and CASE 2.
CASE 1
1) Connect the external cables from the gantry unit to the image processing unit.
Connect the cables (connector #56CN and 57CN) from the rear panel of the gantry unit to
connectors 56CN and 57CN at the lower part on the side panel of the main unit as illustrated
below. Cleat these cables on the rear panel of the main unit as shown by arrow view A.

57CN

56CN

Arrow view A

1FFB

Fix cables so that their

1TN shields are securely
2TN attached to the fixtures.

57CN

56CN

RUN# RUN#
Fix with tie lap 362 331

To gantry unit

2−13 L2E-BW1348
 CASE 2
(1) Connect the external cables from the gantry unit to the image processing unit Connect the
external cables to the connectors ( 56CN, 57CN) from the rear panel of the main body
Cleat the cables according to arrow view A

Arrow view A

57CN 56CN

Fix the cables so that

their shields are
1TN securely attached to the
shield fittings

2TN

56CN
57CN

56CN
1FFB

57CN Fix with tie lap

RUN# RUN#
362 331

To gantry unit

2−13−1 L2E-BW1348
2) Connect cables to the connectors on the upper panel of the image processing unit.
Insert these cables through the rubber clearances on the rear panel of the main unit as illustrated
below. Observe the following procedure. (The following figure shows the upper panel of the
main unit.)
① Connect cable A (Touch panel unit ~ 9CN) to 9CN of the main unit.
② Connect cable C (touch panel unit ~ 22CN) to 22CN of the main unit through core 5FC.

Front

82CN 83CN

7FC
82CN
83CN

22CN

5FC

22CN

21CN

21CN

9CN

9CN

FG4
FG4 Rear

A B D C G F

2−14 L2E-BW1348
 ③ Connect cable D (monitor ~ 21CN) to 21CN of the main unit.
④ Connect cable F (keyboard ~ 83CN) to 83CN of the main unit through core 7FC.
⑤ Connect cable G (mouse ~ 82CN) to 82CN of the main unit through core 7FC.
⑥ Fix cable B (shielded cable from the touch panel unit) to FG4 by using a screw.

3) Cleat the cables connected in 2) as illustrated below.

NOTE: Make sure that each PCB in PCB unit is inserted securely.

Monitor power cable

22CN

21CN

Fix F.G cables by using a wiring band

9CN

FG4

A B D C G F

Fix cables A ~ F connected to the

Take the monitor power cable out of main unit collectively by using the
the rubber clearance to the rear panel cable clamp together with the
of the main unit in the same way as monitor power cable.
in other cables.

2−15 L2E-BW1348
4) Magnetic disk mounting procedure
(This work is not necessary if magnetic disk units are mounted at the delivery time.)
① Remove the cover of the image processing unit.
② Connect the cables to the magnetic disks.
③ Mount the magnetic disks in the PCB unit.

Note 1. Mount the magnetic disks on both sides of the PCB unit. Mount the 2MD
magnetic disk on the opposite side in the following figure.

Note 2. Connect the signal cable with its connector label plane facing upward in the
same way as in the power cable.

PCB unit

Magnetic disk
（1MD）

2−16 L2E-BW1348
5) Connect cables to the monitor
Connect the monitor power cable and monitor signal cable to the specified connectors on the rear
panel of the monitor as illustrated below. (The following figure shows the rear panel of the
monitor.)

Note: Connect the power cable only to the monitor whose signal cable directly
comes out of the rear panel of the monitor.

Monitor power cable

Image processing unit

Monitor signal cable

2−17 L2E-BW1348
6) Connect the power cable to the image processing unit.
NOTE: This work differs according to the system versions. Perform the work referring
to CASE 1 and CASE 2.
CASE 1
① Fix the power cable with clamp A. Fix the cable shield by the shield clamp.
② Connect the GND cable as shown in the following figure, and fix it with clamp B.

Rear panel of main unit

1FFB

Shield clamp
Clamp B
1TN
2TN

57CN
Clamp A
56CN

RUN#
Power cable
061 GND cable

RUN#
161

③ Mounting of image processing unit cover.

Mount the cover by reversing the dismounting work (Turn on FFB)

2−18 L2E-BW1348
CASE 2
① Fix the power cable by clamp fitting A. Fix the cable shield securely by the shield fitting.
② Connect the GND cable as shown in the following figure, and fix it by clamp fitting B.

Rear view of main body

Shield fitting Clamp fitting B

1TN

Clamp fitting A

2TN

57CN

56CN
1FFB

Power cable GND cable

RUN# RUN#
161 061

③ Mounting of image processing unit cover

Mount the cover by reversing the dismounting work (Turn on FFB)

2−18−1 L2E-BW1348
Fixing of image processing unit

After turning the front casters sideways, fix them by inserting the attached caster holders.

Caster Caster holder

2−19 L2E-BW1348
2.2.5 X-ray control unit

RUN#

106 (Note 7)

RUN#

100 131
RUN#
161
107

303 RUN#

105

RUN#

131 RUN#
RUN# 100 106

RUN#

161

RUN#

105

2−20A L2E-BW1348
 Starter (Note 7)

Power supply unit (Note 7)

RUN#
302
100

131

161

100 161 131

2−21A L2E-BW1348
For cabling to the X-ray control unit, remove the front, right, and left covers, and observe the
following procedure.

Note 1) For the cables being connected from the front lower part of the X-ray control unit,
separate these cables from the front of the inverter unit and the front of the rectifier
circuit as much as possible for the purpose of preventing ingress of noises.
2) Cleat Run #100 after cleating Run #131, 161, and 106.
3) Short 2TN DI terminals if the door switch is not used, otherwise a “DOOR OPEN”
error occurs.
4) AC 100V is output to 2TN - WL terminals in the following cases.
・ AC 100V is output when No.1 of DIP switch 201SW of XCONT3 PCB is turned on
and X-rays are turned on.
・ AC 100V is output when No. 1 of DIP switch 201SW is turned off and GANTRY
POWER is turned on.

For setting the mode where the AC 100V is output when turning on X-rays,
don’t connect any fluorescent lamp between WL terminals, otherwise the
system does not function normally. Connect a lamp whose power
consumption is lower than 60W.

5) RUN#100 cable is provided with a crimp style terminal as an attachment.

Terminate this cable as occasion demands after adjusting its length.
* Treat the shield securely.
6) RUN#105 cable serves as the high-voltage transformer input cable. This cable is
not a high-voltage cable, but it produces noises. Separate this cable from the other
cables, accordingly. A change of the cable length causes an X-ray output change.
Fix the cable length within a range of 15+1/-3m.

2−22A L2E-BW1348
7) The power supply unit and starter are changed when Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is
mounted. The starter is mounted at the lower part on the right side panel of the
X-ray control unit, and external cable RUN#106 is connected to starter terminal TB1
(H7,H8,H9).

Power supply unit

RUN# 100 RUN# 131 161

Starter

Terminal TB1
(H7,H8,H9)

RUN# 106

2−22A−1 L2E-BW1348
 2.2.6 Step down transformer

Earth cable clamp

Run#

110

Power cable clamp

Run# Run#

100 003 031 061 100-E

Install the step down transformer and remove the front cover for cabling to the step down transformer.

2−23 L2E-BW1348
 Note 1) When installing the step down transformer, open the top cover and make sure without fail that the
power supply voltage at the installation site meets the setting of the step down transformer’s primary
voltage tap. If setting of the step down transformer tap is to be changed according to the voltage at
the site, change the taps of all three phases as shown in the following example.

Tap Tap

Primary side

Secondary side

(i) 400V setting (ii) 380V setting

Top view of step down transformer

2−24 L2E-BW1348
2.3 Internal wiring of system
2.3.1 Wiring on scanner rotary plate
Connect the following cables after assembling the X-ray tube assembly and detector unit if these units
are delivered separately without being assembled to the system (This work is not necessary for
standard delivery type where these units are assembled to the system at the delivery time.)
(1) Connect the anode and cathode high voltage cables to the X-ray tube assembly. (Remove dirt
from the high voltage cable plugs by using gauze or the like and coat them with silicon compound
before connecting these cables.)
Refer to Maintenance & Inspection (Appendix S).
(2) Connect X-ray tube assembly and cooler cables to terminal boards 91TN and 92TN.
(See Fig.2.3.1)
(3) Connect the oil container ⑧ and relief valve ⑨ of the X-ray tube assembly to each other by
using vent hose ⑦, and fix the hose by hose clip ⑩. (This does not apply to 1.5MHU X-ray
tube assembly.)
(4) Fix high voltage cables ②, ③, oil hose ⑥, and vent hose ⑦ securely by using tie laps so as
not to allow them to come outside.
(5) Turn the rotary plate clockwise (as viewed from the gantry unit front) slowly by hand, and make
sure that neither high voltage cables nor vent hose touches any other part.

2−25 L2E-BW1348
 Front of scanner 1 9 10 2 6

4 5 9 2
Rear of scanner

8 7 6

Note: This figure shows X-ray tube assembly UKM-5TA-01TF

(2MHU, focus move quantity reduction type)
Be careful since the mounting positions of the anode, cathode, bushing, and relief valve
are different from those in this figure in the other types.
① X-ray tube assembly ⑥ Cooling oil hose
② High voltage cable (cathode side) ⑦ Vent hose
③ High voltage cable (anode side) ⑧ Oil container
④ Cooler power cable (92TN:ED, E, L0, L100, H, H0) ⑨ Relief valve of X-ray tube assembly
⑤ Starter cable (91TN:7, 8, 9, CS, EX) ⑩ Hose clip
Fig. 2.3.1A X-ray tube assembly wiring

2−26 L2E-BW1348
 1 2 11 13
Front side of scanner

12

92TN 91TN
Rear side of scanner

8 10 7 6

Note: This figure shows GS3072 type X-ray tube assembly

Parts ⑪ ⑫ and ⑬ in this figure apply to Pronto-SE and VE.

① X-ray tube assembly ⑤ Starter cable ⑨ Relief valve of X-ray tube

assembly
② High voltage cable (cathode side) (91TN:7, 8, 9, CS, EX) ⑩ Hose clip
③ High voltage cable (anode side) ⑥ Cooling oil hose ⑪ Guard fitting 1 (Pronto VE only)
④ Cooler power cable ⑦ Vent hose ⑫ Guard fitting 2 (Pronto VE only)
（92TN:ED,E, L0, L110, H, H0） ⑧ Oil container ⑬ Guard plate (Pronto VE only)

2−26−1 L2E-BW1348
Fig. 2.3.1B Wiring of X-ray tube assembly

2−26−2 L2E-BW1348
2.3.2 Detector cabling work
・ In case of Pronto XE (CT-WA-14A)
Connect detector cables as shown in Fig. 2.3.1.

DETECTOR

1
2
11
12
13
14
23
24
25
26
35
36
DETECTOR
CONNECTOR No.

DETECTOR CABLE

1CN
2CN
3CN

11CN
12CN

13CN
14CN
15CN

22CN
23CN
24CN

25CN
26CN
27CN

35CN
36CN
CONNECTOR No.

CONVERTER PCB No.

121 12 343 434 565 56
DSC-DAS

Fig. 2.3.1 Connection diagram of detector cables

Connect the earth wire receptacle of each detector cable to each tab, referring to Fig.2.3.2 and
2.3.3. Connect the receptacles of continuous connectors (like in 1CN and 2CN, and 3CN and
4CN) to the same tab on the detector side (See Fig.2.3.3).
Connect the receptacles of adjacent connectors (like in1CN and 3CN, and 5CN and 7CN)to the
same tab between connectors on the preamplifier side (See Fig.2.3.3).
When replacing the earth plate during detector exchange, fasten the hexagon socket head bolts
with the torque of 1274N･cm ~ 1568N･cm (130kgf･cm ~ 160kgf･cm).
Each receptacle is provided with a handy lock device. Don’t pull the earth wire but draw out the
receptacle part. (The receptacle is unlocked automatically when drawing it out by holding it.)

1CN
Earth wire receptacle
2CN
Earth plate

4CN

3CN

Fig. 2.3.2 Detector side earth wire connection

2−27 L2E-BW1348
 No.1 P.C.B.

No.2 P.C.B.
Tab

Fig. 2.3.3 Mounting layout of preamplifier side connector tabs

・ In case of Pronto SE (CT-WA-14B)

Connect the detector cables referring to Fig.2.3.4.

DETECTOR
DETECTOR
ELEMENT No. 1 12 13 20 21 32
C

C
A
B

A
B

A
B

A
B

A
B

A
B

CONNECTOR No.

DETECTOR CABLE
18CN
19CN
20CN
21CN

28CN
29CN
30CN
31CN
32CN
33CN
34CN

47CN
48CN
1CN
2CN
3CN
4CN
5CN

CONNECTOR No.

CONVERTER PCB No.

1231 2 3 454 545 6 786 78
DSC-DAS

Fig. 2.3.4 Connection diagram of detector cables

Connect the preamplifier side earth wire receptacle of each detector cable to each tab, referring to
Fig.2.3.5. Connect the receptacles of adjacent connectors (like in 1CN and 4CN, and 7CN and
10CN) to the same tab between connectors.
Each receptacle is provided with a handy lock device. Don’t pull the earth wire but draw out the
receptacle part. (The receptacle is unlocked automatically when drawing it out by holding it.)

2−28 L2E-BW1348
 Tab No.1 P.C.B.

No.4 P.C.B.

No.2 P.C.B.

No.3 P.C.B.

No.5 P.C.B.

Fig. 2.3.5 Mounting layout of preamplifier side connector tabs

・ In case of Pronto VE (CT-WA-12G)

(1) Remove the preamplifier cover.

Fig. 2.3.6

(2) Connect the preamplifier cable referring to 2.3.7 Detector cable connection work
(3) Mount the preamplifier cover with due care so as not to allow the cable to be caught

2−29 L2E-BW1348
 DETECTOR
DETECTOR
ELEMENT No. 1 16 17 32

C
A
B

A
B

A
B

A
B
CONNECTOR No.

DETECTOR CABLE

106CN
107CN
108CN
13CN
14CN
15CN

58CN
59CN
60CN

61CN
62CN
63CN
CONNECTOR No.

CONVERTER PCB No. 1 16 17 32

(Mother Board slot No.) (X 5) (X 20) (X 21) (X 36)

DSC-DAS (LEFT) DSC-DAS (RIGHT)

Fig. 2.3.7 Mounting layout of preamplifier side connectors

2−30 72 L2E-BW1348
 Section 3 ADJUSTMENT

3.1 Turning on the power supply

Check the following items before turning on the power supply
(1) Check if cable connection destinations are correct. Check if terminal screws are fastened securely.
(2) Check the insulation between each power line and the grounding point in all units.
(3) Check if PCB and connectors are securely connected.

3.2 Operation check of image processing unit in central operator console

POWER ON

(It takes about 2 minutes after turning on the power supply)

NO
Is the unit initialized?
(Screen display)

YES
Check if PCB are inserted securely and
also cables are connected securely
Check DC power supply
Image display

YES
NO Is the unit
Normal? initialized?

YES NO

Check by the
check program

OK

Fig. 3.2.1

3−1 L2E-BW1348
3.3 Operation check and adjustment of scanner unit
(1) Turning on the power supply
Open the front cover and side covers of the scanner unit to make sure that circuit breakers 21FFB, 22FFB,
31FFB are turned on (set to the upper position) and switches 21SW and 22SW are set to NORMAL (lower
position). When the front cover is opened, front cover limit switch 3LS is turned off. Turn on the limit
switch by using a tie lap or the like.

Inverter
PCB unit Ⅰ 1SW:Manual scan push-button switch
Chassis 2

Check window

MCPUC
PCB 21FFB
22FFB
TCPUB
PCB
21SW:Stationary/normal selector switch
2SW:
Manual scan push- 22SW:Brake free selector switch
button switch
3SW:Manual-normal selector switch
4SW:EMG switch

31FFB

Chassis 3

3LS:Lift cover switch

31PL 32PL
Front view of scanner Right side view of scanner

Fig. 3.3.1 Mounting layout of scanner switches and PCB

(2) By turning on the power switch on the scanner gantry

0
side on the central operator console, the STATUS 1
2
indicator lamp on MCPUC PCB changes since the CPU 3 STATUS indicator lamps
4
is being checked first. Then, power is applied to the 5
6
inverter. When no abnormal symptom occurs, 7
STATUS indicator lamp 0 lights to be ready for ABORT indicator lamp, check pin
receiving the communication from the operator
ZEBRA indicator lamp, check pin
console.
V-TRG indicator lamp, check pin

X-TRG indicator lamp, check pin

V-TRG2 check pin
DEADMAN check pin
DGND check pin
RESET switch

Fig. 3.3.2 Mounting layout of indicator lamps on MCPUC PCB

3−2 L2E-BW1348
(3) Check parameter values according to the following procedure after power supply has been applied to the
motor controller (inverter).
Change the parameter values according to the same procedure when the motor controller has been replaced
or when the values have been changed. Data n025, 026, 027, 028, and 031 (Pronto-VE includes data n024,
too.) have been finely adjusted by scan speed adjustment and scanner stationary position adjustment.
Don’t change them, except for readjustment. (Adjusted values remain held even after the power supply
has been turned off)

3−3A L2E-BW1348
 * In case of inverter type CIMR-V7AA22P2
The following figure shows the names of keys and their functions on the inverter operator panel. By
turning on the power supply, FREF lamp of handy run lamps lights. By pressing DSPL key, the lamp
indications change in the order of FREF →FOUT → IOUT → MNTR → F/R→ LO/RE →
PRGM →FREF. For running the inverter, reset the lamp to the FREF lighting condition.

Indicator

Data indicator

DIGITAL
Handy run lamps OPERATOR
Lighting of the lamps of these items moves
JVOP-140 Frequency setting
one by one each time DSPL key is FREF FOUT IOUT MNTR
control knob
pressed once. Also, the upper data F/R LO/RE PRGM Changes the frequency

display contents change correspondingly. setting continuously.

DSPL RUN
Changes the handy run contents MIN MAX

DATA STOP
Increases constant No/ data value ENTER RESET

Enters constant data

Data are displayed after selecting
Issues a run command
constant No. by PRGM key.  Decreases constant Issues a run stop command 
No/data value Trouble reset key in case
of the occurrence of a
trouble

Status indicator lamp

(same function as in RUN lamp of main unit)

Names of handy run lamps Parenthesized colors in ( ) indicate the lighting colors of lamps

FREF FOUT IOUT MNTR

Frequency command setting/ Output frequency Output current monitor Multifunction monitor
monitor (green) monitor (green) (green) (green)

F/R LO/RE PRGM

reverse selection of operator Local/remote selection Constant No/data
run command (green) (red) (red)

Fig. 3.3.3 Inverter operator panel

3−4 L2E-BW1348
For referring to setting parameters or changing the setting, light PRGM lamp, select a parameter number
according to the following procedure, and refer to or change data. After the end, reset to FREF lighting condition
by pressing DSPL key.

Remote/local selection Method of changing data by selecting parameter No.

LO/RE

DSPL ・Setting of parameter n003 (run command selection)

Parameter No.
/data
PRGM PRGM ENTER PRGM PRGM ENTER

Parameter n003 run Initialization contents Setting selection [1]

command selection [0] operator Control circuit terminal
DSPL command command (Data flickers
during change)

PRGM PRGM

FREF Returns to Data setting

constant No. display
after 1 second

NOTE: Don’t change to [LO], but keep [RE] unchanged as preset at the delivery time from the
works in remote/local selection. Change it to [RE] if the initial value is set to [LO]. If
[LO] remains set, the scanner does not rotate even if the mode is returned to FREF
mode.

Fig. 3.3.4 Inverter operation procedure

3−5 L2E-BW1348
 List of inverter setting parameters (For inverter type CIMR-V7AA22P2)…In case of Pronto-SE/XE
Parameter Maker’s set Adjusting
No. Parameter names Remarks
No. values values
1 Constant write 001 1 4 Settable up to 4: n001 ~ n179
2 Run command selection 003 0 1 1: Input terminals are effective
Frequency command selection 1: Frequency command 1 is
3 004 0 1
effective
4 Reverse run disable selection 006 0 1 1: Reverse run is disabled
5 Maximum output frequency 011 60.0 50.0
6 Maximum voltage 012 200.0 180.0
7 Maximum voltage output frequency 013 60.0 50.0
8 Intermediate output frequency 014 1.5 15.0
9 Intermediate output frequency voltage 015 12.0 54.0
10 Minimum output frequency 016 1.5 0.1
11 Minimum output frequency voltage 017 12.0 18.0
Acceleration/
12 018 0 1 1: 0.01s unit
deceleration time unit selection
13 Acceleration time 1 019 10.0 5.00
14 Deceleration time 1 020 10.0 5.00
15 Frequency command 1 024 6.00 0.00
16 Frequency command 2 025 0.00 45.60 *Note 2
17 Frequency command 3 026 0.00 30.40 *Note 2
18 Frequency command 4 027 0.00 22.80 *Note 2
19 Frequency command 5 028 0.00 15.20 *Note 2
20 Frequency command 6 029 0.00 11.60
21 Frequency command 7 030 0.00 0.60
22 Frequency command 8 031 0.00 0.80 *Note 3
23 Motor rated current 036 8.5 7.0
24 Input terminal 7 function selection 056 10 8 8: Multi-stage speed command 3
25 Carrier frequency 080 3 13 13:15kHz
26 DC braking current 089 50 100
Stall prevention function selection
27 092 0 1 1: Not provided
during deceleration
Stall prevention operation level during
28 093 170 200
acceleration
Stall prevention operation level during
29 094 160 200
run
30 Motor rating slip 106 2.9 2.4
31 Motor phase component resistance 107 0.800 1.175
32 Motor no-load current 110 35 52

NOTE 1) This table shows initial set values when replacing the inverter. Don’t change any parameter
values other than indicated here. Don’t change any parameter during motor rotation.
2) Parameters n025, n026, n027 and n028 are finally adjusted in case of speed check described
later.
3) Parameter n031 is finally adjusted during stop adjustment described later.
4) When the content of parameter number other than the number in the table is erroneously altered,
set the parameter No. n001 to [8] once. All parameter values return to the set values at the time

3−6A L2E-BW1348
of shipment from the factory of inverter maker.

3−7A L2E-BW1348
 List of inverter setting parameters … In case of Pronto-VE
Parameter Maker’s set Adjusting
No. Parameter names Remarks
No. values values
Constant write Settable over a range from 4.n001 to
1 001 1 4
n179
2 Run command selection 003 0 1 1: Input terminals are effective
3 Frequency command selection 004 0 1 1: Frequency command 1 is effective
4 Reverse run disable selection 006 0 1 1: Reverse run is disabled
5 Maximum output frequency 011 60.0 60.0
6 Maximum voltage 012 200.0 200.0
7 Maximum voltage output frequency 013 60.0 60.0
8 Intermediate output frequency 014 1.5 15.0
9 Intermediate output frequency voltage 015 12.0 54.0
10 Minimum output frequency 016 1.5 0.1
11 Minimum output frequency voltage 017 12.0 18.0
Acceleration/
12 018 0 1 1: 0.01s unit
deceleration time unit selection
13 Acceleration time 1 019 10.0 6.00
14 Deceleration time 1 020 10.0 6.00
15 Frequency command 1 024 6.00 56.50 *Note 2
16 Frequency command 2 025 0.00 45.60 *Note 2
17 Frequency command 3 026 0.00 30.40 *Note 2
18 Frequency command 4 027 0.00 22.80 *Note 2
19 Frequency command 5 028 0.00 15.20 *Note 2
20 Frequency command 6 029 0.00 11.60
21 Frequency command 7 030 0.00 0.60
22 Frequency command 8 031 0.00 0.80 *Note 3
23 Motor rated current 036 8.5 7.0
24 Input terminal 7 function selection 056 10 8 8: Multi-stage speed command 3
25 Carrier frequency 080 3 13 13:15kHz
26 DC braking current 089 50 100
Stall prevention function selection
27 092 0 1 1: Not provided
during deceleration
Stall prevention operation level during
28 093 170 200
acceleration
Stall prevention operation level during
29 094 160 200
run
30 Motor rating slip 106 2.9 2.4
31 Motor phase component resistance 107 0.800 1.175
32 Motor no-load current 110 35 52

NOTE 1) This table shows initial set values when replacing the inverter Don’t change any parameter
values other than indicated here. Don’t change any parameter during motor rotation
2) Parameters n024, n025, n026, n027, and n028 are finally adjusted in case of speed check
described later.
3) Parameter n031 is finally adjusted during stop adjustment described later
4) When the content of parameter number other than the number in the table is erroneously altered,
set the parameter No. n001 to [8] once. All parameter values return to the set values at the time

3−6−1 L2E-BW1348
of shipment from the factory of inverter maker.

3−6−2 L2E-BW1348
(4) Select 3SW switch to the manual side
Perform manual scan operation by pressing 1SW and 2SW switches at the same time to make sure that the
rotating part does not contact any fixed part.

(5) Perform a series of scan operation at a scan speed of 0.8sec (in case of VE only) 1sec, 1.5sec, 2sec, and 3sec
in NORMAL SCAN mode, to make sure that the operation ends normally without being interrupted
halfway. If the X-ray system adjustment and check is not completed yet, perform scanning under the
turn-off condition of X-rays (by turning off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit). Perform scan once each.

(6) Check the scanner speed from the operator console after checking the manual scan operation in (4).
1) Display the basic screen for scanner check in the operation panel screen.

2) Select SCANNER CHECK from MAIN MENU. Select SCANNING TIME CHECK out of actual
check items in SCANNER CHECK being displayed in SUB MENU.

3−7A L2E-BW1348
3) By selecting SCANNING TIME CHECK in SUB MENU, SELECT appears below SUB MENU.
Check the desired check time out of 1.0sec, 1.5sec, 2.0 sec., and 3.0sec. (0.8sec, 1.0sec, 1.5sec, 2.0sec,
and 3.0sec in case of VE) After clicking a selection item. Click EXECUTE button, and the check
operation is started.

In case of Pronto-SE/XE In case of Pronto-XE/SE/VE

(V1.00 system soft) (After than V1.10 system soft)

4) When check ends, the required CW scan time is displayed in STATUS part.
Make sure that respective speed values conform to the specified values (A message “WITHIN A
SPECIFICATION” is displayed).
5) If the speed does not conform to the specified values, set it to the value, whichever smaller in the
adjusting value range by adjusting the motor controller parameters according to the following table.

3−8A L2E-BW1348
 In case of Pronto-SE/XE In case of Pronto-VE

Parameter names Parameter names

Adjusting Adjusting
Speed Inverter Speed Inverter
values values
（V7AA22P2） （V7AA22P2）
1.0 1.00±0.03 n025 0.8 0.80±0.02 n024
1.5 1.50±0.05 n026 1.0 1.00±0.03 n025
2.0 2.00±0.06 n027 1.5 1.50±0.05 n026
3.0 3.00±0.10 n028 2.0 2.00±0.06 n027
3.0 3.00±0.10 n028
As the parameter value increases, the speed value decreases.
As the parameter value decreases, the speed value increases.

(6) Adjust the parameters so that the stop position detection sensor center is closest to the striker center
when the scanner has stopped after rotating it.
If the distance between these centers is deviated from each other more than 2mm, adjust the inverter
parameter n031 every 0.05 so that the deviation between the sensor center and the striker center does
not exceed 2mm.
As n031 increases as 0.80 → 0.85 →0.90, the striker position shifts in the plus direction.
As n031 decreases as 0.80 → 0.75 →0.70, the striker position shifts in the minus direction.
If the striker does not stop at the center completely, set it to stop after being deviated toward minus
direction. If the scan rotation is started and stopped repeatedly, the motor and regenerative resistor
are heated to decrease the braking force, causing the striker position to be gradually deviated toward
the plus direction. Don’t repeat the stop operation at the sensor position more than 5 times.
If it is desired to repeat the stop operation more than 5 times, pause it for longer than 3 minutes before
restarting the operation.

Striker sensor

(-) direction (+) direction

Rear side view

SENS2A PCB

Fig. 3.3.5 Mounting layout of sensor and striker

3−9 L2E-BW1348
3.4 Operation check of patient table and adjustment of scanner gantry tilt

(1) Vertical move of patient table

(a) Lift the tabletop to 750 +0/-3mm above the floor level, and make sure that the height display is 000.
(b) Make sure that the patient table height is 1000±3mm above the floor and the display indicates 250
when lifting the tabletop up to 1000mm. Make sure that the lift switch LED goes out.
(c) Make sure that the patient table height is 380±3mm above the floor when the table lowers to the lowest
position. Make sure that the lowering switch LED goes out. If deviated, adjust TDRV1D PCB in the
table according to the following procedure.
(d) Adjust VR6 of TDRVID PCB so that the table height indication becomes 079 when the patient table
height above the floor level is 829+0/-1mm.
(e) Adjust VR7 of TDRV1D PCB so that the table height indication becomes 250mm when the patient
table height above the floor level is 1000±3mm.
NOTE 1) No display appears if the patient table is lower than 750mm above the floor
level.

Mounting position of Reference adjusting value

VR6 of TDRV1D PCB Change quantity in 180°rotation
See Fig.3.4.1 Display Display = approx. 5mm
decreases increases
VR6

Mounting position of Reference adjusting value

VR7 of TDRV1D PCB Change quantity in 3 turns
See Fig.3.4.1 Display Display = approx. 5mm
increases decreases
VR7

3−10 L2E-BW1348
 TDRV1D PCB DC power supply (5V) Table control unit
Table interior

Protective cover

Scanner side
Bellows cover

For speed For DA value VR6

adjustment adjustment (height display offset adjustment)

DSW1 VR7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (height display gain adjustment)

TDRV1D PCB

VR1,VR2 VR3
(DA output adjustment) (Speed offset adjustment)

Fig. 3.4.1 Mounting layout of component parts of patient table

3−11 L2E-BW1348
(2) Gantry tilting
(a) Set an angle gauge on the scanner gantry and set the tilt angle to 0°.
Adjust VR3 of TCPUB PCB so that the angle indicator lamp goes out (0°).
(b) Tilt the scanner gantry toward the patient table and check if the tilt angle indication becomes +25 when
the angle gauge indicates +25° and the READY lamp for tilting toward the patient table turns off.
If not, adjust VR4 of TCPUB PCB to set the angle indication to +25. After adjusting VR4, check
adjustment item (a).

For tilting the scanner gantry before mounting the lift cover, fix the gas spring to the frame
(square pipe) with Tyraps or the like, and be careful not to allow the gas spring to collide
against the scanner gantry to be broken.

(c) Check the gantry tilting in the same way down to –25° when the scanner gantry tilts in the direction
opposite to the patient table.

3−12 L2E-BW1348
(3) Longitudinal move of tabletop
Check the tabletop feed speed by SCANNER CHECK software (MOVING SPEED CHECK).

Operation procedure
1) Display the basic screen of SCANNER CHECK on the operation panel screen.

2) Select TABLE CHECK from MAIN MENU. Select MOVING SPEED CHECK out of the actual
check items in TABLE CHECK being displayed in SUB MENU.

3−13 L2E-BW1348
3) EXECUTE button becomes effective when selecting MOVING SPEED CHECK in SUB MENU.
Check operation is started by clicking EXECUTE button.

Start checking the speed from the position more than 400mm forward from the extreme
retreat position of the tabletop (in the direction opposite to the gantry).
Speed check does not function if the tabletop is set to the forward or backward limit
position.

3−14 L2E-BW1348
(4) Operate the patient table by the gantry and adjust each item by TDRV1D PCB in the patient table.
1) Make sure that table height display indicates “1” and tilt display indicates “1.5”.
(See the following table A).
2) Retreat the tabletop and adjust VR3 of TDRV1D PCB so that the table speed becomes 1.5±0.1 (mm/s).

VR3 mounting position Adjustment reference

in TDRV1D PCB Speed Speed Speed change quantity in 180°rotation
See Fig.3.4.1 decreases increases = approx. 1mm/s

VR3

3) Set the table height display to “13” by pressing RESET key several times.
4) Retreat the tabletop and adjust DSW1 of TDRV1D PCB so that the table speed becomes 60±3 (mm/s).
(Adjust DIP SW value so that the table speed becomes closest to 60mm/s, referring to the following
table B.)
5) Move the tabletop forward and adjust DSW1 of TDRV1D PCB so that the table speed becomes 60±3
(mm/s). (Adjust DIP SW value so that the table speed becomes closest to 60mm/s, referring to the
following table C.)
6) Move the patient table longitudinally and make sure that each speed is within the error range.

Operate the tabletop according to the tabletop high-speed feed procedure.

Table A Display contents at each position

Table height indicator Indicates item numbers of each adjustment speed in check mode.
They change over a range from 0 to 23, each time RESET key is pressed once.
Tilt indicator Indicates each adjusting speed value in check mode.
Each adjusting speed value changes over a range from 0 to 60 (mm/s) each time
RESET key is pressed once.
Note: Speed 60mm/s is not displayable to be blank.

Table B DSW1 adjustment (1)

Bit No. Speed correction values
1 2
OFF OFF Speed change quantity:0％
OFF ON Speed change quantity:＋1.5％ (Approx.＋0.9mm/s)
ON OFF Speed change quantity:0％
ON ON Speed change quantity:−1.5％ (Approx.−0.9mm/s)

3−15 L2E-BW1348
Table C DSW1 adjustment (2)
Bit No.
Speed correction values
3 4 5
OFF OFF OFF Speed change quantity:0％
OFF OFF ON Speed change quantity:＋1％ (Approx.＋0.6mm/s)
OFF ON OFF Speed change quantity:＋2％ (Approx.＋1.2mm/s)
OFF ON ON Speed change quantity:＋3％ (Approx.＋1.8mm/s)
ON OFF OFF Speed change quantity:0％
ON OFF ON Speed change quantity:−1％ (Approx.−0.6mm/s)
ON ON OFF Speed change quantity:−2％ (Approx.−1.2mm/s)
ON ON ON Speed change quantity:−3％ (Approx.−1.8mm/s)

Table D Operation check at each speed

Table height indicator Tilt indicator Operation speed
1 1.5 1.5±0.1mm/s
12 20.0 20.0±1.0mm/s
13 Blank 60.0±3.0mm/s
14 12.4 12.4±0.6mm/s

Speed 0 ~ 60 (mm/s) is set to 0 ~ 23 being displayed in table height indicator. However, the
values shown in Table D only are used for adjustment work.

3−16 L2E-BW1348
(5) Check and adjustment of stable stop position

1) Move the tabletop from the console side by index 10mm feeding in several times. Check by the
display each tabletop feeding is correct as the previously set value.
2) If the tabletop does not move correctly as the previously set value, adjust DIPSW (17F) on the TCPUB
PCB referring to the index correction value in the table A.

Table A Index correction value

Bit No.
Index correction value
8 7
OFF OFF Predetermined value -0.1mm
OFF ON Predetermined value -0.2mm
ON OFF Predetermined value -0.3mm
ON ON Predetermined value -0.4mm

3) After the adjustment, repeat the same work in 1) to check by the display that the tabletop moves
correctly as the previously set value.

3−16−1 L2E-BW1348
3.5 Adjustment of X-ray system
(In case of Hitachi 1.5M/2M/3.5MHU or Varian 2MHU X-ray tube is mounted)
3.5.1 X-ray tube assembly check
Check the following operation.
(1) The cooler fan is rotating.
(2) The cooler pump operates and cooling oil is circulating.

3.5.2 Anode rotation drive unit (starter) adjustment

Connect a digital voltmeter across H7 and H9 of terminal 3TN of the X-ray control unit. Turn off
2FFB of the X-ray control unit.
Select 120kV, 150mA, slice thickness 10mm, 2-sec scan on the central operator console, and press
STANDBY . As a result of this operation, the anode rotation drive unit operates in the following
sequence. Perform the adjustment and check as shown in the following table.
(Low speed mode)

Approx. 10 minutes
Boost
Run
Braking

HITACHI X-ray tubes

＜1500kHU＞ ＜2000kHU＞ ＜3500kHU＞ Adjusting
Items Adjustment and Adjustment and Adjustment and position
check value check value check value (Rotor PCB)
Boost
200Vacrms±10% 200Vacrms±10% 200Vacrms±10% ――
voltage
4.5 +0.5 17 +0.5 +0.5 1VR
Boost time s s 19 s
-0 -0 -0
Running 50Hz : 80+5 / -0 50Hz : 80+5 / -0 Vacrms 50Hz : 80+5 / -0 3VR
Vacrms Vacrms
voltage 60Hz : 85+5 / -0 60Hz : 85+5 / -0 Note 1 60Hz : 85+5 / -0
Anode
rotation >2600r / min >2700r / min >2700r / min ――
speed
Braking
70±10Vdc 70±10Vdc 70±10Vdc ――
voltage
Braking +0.5 +0.5 +0.5 2VR
6.0 s 10 s 10 s
time -0 -0 -0

For measuring the voltage, use a true RMS meter.

Operate the starter once more after braking, and check the anode rotation and braking by
applying your hand to the X-ray tube housing.

Note 1. Change the adjusting value to 70+5/-0 when mounting the Varian X-ray tube.

3−17A L2E-BW1348
3.6 Adjustment of X-ray system (In case of Varian 3.5MHU X-ray tube is mounted)
3.6.1 X-ray tube assembly check
Check the following operation
(1) The cooler fan is rotating
(2) The cooler pump operates and the cooling oil is circulating

3.6.2 Anode rotation drive unit (starter) adjustment

Connect a digital voltmeter across H7 and H9 of terminal TB1 of the built-in starter of the X-ray
control unit. Turn off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit. Select 120kV, 200mA, slice thickness 10mm,
2-sec scan on the central operator console, and press STANDBY .
As a result of this operation, the anode rotation drive unit operates in the following sequence.
Perform the adjustment and check as shown in the following table.
Note:High-speed rotation is not used.

(Low speed mode)

Approx. 290sec.
Boost
Run

Braking

Fig.3.6.1

Varian X-ray tube (GS3072)

< 3500kHU> Adjusting position
Items
Adjustment and check value (CPU CONT PCB)
Boost voltage 230+10/-0 Vac rms 16VR
Boost time 12+0.5/-0 sec. 10VR
Running voltage 88+5/-0 Vac rms 4RSW
Anode rotation speed >2700 r/min ―――
Barking voltage 90±5 Vdc 5RSW
Braking time 12.7±0.5 sec. 14VR
Hold ON time 250±1 sec. 12VR

3−18 L2E-BW1348
(1) Output voltage adjustment (CPU CONT PCB)
Note 1) Check the symbols of adjustment VR and RSW sufficiently with due care so as
not to mistake them. Refer to the figure (VR and RSW positions on CPU
CONT PCB).
2) Connect a TRUE RMS meter across H7 and H9 securely, and measure the
output voltage.
3) Adjust VR and RSW while turning them gradually. VR can be adjusted
continuously, but RSW changes stepwise from 0 to F.
4) The boost voltage cannot be adjusted in real time during boosting. After
adjusting VR first, check the output voltage by boosting. Boosting is
necessary about 3 times until the feedback control is stabilized. Check the
output voltage after boosting three times, accordingly.
5) The running voltage and braking voltage can be adjusted in real time,
respectively. However, since the output voltage changes stepwise, set RSW
to a position being closest to the specifications.
6) Select the correct drive frequency.
For details, refer to 3.6.2.1 and subsequent paragraphs.

3−19 L2E-BW1348
 3.6.2.1 Starter CPU-CONT PCB adjusting method
CPU-CONT PCB (inside the anode rotation drive unit)

Fig. 3.6.2 Entire CPU-CONT PCB

Low-speed running Low-speed braking

voltage adjustment voltage adjustment

Numerical
display LED

1RSW for
display
setting
change

Low-speed
Low-speed braking boosting voltage Low-speed hold
time adjustment adjustment ON time
adjustment Low-speed boosting
time adjustment

Fig.3.6.3 CPU-CONT PCB adjusting positions

3−20 L2E-BW1348
3.6.2.2 Control volume on PCB and dial time adjustment (Adjust VR while checking the LED display)
Set 1RSW (16 position code switch) on CPU CONT PCB to the position corresponding to the time to
be adjusted, and display the set time. Adjust respective time, referring to the following table. Set
the starter to be idle.
1RSW Contents of numerical VR to be Display of numerical
Setting methods
position display LED adjusted display LED
0 Standby condition − − −
4 Low-speed boosting time 10VR 4L☆☆☆ Set an actual adjusting value
Set it assuming that the running
5 Low-speed hold ON time 12VR 5L☆☆☆
rotation time is 40 sec.
6 Low-speed braking time 14VR 6L☆☆☆ Set an actual adjusting value
* Since the ROM of PCB is set to 40 seconds as a fixed value, the hold ON time becomes 290 seconds
(total) - 40 seconds (ROM) = 250 seconds (set value), assuming that it is desired to set the running
rotation time to 290 seconds, for example.
* ☆☆☆ becomes the adjusting value (the time to be adjusted is displayed).
* 7 ~ F positions of 1RSW are used for adjusting in the Works.
* After the adjustment has been completed, reset 1RSW to 0 position.

3.6.2.3 Voltage adjustment (Measure H7-H9 voltage by a TRUE RMS meter)

Voltage setting Mode VR and RSW to be adjusted Remarks
Low-speed boosting voltage AC 16VR Display does not change in real time
Low-speed running voltage AC 4RSW Adjustable while monitoring the display
Low-speed braking voltage DC 5RSW Adjustable while monitoring the display
(Check the voltage in DC mode)

3−21 L2E-BW1348
3.6.2.4 CPU-CONT PCB adjustment

Adjusting VR and RSW Measuring points

No. Adjustment and check Remarks
value to be adjusted and modes
1 Low-speed boosting time As instructed 10VR 1RSW-4
check and adjustment
2 Low-speed hold ON time 0 12VR 1RSW-5 For shortening the
change adjustment time
3 Low-speed braking time As instructed 14VR 1RSW-6
4 Low-speed boosting voltage As instructed 16VR AC voltage across Caution
adjustment and check H7 and H9
(1) Select 120kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, 2-sec scan and press STANDBY .
(2) Observe and record H7-H9 voltage. Don’t touch 16VR. Proceed to the next adjustment if
adjustment is not necessary.
(3) If voltage adjustment is necessary, change it by one scale division of 16VR.
(4) The running voltage turns off in 40 seconds at present. After confirming that the braking voltage
ends, select 120kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, 2-sec scan and press STANDBY .
(5) Observe and record H7-H9 voltage. Don’t touch 16VR. Proceed to the next adjustment if
adjustment is not necessary.
(6) Check a difference between the first boosting voltage and the present boosting voltage, and decide the
next adjusting voltage by comparing the change quantity of one scale division of 16VR and the
change quantity of the boosting voltage, and change the scale divisions correspondingly.
(7) The running voltage turns off in 40 seconds at present. After confirming that the braking voltage
ends, select 120kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, 2-sec scan and press STANDBY .
(8) Terminate the adjustment after repeating steps 5 ~ 7.
5 Low-speed running voltage As instructed 4RSW AC voltage across
adjustment and check H7 and H9
6 Low-speed braking voltage As instructed 5RSW DC voltage across
adjustment and check H7 and H9
7 Low-speed boosting voltage As instructed 16VR AC voltage across Caution
adjustment and check H7 and H9
8 Low-speed hold ON time As instructed 12VR 1RSW-5 Running rotation
setting time - 40sec.
9 Measurement of each setting As instructed Stop watch Execute
time

3−22 L2E-BW1348
 F 0 1 2

3 4 5 6
C D
B
7 8 9 A

1DSW
1RSW 3RSW 5RSW
1 2 3 4 2RSW 4RSW

Numerical display LED

CPU CONT PCB

Fig. 3.6.4

3.6.2.5 Anode rotation drive unit conditions display

(a) is displayed on the numerical display LED under the idle condition.
(b) is displayed on the numerical display LED in low-speed boosting mode.
(c) is displayed on the numerical display LED in low-speed running mode.
(d) is displayed on the numerical display LED in low-speed braking mode.

3−23 L2E-BW1348
3.7 kV, mA waveform check

Perform the following check in the stationary scan mode without fail.

Connect probe CH1 of an oscilloscope to TP6 of CONT-D3 board in PCB unit of the scanner turn plate.
Connect the probe CH2 to TP8 of CONT-B1 board. Connect GND of the probe to GND terminal on the board
(Use an oscilloscope having the storage mode for the purpose of avoiding the X-rays exposure).
Set the oscilloscope to CHOP mode, the time range to 0.1s/div, and the voltage range to CH1: 2V/div, CH2:
1V/div. Perform the X-ray exposure by the following operation on the central operator console and check the
following waveforms.

(1) Select 120kV, 100mA, 10mm slice, 2-second stationary scan in the MAINTENANCE SCAN mode.

CH1 kV(Anode)
20kV/div

CH2 mA(Cathode)
50mA/div

3−24 L2E-BW1348
3.8 Filament heating conditions adjustment before X-ray exposure

Carry out the following adjustment in the stationary mode without fail in the same way as in kV,
mA waveform check.

(1) Connect a digital voltmeter across TP1 and GND of the filament board in the scanner turn plate. (DC volt
range)
(2) Select the conditions of 120kV, 150mA, 10mm slice thickness, and 2-sec stationary scan on the central
operator console, and make a scan. Measure the voltage across TP1 and GND during X-ray exposure.
(3) Turn off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit, make a scan under the same condition as specified in (2), and
adjust 3VR of CONT B-1 board of the scanner turn plate so that the voltage during the exposure sequence
becomes equal to the value measured in (2).
(4) Turn on 2FFB.

After completion of the above adjustment, make a final check as follows.

Measure “XD-OFD+BIAS” under 120kV, 25mA, 5mm slice thickness, and 3-sec scan speed. Check raw data
of detector channel shown in Table 3.8.1 to make sure that it is within the following range.

Variation value

Min. Max. Min. Max.

1 view 1 view

Stable value

(Low adjusting condition) (High adjusting condition)

Variation value
×100≦4%
Stable value

Table 3.8.1

Model Channel number to be checked

Pronto-SE 376

Pronto-XE 288

3−25 L2E-BW1348
3.9 X-ray tube aging
Perform the X-ray tube aging according to the following procedure.
1. In case of 1.5MHU
(1) Repeat warming up twice.
(2) Wait for 10 minutes while keeping the power supply turned on.
(3) Perform serial scan 20 times under the conditions of 130kV, 175mA, 10mm slice, and 3.0 sec. scan at
41 seconds interval without scanning.
2. In case of 2MHU
(1) Perform serial scan 20 times under the conditions of 100kV, 120mA, 10mm slice, and 3.0 sec. scan at
11 seconds interval without scanning.
(2) Wait for 50 seconds without scanning.
(3) Perform scanning 6 times under the X-ray conditions specified in (1) at 50 seconds interval without
scanning.
(4) Wait for 30 minutes without scanning while keeping the power supply turned on.
(5) Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 120kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, and 2.0 sec. scan.
(6) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(7) Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 130kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, and 2.0 sec. scan at
11 seconds interval without scanning.
3. In case of 3.5 MHU
(1) Perform serial scan 26 times under the conditions of 100kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, and 3.0 sec. scan at
11 seconds interval without scanning.
(2) Wait for 50 seconds without scanning.
(3) Perform scanning 6 times under the X-ray conditions specified in (1) at 30 seconds interval without
scanning.
(4) Wait for 30 minutes without scanning while keeping the power supply turned on.
(5) Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 120kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, and 2.0 sec. scan at
10 seconds interval without scanning.
(6) Wait for 30 seconds without scanning.
(7) Perform serial scan 4 times under the conditions of 130kV, 200mA, 10mm slice, and 2.0 sec. scan at
10 seconds interval without scanning.

3−26 L2E-BW1348
3.10 kV, mA adjustment and check
(1) Measure the anode tube voltage and cathode side neutral point current by an oscilloscope in the same way
as in 3.7.
(CONTD3 TP6･･･+kV, CONTB1 TP8･･･cathode side mA)
(2) Select 120kV, 25mA, 10mm slice, 3-sec scan to make a scan. Observe kV and mA waveforms.
(3) Since the tube current can be finely adjusted by mA (coordinates 11A) of the DIP switch on IF B-l board,
set it to be as close to 25mA as possible.

NOTE: DIP SW No. 1 ~ 4 are effective to be able to set from 0 (all OFF) to F (all ON).
The tube current increases every 2 ~ 3mA as the switch is set with an increment of 1
bit.

(4) kV and mA check

Make sure that the tube voltage and tube current are within the following ranges in all possible
combinations of kV and mA of X-ray exposure.
kV : ±7%
mA : ±10%

NOTE: kV is the peak value and mA is a mean value except for a position where a rush
current flows. The tolerance value of 25mA is ±15%.

3−27 L2E-BW1348
3.11 Adjustment of X-ray field
3.11.1A Adjustment in X-axis direction (in case of 2 or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly)
(i) Loosen four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.
(ii) Loosen nuts ②.
(iii) Adjust the X-axis direction position of X-ray tube by using bolts ○
3A ○3B .

(For this adjustment, mount a dial gauge as shown in the following figure, and check the moving
quantity of the X-ray tube. Remove the dial gauge after adjustment.)
(iv) After adjustment, tighten nuts ② to lock bolts ○ 3A ○
3B securely.

(v) Fasten four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.

R direction

Z direction

M8 hexagon socket head bolt ④

X direction
A

Bolt 5R
(Bolt 5F on the front side)
Nut ⑥

Fig. 3.11.1 Positioning of 2, 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly

M8 hexagon socket head bolt ①

Nut ②
Dial gauge

Bolt 3B (for pushing)

Bolt 3A (for pulling)

X direction

Fig. 3.11.2 Enlarged view of part A

3.11.2 A Adjustment in Z-axis direction (in case of 2 or 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly)
(i) Loosen four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ④, and loosen nuts ⑥.
(ii) Move the X-ray tube toward the Z-axis direction by using bolt ○
5F (on the table side of the X-ray

tube holder) and bolt ○

5R (on the scanner backward side of X-ray tube holder).

(iii) After adjustment, tighten nuts ⑥ to lock bolts ○

5F ○
5R securely.

(a) For moving the X-ray tube toward the table, loosen bolt ○
5F and fasten bolt ○
5R .

(b) For moving the X-ray tube toward the scanner backward, loosen bolt ○
5R and then, fasten

bolt ○
5F .

(iv) Fasten four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ④ (with the tightening torque of 1960N･cm (200kgf･
cm))

3−28 L2E-BW1348
 ○ ○
Bolt 5F （Bolt 5R on the rear side）
and nut ⑥
Fig. 3.11.3 Positioning of 2, 3.5MHU X-ray tube assembly

3.11.1 B Adjustment in X-axis direction (in case of 1.5MHU X-ray tube assembly)
(i) Loosen four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.
(ii) Loosen nuts ② and adjust the X-axis direction position of X-ray tube by using M6 hexagon bolts
○
3A ○
3B . (Check the moving quantity of the X-ray tube by using a dial gauge.)
(iii) After adjustment, tighten nuts ② to lock bolts ○
3A ○
3B securely.

(vi) Fasten four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.

3.11.2 B Adjustment in Z-axis direction (in case of 1.5 MHU X-ray tube assembly)
(i) Loosen four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ⑦.
(ii) Adjust the Z-axis direction position by using M6hexagon socket head bolts and nuts ⑧⑨.
(iii) Fasten four M8 hexagon socket head bolts ⑦.
(iv) After adjustment, tighten nuts to lock bolts ⑧⑨ securely.

M8 hexagon socket head bolt ⑦ M8 hexagon socket head bolt ④

M6 hexagon socket head bolt, nut 3A 2

(for pulling) Z direction

M6 hexagon socket head bolt, nut 3B 2

M8 hexagon socket head bolt ①
(for pushing)

R direction

M6 hexagon bolt,nut ⑨ M6 hexagon bolt, nut ⑧

(for pulling) (for pushing)
X direction

Fig. 3.11.4 Positioning of 1.5MHU X-ray tube assembly

3−29 L2E-BW1348
3.11.3 R-direction adjustment (Common to each X-ray tube assembly).
(i) Loosen M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.
(ii) Align the center mark line of the X-ray tube housing with the end face of the X-ray tube holder.
(iii) Fasten M8 hexagon socket head bolts ①.

Center mark line

X-ray tube holder

Center mark line

Fig.3.11.5

3−30 L2E-BW1348
3.11.3A Additional item to the adjusting method in X, Z, and R directions in case of Pronto-SE and VE
For Pronto-SE and VE, perform the following work in addition to the adjusting method described later.
(See Figure 3.11.5A, 5B)
(i) For X-direction adjustment, loosen bolt ○
A once , and retighten it after adjusting the X-direction
position of the X-ray tube (Guard plate ○
B may be removed once for this work)
(ii) For R-direction adjustment, loosen ○
C bolt once, and retighten it after adjusting the R-direction
position of the X-ray tube.

Retaining band

4-M8×50L hexagon socket

head bolt
In case of those other than
Pronto-VE, loosen this
screw once, and adjust the
R direction.

Fig. 3.11.5A C 4-M8 x 20L hexagon socket

head bolt (spring, plain washer)

Guard plate B A 3-M4 x 10L hexagon socket head bolt (plain washer)

Fig. 3.11.5B

3−31 L2E-BW1348
3.11.4 Normal condition of X-ray tube
When Pronto-SE (including the system having sub-second option) is provided with the focus shift
detector (FSD), certain system adjusting work must be done under the stable extended condition of the
anode shaft of the X-ray tube.
This stable extended condition of the anode shaft of X-ray tube is called normal condition in this
manual. For setting the X-ray tube to the normal condition, the X-ray tube must be cooled down
suitably after fully warming it up. For this purpose, warm up the X-ray tube according to (1A) of
3.17.4, and set the accumulated heat quantity of anode to 43%~58% by interrupting the warm up just
before starting the air calibration. This condition is called normal condition.
The normal condition must be maintained in 3.11.5 and 3.16 in SE ( with FSD).
If the normal condition is being already held, it is not necessary any more to repeat the warm-up work
from the beginning even if the “setting to normal condition” is demanded for the adjustment work.

3−31−1 L2E-BW1348
3.11.5 X-ray beam radiation adjustment (slice thickness direction)
3.11.5A In case of Pronto SE/VE (See Figure .3.11.7)
(1) Perform (4) ~ (9) when the focus shift detector (FSD) is not provided
Perform (2) ~ (9) when the focus shift detector (FSD) is provided.
(2) Stop the FSD control by turning on No. 1 of 3SW of FSD PCB

2CN
(FSD PCB)

1CN

3SW
2SW 1SW

3SW No. 1 ON ： FSD turns off

（OFF ： ON FSD turns on）
1SW ： Press this switch when moving the X-ray tube toward the front of gantry
2SW ： Press this switch when moving the X-ray tube toward the rear of gantry

(3) Set the X-ray tube to the NORMAL condition. (See 3.11.4)
Keep this NORMAL condition hereafter by using [stationary scan] suitably during the adjustment
of the X-ray beam radiation in the slice thickness direction.
The accumulated heat of anode increases as shown below when 100kV, 200mA,3s scan is done.

Accumulated heat of anode increases about 5% in case of 2MHU X-ray tube

Accumulated heat of anode increases about 3% in case of 3.5MHU X-ray tube

3−32−1 L2E-BW1348
(4) Set the switch 21SW at the front right of the scanner unit to the STATIONARY SCAN side so that
the scanner does not rotate (See Fig.3.11.6).

21SW:Stationary scan switch

22SW:Brake release switch

Front view of scanner

Fig. 3.11.6 Stationary scan switch

(5) Apply the beam adjusting jig ① to beam adjusting jig positioning plate ②.
The 1mm groove of beam adjusting jig ① serves as the X-ray beam center.
(6) Set the film ③ between the detector and beam adjusting jig ①.
(7) Select the “maintenance scan” from the main menu on the operation panel.
(If the maintenance scan is not displayed, display it according to 4.1.1.)
(7.1) Set the following conditions and press STANDBY button.

Items Set values

Scan count 1
Table index (mm) 0
Gantry tilt (°) 0
Tube current (mA) 50
Tube voltage (kV) 100
Scan time (s) 1
Slice thickness (mm) 10
Stationary scan ON
Other items Anything

(7.2) START button flickers when the system has been set to be ready for measurement.
Press START button.
(7.3) After the end of stationary scan under the conditions in (7.1), reverse the film ③ position,
and make stationary scan with 2mm slice thickness (The other conditions remain
unchanged from those in (7.1)).
(7.4) After the end of stationary scan in (7.3), develop the film.

3−32−2 L2E-BW1348
(8) Measure the deviation between the narrow X-ray part and the broad X-ray part. The move
quantity of X-ray tube corresponds to about 40% of the above deviation. Move the X-ray tube
toward the rear of the gantry if the narrow X-ray part is displaced toward the front of gantry unit.
Move the X-ray tube toward the front of the gantry if the X-ray narrow part is displaced toward
the rear of gantry unit. For the method of moving the X-ray tube, observe 3.11.2A or 3.11.2B.
The X-ray tube moves about 1mm per rotation of X-ray tube moving bolt.
Repeat steps (5) ~ (8) until the deviation between the narrow X-ray part and the broad X-ray part
becomes within 0.5mm.

(9) After the end of adjustment, perform (9.1) ~ (9.3) if not equipped with Focus Shift Detector. If
equipped with Foucus Shift Detector, perform (9.3).
(9.1) Fasten the X-ray tube fixing bolts.
(9.2) Loosen the X-ray tube moving bolts and fix them with lock nuts at the position where is
kept free of contacting the X-ray tube.
(9.3) Reset switch 21SW to NORMAL (See Fig.3.11.6).

3−32−3 L2E-BW1348
 ②
③ ①
①

②
③

Detector Detector

Narrow X-ray part Broad X-ray part

Photosensitive film
Less than 0.5mm

① Beam adjusting jig

② Beam adjusting jig positioning
plate
③ Film

Fig. 3.11.7 X-ray beam adjustment

3−33 L2E-BW1348
3.11.5B In case of Pronto-XE (See Fig.3.11.9)
(1) Set the switch 21SW at the front right of the scanner unit to the STATIONARY SCAN side so that
the scanner does not rotate (See Fig.3.11.8).

21SW:Stationary scan switch

22SW:Brake release switch

Front view of scanner

Fig. 3.11.8 Stationary scan switch

(2) Insert the film holder ② into the X-ray incident window of the detector. The wire on the film
holder serves as the X-ray beam center.
(3) Insert film ③ into film holder ②.
(4) Select the “maintenance scan” from the main menu on the operation panel.
(If the maintenance scan is not displayed, display it according to 4.1.1.)
(4.1) Set the following conditions and press STANDBY button.

Items Set values

Scan ount 1
Table index (mm) 0
Gantry tilt (°) 0
Tube current (mA) 50
Tube voltage (kV) 100
Scan time (s) 1
Slice thickness (mm) 10
Stationary scan ON
Other items Anything

(4.2) START button flickers when the system has been set to be ready for measurement.
Press START button.
(4.3) After the end of stationary scan under the conditions in (4.1), reverse the film ③ position,
and make stationary scan with 2mm slice thickness (The other conditions remain
unchanged from those in 4.1).
(4.4) After the end of stationary scan in (4.3), develop the film.

3−34 L2E-BW1348
(5) Measure the deviation between the wire and the X-ray exposed part. The move quantity of
X-ray tube corresponds to about 40% of the above deviation. Move the X-ray tube toward the
rear of the gantry if the wire shadow is displaced toward the front of gantry unit. Move the
X-ray tube toward the front of the gantry if the wire shadow is displaced toward the rear of gantry
unit. For the method of moving the X-ray tube, observe 3.11.2A or 3.11.2B. The X-ray tube
moves about 1mm per rotation of X-ray tube moving bolt.
Repeat steps (2) ~ (5) until the deviation between the wire shadow and the X-ray exposured part
center of the film becomes within 0.5mm.

(6) After the end of adjustment, perform (6.1) ~ (6.3).

(6.1) Fasten the X-ray tube fixing bolts.
(6.2) Loosen the X-ray tube moving bolts and fix them with lock nuts at the position where is
kept free of contacting the X-ray tube.
(6.3) Reset switch 21SW to NORMAL (See Fig.3.11.8).

3−35 L2E-BW1348
 Z
1 X-ray tube assembly

0.5mm max

X-ray beam center

Wire
Exposure to X-ray

4
Figure as viewed from A direction

A
Insertion
Wire
3

1 Bolt
2 Film holder
2 3 Film
4 Bolt Detector

Fig. 3.11.9 X-ray beam adjustment

3−36 L2E-BW1348
3.12 Preamplifier check
3.12.1 Bus line check
Start the PREAMP CHECK of check program.

Select BUS-LINE CHECK of MENU, and click EXECUTE button to make sure
that no error occurs.

This check is looped until an error is detected or STOP button is clicked and the
loop count is displayed in the window. An error list is displayed in the status
part if an error is detected.

In the BUS-LINE CHECK, a simulated signal is generated from the preamplifier

to check if the data bus line between the preamplifier and the image processing
unit is normal. The preamplifier control signal functions in the same way as in
scan measurement.
For checking the control signal, set the switch 21SW at the front right of the
scanner unit to STATIONARY so that the scanner does not rotate.

3−37 L2E-BW1348
3.12.2 Output sequence check
Check the data sequence from the detector channel to the image processing unit via the preamplifier
according to the following procedure.
(1) Execute air calibration according to the following procedure.
(1.1) Select the items in the order of “warm up (calibration)”→“calibration select mode” from
the main menu on the operation panel.
(1.2) Select 120kV, 10mm slice thickness on the operation panel and press STANDBY
button.
(1.3) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers.
Press it.
(2) After the end of air calibration, fix either Cu wire or a solder wire having a size of about 1mm
diameter to the right end or the left end of the tabletop using an adhesive tape, and adjust the
patient table height to obtain the maximum field of view.
(3) Select the “maintenance scan” from the main menu of the operation panel.
(3.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and press STANDBY
button.

Items Set values

Scans 1
Table index (mm) 0
Angle (°) 0
Current (mA) 50
Voltage (kV) 120
Scan time (s) 1
Thickness (mm) 10
Interval (s) Anything
Stationary scan OFF
Delay (s) Anything
Start mode Anything
F.O.V. (mm) Maximum
Filter 1
B.H.C. OFF
B.G.C. OFF
Variation code 0
Phantom correction OFF
Bias 0
ADPP (Measure) OFF
ADPP (Recon) OFF
Scatter corr. OFF
CT No. Adj. OFF
ADNR OFF

(Note) For the items indicated as [Anything], they need not to be changed.
For the item indicated as [Maximum], input a settable maximum value.

(3.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers.
Press it.

3−38 L2E-BW1348
 (4) At the end of scan, start “Raw Data Analysis” of the service program to indicate raw data.
(4.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open]- [Raw Data] from the menu bar of “Raw Data
Analysis” (click [File] by the left button of mouse, point [Open], and click [Raw Data] by
the left button of mouse).

(4.2) Select the raw data scanned in (3) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice
number data by the left button of mouse), and click OK by the left button of mouse to
display raw data.

(4.3) Set a window width (W/W) and window level (W/L) suitable for observing the wire
trajectory (Be careful since the input is not completed unless ENTER key is pressed
when inputting them from the keyboard).

(4.4) Make sure that the wire trajectory changes smooth without any step.

Short-circuit channel replacement Disconnection Wrong connection Defective pre-amp.

of detector cable or detector

3−39 L2E-BW1348
 The projection range to display raw data can be changed by moving up or down the slider
on the right side of the window by means of mouse.

Slider

(4.5) For terminating the “Raw Data Analysis”, click items in the order of [File] - [Exit] (Click
[File] by the left button of mouse, and then, click [Exit] by the left button of mouse).

3−40 L2E-BW1348
3.13 Checking the influences of vibration noises on measuring data
Check the vibration noises of detector, detector cable, and preamplifier according to the following procedure.

(1) Turn off 2FFB of the X-ray control unit to turn off X-rays.
(2) Select the “Maintenance Scan” from the main menu of the operation panel.
(If the “Maintenance Scan” is not displayed, display it according to 4.1.1.)
(2.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and press STANDBY button.

Set values
Items
XE/SE VE
Scans 1 1
Table index (mm) 0 0
Angle (°) 0 0
Current (mA) 175 175
Voltage (kV) 120 120
Scan time (s) 1 0.8
Thickness (mm) 2 2
Interval (s) Anything Anything
Stationary scan OFF OFF
Delay (s) Anything Anything
Start mode Anything Anything
F.O.V. (mm) Maximum Maximum
Filter 4 4
B.H.C. OFF OFF
B.G.C. OFF OFF
Variation code 3 3
Phantom correction OFF OFF
Bias 320 320
ADPP (Measure) OFF OFF
ADPP (Recon) OFF OFF
Scatter corr. OFF OFF
CT No. Adj. OFF OFF
ADNR OFF OFF

(Note) For the items indicated as [Anything], they need not to be changed. For the
item indicated as [Maximum], input a settable maximum value.

(2.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it.

(3) At the end of scan, start “Raw Data Analysis” of the service program to indicate raw data.
(3.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open]- [Raw Data] from the menu bar of “Raw Data Analysis”
(click [File] by the left button of mouse, point [Open], and click [Raw Data] by the left button of
mouse).

3−41 L2E-BW1348
(3.2) Select the raw data scanned in (2) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice number data by
the left button of mouse), and click OK by the left button of mouse to display raw data.

(3.3) Set a window width (W/W) to 280 and window level (W/L) to 21430 (Be careful since the input is
not completed unless ENTER key is pressed when inputting them from the keyboard).

(3.4) Make sure that the displayed raw data are free of extreme longitudinal streaks, lateral streaks, black
lines, and white lines, and execute VCK processing as described in and after (3.5). The projection
range to display raw data can be changed by moving up or down the slider on the right side of the
window by means of mouse.

Slider

3−42 L2E-BW1348
(3.5) Select items in the order of [Analysis] - [VCK] from the menu bar of Raw Data Analysis (Click
[Analysis] by the left button of mouse and then, click [VCK] by the left button of mouse).

(3.6) Set the threshold values of MAX-MIN and SD as shown below ( ENTER input is not necessary),
and left-click the CHECK key with the mouse.
MAX-MIN threshold
Model SD threshold value
value
Pronto-XE 800 160
Pronto-SE 800 160
Pronto-VE 700 140

(3.7) If no channel exceeds the threshold values being set in (3.6), a message
All channels are OK.
is displayed. If some channels exceed these threshold values, data of the channels are displayed.
If none of channels exceeds MAX-MIN threshold values, check results are acceptable (OK).

(3.8) The ordinate range of MAX-MIN graph or SD graph can be changed by clicking DFAULT ,
MAX/MIN , or KEY IN as desired using the left button of mouse.

Keys Processing contents

DEFAULT Set ordinate higher-limit value to 65535 and ordinate lower-limit value to
0.
MAX/MIN Set ordinate higher-limit value to the maximum value of graph and the
ordinate lower-limit value to the minimum value of graph.
KEY IN Display the key input window, and input the higher-limit value and
lower-limit value of ordinate.

3−43 L2E-BW1348
 (3.9) For returning to the RAW DATA display after terminating VCK processing, select items in the order
of [Analysis] - [VCK] from the menu bar of Raw Data Analysis (Click [Analysis] by the left button
of mouse and then, click [VCK] by the left button of mouse).

(3.10) For terminating “Raw Data Analysis”, select items in the order of [File]-[Exit] (Click [File] by the
left button of mouse and then, click [Exit] the left button of mouse).

(4) Reset 2FFB of the X-ray control unit to ON.

3−44 L2E-BW1348
3.14 Center adjustment
Adjust the center for correcting the alignment of X-ray focus, scanner rotation center, and detector center
according to the following procedure.
＊）If equipped Focus Shift Detector (FSD), switch on No.1 of 3SW on the FSD PCB.

(1) Execute air calibration according to the following procedure.

(1.1) Select the items in the order of “Warm up (calibration)”→“Select Mode” from the main menu on the
operation panel.
(1.2) Select 120kV, 10mm slice thickness on the operation panel and press STANDBY button.
(1.3) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it.

(2) After the end of air calibration, set the center adjustment rod to 20 ~ 25mm deviated from the scanner
rotation center.

(3) Select the “Maintenance Scan” from the main menu of the operation panel.
(3.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and press STANDBY button.

Items Set values

Scans 1
Table index (mm) 0
Angle (°) 0
Current (mA) 50
Voltage (kV) 120
Scan time (s) 3
Thickness (mm) 10
Interval (s) Auto
Stationary scan OFF
Delay (s) Anything
Start mode Anything
F.O.V. (mm) 160
Filter 1
B.H.C. OFF
B.G.C. OFF
Variation code 0
Phantom correction OFF
Bias 0
ADPP (Measure) OFF
ADPP (Recon) OFF
Scatter corr. OFF
CT No. Adj. OFF
ADNR OFF

(Note) For the items indicated as [Anything], they need not to be changed.

(3.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it.

3−45 L2E-BW1348
(4) At the end of scan, start “Raw Data Analysis” of the service program to indicate raw data.
(4.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open]- [Raw Data] from the menu bar of “Raw Data Analysis”
(click [File] by the left button of mouse, point [Open] and click [Raw Data] by the left button of
mouse).

(4.2) Select the raw data scanned in (3) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice number data by
the left button of mouse), and click OK by the left button of mouse to display raw data.

(4.3) Set a window width (W/W) and window level (W/L) suitable for observing the rod trajectory (Be
careful since the input is not completed unless ENTER key is pressed when inputting them from
the keyboard).

(4.4) Select items in the order of [Analysis] - [CACK] from the menu bar of “Raw Data Analysis” (Click
[Analysis] by the left button of mouse first, and then, click [CACK] by the left button of mouse).
Now, the calculation of X-ray tube move quantity is started.

3−46 L2E-BW1348
 (4.5) At the end of calculation, the X-ray move quantity is displayed when the scanner is viewed from the
table side. Move the X-ray tube according to the display value (See 3.11). Perform the work
while monitoring the move quantity on the dial gauge.
For closing the X-ray tube move quantity display window, click Close by the left button of
mouse.

Fasten fixing bolts at 4 positions without fail after moving the X-ray tube.

(4.6) For terminating the “Raw Data Analysis”, click items in the order of [File] - [Exit] (Click [File] by
the left button of mouse, and then, click [Exit] by the left button of mouse).

(5) Repeat (1)~ (4) until the indicating value of the X-ray tube move quantity becomes within 0.05mm. Be
careful since the air calibration must be repeated without fail after moving the X-ray tube.

(6) Perform (6.1) ~ (6.2) after the end of center adjustment.

(6.1) Fasten the X-ray tube fixing bolts (See 3.11).
(6.2) Loosen the X-ray moving bolts, and fix them by lock nuts at a position where they don’t touch the
X-ray tube assembly (See 3.11).

(7) If equipped Focus Shift Detector (FSD), switch off No.1 of 3SW on the FSD PCB.

3−47 L2E-BW1348
3.15 Compensator position adjustment
Adjust the compensator position according to the following procedure.

(1) After making sure that the phantom, tabletop of patient table, etc. are not put in the gantry opening to be
ready for air scan, select the “Maintenance Scan” from the main menu of the operation panel. (Display the
“Maintenance Scan” according to 4.1.1, if not displayed.)

(1.1) Set the scan conditions on the operation panel as shown below and then, press STANDBY
button.

Items Set values

Scans 1
Table index (mm) 0
Angle (°) 0
Current (mA) 150
Voltage (kV) 120
Scan time (s) 1
Thickness (mm) 10
Interval (s) Auto
Stationary scan OFF
Delay (s) Anything
Start mode Anything
F.O.V. (mm) Anything
Filter Anything
B.H.C. OFF
B.G.C. OFF
Variation code 4
Phantom correction OFF
Bias 0
ADPP (Measure) OFF
ADPP (Recon) OFF
Scatter corr. OFF
CT No. Adj. OFF
ADNR OFF

(Note) For the items indicated as [Anything], they need not to be changed.

(1.2) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it.

(2) At the end of scan, start “Raw Data Analysis” of the service program to indicate raw data.
(2.1) Select items in the order of [File] - [Open]- [Raw Data] from the menu bar of “Raw Data Analysis”
(click [File] by the left button of mouse, point [Open] and click [Raw Data] by the left button of
mouse).

3−48 L2E-BW1348
(2.2) Select the raw data scanned in (1) (Click the corresponding patient number and slice number data by
the left button of mouse), and click OK by the left button of mouse to display raw data.

(2.3) Select items in the order of [Analysis] - [CLB] from the menu bar of Raw Data Analysis (Click
[Analysis] by the left button of mouse, and then, click [CLB] by the left button of mouse).

(2.4) Check the values being displayed at the lower end of the CLB window.
These values are Left, Right, Center, and Diff. in 4 kinds.
A “Diff” of less than 5% is acceptable. If “Diff” exceeds 5%, compare Left and Right values with
each other, and move the X-ray tube assembly as shown below.
If Left ＞Right, move the compensator rightward as viewed from the table side.
If Left ＜ Right, move the compensator leftward as viewed from the table side.
Move the compensator according to the following procedure (See Fig.3.15).
1) Remove the collimator box cover.
2) Loosen the right and left sems screws.
3) Loosen the M4 hexagon socket head bolts in the moving direction to produce a suitable
clearance at the bolt tips.
4) Move the compensator by fastening M4 hexagon socket head bolts on the opposite side.
5) Fix the compensator by fastening sems screws.
6) Loosen the right and left M4 hexagon socket head bolts to produce a suitable clearance at the
bolt tips Then, fix the bolts with nuts.

3−49 L2E-BW1348
 7) After confirming that Diff in CLB processing is less than 5%, mount the collimator box cover.

Collimator box cover

Sems screw

Nut

Hexagon socket head bolt

Fig. 3.15

(2.5) For returning to the raw data display at the end of CLB processing, select items in the order of
[Analysis] - [CLB] from the menu bar of raw data analysis in the same way as in (2.3) (Click
[Analysis] by the left button of mouse and then, click [CLB] by the left button of mouse).

(2.6) For returning to the raw data display , select items in the order of [File] - [Exit] (Click [File] by the
left button of mouse and then, click [Exit] by the left button of mouse).

(2.7) Repeat steps (1) and (2) until the criterion in (2.4) is satisfied. The Center value should be within
the range shown in Table 3.15 when the criterion in (2.4) has been satisfied.

Table 3.15 Center value at the end of adjustment

Model Center : value
Pronto-XE 11000±2200
Pronto-SE 12600±2500
Pronto-VE 11000±2200

3−50A−1 L2E-BW1348
3.16 Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment
Perform the following adjusting method (1) ~ (19) when the focus shift detector (FSD detector and FSD PCB) is
not adjusted at all.
(a) If the system was installed under the mounted condition of the X-ray tube, this adjustment is not necessary
because FSD was adjusted at the delivery time from the Works. (Adjustment is not necessary when the
X-ray beam is within the reference value in 3.11 X-ray beam adjustment)
(b) If the X-ray tube was removed when installing the system, perform (1) ~ (3), (10) ~ (12), and (14) ~ (19)
only in 3.16 Focus shift detector (FSD) adjustment.
(Other items are not normally affected by mounting or dismounting the X-ray tube.
If adjustment cannot be done by the control knob in (10), position the FSD in (7) ~ (9)
(c) When FSD was replaced, perform (1) ~ (4) in 3.16 FSD adjustment, and finely adjust the FSD position
without turning the FSD PCB VR in (7) to fix the FSD at the position where the FSD PCB 3TP output
becomes 0±2V when1.5 seconds have passed after turning on the X-ray during 120kV, 150mA, 10mm
slice, 3-sec scan. Then, finely adjust VR and perform (10) ~ (12) and (19)
(d) When FSD PCB was replaced, the FSD is positioned correctly.
Perform (1) ~ (6) and (10) ~ (19) in 3.16 FSD adjustment

Perform all FSD adjustment to the KV condition, otherwise ring artifact occurs

(1) Make sure that No. 1 of 2SW of FSD PCB is turned on and the collimator case cover is mounted.
(2) Set the X-ray tube to the NORMAL condition (See 3.11.4) Connect the storage oscilloscope probe to (3) ~
(5) during stop.
(3) Set the X-ray tube by turning it clockwise by 270°as viewed from the top as illustrated below, and set
21SW to “STATIONARY SCAN”

270°

3−50A−2 L2E-BW1348
(4) Offset adjustment
Adjust 1VR so that the 3TP output becomes 0±10mV when X-ray is turned off (The output increases when
turning 1VR clockwise) (Use a digital voltmeter)
(5) KV selector adjustment
Adjust 5VR so that 6TP becomes 6.25±0.05V (The output increases when turning 5VR clockwise) Make
sure that 7TP is 5.5±0.2V (Use a digital voltmeter)
* Keep the tube rating to 45 ~ 65% during adjustment in (7) ~ (12)
Perform stationary scan in (6) ~ (13) and (18)
(6) Adjust 6VR so that the 4TP output becomes 1 ~ 3V in case of 10mm slice, 100kV, 150mA, 3-sec scan.
(The output decreases when turning 6VR clockwise)
(7) Turn 3VR (for 120kV) fully counterclockwise (until a click is heard to show idle turning after about 30
turns) Turn 3VR clockwise by 12 turns from the above condition, and fix the detector for FSD to the
position where 3TP output (point A) becomes 0 ~ ±2V 1.5 seconds after X-ray has been turned on in 10mm
slice, 120kV, 150mA, and 3-sec scan. (For checking the 3TP waveform, trigger the 4TP output as shown in
< An example of FSD adjustment> in 50A-8, 9 on P3) (Oscilloscope screen) X-ray ON X-ray OFF 1.5sec.
3sec. Point A. Detector for FSD Adjusting screw M4 screw Loosen.

（Oscilloscope screen）
Adjusting screw

2V
FSD
Point A

M4 screw
0V
Loosen

① Loosen the M4 screws which fix the

-2V
detector for FSD
② Adjust the detector for FSD by turning the
1.5sec adjusting screws.
3sec
CW : 3TP output decreases
X-ray on X-ray off CCW : 3TP output increases

③ Fix the detector for FSD by fastening the

M4 screws at the adjusted position.

Fig. 3.16.1 Adjusting method of detector for FSD

3−50A−3 L2E-BW1348
(8) If the 3TP output is 100KV 1.5 sec after X-ray has been turned on in case of 10mm slice, 150mA, 3-sec
scan, make sure that the 3TP output becomes higher than 1V when turning 4VR counterclockwise and
becomes lower than -1V when turning 4VR clockwise. Make sure in the same way that the 3TP output
changes from being higher than 1V to be lower than -1V when turning 2VR counterclockwise and
clockwise at 120KV.

(9) If the output does not become higher than 1V under a KV condition in (8), readjust the position of the
detector for FSD to increase the 3TP output, and perform the confirmation in (8). If the output does not
become lower than -1V under a KV condition in (8), readjust the position of the detector for FSD to
decrease the 3TP output, and perform the confirmation in (8).

3−50A−4 L2E-BW1348
(10) Adjust the following control knobs (VR) so that the 3TP 10mm
output becomes 0 ±0.1V at 100KV or 0 ±0.2V at 120 slice

and 130KV when1.5 seconds have passed after turning +0.1V

on the X-ray during 100kV, 120KV, 130KV 150mA,
0V
10mm slice, 3-sec scan.(The output decreases when Output value by
turning 2 ~ 4VR clockwise) -0.1V adjusting the
control knob
Adjust the entire output coarsely at tube rating 50 ~ 55%
first. Finally, press START at tube rating 50%,
Fig. 3.16.4 When the adjusting position
and adjust the 3TP output to 0 ±0.1V at 100KV or 0
of the control knob is OK.
±0.2V at 120 and 130KV

2VR : 130KV
3VR : 120KV
4VR : 100KV

Reference
FSD PCB Rev
A/8
2VR Approx. 2.0V/turn
3VR Approx. 1.0V/turn
4VR Approx.0.6V/turn
0°

(11) Measure the 3TP output 1.5 seconds after turning on

the X-ray during 120KV, 150mA, 10mm slice, 3-sec
scan when the X-ray tube is set to 0° and 180°
Assume “a” be the output at 0° and “b” be the output
at 180°
(12) Adjust 6VR so that the 4TP output becomes (a-b) /
2+0.3V in case of 10mm slice, 120KV, 150mA, 3-sec
scan. Set the 4TP adjusting value to 1.3V ~ 2.3V
±0.2V in this case If a calculated value exceeds the
above range, adjust 6VR within this range.
180°

<Example> In this case,

3TP output 1.2−(−1.8)
＋0.3＝1.8
2
0° 1.2V ←“a” Adjust 6VR so that the 4TP output becomes
180° -1.8V ←“b” 1.8±0.2V

3−50A−5 L2E-BW1348
(13) Adjust 13VR so that the 9TP output rises with a delay of 200ms±20ms after 4TP rise in 10mm slice,
120KV, 150mA, 1-sec scan. (The output rise is delayed when turning 13VR clockwise)
(If only one probe appears, make sure that the 9TP output is 800ms±20ms during 1-sec scan.)

Output

4TP output

200ms ± 20ms

9TP output
(TTL level)

Time

Fig. 3.16.5 9TP output adjustment

(14) Turn off No. 1 of 3SW of FSD PCB (Tube shift turns on), and set 21SW to “NORMAL”.
(15) Perform 120KV, 10mm slice air calibration.
(16) Fix the beam adjusting jig to the center of the solid detector by using the fixing screw of the solid detector
cover.

PPC

Beam adjusting jig

Fig. 3.16.6 Mounting of beam adjusting jig

3−50A−6 L2E-BW1348
(17) (In case of Pronto SE)
After turning off No.1 of 3SW ,repeat air scan 3 times by 10mm slice, 120kV, 150mA, 3-sec scan, 5 times
by 1.5 -sec scan, and 5 times by 1-sec scan.
Select a channel nearest to 1850 as “c” in the 3rd raw data of 3-sec scan, assume “d” be the 5th value of
1.5-sec scan of the channel, and also assume “e” be the 5th value of 1-sec scan of the channel.
(In case of Pronto SE sub-second)
After turning off No.1 of 3SW ,repeat air scan 3 times by 10mm slice, 120kV, 150mA, 3-sec scan, 5 times
by 1-sec scan, and 5 times by 0.8-sec scan.
Select a channel nearest to 1850 as “c” in the 3rd raw data of 3-sec scan, assume “d” be the 5th value of
1-sec scan of the channel, and also assume “e” be the 5th value of 0.8-sec scan of the channel.

(18) Calculate d-c and e-c, and perform the following processing.
① 12VR adjustment is not necessary when 20≧d-c≧−20
② In case of d-c ＞20
i) Adjust 12VR by turning it clockwise so that 20≧d-c≧-20 when No.7 of 3SW is turned off
ii) Adjust 12VR by turning it counterclockwise so that 20≧d-c≧−20 when No.7 of 3SW is turned
on. If 20≧d-c≧−20 is not obtained even if 12VR is turned fully counterclockwise, turn off
No.7 of 3SW , and turn 12VR counterclockwise until 20≧d-c≧−20 is obtained
③ In case of −20＞d-c
i) Adjust 12VR by turning it counterclockwise so that 20≧d-c≧−20 when No.7 of 3SW is turned
off. If 20≧d-c≧−20 is not obtained even if 12VR is turned fully counterclockwise, turn on
No.7 of 3SW , and turn 12VR clockwise until 20≧d-c≧−20 is obtained
ii) Adjust 12VR by turning it clockwise so that 20≧d-c≧−20 when No.7 of 3SW is turned on
④ 10VR adjustment is not necessary when 40≧e - c≧−40
⑤ In case of e - c≧40
i) Adjust 10VR by turning it clockwise so that 40≧e-c≧−40
when No.5 of 3SW is turned off
ii) Adjust 10VR by turning it counterclockwise so that 40≧e-c≧−40 when No.5 of 3SW is turned
on. If 40≧e-c≧−40 is not obtained even if 10VR is turned fully counterclockwise, turn on No.
5 of 3SW, and turn 10VR clockwise until
40≧e-c≧−40 is obtained
⑥ In case of −40＞e-c
i) Adjust 10VR by turning it counterclockwise so that 40≧e-c≧−40 when No.5 of 3SW is turned
off. If 40≧e-c≧−40 is not obtained even if 10VR is turned fully counterclockwise, turn on
No.5 of 3SW , and turn 10VR clockwise until 40≧e-c≧−40 is obtained
ii) Adjust 10VR by turning it clockwise so that 40≧e-c≧−40 when No.5 of 3SW is turned on
* When 10 and 12VR were adjusted, repeat scanning in (17) and make sure that the c~ e values
are set to be within the range where no adjustment is necessary.

(19) Make sure that No. 1 of 3SW of FSD PCB is turned off, and mount the FSD PCB cover.

3−50A−7 L2E-BW1348
＜An example of FSD adjustment＞
● 100kV (Adjustment is necessary)

TP4 Ref (trigger)

TP3 output

Fig. 3.16.7

● 100kV OK

TP4 Ref (trigger)

TP3 output

Fig. 3.16.8

3−50A−8 L2E-BW1348
● 120kV OK

TP4 Ref (trigger)

TP3 output

Fig. 3.16.9
● 130kV OK

TP4 Ref (trigger)

TP3 output

Fig. 3.16.10

3−50A−9 L2E-BW1348
3.17 Phantom calibration
3.17.1 Procedure

Start

X-ray detection NO X-ray detection

system warm up system warm up
OK?
YES

X-ray tube NO
warm up
OK?
Warm up
YES
(calibration)

NO All necessary air

Air calibrat ion
calibrat ion ends?

YES

Phantom position adjustment

Within 0.1mm in NO
the vertical and horizontal
directions?
YES

Phantom calibration measurement

Phantom calibration calculat ion

Calibrat ion data NO

OK?

YES

End

Perform X-ray warm up (or air calibration) and phantom calibration measurement under the
mounted conditions of the scanner corn cover, lift cover, and X-ray transmission window for
executing calibration under the X-ray conditions during user’s use.

3−51 L2E-BW1348
3.17.2 Mounting method of phantom mounting bracket
(1) Mounting
(a) Turn the knob counterclockwise and loosen fixing plate L under the condition shown below.

Knob

Fixing plate
Fixing plate L

(b) Lift up the phantom mounting bracket and insert the phantom mounting in the
direction until the end bracket touches the tabletop end as illustrated below.

Tabletop

End bracket

3−52 L2E-BW1348
 (c) Adjust the fixing plate R to the right edge of tabletop and clip the tabletop by sliding fixing
plate L in the direction. Turn the knob to fix the phantom mounting bracket.

If the bracket is not fixed properly, the bracket may possibly fall down during the
calibration resulting in the damage of scanner cover.

Knob

Fixing plate

Fixing plate L
Tabletop

Fixing plate R

3−53 L2E-BW1348
(2) Removal
Loosen the knob to make the fixing plate L free to move, and slide the fixing plate L outward.
Remove the phantom mounting bracket from the tabletop.

Knob

Fixing plate L

Tabletop

Fixing plate L

3−54 L2E-BW1348
3.17.3 X-ray detection system warming up
Table 3.17.1 shows the required time from turning on the X-ray detector power supply and
preamplifier power supply to be ready for calibration. With a longer warm-up time, better results may
be expected. When it is necessary for any work to turn off the power supply, the off time should be as
short as possible.

Table 3.17.1 Required time from turning on the power supplies to be ready for calibration

Power supplies Required time to be ready for calibration

High voltage power supply of X-ray detector
(Pronto-XE)
Permanent power supply for temperature
controller of X-ray detector
(Pronto-SE/VE)
Preamplifier power supply
Longer than 1 day after turning on the power supply.
However, calibration can be done in 30 minutes after
the high voltage power supply has been recovered if
the high voltage power supply has been recovered
within 30 minutes without discharging the high
voltage of X-ray detector.
Longer than 4 hours after power supply has been
turned on. (Keep power been fed normally.)
Longer than 2 hours after turning on the power supply.

3.17.4 X-ray tube warm up and air calibration

If it has passed longer than 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure, perform continuous operation ((1A)
or (1B) described later) of X-ray tube warm up and air calibration before starting the other
measurement. If the phantom calibration is done within 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure,
observe Table 3.17.2.

Table 3.17.2 When it has passed shorter than 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure

Models X-ray tube warm up before phantom calibration

Pronto- SE/VE Observe the note in (1A) described later
Pronto-XE Execute air calibration only (See (2) described later)

The X-ray tube warm up and air calibration can be operated systematically by Warm up (calibration)
in the measurement main menu on the operation panel.

Since the air calibration is executed protocol mode during continuous operation of warm
up and air calibration, the air calibration is executed with conforming to the [combinations
of X-ray tube voltage and slice thickness] being entered in the measurement protocol. If
air calibration is necessary under the other conditions, execute it in the calibration select
mode ((2) described later).

3−55 L2E-BW1348
(1A) Continuous operation of X-ray tube warm up and air calibration (In case of Pronto SE/VE)
(1A.1) Make sure that none of tabletop, phantoms, etc. is present in the gantry aperture.
(1A.2) If the “maintenance scan” is not displayed on the measurement main menu on the operation
panel, display it according to 4.1.1. Be careful since the “maintenance warm up” cannot
be selected in (1A.4) without this display.
(1A.3) Select Warm up (calibration) in the measurement main menu on the operation panel,
and display the mode selection menu.
(1A.4) Select the “maintenance warm up” and press STANDBY button.

Air calibration before phantom calibration must be executed under the stable
condition (normal condition) of the elongation of the anode axis of X-ray tube.
“Maintenance warm up” is executed to realize the normal condition for
executing air calibration. Keep the X-ray tube rate to be within a range of 43 ~
75% after executing the maintenance warm up until all necessary phantom
calibration measurement ends.

(1A.5) When the system is ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it. Now,
the X-ray tube warm up and air calibration in protocol mode are executed automatically.
If air calibration under the conditions other than protocol mode is necessary, perform
necessary air calibration in the “calibration select mode”.

If the lapsed time from the latest X-ray radiation is shorter than 2 hours, perform
the following procedure instead of maintenance, warm-up.

(1) Execute 120kV, 200mA, 2s, 2mm slice thickness continuous scan until the
accumulated heat of anode ≧90%

(2) Perform (3) when focus shift detector (FSD) is not provided,

If FSD is provided, continue scanning after (1) above, and execute (3)
after continuing the condition of accumulated heat of anode ≧85% for
longer than 12 minutes.

(3) Stop operating the system for about 10 minutes, and execute air
calibration after the accumulated heat of anode has become within a
range of 43 ~ 58%

After (3) above, keep the accumulated heat of anode within a range of 43 ~
75% until all necessary phantom calibration measurement ends.

3−56 L2E-BW1348
 (1B) Continuous operation of X-ray tube warm up and air calibration (In case of Pronto-XE)
(1B.1) Make sure that none of tabletop, phantoms, etc. is present in the gantry aperture.
(1B.2) Select Warm up (calibration) in the measurement main menu on the operation panel,
and display the mode selection menu.
(1B.3) Select the “warm up” and press STANDBY button.
(1B.4) When the system is ready for measurement, START button flickers.
Press it. Now, the X-ray tube warm up and air calibration in protocol mode are executed
automatically. If air calibration under the conditions other than protocol mode is
necessary, perform necessary air calibration in the “calibration select mode”.
(2) Air calibration (select mode)
(2.1) Make sure that none of tabletop, phantoms, etc. is present in the gantry aperture
(2.2) Select Warm up (calibration) in the measurement main menu on the operation panel, and display
the mode selection menu. When it has passed shorter than 2 hours after the latest X-ray exposure,
execute air calibration without warm up. In this case, the conditions setting screen in the calibration
select mode is displayed.
(2.3) Select a desired tube voltage and slice thickness, and press STANDBY button.
(2.4) After the system has become ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it. Now,
the air calibration is done under the selected conditions.

3−57 L2E-BW1348
3.17.5 Phantom position adjustment and phantom calibration
Be sure to carry out the air calibration before starting the phantom calibration.
Observe the following caution, in particular, in case of Pronto-SE/VE.

Perform the air calibration after setting the X-ray tube to the normal condition according to
3.17.4 (1A). Keep the tube rating to be within a range of 43 ~ 75% until all necessary
phantom calibration measurement ends.

(1) If Phantom calibration is not displayed in the measurement main menu on the operation panel,
display it according to 4.1.1.
(2) Set the calibration phantom shown in Table 3.17.4 at the center of the gantry aperture.
Use the beam of the light localizer (for slice planes) to adjust the phantom so that it is kept in
parallel with the X-ray beam (Make the scan starting from smaller phantom).
(3) Use maintenance scan for positioning the phantom. Set the scan conditions as shown in Table
3.16.3 and execute maintenance scan.
The indication value can be inaccuracy if the maintenance scan does not be carried out.

Table 3.17.3 Scan conditions for phantom position adjustment

Items Set values
Scans 1
Table index (mm) 0
Angle (°) 0
Current (mA) 175
Voltage (kV) 120
Scan time (s) 2
Thickness (mm) 10
Interval (s) Auto
Stationary scan OFF
Delay (s) Anything
Start mode Anything
F.O.V. (mm) Table 3.16.4
Filter 1
B.H.C. OFF
B.G.C. OFF
Variation code 0
Phantom correction OFF
Bias 0
ADPP (Measure) ON
ADPP (Recon) ON
Scatter corr. ON
CT No. Adj. OFF
ADNR ON
(Note) For the items indicated as[Anything], they need not to be changed.

3−58 L2E-BW1348
 Table 3.17.4 Phantom position adjustment vs FOV
Phantom F.O.V.(mm)
φ230 polyethylene 250
φ260 polyethylene 300
φ350 polyethylene 420
φ410 polyethylene (*1) 430
(*1) Applies to Pronto-SE/VE

(4) Adjust the calibration phantom position.

(4.1) Click [Start] of the task bar by the left button of mouse, point the items in the order of [Programs]→
[2. Service], and then, click [Phantom Position] by the left button of mouse.
(4.2) When the latest scan CT image, if any, is displayed, proceed to (4.5).
If the latest scan CT image is not displayed, the following warning window is displayed.
Click Yes when designating the image by patient slice directory or Abort when terminating
processing by the left button of mouse.

It is possible that the latest scan image is not displayed if the phantom position program is
started just after scan.
In such a case, select Yes on the above warning window, and perform the operation in
and after (4.3).

(4.3) A patient directory window is displayed. Designate the patient number of the calibration phantom
measured in (3) by clicking it with the left button of mouse, and then, click OK button by the left
button of mouse.
(4.4) A slice directory window corresponding to the designated patient number is displayed. Designate
the slice number of the calibration phantom measured in (3) by clicking it with the left button of
mouse, and then, click OK button by the left button of mouse.
(4.5) A phantom move indicating value is displayed as shown below when clicking
Calculation by the left button of mouse after the designated image has been displayed.

An example of phantom move indicating value display

3−59 L2E-BW1348
 (4.6) Move the phantom by using the micro gauge according to the displayed phantom move indicating
value.
For closing the information window displaying the phantom move indicating value, click
OK button of the information window by the left button of mouse.
(4.7) Repeat steps (3) ~ (4.6) until the phantom move indicating values become less than 0.1mm in the
vertical and horizontal directions.

(5) Measure the calibration phantom data

(5.1) Select Phantom Calibration in the measurement main menu on the operation panel to display the
calibration phantom selection menu.
(5.2) Display the tube voltage and slice thickness selection menu by pressing the button of the phantom
diameter ( 230 for example) to be calibrated, select the tube voltage and slice thickness ( 120 kV,
10 mm for example) to be calibrated, and then, press STANDBY button.
(5.3) After the system has been ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press START
button. Calibration phantom data is measured under the selected conditions.

In case of Proton-SE/VE, calculate the phantom calibration data after measuring the
phantom of all diameters (See Table 3.17.4).

3−60 L2E-BW1348
(6) Calculate the phantom calibration data.
(6.1) Click [Start] of the task bar by the left button of mouse, point the items in the order of [Programs]→
[2. Service], and then, click [Phantom Calibration] by the left button of mouse.
(6.2) A phantom calibration calculation menu window is displayed. By clicking Calculation
with the left button of mouse, the following data list window is displayed.

Phantom diameter cannot be

selected in Pronto-SE/VE

The data list remarks column indicates the following contents according to the calculation date and
time, and measurement date and time.
“Impossible to Calc.” : Non-measured data
“Calculation required” : Measured, but not calculated data
“Measured” : Data whose measuring date and time are later than the calculation date
and time
“Calculated” : Data whose calculation date and time are later than the measurement
date and time

(6.3) By clicking the check box at the left of window with the left button of mouse, the phantom
calibration data calculation conditions (X-ray tube voltage, slice thickness, and also phantom
diameter in case of Pronto-XE) are selected.
A check mark is displayed on the [Sel.] column of the data conforming to the selected calculation
conditions.
(6.4) By clicking Calc. start button with the left button of mouse after the end of conditions selection,
calculation of phantom calibration data is started.

If data being displayed as “Impossible to Calc.” in [Remarks] column is indicated by a

selection check mark, Calc. start button is displayed with a light color to show that the
calculation cannot be executed.

3−61 L2E-BW1348
 If an error occurs halfway in the course of calculation, the following window is displayed.

If an error occurred halfway in the course of

calculation, repeat the phantom calibration
measurement under the corresponding conditions
and then, calculate the phantom calibration data
again.
An error display example

For erasing the error display window, click Abort button with the left button of mouse.

(6.5) After calculation ends, make sure that “End” is displayed in [Remarks] column of data selected in
(6.3), and terminate the phantom calibration calculation by clicking Close button with the left
button of mouse.

(7) Check phantom calibration data

(7.1) Click [Start] of the task bar by the left button of mouse, point the items in the order of [Programs]→
[2. Service], and then, click [Raw Data Analysis] by the left button of mouse.

(7.2) Click [File] in the menu bar of Raw Data Analysis by the left button of mouse, point [Open], and
then, click [Cal. Data] by the left button of mouse.
Now, the calibration data display mode is selected.

(7.3) A window for selecting the kinds of data to be displayed appears. Select “Phantom Cal. Data” by
selecting the corresponding radio button with the left button of mouse, select a tube voltage (120kV,
for example) by clicking the corresponding radio button with the left button of mouse, and then,
click
OK by the left button of mouse.

3−62 L2E-BW1348
(7.4) After the calibration data group conforming to the conditions selected in (7.3) has been displayed,
click [Analysis] in the menu bar of the calibration data display window with the left button of mouse,
and then, click [PLP] with the left button of mouse for observing data shape.

(7.5) When the PLP window has been displayed, click the data having a desired profile to be observed by
the left button of mouse. A desired data graph is displayed in PLP window. For selecting the data
to be observed, the data contents being pointed by the mouse cursor are displayed in the format of
the X-ray tube voltage, slice thickness – alpha or beta : and calibration phantom diameter in the
“Phantom Cal. Data” window as a hint. The contents of the selected data are displayed at the lower
end of the PLP window in the same format.

3−63 L2E-BW1348
(7.6) After a desired data graph has been displayed on the PLP window, click MAX/MIN key of PLP
window by the left button of mouse to set the graph to the MAX/MIN display condition.

An example of phantom cal. Data alpha display

An example of phantom cal. Data beta display

(7.7) Make sure that the calibration data graph is free of abnormal convex or concave. If abnormal,
repeat the above procedure, starting with air calibration (3.16.4). If the abnormal condition cannot
be solved yet, check the hardware.

An example of abnormal data

3−64 L2E-BW1348
 (7.8) For terminating raw data analysis, click [File] of the menu bar by the left button of mouse, and then,
click [Exit] by the left button of mouse or click the × button at the right upper end of the raw data
analysis window by the left button of mouse.

(8) Perform all necessary phantom calibration.

3−65 L2E-BW1348
 Caution Supplement of Pronto-SE/VE phantom calibration measurement
(X-ray tube rate control)

Until application soft ware V1.00, an X-ray tube rate change of [Phantom calibration measurement in progress] is not
reflected on the system monitor in real time. Accordingly, use the system monitor without executing the maintenance
scan program or phantom calibration measurement program in the following work.

(1) Perform step (2) and subsequent steps after the X-ray detection system has been warmed up (See 3.17.3).
(2) Execute X-ray tube warm up and air calibration (See 3.17.4).
(3) Adjust the calibration phantom position (See 3.17.5). Make sure that the X-ray tube rate is within a range of 50%
~ 72% by the system monitor before executing the phantom position measuring scan (maintenance scan).
Execute X-ray exposure under 120kV, 175mA, 2s conditions (same conditions as in phantom position measuring
scan) as occasion demands for the purpose of keeping the X-ray tube rate within a range of 43% ~ 75%.

Reference: The energy to be input to the X-ray tube during 120kV, 175mA, 2s scan corresponds to 3% X-ray tube
rate in 2MHU X-ray tube or 2% X-ray tube rate in 3.5MHU X-ray tube.
It takes about 3 minutes to decrease the anode accumulated heating quantity from 50% to 43% in
2MHU X-ray tube and about 4 minutes in 3.5MHU X-ray tube.

(4) Execute phantom calibration measurement (See 3.17.5). Table 1 shows the input energy for one phantom
calibration scan. By executing the phantom calibration measurement in the following sequence, it can be
measured within a range of about 50% ~ 70% of the X-ray tube rate without deviating from 43% ~ 75% range of
the X-ray tube rate.

Wait for 5 minutes after 3 scans from 50% X-ray tube rate in case of 2MHU X-ray tube
Wait for 7 minutes after 6 scans from 50% X-ray tube rate in case of 3.5 MHU X-ray tube

When the phantom calibration measurement (18 scans) is executed under all kV, all slice thickness (including 1mm
thick option) conditions about one phantom in the above sequence, it takes about 25 ~ 30 minutes in 2MHU X-ray
tube or about 15 ~ 20 minutes in 3.5MHU X-ray tube.

Table 1 Input energy of phantom calibration by one scan

Input energy X-ray tube rate [%] conversion value

kV by one scan 3.5MHU X-ray
[kJ] 2MHU X-ray tube
tube
100 60 4.7% 3.1%
120 72 5.6% 3.8%
130 68.25 5.3% 3.6%

(5) Repeat steps (3) ~ (4) for all necessary phantoms. (In Pronto-SE/VE, the phantom calibration calculation cannot
be executed unless the measurement of all phantoms ends.)

3−66 L2E-BW1348
3.18 CT number adjustment
3.18.1 Procedure
(1) Scan all water phantoms (See table 3.18.1) by using the CT number adjustment scan (a kind of
service scans) under the combined conditions of X-ray tube voltage and the slice thickness to be
adjusted.
(2) Calculate CT number adjusting parameter by inputting the combined conditions of X-ray tube
voltage and slice thickness measured in (1) in [Calculation] of CT number adjustment calculation
program of service programs.
(3) Execute off-line image reconstruction using raw data of the water phantoms measured in CT
number adjustment scan, and check the CT number at the water phantom center (Radius of
measuring R.O.I is 75 pixels in X and Y). If the CT number is deviated from 0±4, repeat the
procedure from the CT number adjustment scan of the corresponding water phantom.

Start

Scan water phantom by

“CT number adjustment scan”

Calculate CT value adjustment parameter by

“CT number adjustment calculation”

N.G.
Check CT number by off-line
reconstructed images

O.K.

End

Fig. 3.18.1

Execute CT number adjustment scan under the mounted condition of scanner cone
cover, lift cover, and X-ray transmission window for the purpose of adjusting the CT
number under the X-ray conditions during user’s use.

3−67 L2E-BW1348
3.18.2 CT number adjustment scan
(1) If CT Number Adjustment is not displayed in the measurement main menu on the operation
panel, display CT Number Adjustment according to 4.1.1.
(2) Mount the water phantom shown in table 3.18.1 to the phantom fixture, and set it to the gantry
aperture center. Set the phantom to be parallel to the X-ray beam by using the projection line
(for slice plane) of the light localizer.
(3) Adjust the water phantom position.
(3.1) For adjusting the phantom position, scan the water phantom by using maintenance scan.
Set F.O.V to the value shown in Table 3.18.1. Other conditions are as specified below.

Items Set values

Scans 1
Table index (mm) 0
Angle (°) 0
Current (mA) 175
Voltage (kV) 120
Scan time (s) 2
Thickness (mm) 10
Interval (s) Auto
Stationary scan OFF
Delay (s) Anything
Start mode Anything
F.O.V. (mm) Table 3.18.1
Filter 4
B.H.C. OFF
B.G.C. OFF
Variation code 0
Phantom correction ON
Bias 0
ADPP (Measure) ON
ADPP (Recon) ON
Scatter corr. ON
CT No Adj. OFF
ADNR ON

(Note) For the items indicated as [anything], they need not to be changed.

Table 3.18.1 F.O.V during water phantom position adjustment

F.O.V.(mm) F.O.V.(mm)
Water phantoms
(Pronto-XE) (Pronto-SE/VE)
φ210 250 250
φ230 (*1) 300 300
φ305 420 420
φ380 (*2) 420 430
(*1) Used for 1mm slice (option) only.
(*2) Not used for 1mm slice (option).

3−68 L2E-BW1348
(3.2) Click [Start] of the task bar by the left button of mouse, point the items in the order of [Programs]→
[2. Service], and then, click [Phantom Position] by the left button of mouse.

(3.3) When the latest scan CT image, if any, is displayed, proceed to (3.6).
If the latest scan CT image is not displayed, the following warning window is displayed.
Click Yes when designating the image by patient slice directory or Abort when terminating
processing by the left button of mouse.

It is possible that the latest scan image is not displayed if the Phantom Position
program is started just after scan. In such a case, select Yes on the above
warning window, and perform the operation in and after (3.4).

(3.4) A patient directory window is displayed. Designate the patient number of the calibration phantom
measured in (3.1) by clicking it with the left button of mouse, and then, click OK switch by the
left button of mouse.

(3.5) A slice directory window corresponding to the designated patient number is displayed. Designate
the slice number of the calibration phantom measured in (3.1) by clicking it with the left key of
mouse, and then, click OK button by the left button of mouse.

(3.6) A phantom move indicating value is displayed as shown below when clicking.
Calculation by the left button of mouse after the designated image has been displayed.

An example of phantom move indicating value display

(3.7) Move the phantom by using the micro gauge according to the displayed phantom move indicating
value. For closing the information window displaying the phantom move indicating value, click
OK button of the information window by the left button of mouse.

(3.8) Repeat steps (3.1) ~ (3.7) until the phantom move indicating values become less than 5 mm in the
vertical and horizontal directions.

3−69 L2E-BW1348
 (4) Execute CT number adjustment scan

(4.1) Select CT Number Adjustment in the measurement main menu on the operation panel to display
the water phantom selection menu.

(4.2) Display the tube voltage and slice thickness selection menu by pressing the button of the phantom
diameter ( 210 for example) to be adjusted, select the tube voltage and slice thickness ( 120 kV,
10 mm for example) to be adjusted, and then, press STANDBY button.

(4.3) After the system has been ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press START
button. The CT number adjustment scan is executed under the selected conditions.

Measure all necessary water phantoms by CT number adjustment scan under the tube
voltage and slice thickness where the CT number adjustment is desired, and then,
execute CT number adjustment calculation.

3.18.3 CT number adjustment calculation

(1) Click [Start] of the task bar by the left button of mouse, point the items in the order of [Programs]→[2.
Service], and then, click [CT No. Adjustment] by the left button of mouse.

(2) A CT number adjustment processing menu window is displayed. By clicking Calculation with the left
button of mouse, the following data list window is displayed.

The data list remarks column indicates the following contents according to the calculation date and time,
and measurement date and time.
“Calculation disable” : Non-measured data
“Calculation required” : Measured, but not calculated data
“Measured” : Data whose measuring date and time are later than the calculation date and
time
“Calculated” : Data whose calculation date and time are later than the measurement date
and time

3−70 L2E-BW1348
(3) By clicking the check box at the left of window with the left button of mouse, the CT number adjustment
parameter calculation conditions (X-ray tube voltage, slice thickness) are selected. A check mark is
displayed on the [Selection] column of the data conforming to the selected calculation conditions (See the
display example in (2)).

(4) By clicking Calc. Start button with the left button of mouse after the end of conditions selection,
calculation of CT number adjustment parameters is started.

If data being displayed as “Calculation disable” in [Remarks] column is indicated by a selection

check mark, Calc. Start button is displayed with a light color to show that the calculation
cannot be executed.

If an error occurs halfway in the course of calculation, the following window is displayed.

If an error occurred halfway in the course of calculation,

repeat the CT number adjustment scan about all water
phantoms under the corresponding conditions and then,
repeat calculation.

For erasing the error display window, click Abort button with the left button of mouse.

(5) After calculation ends, make sure that “End” is displayed in [Remarks] column of data selected in (3), and
terminate the CT number adjustment calculation program by clicking Close button with the left button
of mouse.

(6) Check the water CT number after CT number adjustment calculation processing by using raw data of the
water phantoms measured in CT number adjustment scan.
(6.1) Execute off-line image reconstruction by using the raw data of water phantoms requiring water CT
number check (raw data measured by CT number adjustment scan in 3.18.2). Then, A CT value
adjusted water phantom image is obtained. Set off-line image reconstruction conditions as shown
below.

Items Set values

Segment Full
Recon. center position (0, 0)
F.O.V. Same as in CT number adjustment scan
Zoom ratio 1
FFT filter 4
Image filter 0
Hi-Reso, BGC, BHC OFF
CTAdj ON

3−71 L2E-BW1348
 (6.2) Set circular R.O.I of radius 75 pixel at the center of the off-line reconstructed water phantom image,
measure the mean value of CT number (MEAN) in R.O.I, and make sure that the mean value is
0.0±4.0. If not, repeat the procedure starting with 3.18.2 [CT number adjustment scan].
If the mean value does not become within a range of 0.0±4.0 even after repeating the procedure
starting with the CT number adjustment scan, execute air calibration under the corresponding
conditions (combinations of x-ray tube voltage and slice thickness) and execute the CT number
adjustment scan, CT number adjustment calculation, and CT number check.

(7) Execute the CT number adjustment scan, CT number adjustment calculation, and CT number check under
all necessary conditions (combinations of X-ray tube voltage and slice thickness).

3−72 L2E-BW1348
3.19 Laser marker adjustment
Fig.3.19.1 shows the mounting layout of laser markers.
Fig.3.19.4 ~ Fig.3.19.7 show the mounting method of each laser marker.
After mounting the laser marker adjustment jig, adjust the laser marker to align the laser marker beams with the
black lines of the jig.

Laser marker ③
(patient positioning)

Laser marker ①
(slice plane)
Laser marker ④
(median line)

Laser marker ②
(scan center height)

Adjustment jig

Fig.3.19.1

Black line A
Black line C

Black line B

4-M6 x 25L hexagon

socket head bolt

Black line D

Fig.3.19.2

Basic application method of adjustment jig ･･･ Common to each laser marker

(i) Align the laser marker beam with the black line
on the front plate (on the plate close to the laser Black line of rear plate

marker in case of the right laser marker).

(ii) Align the beam passing through the front plate
hole with the black line of the rear plate. Black line of front plate

Front plate laser

beams passing hole

3−73 L2E-BW1348
(1) Adjustment of laser marker ①.
(This laser marker projects the slice plane.)

Move the laser marker after loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.19.4, and align the laser marker beam with
black line A in Fig.3.19.2. Align the beam passing the hole with the black line of the rear plate at the same
time.

M4 hexagon socket head screw

This screw is used for rotating the
M4 pan head screw laser marker largely. Don’t adjust
this screw normally, but keep it
fixed.
Laser marker
M4 pan head screw

Set to
36mm Fig. 3.19.4
Bracket

(2) Adjustment of laser marker ②.

(This laser marker projects the horizontal line showing the scan center height.)

Move the laser marker after loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.19.5, and align the laser marker beam with
black line B in Fig.3.19.2 Align the beam passing the hole with the black line of the rear plate at the same

M4 pan head screw

M4 hexagon socket head screw

This screw is used for rotating the
laser marker largely. Don’t adjust
this screw normally, but keep it
fixed.
M4 pan head screw

time.

3−74 L2E-BW1348
Fig. 3.19.5

Laser marker

Set to
36mm Bracket

3−75 L2E-BW1348
 (3) Adjustment of laser marker ③.

(This laser marker projects the beam perpendicular to the patient body axis.)

Move the laser marker after loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.19.6, and align the laser marker beam with
black line D in Fig.3.19.2. Align the beam passing the hole with the black line of the lower plate at the
same time.

M4 pan head screw

M4 hexagon socket head screw

This screw is used for rotating the
laser marker largely. Don’t adjust M4 pan head screw
this screw normally, but keep it fixed.

Laser marker

Fig. 3.19.6 Set to

36mm Bracket

(4) Adjustment of laser marker ④.

(This laser marker projects the median line.)

Move the laser marker after loosening the screws shown in Fig.3.19.7, and align the laser marker beam with
black line C in Fig.3.19.2. Align the beam passing the hole with the black line of the rear plate at the same
time.

M4 pan head screw

M4 hexagon socket head screw

This screw is used for rotating the laser
marker largely. Don’t adjust this screw
normally, but keep it fixed.

M4 pan head screw Laser marker

Set to
36mm Bracket
Fig.3.19.7

3−76 L2E-BW1348
3.20 Inter-phone (intercommunication) check
(1) Operation room → Scanner room
Operation room sound comes out to the scanner room when pressing TALK switch. Adjust the
sound volume by “OC-GANTRY” control knob on the rear face of touch panel.

When TALK is pressed, the sound from the scanner room is automatically attenuated.

(2) Scanner room → Operation room

Make sure that the sound volume can be changed by the control knob on the operator console. The sound
volume position of the operation room → auto voice control knob can be changed by setting the control
knob on the rear face. Adjust the sound volume position to an easy-to-use position.

3−77 L2E-BW1348
3.21 Hospital name entry
Enter a hospital name according to the following procedure

(1) After clicking [Start] switch, point [Programs] and [2 Service] Click [Hospital Name Entry].

(2) A hospital name entry window is displayed.

The preset hospital name is displayed For changing it, input a hospital name within 26 half-sized characters
and click [OK].

(3) The entered hospital name becomes effective after starting the system again. Check the hospital name by
an image scanned after starting the system again.

3−78 161 L2E-BW1348

 Section 4 Reference data

4.1 Service scan

([Phantom Calibration][Maintenance Scan] [CT Number Adjustment])
4.1.1 Service scan display/non-display selection
(1) Click [Start] [Programs] in the task bar by the left button of mouse, point [2 Service] by the mouse,
and then, click [Service Scan Seletion] by the left button of mouse.

Service menu display example

(2) A service scan setting window is displayed.

If none of service scan ([Phantom Calibration][Maintenance
Scan][CT Number Adjustment]) is displayed in the
measurement main menu on the operation panel at present,
checked [OFF] radio button is displayed. If service scan is
displayed, the checked [ON] radio button is displayed (The left
example shows that [OFF] radio button is checked).
For displaying the service scan in the measurement main menu
on the operation panel, click the items in the order of [ON]
radio button → [OK] button by the left button of mouse. For deleting service scans from the
measurement main menu, click the items in the order of [OFF] radio button → [OK] button by the
left button of mouse.

(3) By setting the service scan to [ON] in (2), the service scans ([Phantom Calibration][Maintenance
Scan][CT Number Adjustment]) are
displayed in the maintenance
measurement menu on the operation
panel.

4−1 L2E-BW1348
4.1.2 Stationary scan
(1) If [Maintenance scan] is not displayed in the measurement main menu on the operation panel,
display it according to 4.1.1.
(2) Set 21SW mounted at the front right of the scanner unit to STATIONARY SCAN to set the
scanner to be stationary (See Fig.4.1.1).
21SW:stationary/normal selector switch

22SW:
X-ray Brake free selector switch
tube
PCB unit Ⅰ
Chassis 2

Detector

Fig. 4.1.1 Stationary method of scanner

(3) Select maintenance scan from the main menu on the operation panel.
(4) After selecting a desired protocol on the operation panel, set the scan conditions to desired values,
and press STANDBY button. Turn [Stationary scan] item “ON”.
Table
Scans Angle Current Voltage Scan time Thickness Interval
index
Stationary Start
Delay FOV Filter B.H.C. B.G.C. Recon moment
scan mode
Variation Phantom ADPP ADPP CT No.
Bias Scatter corr. ADNR
code correction (measure) (recon) Adj.

(5) After the system has been set to be ready for measurement, START button flickers. Press it.
(6) When the stationary scan is not necessary, reset 21SW changed in (2) to NORMAL
(See Fig.4.1.1).
(7) For deleting [Maintenance scan] from the measurement main menu on the operation panel,
observe 4.1.1.
[Maintenance scan] cannot be deleted individually, but [phantom calibration], [maintenance scan],
and [CT number adjustment scan] belonging to the service scan are deleted collectively.

4−2 L2E-BW1348
4.2 Detector - preamplifier channels correspondence table
Pronto-XE

Detector Preamplifier Detector Preamplifier

Channel Channel
Connector No. Preamplifier No. Connector No. Connector No. Preamplifier No. Connector No.
1 ∼ 16 1 1 1 289 ∼ 304 19 3 19
17 ∼ 32 2 2 2 305 ∼ 320 20 4 20
33 ∼ 48 3 1 3 321 ∼ 336 21 3 21
49 ∼ 64 4 2 4 337 ∼ 352 22 4 22
65 ∼ 80 5 1 5 353 ∼ 368 23 3 23
81 ∼ 96 6 2 6 369 ∼ 384 24 4 24
97 ∼ 112 7 1 7 385 ∼ 400 25 5 25
113 ∼ 128 8 2 8 401 ∼ 416 26 6 26
129 ∼ 144 9 1 9 417 ∼ 432 27 5 27
145 ∼ 160 10 2 10 433 ∼ 448 28 6 28
161 ∼ 176 11 1 11 449 ∼ 464 29 5 29
177 ∼ 192 12 2 12 465 ∼ 480 30 6 30
193 ∼ 208 13 3 13 481 ∼ 496 31 5 31
209 ∼ 224 14 4 14 497 ∼ 512 32 6 32
225 ∼ 240 15 3 15 513 ∼ 528 33 5 33
241 ∼ 256 16 4 16 529 ∼ 544 34 6 34
257 ∼ 272 17 3 17 545 ∼ 560 35 5 35
273 ∼ 288 18 4 18 561 ∼ 576 36 6 36

4−3 L2E-BW1348
 Pronto-SE (not sub-second)

Detector Preamplifier Detector Preamplifier

Channel No. Device Preamplifier Channel No. Device Preamplifier
Connector Connector Connector Connector
block PCB block PCB
- ∼ - 1 369 ∼ 376 1
1 1 4 25
- ∼ - 1 2 377 ∼ 384 17 2
1 ∼ 8 3 385 ∼ 392 3
2 2 5 26
9 ∼ 16 1 393 ∼ 400 1
17 ∼ 24 2 2 401 ∼ 408 18 2
3 3 4 27
25 ∼ 32 3 409 ∼ 416 3
33 ∼ 40 1 417 ∼ 424 1
1 4 5 28
41 ∼ 48 3 2 425 ∼ 432 19 2
49 ∼ 56 3 433 ∼ 440 3
2 5 4 29
57 ∼ 64 1 441 ∼ 448 1
65 ∼ 72 4 2 449 ∼ 456 20 2
3 6 5 30
73 ∼ 80 3 457 ∼ 464 3
81 ∼ 88 1 465 ∼ 472 1
1 7 6 31
89 ∼ 96 5 2 473 ∼ 480 21 2
97 ∼ 104 3 481 ∼ 488 3
2 8 7 32
105 ∼ 112 1 489 ∼ 496 1
113 ∼ 120 6 2 497 ∼ 504 22 2
3 9 8 33
121 ∼ 128 3 505 ∼ 512 3
129 ∼ 136 1 513 ∼ 520 1
1 10 6 34
137 ∼ 144 7 2 521 ∼ 528 23 2
145 ∼ 152 3 529 ∼ 536 3
2 11 7 35
153 ∼ 160 1 537 ∼ 544 1
161 ∼ 168 8 2 545 ∼ 552 24 2
3 12 8 36
169 ∼ 176 3 553 ∼ 560 3
177 ∼ 184 1 561 ∼ 568 1
1 13 6 37
185 ∼ 192 9 2 569 ∼ 576 25 2
193 ∼ 200 3 577 ∼ 584 3
2 14 7 38
201 ∼ 208 1 585 ∼ 592 1
209 ∼ 216 10 2 593 ∼ 600 26 2
3 15 8 39
217 ∼ 224 3 601 ∼ 608 3
225 ∼ 232 1 609 ∼ 616 1
1 16 6 40
233 ∼ 240 11 2 617 ∼ 624 27 2
241 ∼ 248 3 625 ∼ 632 3
2 17 7 41
249 ∼ 256 1 633 ∼ 640 1
257 ∼ 264 12 2 641 ∼ 648 28 2
3 18 8 42
265 ∼ 272 3 649 ∼ 656 3
273 ∼ 280 1 657 ∼ 664 1
4 19 6 43
281 ∼ 288 13 2 665 ∼ 672 29 2
289 ∼ 296 3 673 ∼ 680 3
5 20 7 44
297 ∼ 304 1 681 ∼ 688 1
305 ∼ 312 14 2 689 ∼ 696 30 2
4 21 8 45
313 ∼ 320 3 697 ∼ 704 3
321 ∼ 328 1 705 ∼ 712 1
5 22 6 46
329 ∼ 336 15 2 713 ∼ 720 31 2
337 ∼ 344 3 721 ∼ 728 3
4 23 7 47
345 ∼ 352 1 729 ∼ 736 1
353 ∼ 360 16 2 737 ∼ 744 32 2
5 24 8 48
361 ∼ 368 3 745 ∼ 752 3

4−4 L2E-BW1348
 Pronto-VE

Detector Preamplifier Detector Preamplifier

Channel ch Device Preamplifier Channel ch Device Preamplifier
Connector Connector Case Connector Connector Case
block PCB block PCB
- ∼ - 1 13 1 369 ∼ 376 1 61 2
- ∼ - 1 2 1 14 377 ∼ 384 17 2 17 62
1 ∼ 8 3 15 385 ∼ 392 3 63
9 ∼ 16 1 16 393 ∼ 400 1 64
17 ∼ 24 2 2 2 17 401 ∼ 408 18 2 18 65
25 ∼ 32 3 18 409 ∼ 416 3 66
33 ∼ 40 1 19 417 ∼ 424 1 67
41 ∼ 48 3 2 3 20 425 ∼ 432 19 2 19 68
49 ∼ 56 3 21 433 ∼ 440 3 69
57 ∼ 64 1 22 441 ∼ 448 1 70
65 ∼ 72 4 2 4 23 449 ∼ 456 20 2 20 71
73 ∼ 80 3 24 457 ∼ 464 3 72
81 ∼ 88 1 25 465 ∼ 472 1 73
89 ∼ 96 5 2 5 26 473 ∼ 480 21 2 21 74
97 ∼ 104 3 27 481 ∼ 488 3 75
105 ∼ 112 1 28 489 ∼ 496 1 76
113 ∼ 120 6 2 6 29 497 ∼ 504 22 2 22 77
121 ∼ 128 3 30 505 ∼ 512 3 78
129 ∼ 136 1 31 513 ∼ 520 1 79
137 ∼ 144 7 2 7 32 521 ∼ 528 23 2 23 80
145 ∼ 152 3 33 529 ∼ 536 3 81
153 ∼ 160 1 34 537 ∼ 544 1 82
161 ∼ 168 8 2 8 35 545 ∼ 552 24 2 24 83
169 ∼ 176 3 36 553 ∼ 560 3 84
177 ∼ 184 1 37 561 ∼ 568 1 85
185 ∼ 192 9 2 9 38 569 ∼ 576 25 2 25 86
193 ∼ 200 3 39 577 ∼ 584 3 87
201 ∼ 208 1 40 585 ∼ 592 1 88
209 ∼ 216 10 2 10 41 593 ∼ 600 26 2 26 89
217 ∼ 224 3 42 601 ∼ 608 3 90
225 ∼ 232 1 43 609 ∼ 616 1 91
233 ∼ 240 11 2 11 44 617 ∼ 624 27 2 27 92
241 ∼ 248 3 45 625 ∼ 632 3 93
249 ∼ 256 1 46 633 ∼ 640 1 94
257 ∼ 264 12 2 12 47 641 ∼ 648 28 2 28 95
265 ∼ 272 3 48 649 ∼ 656 3 96
273 ∼ 280 1 49 657 ∼ 664 1 97
281 ∼ 288 13 2 13 50 665 ∼ 672 29 2 29 98
289 ∼ 296 3 51 673 ∼ 680 3 99
297 ∼ 304 1 52 681 ∼ 688 1 100
305 ∼ 312 14 2 14 53 689 ∼ 696 30 2 30 101
313 ∼ 320 3 54 697 ∼ 704 3 102
321 ∼ 328 1 55 705 ∼ 712 1 103
329 ∼ 336 15 2 15 56 713 ∼ 720 31 2 31 104
337 ∼ 344 3 57 721 ∼ 728 3 105
345 ∼ 352 1 58 729 ∼ 736 1 106
353 ∼ 360 16 2 16 59 737 ∼ 744 32 2 32 107
361 ∼ 368 3 60 745 ∼ 752 3 108

4−4−1 L2E-BW1348
4.3 Connection of laser imager (L.I.) to the image processing unit
4.3.1 Connection of imager control cable
Connect the imager control cable being attached to 85CN on the upper panel of the image processing
unit.

Front

85CN
83CN
82CN
7

22CN
13

21CN
61CN

9CN

FG4

Rear

Cleat the cable

Connect to L.I. store control connector

4−5 L2E-BW1348
4.3.2 Video signal connection
(a) Analog video signal connection.
(1) Connect analog video signals to 18CN on the rear panel of the main unit.
(2) Connect the synchronous signal (pixel clock) to 19CN, if necessary.

18CN

19CN

1FFB

Coaxial cable
(Prepared by the maker)

1TN

Cleat the cable

To L.I.

4−6 L2E-BW1348
(b) Digital video signal connection.
Connect digital video signals to 20CN on PC-IMG PCB of slot No. 10 on the side panel of main
unit.

20CN

Front

Slot No.10
PC-IMG PCB

Signal cable
(Prepared by the maker)

A
Rear

Enlarged view of part A

1FFB

1TN

Cleat the cable by a tie lap

To L.I.

4−7 169 L2E-BW1348

 Whole-body X-ray CT System

Model Pronto

TECHNICAL GUIDE
- - - Maintenance & Inspection - - -

Tokyo, Japan
L3E-BW1349-3

CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of

Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2001, 2002. All rights reserved.
This Technical Guide was originally drafted, approved and supplied by Hitachi Medical Corporation in the English
language.

Periodical Inspection Work Standard

1. Purpose of Periodical Inspection Work Standard

1-1 The periodical inspection work standard aims safety of the workers for inspection work and reasonable
implementation of inspection work
To implement this purpose, a person in charge of inspection work shall be appointed and the inspection work
shall be proceeded under the control of the person.

2. Appointment of Person in Charge of Inspection Work

2-1 The person in higher rank shall appoint a person in charge of inspection work among workers before starting
the periodical inspection work.

3. Task of Person in Charge of Inspection Work

3-1 The person in charge of inspection work shall hold "Pre-work meeting" based on "Pre-work checklist" shown
in the following page to make sure of safety work. At the same time, he/she shall confirm contents and
purpose of inspection work, and show precautions for the inspection work to the inspection workers.
3-2 The person in charge shall be a liaison officer for customer relations, and have close contact with the customer
on work schedule (Starting and ending hours scheduled, etc.) taking full care of claims not to be raised.
3-3 The person in charge of inspection work shall issue instructions to the workers taking full care of their safety
based on the safety pocketbook.

4. Relieving Person in Charge of Inspection Work

4-1 By submitting the maintenance checklist and pre-work checklist after completing inspection work, the person
in charge of inspection work shall be relieved of his/her task.

( 1A ) 1 L3E-BW1349
 Person in
Manager
charge

Pre-work Checklist

Date and time

Place

Contents
Workers (Section, name) (Person in charge)

Check items Checked Check items Checked

Preliminary work (4) Working ware
(1) At start of work (a) Working ware is neat?
(a) Film badge worn? (b) Working shoes are appropriate?
(b) Protection tools prepared?
(c) X-ray ON is due to instructions (5) Others
by the person in charge? (a) Number of workers in replacing
heavy articles is ensured?
(2) Indication and making contact with (b) Scope of responsibility has been
the customer during inspection clarified with the carriers?
(a) Indication of the CT room (c) Location to store and handle
entrance? detergent is properly ventilated?
(b) Indication of the power (d) Signals when working as a group
distributing unit? have been confirmed?
(c) Indication of the control panel? (e) Location designated for smoking
(d) Making contact with the has been confirmed?
customer completed?

(3) Putting in order in the work room

(a) Removed covers are properly
placed?
(b) Passage is fully ensured?

(Remarks)

NOTE: This checklist is for checking the purpose of work, instructions, preliminary work, etc. by holding a
meeting before starting inspection work. Fully take care of safety in performing inspection work.

(2) 2 L3E-BW1349
 Tables of Maintenance Inspection Items and Methods

CONTENTS

Page

Removing Covers in Maintenance Work......................................................................................................1

A. Periodical Maintenance Inspection Work ............................................................................................3
1. Scanner .........................................................................................................................................3
2. Table .............................................................................................................................................7
3. Central Operation Console (Control unit and image processing unit) ..........................................9
4. X-ray Control Unit......................................................................................................................10
5. High Voltage Generator and Filament Heating Circuit (in the scanner) .....................................11
6. X-ray Tube Assembly (in the scanner) .......................................................................................11
7. Overall Adjustment.....................................................................................................................12

Appendix
A Checking Hydraulic Drive Unit for Tilting (Check item No.101) ..............................................13
B Belt Tension Adjustment of Scan Drive Unit (Check item No.102)...........................................14
C Cleaning Sensor PCB (Check item No.104) ...............................................................................17
D Checking and Replacing Slip Ring Brush (Check item No.107) ................................................18
E-1 Interlock Specification of XE (Check item No.115)...................................................................26
E-2 Interlock Specification of SE and VE (Check item No.115).......................................................27
F Checking Chain Tension and Wire Rope Tension (Check item No.211) ....................................28
G Lubrication to Table Hydraulic Drive Unit (Check item No. 214) .............................................31
H (1) Pronto (1.5MHU) Permissible Load Range ..........................................................................32
(2) Pronto (2MHU, 3.5MHU) Permissible Load Range .............................................................33
I Checking Primary Voltage of X-ray Controller (Check item No.408)........................................34
J Checking Detector Temperature Controller (SE/VE) (Check item No. 121)..............................35
K Fastening Torque of Bolts and Nuts............................................................................................36
L Correspondence between Detector and Preamplifier Channels ..................................................38
M Checking Voltage of Scanner DC Power Supply (Check item No. 120) ....................................41
N Checking Voltage of Table DC Power Supply (Check item No. 210) ........................................43
O Checking Electromagnetic Valve of Table Hydraulic System ....................................................44
P Replacing Battery Pack of Detector High Voltage Power Supply (XE) (Check item No.122)...46
Q Replacing the Capacitor Microphone (Check item No.125).......................................................47
R Air Scan Image for Reference.....................................................................................................49
S Connecting High Voltage Cable..................................................................................................50

(3) 3 L3E-BW1349
Removing Covers in Maintenance Work

In maintenance inspection, remove or open the covers listed below. Fig. 1 shows the gantry covers.

Components to be inspected and procedure to remove covers

No. Components to be maintained and inspected Procedure to remove covers

1 X-ray tube assembly 1. Remove the lower front cover ②.
2 Detector 2. Remove screws and X-ray window ④.
3 Preamplifier 3. Remove the screws fixing the lower part of lift
4 Light localizer for slice positions cover ① and open the lift cover ①.
5 Light localizer for center height position
6 Light localizer for midline
7 PCB unit×2
8 Chassis 1
9 Chassis 2
10 Light localizer for positioning
Hydraulic system In addition to the above, remove the rear cover ⑤,
11
side cover (right) ⑦ and side cover (left) ⑧.
12 TUBE UPSIDE sensor Remove screws to remove the rear cover ⑤, cone
13 Rotary encoder for zebra pulse generation cover ③ and X-ray window ④.
14 Belt tension

− 1 − L3E-BW1349
 ⑧
⑥

④
③

Gantry front view Gantry rear view

① Lift cover ⑥ Top cover

② Lower front cover ⑦ Side cover (right)
③ Cone cover ⑧ Side cover (left)
④ X-ray window
⑤ Rear cover

Fig.1 Gantry Covers

− 2 − L3E-BW1349
Periodical Maintenance Inspection Work

1. Scanner
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
101 Hydraulic (1) Oil leak Check if there is no oil leak at While turning on 6 months 10 min
cylinder (for the tube joints of cylinder, the power, keep
tilting drive) pump, etc. and joints of you off the
electromagnetic valves, etc. scanner to check
(2) Electro- Follow Appendix A at the end it. 12 months 10 min
magnetic of this manual to check if the
valve and gantry does not tilt.
check
valve
(3) Applying Apply spray type lubricant 12 months 10 min
lubricant (Accessory to the table) to the
hydraulic cylinder rod.
102 Belt for scan (1) Scratch Check if there is no scratch or Turn OFF the 6 months 10 min
drive crack on the belt. power switch on
(2) Belt Follow Appendix B at the end the control panel 6 months 10 min
tension of this manual to check if belt before work.
tension is 40~50N {4~5kgf}.
103 Electro-mag Operation Use 3s scan to check if rotation Do not enter into 6 months 10 min
netic brake stops with the EMERGENCY the scanner room
(Scan drive button on the control panel during the check.
unit) (Try twice.)
104 Scan (1) Dust If the position detecting photo Turn OFF the 6 months 30 min
controller sensor is covered with dust, use power switch on
a piece of cloth to clean it. the control panel
When removing the sensor before check.
PCB, see Appendix C at the
end of this manual.
(2) Operation Check signal level of the 6 months 10 min
position detecting photo
sensor.
(3) Looseness Further tighten the fixing screw
of each signal detector.
(4) Contact Check if the position detecting
photo sensor does not touch the Keep you off the 6 months 10 min
striker. turn plate to
check this.
105 Interlock Operation Check that scan operations are 6 months 5 min
switch (Lift disabled if opening the lift
cover) cover.
106 Touch Operation Check if operation stops by 6 months 5 min
switch (Lift pressing the touch switch
cover and during scanner tilt and table
cone cover) movement.

− 3 − L3E-BW1349
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
107 Slip ring (1) Checking Check wearing of the brush Turn OFF all 6 months 8 hours
brush wear of and clean the slip ring (See breakers of the
brush and Appendix D at the end of this power
cleaning manual.). distribution
(2) Replacing Periodically replace the left board before 160k scans 1 hour
power and right power brushes. check.
brush
(3) Replacing Periodically replace the upper 320k scans 2 hours
signal and lower signal brushes.
brush
108 Collimator (1) Dust If there is dust on the Turn OFF the 6 months 15 min
collimator bar, use a piece of power switch on
cloth to wipe it off. the control panel
(2) Scratch Check if there is no scratch in before work.
the slit of collimator bar.
(3) Loose Further tighten the fixing
screw screws.
109 Light Projected line Check the position of projected Keep you off the 6 months 5 min
localizer line is not shifted. If any shift turn plate to
is found, adjust it. check it.
Do not turn your
eyes directly to
the laser light.
110 X-ray Dust and stain Use a piece of soft cloth to 6 months 5 min
window clean the transparent sheet.
111 Cabling (in Loose cleat Check if there is loose cable 6 months 15 min
the turn cleat or the cable does not
plate and touch the scanner cover and so
stand) on.
112 X-ray tube Loose screw Further tighten the fixing Turn OFF the 6 months 15 min
assembly screws of X-ray tube assembly power switch on
support support. the control panel
before work.
113 Chassis and (1) Dust Remove dust on the chassis 6 months 15 min
chassis (gantry and stand).
terminal (2) Loose Further tighten the fixing
screw screws of connection cable at
the terminal.
114 Tilt angle Broken wire, Check if the indicator 6 months 2 min
indicator functions increments or decrements by
0.5 according to tilt of the
scanner and if no segment
fails.

− 4 − L3E-BW1349
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
115 Range of Operation Check if angle agrees with 6 months 2 min
tilting indication (See Appendix E at
the end of this manual.).
116 EMERGENCY Operation When pressing the ● Wear the 6 months 2 min
EMERGENCY button, X-ray protective
exposure and scan operation clothing to
must stop and the indicator protect you
must light. from
exposure.
● Keep the
X-ray
condition at
its lowest
position.
117 Scan time Operation Run the check program ● Be careful 6 months 15 min
Measurement “Scanning Time Check” from since the
the central operation console to scanner can
check four types (five : VE) of rotate (Do
scan time. not emit
If measured value is out of X-rays.)
specification, change Reference:
parameter values of the motor TECHNICAL
inverter. GUIDE (Check
& Service
Programs)
(Installation &
Adjustment)
118 Table control Operation Run the check program “Table Reference: 6 months 5 min
panel Check” – “LED Check” to TECHNICAL
check if LED’s light in turn. GUIDE (Check
& Service)
119 PCB Cleaning Remove dust on PCB. Turn OFF the 12 months 10 min
200V breaker of
the power
distribution board
for check.

− 5 − L3E-BW1349
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
120 DC power Voltage check Use the digital voltmeter to See Appendix M. 12 months 20 min
supply check DC voltages of PCB
unit.
(Gantry)
1DPS: 5V ± 0.1V
2DPS: 5V ± 0.1V
+15V ± 0.5V
-15V ± 0.5V
3DPS: 24V ± 1.0V
4DPS: 12V ± 0.5V
51DPS: +15V ± 0.5V
52DPS: 5V ± 0.1V
53DPS: -15V ± 0.5V
54DPS: 5V ± 0.1V
101DPS: 5V ± 0.1V
301DPS: 48V ± 2.0V
103DPS: +15V ± 0.1V
-15V ± 0.1V
104DPS: 5V ± 0.1V
* Use 103DPS and 104DPS in
case of VE only.
(Preamplifier)
XE, SE
1APS: +5V±0.1V
2APS: +5V±0.1V
3APS: +5V±0.1V
VE
DC OUT #1pin: +5V±0.1V
DC OUT #10pin: -5V±0.1V
DC OUT #5pin: +5V±0.2V
DC OUT #2pin to GND
Measure with pins connected
as above.
121 Indication of Check Check if temperature controller See Appendix J. 6 months 2 min
detector reads 35ºC±1.
temperature
controller
(SE/VE)
122 High voltage Check Press the snap switch of high 6 months 2 min
power supply Recording voltage power supply to check
for detector the indicator of voltmeter is
(XE) within the green range.
Also record the voltage.
See Appendix P for procedure
to replace the battery pack.
123 Gas pressure Check Check if the indicator of 12 months 2 min
of detector pressure gauge is within the
(XE) green range.
124 Intercom Check Check if communication in the 12 months 3 min
direction of the scanner Æ
operation console is available.
125 Capacitor Periodical Periodically replace the Lift cover and 24 months 20 min
microphone replacement capacitor microphones at two cone cover
locations. See Appendix Q.

− 6A − L3E-BW1349
 2. Table
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
201 Tabletop Broken wire, Check if indication increments or 6 months 2 min
slide functions decrements by 0.5 according to
indicator longitudinal move of the tabletop
and if no segment fails.
202 Table Broken wire, Check if indication increments or 6 months 2 min
up/down functions decrements by 1 according to
indicator up/down move of the table and if
no segment fails.
203 Table Stroke Check if actual stroke agrees with 6 months 2 min
longitudinal indication indication.
move stroke
204 Up/down Stroke Check if actual stroke agrees with 6 months 2 min
move stroke indication indication.
205 Segment Broken wire Check if indication is correctly 6 months 5 min
indicator performed according to each
operation.
206 PAT Operation Check if the PAT button moves Check no one in 6 months 5 min
operation the table by 290mm of preset the scanner room
value. during X-ray
Check if PAT operation is exposure.
disabled during X-ray exposure or
manual indexing, scanogram and
SET indexing.
207 SET Operation Check if the table moves 6 months 5 min
indexing correctly following the stroke
operation setting using the SET switch at
the touch panel side.
208 Abnormal Abnormal Perform each operation to check 6 months 5 min
sound sound if no abnormal sound is heard.
during
operation
209 PCB Cleaning Remove dust on PCB. Turn OFF the 12 months 10 min
200V breaker in
the power
distribution board
before check.
210 DC power Voltage check Use the digital voltmeter to check See Appendix N.
supply DC voltage of the control unit
1DPS: 5V±0.1V

− 7 − L3E-BW1349
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
211 Tabletop (1) Tension Check if tension of the drive ● See 6 months 10 min
longitudinal chain and wire rope is Appendix F
move drive appropriate. at the end of
chain and (2) Applying Apply the machine oil to the this manual.
wire rope machine chain.
oil
(3) Scratch Check if there is no scratch and
broken element wires on the wire
rope.
212 CAL Damage Check if there is no damage 6 months 5 min
phantom affecting functions.
mount
213 CAL Attached Check no foreign article is 6 months 5 min
phantom foreign article, attached or no damage is found at
damage the periphery of phantom.
214 Checking oil Oil level (1) When setting the table height 6 months 30 min
level of the to 900mm (indicator reads
table 150mm), oil level in the tank
hydraulic must be within 60mm±
drive and oil 10mm.
leak from (2) Check if there is no oil leak (See Appendix G
cylinder, at the cylinder and joints. at the end of this
joint, etc. manual.)
215 Hydraulic Lubrication Apply spray type lubricant 12 months 5 min
cylinder (accessory to the table) to the rod.
216 Fixing of Loose screw Check the bolts fixing tabletop For the back of 12 months 5 min
tabletop (on the surface and back of tabletop, shift the
tabletop) and further tighten them. tabletop to its
foremost
position.

− 8 − L3E-BW1349
 3. Central Operation Console (Control unit and image processing unit)
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
301 Operation of Checking Perform scanogram and scan to See 6 months 15 min
scan and functions and check the following operations. INSTRUCTION
image display (1) Check date and time. If MANUAL.
display any of them is incorrect,
correct it.
(2) Check both-way
communication of the
intercom and auto voice.
(3) Check if the SET switch
carries out table indexing
correctly.
(4) Check indication and tone
of X-RAY ON, and check
indication of WAIT TIME
when waiting HU.
(5) Check the EMERGENCY
button stops scan and
lights the indicator lamp.
(6) Check the keyboard and
mouse. Try patient
registration and window
change to check them.
302 Internal Cleaning (1) Clean the inside if there is Turn OFF the 6 months 20 min
check Operation any dust. power before
check (2) Clean PCB in the PCB work.
unit if there is any dust on
it. Also check if the
connector is correctly
inserted.
(3) Check if the cable is not
poorly connected. Also
check if screws on the
terminal block are not
loose.
(4) If dust is attached to each
cooling fan, clean it and
check if it rotates
smoothly.
(5) Check there is no damage
on the other electric
appliances by eyes.
303 Checking Output of error Run the service program to Take appropriate 6 months 5 min
error log log check the error in detail. action according
to contents.
304 Check Operation Use the check program to Implement in an Reference ─
program check operation as necessary. abnormal
situation.

− 9 − L3E-BW1349
 4. X-ray Control Unit
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
401 Inside in Cleaning Remove dust. Turn OFF all 12months 30 min
general FFB’s of the
402 Electric Damage Check any damaged parts. power 6 months 10 min
parts distribution unit
403 Relay Rough contact Replace any contact the extent in the X-ray 6 months 5 min
contact of roughness is big. control unit
404 Terminal, Looseness, Check there is no looseness before work. 6 months 15 min
connector damage and damage. Further tighten Check if the
terminal screws. power
indicator
“MAINS” in
the X-ray
control unit is
not lit.
405 Checking Operation, See [3.5] [3.6] of Turn ON the 6 months 20 min
anode Measurement TECHNICAL GUIDE power to the CPU
rotation (Installation & Adjustment) to and gantry before
drive unit check boost, running, braking check.
(Starter) voltages and boost and braking
time (Use the RMS meter to
measure voltage.)
406 DC power Voltage check Use the digital voltmeter to Turn ON the 6 months 10 min
supply check DC voltages. power to the CPU
PCB unit: and gantry before
501DPS- +5±0.1V check.
502DPS- +15±0.2V
503DPS- -15±0.2V
407 Cooling fan Cleaning, check Clean two cooling fans at the 6 months 10 min
lower part of inverter unit and
six cooling fans at the back of
cabinet and check their
rotation.
408 Checking Measurement See Appendix I to check 6 months 15 min
primary primary voltage.
voltage
409 Checking Measurement See TECHNICAL GUIDE Care should be 6 months 30 min
kV, mA (Installation & Adjustment) to taken because
check kV and mA. X-rays are
emitted.
410 Record of Record of scan Record of scan counter 6 months 5min
scan counter numbers indication

− 10 − L3E-BW1349
 5. High Voltage Generator and Filament Heating Circuit (in the scanner)
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
501 Oil leak Checking oil leak Check it by eyes. 6 months 15 min
502 Terminal, Looseness, Check if there is no looseness or Turn OFF all 12 months 15 min
connector damage damage. Further tighten breakers of the
terminals. power distribution
board.
503 Filament Measurement With digital voltmeter connected Turn on the power 4 months 20 min
heating between TP1 and GND of supplies of CPU and
Filament PCB, measure the gantry in advance.
voltage there. Perform this
(1) With only power on, adjust measurement in the
4VR on CONT B1 PCB for stationary scan
the voltage between TP1 and
GND to be 7±0.1V DC. mode.
504 HV plug (1) Cleaning After disconnecting the plug, Ditto 6 months 20min
and socket (2) Replacement check the appearance. Reset the
of silicon plug as before after replacing
grease silicon grease.

6. X-ray Tube Assembly (in the scanner)

* Turn OFF the 200V breaker of power distribution board.
Only turning off the GANTRY POWER switch cannot turn OFF the power in the scanner turn plate.
Turn OFF the 200V breaker of hospital power distribution board.

No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours

601 Radiator Cleaning Clean dust attached to the radiator 6 months 30 min
and fan (Clean the back as well).
602 Thermal Operation (1) Remove the terminal (92TN) 6 months 10 min
switch H, H0 at the lower side of
X-ray tube assembly and use
the circuit tester to check
continuity. At this time, no
continuity exists between H
and H0.
(2) When turning ON the power Removed wire must
to central operation console not touch the other
with H and H0 removed, and conductors.
performing pre-measurement
operation, the sequence
displayed as “TUBE OVER
HEAT” must be suspended.
(3) Restore H and H0 to their Turn OFF FFB of the
original state. hospital power
distribution board
before work.
603 HV plug (1) Cleaning After disconnecting the plug, Ditto 6 months 20min
and socket (2) Replacement check the appearance. Reset
of silicon the plug as before after replacing
grease silicon grease.

− 11 − L3E-BW1349
 7. Overall Adjustment
No. Check item Purpose Method Cautions Cycle Man-hours
701 X-ray beam Check Use the instant film to check Use the instant 6 months 5 min
and adjust X-ray beam. film. Do not
(1) Use stationary scan. expose yourself to
(2) X-ray conditions: 100kV, X-rays.
50mA and 1.0s See TECHNICAL
GUIDE
(Installation &
Adjustment).
Shift between the center of
X-ray beam and the center of
window must be within
0.5mm.
X-ray beam X-ray beam
narrow area wide area

Distance “d” must be within

0.5mm.
702 Checking Checking Carry out vibration check scan See TECHNICAL 6 months 5 min
vibration vibration and to check there is no abnormal GUIDE
data on the abnormality of vibration or other abnormality (Installation &
detector the detector in the detector system. Adjustment).
system BIAS value = 320 Perform this
check with X-ray
OFF.
703 Detector Check Use the maintenance scan Check that no one 6 months 5 min
preamplifier program to check the stays in the
output preamplifier output at the scanner room.
center of detector.
(XD-OFD)
(1) Air scan
(2) X-ray condition: 120kV, See TECHNICAL
150mA, 10mm slice. GUIDE
For the range of output (Installation &
values, see TECHNICAL Adjustment).
GUIDE (Installation &
Adjustment).
704 Adjusting Check Measure shift of the center of See TECHNICAL 6 months 10 min
the center of tube with 120kV, 10mm, GUIDE
X-ray tube 50mA and 3s. Focus position (Installation &
assembly shift must be within 0± Adjustment).
and detector 0.05mm.
705 Phantom Carrying out Follow the TECHNICAL See TECHNICAL 6 months 80 min
calibration GUIDE (Installation & GUIDE
Adjustment) to carry out (Installation &
phantom calibration. Adjustment).

− 12A − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix A Checking Hydraulic Drive Unit for Tilting (Check item No.101)

Follow the steps below to check the hydraulic drive unit for tilting located at the left and right stands.
(1) While setting the scanner with the TILT CENTER lit, turn OFF the scanner power.
(2) Remove the side cover of the left stand and remove the connector of power cable for hydraulic circuit (214CN).
Short the #3 and #4 terminals of connector at the cable side.
(3) Turn ON the power and stick the gummed tape to the back tilt button of the control panel to keep the ON state for
10 minutes. If the TILT CENTER keeps lit, there is no abnormality in the left side hydraulic drive unit.
(4) Turn the power OFF and return the connector to its original position.
(5) Remove the connector of power cable (215CN) for hydraulic circuit in the right stand.
(6) As well as Item (3) above, check if there is no abnormality in the right side hydraulic drive unit.

NOTE: If back tilting of the gantry is extraordinary, press the EMERGENCY button to turn the panel
power OFF. Return the connector to its original position and inform the factory of this
trouble.

Control panel

Power connector Gummed tape

215CN
(214CN)

Fig. A.1 Hydraulic Drive Unit

− 13 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix B Belt Tension Adjustment of Scan Drive Unit (Check item No.102)

1. Follow (1) below to check belt tension. If tension is not normal, follow 2 to work for it.
(1) Measuring tension of the scan drive timing belt
Press the spring balance against the belt halfway between the large pulley and small pulley as shown in Fig.
B.1.
Tension is appropriate if deflection of the belt is 7mm when pressing the spring balance with the force of
40~50N (4~5kgf).
(2) Measuring tension of the V-belt and timing belt (Rotary encoder)
Belt tension is appropriate if deflection of the belt δ1 and δ2 halfway between pulleys as shown in Fig. B.2
are those shown in Table B.1.

Timing belt
δ =7mm

Timing belt

Spring balance
Spring balance

40∼50N
Electromagnetic brake
Tension is normal if deflection δ is 7mm when
pressing the spring balance by 40~50N.
V-belt Press the center part so as not to twist the
timing belt.

Drive pulley
Induction motor

Fig. B.1 Scan Drive Belt

− 14 − L3E-BW1349
 δ2

F2 Rotary encoder

M8 hexagonal bolt Scan drive base

F1
M4 screw
M8 nut
M12 hexagonal socket bolt
M8 hexagonal bolt
δ1 M8 hexagonal socket bolts (4 pieces)

Motor base

F (N)
Spring balance
Scale
δ (mm)

Belt
Marking line

Fig. B.2

43N {4.3kgf}: 1st time

F1 δ1 4.6mm
37N {3.7kgf}: 2nd time and after
F2 0.5N {50gf} δ2 2.3mm

Table B.1

− 15A − L3E-BW1349
2. Adjusting belt tension
(1) Timing belt (for scan drive)
1) Loose two M12 hexagonal socket bolts fixing the scan drive base to the frame.
2) Use the adjusting M8 hexagonal bolt to adjust tension.
3) After adjustment, fasten the M12 hexagonal socket bolt to fix the base.
4) Manually turn the pulley clockwise two or three turns to check belt tension is appropriate.

(2) V-belt
1) Loose four motor base fixing bolts (M8 hexagonal socket bolt).
2) Loose the M8 nut fixing the M8 hexagonal bolt for adjustment, and use the M8 hexagonal bolt to adjust
tension of the V-belt.
3) After adjustment, fasten the M8 nut to fix the M8 hexagonal bolt so as not to be loosened.

Fig. B.3

NOTE: As for parallelism between both pulleys, δ must be 1mm or less.

(3) Timing belt (Rotary encoder unit)

Loose four M4 screws of the rotary encoder mount to adjust for δ2 and F2 to be appropriate values. (See
Table B.1.)

− 16 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix C Cleaning Sensor PCB (Check item No.104)

Fig.C.1 shows layout of SENS2A PCB viewing from the rear of scanner.
① SENS2A PCB (TUBE UPSIDE)

X-ray tube assembly

Rotary encoder ①

Fig. C.1 Layout of SENS2A PCB

When removing SENS2A PCB to clean the photo-sensor, move the shading plate off the sensor first.

Shading plate

Mounting plate

Photo-sensor

SENS2A PCB

Fig. C.2 Cleaning SENS 2A PCB

− 17 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix D Checking and Replacing Slip Ring Brush (Check item No.107)

1. Preliminary work
(1) Turn off all breakers of the power distribution board.
(2) Remove the following gantry covers.
Side cover (Right) Side cover (Left) Top cover
(3) Prepare a stepladder 80cm high.
(4) Remove ⑤ Ring cover (Upper left), ⑥ Ring cover (Upper right), ⑨ Ring cover (Lower left),
⑩ Ring cover (Lower right), ⑪ Mounting bracket (Upper) and ⑯ Mounting bracket (Lower).

②
③ Ａ

⑱
Ａ
⑰

⑬
⑭ ⑥

④
⑧
①
⑩
⑨

⑯ ⑮

Fig. D.1

① Slip ring ⑦ Ring cover (Left A) ⑬ Mounting bracket (Upper right)

② Power brush block
③ Signal brush block
④ HF signal brush block
⑤ Ring cover (Upper left)
⑥ Ring cover (Upper right)
⑧ Ring cover (Right)
⑨ Ring cover (Lower left)
⑩ Ring cover (Lower right)
⑪ Mounting bracket (Upper)
⑫ Mounting bracket (Upper left)
⑭ Mounting bracket (Lower left)
⑮ Mounting bracket (Lower right)
⑯ Mounting bracket (Lower)
⑰ Mounting bracket (Middle left)
⑱ Ring cover (Left B)

− 18 − L3E-BW1349
2. Brushes to be checked and replaced
(1) Brushes to be checked and replaced are the following 8 pieces of 3 types
② Power brush block 2 pieces........... (Parts code: 1227086B)
③ Signal brush block 5 pieces........... (Parts code: 1513808D×5) Parts code for 6-piece set of
④ HF signal brush block 1 piece ............ (Parts code: 1513808D) 1513808D : 1513808C

② Power brush block

(1227086B)
Brush fiber
21 pieces/bundle × 3 bundle/ch = 63 pieces/ch

3ch

2ch
1ch

③ Signal brush block

(1513808D×5)
Brush fiber
11 pieces/bundle × 1 bundle/ch = 11 pieces/ch

23ch

5ch
4ch
④ HF signal brush block
(1513808D)

Brush fiber
11 pieces/bundle × 1 bundle/ch = 11 pieces/ch

23ch

20ch

Fig. D.2

− 19 − L3E-BW1349
3. Checking and replacing brushes
3.1 Power brush block
3.1.1 Removing power brush block

1) Remove the screw of terminal block (M10 hexagonal bolt).

2) Remove the screw (M4×12L) fixing the brush block.
3) Raise the power brush block right upward and detach it while putting the tip of brush fibers
through the brush mount.
Take care not to bend the brush fibers.
3.1.2 Checking and cleaning brush fibers

1) Check items
Check items of the brush fiber include ① Wear of brush fiber, ② Shape of the brush fiber and
③ Worn dust attached. If there is any abnormality, follow Table D.1 to take appropriate action.

Table D.1

NO. Status Action to be taken

Only the tip of brush Cut the brush fiber at its base.
fiber wears.
Base

① The center part of Cut the brush fiber at its base.

brush fiber is worn Diameter of the brush fiber is
out and nearly 0.22φ. The fiber reaches the end
Base
broken. of its life if residual thickness
becomes 0.11mm.

The brush fiber is Cut the brush fiber at its base.

twisted.

Base

② The brush fiber Use a pair of tweezers to pick up

bends a little. the brush fiber to align it with the
other brush fibers.
※ The tweezers is an accessory
to the system.
The brush fiber is Use a cotton swab soaked with
attached with black alcohol to remove worn dust. Do
worn dust. so until the contacting part with
③
the slip ring becomes bright.
Black worn dust ※ The cotton swab is an
accessory to the system.

− 20 − L3E-BW1349
 NOTE: Number of cut brush fibers not affecting brush function is 2/bundle for the
power brush and 6/channel in total. For the signal brush and HF brush,
4/bundle and 4/channel in total.

2) Action to be taken
To cut the brush fiber
a. Use the tweezers to pick up the brush fiber and raise it in the arrow direction.
b. Use the nippers to cut the base of brush fiber.

Cut

Tweezers

Fig. D.3

To clean the brush fiber

a. Soak the cotton swab with alcohol.
b. Gently rub the brush fiber along it in the same direction from the top and bottom as shown in
Fig. D.4.
If the cotton swab becomes dirty, replace it with a new one.

Cotton swab

Fig. D.4

− 21 − L3E-BW1349
3.1.3 Mounting power brush block

When mounting the power brush block again after checking and cleaning, or when mounting a new
power brush block for replacement, follow the steps below.
1) Let the power brush block directly face with the mount and put the power brush fibers to the
mount so that the brush fit with each ring.

NOTE: Take care for the brush fibers not to be bent by catching any part.

2) Use the M4×12L hexagonal socket bolt to fix the power brush block to the mount.
3) Use the M10 hexagonal bolt to fix the lead wire of power brush to the terminal block.
4) Check if the brush fibers correctly fit in the channel of slip ring.
(Check mirror and penlight are accessories to the system.)
Check and correct any of brush fibers so that it;
① Does not touch the partition between slip ring channels.
② Does not come into the adjacent channel.
③ Does not touch any of brushes of the adjacent channel.
In many cases, fiber trouble can be corrected by raise the power brush block a little from the
brush mount and fit it again.

Brush fiber

②Crossing
①Touching

③Touching

Partition

Fig. D.5

5) After temporarily fix the lead wire to the terminal block, fix the terminal block and secure the lead
wire again.

− 22 − L3E-BW1349
3.2 Signal and HF signal brush block

3.2.1 Removing signal and H.F. signal brush block

Remove the brush block fixing screw and slowly raise the signal brush block ③ right upward and turn
it upside down.
3.2.2 Checking and cleaning brush fibers

Perform as well as Item 3.1.2.

3.2.3 Mounting brush block

Perform in the reverse order of Item 3.2.1.

Upon mounting all shield covers after cleaning brushes, slowly turn the turn plate
clockwise by hands to check if the shield covers never touch any rotating parts.

− 23 − L3E-BW1349
4. Cleaning slip rings
If water, oil or any other fine particles are considerably attached to the slip ring, clean the slip ring at the same
time as checking and replacing the brush.
(1) Turn OFF all breakers of the power distribution board.
(2) Fasten three M5 screws of the scan drive brake to release braking (See Fig. D.6).

Brake

Screw

Fig. D.6

(3) Insert the cleaning pad 1 and 2 into the cleaning jig and fix it with the holding plate.
NOTE: Give attention to a slant at the end of "cleaning pad 2" (See A-View) before inserting it
into the cleaning jig.

Cleaning pad 2

Cleaning pad 1

Cleaning jig

Cleaning jig

Holding plate

A-view

Fig. D.7

− 24 − L3E-BW1349
(4) Remove the ring cover (Left B) and attach the cleaning jig to the mounting bracket.
NOTE: Press the cleaning jig so that the cleaning pad touches all slots and fix it with M3×20L
screws.

Cleaning jig

Mounting bracket (Middle left)

Ring cover (Left A)

Mounting bracket

Fig. D.8

(5) Use the syringe to fully pour I.P.A. (Isopropyl alcohol) into each cleaning pad.
Turn the turn plate clockwise three turns by hands.

I.P.A

Rotating direction
of slip ring

Cleaning pad

Center frame

Fig. D.9

− 25 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix E-1 Interlock Specification of XE (Check item No.115)

250 1000

140 890
130 880
120 870
Displayed height (mm)

Table height (mm)

110 860
Movable range
100 850
90 840
80 830
70 820
60 810
50 800
40 790
30 780
20 770
10 760
0 750

-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25

Tilt angle

− 25° ＋ 25°

1000
250

750
0

380

Unit mm

Fig. E.1 Interlocking between Gantry and Patient Table

− 26 − L3E-BW1349
Appendix E-2 Interlock Specification of SE and VE (Check item No.115)

250 1000

130 880
Displayed height (mm)

120 870

Table height (mm)

110 860
Movable range
100 850
90 840
80 830
70 820
60 810
50 800
40 790
30 780
20 770
10 760
0 750

-25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 +5 +10 +15 +20 +25

Tilt angle

− 25° ＋ 25°

1000
250

750
0

380

Unit mm

Fig. E.2 Interlocking between Gantry and Patient Table

− 27 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix F Checking Chain Tension and Wire Rope Tension (Check item No.211)

1. Checking chain tension and wire rope tension

(1) Set the tabletop to its rearmost position and the table to its highest position (1000mm above the floor surface,
displayed height 250mm), and turn the power OFF.
(2) Remove the middle cover.
① Remove the screw fixing the front part of middle cover.
② Index the tabletop forward to remove screws at four locations of middle and back part of middle cover.
③ Withdraw the middle cover.
Middle cover
Screw fixing the front of middle cover

Fig. F.1 Taking off the Middle Cover

(3) Withdraw the upper left and right of bellows, and detach the bellows frame from the fixing bracket to lower
the bellows cover.
Detach the left and right bellows supports. (only CE marking, CCIB certificated system)

Bellows fixture Upper edge pipe

of bellows cover
Side cover (Left)

Side cover (Right)

Bellows keeper

Bellows fixture

Bellows keeper

Bellows suppot (left)

(Oposite side:right)
Fig. F.2

− 28 − L3E-BW1349
(4) Checking chain tension and wire rope tension
Fig. F.3 shows check position of the chain and wire rope.
Position to check wire rope tension
Spring fixing pin Movable bed
Spring
Wire rope

Front mounting plate

Chain

Fore

Tabletop

Sprocket mounting block

Side cover
Position to check chain tension M8 hexagonal socket bolt
Sprocket

Fig. F.3 Position to Check Tension

(4-1) Checking chain tension (See Fig. F.4)

① Insert the hexagonal bar wrench into the hexagonal socket bolt (M6) for stretching the chain
to immobilize the bolt, and loose the lock nut (M6).
② Hook the spring balance on the chain 700mm apart from the sprocket and pull it by the force
of 25N (2.5kg) to check if the chain deflection is 15mm or less.
③ If pulling load is small, fasten the hexagonal socket bolt clockwise and check it again in the
manner in ②.
④ After checking, fasten the lock nut.
Sprocket
Chain

Sprocket mounting block

700mm

15mm

M6 hexagonal socket bolt

M6 lock nut Spring balance (100N(10kg))

25N (2.5 kg)

Double-ended spanner (10 × 13)

(Accessory)

Fig. F.4 Checking Chain Tension

− 29 − L3E-BW1349
 (4-2) Checking wire rope tension (See Fig. F.5)
Check that the space between the inner edge of front mounting plate and edge of movable bed is
24~26mm.

Spring fixing pin Spring Movable bed

Front mounting plate

L=24∼26mm

Fig. F.5 Checking Wire Rope Tension

2. Lubrication to the chain

Advance the tabletop to its foremost position in the manner of Item 1 (2) ② and apply machine oil to the chain.
NOTE: Apply machine oil so as not to drop from the chain.

Tabletop

Apply machine oil to the chain.

Fig. F.6 Lubrication to Chain

3. Damage on the wire rope

Set the tabletop to its foremost position to check if there is no scratch and looseness on the wire rope.
4. Check
(1) After completing checks, attach the bellows, middle cover and rear cover in the reverse order of 1 (3) and
(2) above.
(2) Turn the power ON and check if fore/back move speed is normal and no abnormal sound is heard.
Fast fore/back move speed 60±2mm/s
Slow fore/back move speed 5±1mm/s

− 30 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix G Lubrication to Table Hydraulic Drive Unit (Check item No. 214)

Checking oil level of the table hydraulic drive unit

Follow the steps below to check no oil leak at the hydraulic unit and the oil level of oil tank.
(1) Lower the bellows. (See Appendix F.1 (3) above)
(2) After setting the table height to 900mm above the floor surface, turn the power OFF.
(3) Check if there is no oil leak at the hydraulic unit.
(4) Check if the oil level is 60mm±10mm.

Oil level with table

height at 900mm

60 ± 10mm

Oil : DAPHNE TURBINE OIL 32

Volume : 1.9L

Fig. G.1 Checking Oil Level of Table Hydraulic Unit

(5) If short, remove the valve and replenish.

(6) Turn the power OFF with the table height 700mm above the floor surface, and follow (1) to fix the bellows to
the upper part of table.

− 31 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix H (1) Pronto (1.5MHU) Permissible Load Range

0.6sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

1.0sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

1.5sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

2.0sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

3.0sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ × ×

× ............. Cannot be used.

− 32 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix H (2) Pronto (2MHU, 3.5MHU) Permissible Load Range

0.5、0.6、0.8sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×

1.0sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×

1.5sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×

2.0sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×

3.0sec
25mA 50mA 75mA 100mA 125mA 150mA 175mA 200mA 225mA
100kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Overall slice
120kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
thickness
130kV ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×

×............. Cannot be used.

− 33 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix I Checking Primary Voltage of X-ray Controller (Check item No.408)

(1) Remove the front cover of X-ray controller and connect the digital voltmeter between the plus (indicated by the
label ＋ ) and minus (indicated by the label − ) terminal of 601TN on the lower CAP chassis to measure DC
voltage (See Fig. I.1)
(2) Turn the CPU and GANTRY POWER switches ON.
(3) Run the check program RECTIFIER CHECK for X-ray controller from the operation console (See TECHNICAL
GUIDE (Check & Service Program).
(4) Check if the DC voltage measured is 200V±1Vdc. If the DC voltage measured differs from the reference
voltage, use 1VR of MAIN IF PCB on the REC chassis to adjust DC voltage to the reference value.

Capacitor chassis

Digital voltmeter

NOTE: Number of capacitors may differ according to the system.

Fig. I.1

− 34 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix J Checking Detector Temperature Controller (SE/VE) (Check item No. 121)

Follow the flow chart shown below to check the detector temperature controller.

Indicators of two detector YES

OK
temperature controllers read
35±1ºC.

NO

Set temperature of
NO (A) Follow temperature setting procedure
detector temperature controllers are 35ºC.
(*1) to set temperature to 35ºC

YES
Temperature display
Set key (UP)
Display mode
(B) Check broken cable in the detector

Temperature display
℃
changeover key
35
(*1) Checking set temperature SP AL

1) Press the temperature display changeover key to

display SP for Display mode.
Temperature being displayed is the set temperature. Front cover Set key (DOWN)
2) Erase SP and AL from the Display mode and return
Temperature Controller
temperature display to the current temperature.
3) Open the front cover to check if the control mode changeover switch No.1 is ON and No.2~6 are OFF.
(A) Temperature setting
1) Open the front cover to set the protect switch to OFF
2) Press the temperature display changeover key to display SP for Display mode. Temperature being displayed
is the set temperature.
3) Press the set key (UP) or (DOWN) to set temperature display to 35ºC.
4) Set the control mode changeover switch No.1 to ON and No.2~6 to OFF.
5) Set the protect switch to ON and close the front cover.
6) Erase SP and AL from the Display mode and return temperature display to the current temperature.
(B) Checking broken cable in the detector
Pin to be checked Check item Normal
1 2 3 4 5
1&2 Resistance 205~285Ω
552CN
Detector side 3&4 Resistance 170~230Ω
5&6 Continuity Conducting
6 7 8 9
7&8 Continuity Conducting

− 35 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix K Fastening Torque of Bolts and Nuts

Follow Table K.1 and K.2 for fastening torque of bolts, screws, nuts and double nuts in working for this manual.

Table K.1 Fastening Torque of Bolts and Screws

Fastening torque N･cm (kgf･cm)

Type Size
Maximum Minimum
M3 98 (10) 69 (7)
Flat-head screw M4 216 (22) 147 (15)
Pan-head screw M5 392 (40) 275 (28)
M6 540 (55) 373 (38)
M3 108 (11) 79 (8)
M4 265 (27) 187 (19)
M5 539 (55) 392 (40)
Hexagonal bolt M6 833 (85) 588 (60)
M8 1990 (203) 1392 (142)
M10 3528 (360) 2450 (250)
M12 5586 (570) 3920 (400)

M3 138 (14) 98 (10)

M4 343 (35) 245 (25)
M5 696 (71) 510 (52)
Hexagonal socket bolt M6 1078 (110) 765 (78)
M8 2588 (264) 1804 (184)
M10 4587 (468) 3185 (325)
M12 7262 (741) 5096 (520)

− 36 − L3E-BW1349
 Table K.2 Fastening Torque of Nuts*

Fastening torque N･cm (kgf･cm)

Type Size
Maximum Minimum

M3 108 (11) 79 (8)

M4 265 (27) 187 (19)
M5 539 (55) 392 (40)
Nut M6 833 (85) 588 (60)
M8 1990 (203) 1392 (142)
M10 3528 (360) 2450 (250)
M12 5586 (570) 3920 (400)

* Fastening the double nuts

(1) Use the spanners to fix the thin nut.
(2) Use another spanners to fasten the normal nut. Follow Table above for fastening torque.

Normal nut

Thin nut

− 37 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix L Correspondence between Detector and Preamplifier Channels

ProntoXE

Detector Preamplifier Detector Preamplifier

Channel Channel
Connector # PCB # Connector # Connector # PCB # Connector #
1 ∼ 16 1 1 1 289 ∼ 304 19 3 19
17 ∼ 32 2 2 2 305 ∼ 320 20 4 20
33 ∼ 48 3 1 3 321 ∼ 336 21 3 21
49 ∼ 64 4 2 4 337 ∼ 352 22 4 22
65 ∼ 80 5 1 5 353 ∼ 368 23 3 23
81 ∼ 96 6 2 6 369 ∼ 384 24 4 24
97 ∼ 112 7 1 7 385 ∼ 400 25 5 25
113 ∼ 128 8 2 8 401 ∼ 416 26 6 26
129 ∼ 144 9 1 9 417 ∼ 432 27 5 27
145 ∼ 160 10 2 10 433 ∼ 448 28 6 28
161 ∼ 176 11 1 11 449 ∼ 464 29 5 29
177 ∼ 192 12 2 12 465 ∼ 480 30 6 30
193 ∼ 208 13 3 13 481 ∼ 496 31 5 31
209 ∼ 224 14 4 14 497 ∼ 512 32 6 32
225 ∼ 240 15 3 15 513 ∼ 528 33 5 33
241 ∼ 256 16 4 16 529 ∼ 544 34 6 34
257 ∼ 272 17 3 17 545 ∼ 560 35 5 35
273 ∼ 288 18 4 18 561 ∼ 576 36 6 36

− 38 − L3E-BW1349
ProntoSE
Detector – Preamplifier corresponding table

Detector Preamplifier Detector Preamplifier

Channel Element Preamp. Channel Element Preamp.
Connector Connector Connector Connector
block PCB block PCB
- ∼ - A 369 ∼ 376 A
1 1 4 25
- ∼ - 1 B 377 ∼ 384 17 B
1 ∼ 8 C 385 ∼ 392 C
2 2 5 26
9 ∼ 16 A 393 ∼ 400 A
17 ∼ 24 2 B 401 ∼ 408 18 B
3 3 4 27
25 ∼ 32 C 409 ∼ 416 C
33 ∼ 40 A 417 ∼ 424 A
1 4 5 28
41 ∼ 48 3 B 425 ∼ 432 19 B
49 ∼ 56 C 433 ∼ 440 C
2 5 4 29
57 ∼ 64 A 441 ∼ 448 A
65 ∼ 72 4 B 449 ∼ 456 20 B
3 6 5 30
73 ∼ 80 C 457 ∼ 464 C
81 ∼ 88 A 465 ∼ 472 A
1 7 6 31
89 ∼ 96 5 B 473 ∼ 480 21 B
97 ∼ 104 C 481 ∼ 488 C
2 8 7 32
105 ∼ 112 A 489 ∼ 496 A
113 ∼ 120 6 B 497 ∼ 504 22 B
3 9 8 33
121 ∼ 128 C 505 ∼ 512 C
129 ∼ 136 A 513 ∼ 520 A
1 10 6 34
137 ∼ 144 7 B 521 ∼ 528 23 B
145 ∼ 152 C 529 ∼ 536 C
2 11 7 35
153 ∼ 160 A 537 ∼ 544 A
161 ∼ 168 8 B 545 ∼ 552 24 B
3 12 8 36
169 ∼ 176 C 553 ∼ 560 C
177 ∼ 184 A 561 ∼ 568 A
1 13 6 37
185 ∼ 192 9 B 569 ∼ 576 25 B
193 ∼ 200 C 577 ∼ 584 C
2 14 7 38
201 ∼ 208 A 585 ∼ 592 A
209 ∼ 216 10 B 593 ∼ 600 26 B
3 15 8 39
217 ∼ 224 C 601 ∼ 608 C
225 ∼ 232 A 609 ∼ 616 A
1 16 6 40
233 ∼ 240 11 B 617 ∼ 624 27 B
241 ∼ 248 C 625 ∼ 632 C
2 17 7 41
249 ∼ 256 A 633 ∼ 640 A
257 ∼ 264 12 B 641 ∼ 648 28 B
3 18 8 42
265 ∼ 272 C 649 ∼ 656 C
273 ∼ 280 A 657 ∼ 664 A
4 19 6 43
281 ∼ 288 13 B 665 ∼ 672 29 B
289 ∼ 296 C 673 ∼ 680 C
5 20 7 44
297 ∼ 304 A 681 ∼ 688 A
305 ∼ 312 14 B 689 ∼ 696 30 B
4 21 8 45
313 ∼ 320 C 697 ∼ 704 C
321 ∼ 328 A 705 ∼ 712 A
5 22 6 46
329 ∼ 336 15 B 713 ∼ 720 31 B
337 ∼ 344 C 721 ∼ 728 C
4 23 7 47
345 ∼ 352 A 729 ∼ 736 A
353 ∼ 360 16 B 737 ∼ 744 32 B
5 24 8 48
361 ∼ 368 C 745 ∼ 752 C

− 39 − L3E-BW1349
ProntoVE
PCB. No. CHANNEL PCB CN DET CN BLOCK PCB. No. CHANNEL PCB CN DET CN BLOCK
1 1 ∼ 8 15 C 1 393 ∼ 400 64 A
9 ∼ 16 16 A 18 401 ∼ 408 65 B 18
2 17 ∼ 24 17 B 2 409 ∼ 416 66 C
25 ∼ 32 18 C 417 ∼ 424 67 A
33 ∼ 40 19 A 19 425 ∼ 432 68 B 19
3 41 ∼ 48 20 B 3 433 ∼ 440 69 C
49 ∼ 56 21 C 441 ∼ 448 70 A
57 ∼ 64 22 A 20 449 ∼ 456 71 B 20
4 65 ∼ 72 23 B 4 457 ∼ 464 72 C
73 ∼ 80 24 C 465 ∼ 472 73 A
81 ∼ 88 25 A 21 473 ∼ 480 74 B 21
5 89 ∼ 96 26 B 5 481 ∼ 488 75 C
97 ∼ 104 27 C 489 ∼ 496 76 A
105 ∼ 112 28 A 22 497 ∼ 504 77 B 22
6 113 ∼ 120 29 B 6 505 ∼ 512 78 C
121 ∼ 128 30 C 513 ∼ 520 79 A
129 ∼ 136 31 A 23 521 ∼ 528 80 B 23
7 137 ∼ 144 32 B 7 529 ∼ 536 81 C
145 ∼ 152 33 C 537 ∼ 544 82 A
153 ∼ 160 34 A 24 545 ∼ 552 83 B 24
8 161 ∼ 168 35 B 8 553 ∼ 560 84 C
169 ∼ 176 36 C 561 ∼ 568 85 A
177 ∼ 184 37 A 25 569 ∼ 576 86 B 25
9 185 ∼ 192 38 B 9 577 ∼ 584 87 C
193 ∼ 200 39 C 585 ∼ 592 88 A
201 ∼ 208 40 A 26 593 ∼ 600 89 B 26
10 209 ∼ 216 41 B 10 601 ∼ 608 90 C
217 ∼ 224 42 C 609 ∼ 616 91 A
225 ∼ 232 43 A 27 617 ∼ 624 92 B 27
11 233 ∼ 240 44 B 11 625 ∼ 632 93 C
241 ∼ 248 45 C 633 ∼ 640 94 A
249 ∼ 256 46 A 28 641 ∼ 648 95 B 28
12 257 ∼ 264 47 B 12 649 ∼ 656 96 C
265 ∼ 272 48 C 657 ∼ 664 97 A
273 ∼ 280 49 A 29 665 ∼ 672 98 B 29
13 281 ∼ 288 50 B 13 673 ∼ 680 99 C
289 ∼ 296 51 C 681 ∼ 688 100 A
297 ∼ 304 52 A 30 689 ∼ 696 101 B 30
14 305 ∼ 312 53 B 14 697 ∼ 704 102 C
313 ∼ 320 54 C 705 ∼ 712 103 A
321 ∼ 328 55 A 31 713 ∼ 720 104 B 31
15 329 ∼ 336 56 B 15 721 ∼ 728 105 C
337 ∼ 344 57 C 729 ∼ 736 106 A
345 ∼ 352 58 A 32 737 ∼ 744 107 B 32
16 353 ∼ 360 59 B 16 745 ∼ 752 108 C
361 ∼ 368 60 C
369 ∼ 376 61 A
17 377 ∼ 384 62 B 17
385 ∼ 392 63 C

− 40 − L3E-BW1349
Appendix M Checking Voltage of Scanner DC Power Supply (Check item No. 120)

Intercom amplifier

PCB-DC unit
1DPS(5V)

2DPS(5V/15V/-15V)

PCB unit 1
(Left side viewing
from the front)

Chassis 1
(Turn plate) 3DPS(24V)

4DPS(12V)

Upper right corner in the rear of scanner

Fig. M.1 Layout of Scanner DC Power Supply (Stationary side)

− 41 − L3E-BW1349
 PCB-unit II (Turn plate)

CONTD3 PCB

CPU85A PCB
54DPS(5V)

53DPS(-15V)

Upper left corner in the front of scanner

51DPS(+15V)
52DPS(5V)

PCB unit II

Filament chassis (Turn plate) Chassis 1 (Turn plate)

Filament PCB

PCB unit II

Chassis 1

SENS6A PCB 101DPS(5V)

301DPS(48V)

Fig. M.2 Layout of Scanner DC Power Supply (Turn plate side)

− 42 − L3E-BW1349
 Chassis 1 (Turn plate)…In case of Revision “B” and following

PCB unit Ⅱ
CLCB1 PCB

101DPS(5V)

Chassis 1 (Turn plate)…In case of VE

(Layout viewed from rear side of the gantry by removing the side cover.)
*…Position of the volume controller for output voltage.

102DPS
(Stepping motor driver) * *

101DPS (5V) 103DPS (±15V) 104DPS (5V)

Fig. M.3 DC Power Supply location in scanner (Turn plate side)

− 42 – 1A − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix N Checking Voltage of Table DC Power Supply (Check item No. 210)

DC power supply 1DPS

TDRV1D PCB Table control unit
Inside of table

Protection cover

Scanner side
Bellows cover

TDRV1D PCB 1DPS(5V)

Fig. N.1 Layout of Table DC Power Supply

− 43 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix O Checking Electromagnetic Valve of Table Hydraulic System

Two electromagnetic valves are provided in the hydraulic circuit of table up/down move. The following describes
procedure to check the electromagnetic valve A and B respectively.

The hydraulic circuit is shown in Fig. O.1 Both of the electromagnetic valve A and B open only when the tabletop
goes down. Therefore, with the electromagnetic valve A and B closed alternately, press the tabletop DOWN button on
the scanner front control panel. At this time, if the tabletop does not go down, the electromagnetic valve can be
checked to be normal.

Directly connected

Electromagnetic valve A

Electromagnetic valve B
P R

Fig. O.1

− 44 − L3E-BW1349
1. Checking the electromagnetic valve A:
① Disconnect the connector 122CN.
② Keep the table DOWN button pressed for one minute.
③ If the table does not go down, the electromagnetic valve is normal.

122CN Electromagnetic valve A

Fig. O.2

2. Checking the electromagnetic valve B:

① Disconnect the connector 102CN.
② Keep the table DOWN button pressed for one minute.
③ If the table does not go down, the electromagnetic valve is normal.

102CN Electromagnetic valve B

Fig. O.3

− 45 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix P Replacing Battery Pack of Detector High Voltage Power Supply (XE)
(Check item No.122)

Greatest care should be taken not to get an electric shock since handling high voltage.

1. Removing the high voltage power supply

(1) Turn off all circuit breakers of CT system power distribution board.
(2) Turn the rotary switch of high voltage power supply to the "OFF" position.
(3) Press the snap switch and check if the indicator of voltmeter drops down to 0V.
(4) Remove the high voltage cable (coaxial cable) from 1DCN of the high voltage power supply.
(5) Remove the high voltage power supply from the scanner (four bolts).

2. Replacing the battery pack

(1) Open the lid of high voltage power supply (four screws).
(2) Turn the power switch of battery pack itself "OFF".
(3) Remove the spiral DC cable from the battery pack.
(4) Remove the cover of battery pack (four screws).
(5) Replace the battery pack with a new one.
(6) Restore the high voltage power supply in the reverse order of Steps (1)~(4).

NOTE: The connector of spiral DC cable is shaped to avoid reverse connection of plus/minus for
safety.

3. Mounting the high voltage power supply

(1) Mount the high voltage power supply to the scanner.
(2) Connect the high voltage cable (coaxial cable) to 1DCN of the high voltage power supply.
(3) Turn the rotary switch of high voltage power supply to the "READY" position and wait for 10 seconds or
more.
(4) Turn the rotary switch to the "ON" position.
(5) Press the snap switch to check the indicator of voltmeter be within the green range.
(6) Turn on the circuit breaker of CT system power distribution unit.

NOTE: The battery pack is a MnO2 dry cell battery not including Hg or Cd. The battery pack no
longer required should be disposed of according to the local ordinance or the domestic law.

− 46A − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix Q Replacing the Capacitor Microphone (Check item No.125)

1. Lower the table to its lowest position.

2. Turn off the power to the gantry and table.
3. Open the lift cover.
4. Open the rear cover.
5. Remove the cone cover.
The capacitor microphones are installed on the lift cover and cone cover.

Cone Cover Lift Cover

6. Remove the mounting screws at four locations to remove the PCB mounting plate. Then remove the wiring
screw to disconnect the grounding wire.

M4 mounting screw PCB mounting plate Cover hole Grounding wire

Relay connector
Sponge Microphone case M4 wiring screw

− 47 − L3E-BW1349
7. Take out the microphone from the microphone case. Also remove the rubber pad around the microphone and
replace the microphone and relay connector assembly.
Parts code for set of relay connector assembly: (Lift cover assembly) 1387375A
(Cone cover assembly) 1387375C

Microphone

Relay connector

Microphone case
Rubber pad

8. After replacement, install the microphone in the reverse order of removing it. (Insert the concave of microphone
case into the cover hole and put sponge and PCB mounting plate on it.)
9. Restore all covers. Use Tyrap to fix the cable so as not to project.
10. Turn on the power to the gantry and table.
Turn the scanner to check if no cable or any part is caught.
11. Hear voice to check if the capacitor microphone works normally.

− 48A − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix R Air Scan Image for Reference

The X-ray window is installed overlaid about 3 cm at the upper right of scan aperture. As shown in the picture below,
radiated black pattern is generated due to this structure, but it is not an artifact due to contrast medium or stain. Also, it
does not affect phantom scan and clinical imaging.

Air Scan Image (WW = 50, WL = -1000)

Scan conditions: 120kV, 10mm slice, 2s, 50mA, 430 FOV

− 49 − L3E-BW1349
 Appendix S Connecting High Voltage Cable

Follow the steps below to connect the high voltage cable with the high voltage bushing of X-ray generator for CT.

(1) Cleaning the surface of cable head and bushing

Use a piece of clean cloth to wipe the surface of high voltage cable head and inside the receptacle of X-ray tube
assembly, which accepts the cable head. Also use a swab to wipe the pin receptacle.

(1)-1 Cleaning thread

When fastening the bushing, swarf may remain at the thread. Use a piece of clean cloth to wipe it
off.
Fig. S.1

(2) Cleaning the surface

Use a volatile solvent such as isopropyl alcohol to rinse the entire surface (including pin receptacle). The
volatile solvent used here should contain no contaminant, be no toxic and non-flammable. Handle it with
special care.

(3) Wiping the surface

Use a piece of clean cloth to wipe the entire surface again.

− 50 − L3E-BW1349
(4) Drying the surface
Use the dryer to dry the entire surface for about 5 minutes. If it is a 300W dryer, keep it about 10cm from the
target so as not to get a blast of hot air over 100ºC close to the target.

Fig. S.2

(5) Split pin of the cable head

Use a tool such as a cutter to widen the slit of split pin of cable head so as to be parallel (to prevent any trouble in
the X-ray system due to poor contact).

Fig. S.3

− 51 − L3E-BW1349
(6) Mounting the packing
Put the packing onto the base and tip (high voltage cable side) of cable head. Use the packing designated by us.
Do not use the packing used once because it swells.
(Use the packing after cleaning it with alcohol or the like and drying it.)
Apply a small amount of silicone grease to the cable head so that air does not enter between the tip packing and
cable head and insert the tip packing as shown in Fig. 5, and confirm no air remained. Also apply silicone
grease thin on the tip packing. Do not apply it to the pin.
(To prevent poor contact and corona discharge due to air remained)
If applying too much grease to the tip, the packing is hard to be inserted due to air remained. Apply a small
amount of grease.

Apply a small
amount of
grease so that
no air remained.

Fig. S.4
For the base For the tip

Detail of mounting the tip packing

Packing Cable head

Apply a small amount of silicone compound (SC104) and insert the

packing so that it is stuck to this surface, and check if no air remained.
(To prevent corona discharge due to air remained)

Apply a small amount of silicone compound to this surface.

(To eliminate the gap between the packing and the receptacle by applying the compound thin)

Fig. S.5

− 52 − L3E-BW1349
(7) Applying the compound
Apply the compound to the entire circumference of cable head evenly and use the spatula to spread it. Refer to
Fig. 4 on the previous page to apply 10cc (1/5 of SC104 tube) as a standard. Do not additionally apply it to the
tip.

Fig. S.6

(8) Trial insertion of the cable head

Insert the cable head slowing. When inserting it completely, pull it out slowly and confirm that the compound is
applied evenly to the side of cable head and the side of receptacle, and check that a large amount of compound is
not put on the tip of cable head.

(9) Inserting the cable head

Apply about 5cc of the compound to any part applied incompletely and the entire circumference again, and insert
the cable head slowly to the bushing again so that a small amount of compound is pushed out from the bushing.
Use the spatula to remove the compound pushed out. Do not additionally apply it to the tip.

Fig. S.7

− 53 − L3E-BW1349
(10) Fastening the fixture
Screw the fixture (about 2 and half turns as a standard).

(11) Baffle
Tighten two M4 screws to lock turning to fix the fixture.

Fig. S.8

(12) Repeating work

Loosen the screws to lock turning after working for (11), and then retry (10). Repeat this work three times and
finally tighten the screws to lock turning.

− 54 − 57 L3E-BW1349
 Whole-body X-ray CT System

Model Pronto

TECHNICAL GUIDE
--- Check & Service Program ---

To k y o , J a p a n
L4E-BW1360-2

CONFIDENTIALITY : This material contains proprietary information of

Hitachi Medical Corporation and it shall not be disclosed to the third party or
reproduced without the prior written permission of Hitachi Medical Corporation.
Copyright © Hitachi Medical Corporation. 2002. All rights reserved.
 CONTENTS
Page

Section 1 Registration of system program ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 1- 1

1.1 Registration of system program･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1- 1

1.2 System setting ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-10

Section 2 Check program ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2- 1

2.1 Preamp check ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2- 1

2.2 Scanner check ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2- 5
2.3 Board check ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-14
2.4 Ideal reconstruction check ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-18

Section 3 Service program ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3- 1

3.1 Raw data analysis ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3- 1

3.2 CT number adjustment ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-20
3.3 Error List Display ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-25
3.4 Setting Service scan ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-28
3.5 Service backup ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-29
3.6 Study No. registration･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-35
3.7 Setting password ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-36
3.8 Phantom calibration ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-37
3.9 Phantom position ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-43
3.10 Screen copy ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-48
3.11 Selection of Cu-Filter ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-53
3.12 Entry of hospital name ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-54

Section 4 Error codes list (Appendix) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4- 1

Section 5 Handling password for administrator log-on ･･･････････････････････････････････ 5- 1

Section 6 Event viewer ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6- 1

6.1 Introduction ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6- 1

6.2 Startup ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6- 1
6.3 Detailed view of event ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6- 2
6.4 Closing Event Viewer ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6- 2
6.5 Notes ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6- 2

Section 7 Warming-up ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7- 1

7.1 Warming-up Time ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7- 1

(1) 1 L4E-BW1360
At the beginning
Caution to the readers of this manual

＜CAUTION＞

［Pronto］and ［Robusto］are different series of CT system.

These two systems, however, can be operated with a compatible application
software by a system setting.
Before executing the system setting, make sure to confirm that the object CT
system is ［Pronto］or［Robusto］and then carry out the system setting
procedure.

(2) 2 L4E-BW1360
 Section 1 Registration of System Program

1.1 Registration of System Program

1.1.1 Outline of installation

Installation of the system software includes "System installation" and "Application

installation". In the System installation, CPU 0 and CPU 1 system software is
installed on DOS base. This installation is to set system environments for NT system
and various drivers.

Therefore, the System installation must be made for the hard disks of both the CPU0
and CPU1. Location of the hard disks is shown below.

(The picture is shown with the cover so that the direction of the unit can be recognized.)

In installation of application software, after the system is booted up, the software for
CPU0 system and CPU1 system is installed. Development application and various
short-cut software are installed.

*1 Before installing the system software, be sure to keep a record of the study No.
It is used in 1.1.2.4 Registration of study No. Study No. can be checked by Study
No. in ID of the latest image or Study No. displayed by starting the Study No.
Setting program in Service Program. For usage of Study No. Setting program,
refer to “3.6 Study No. registration”

*2 Also save the user data for 3D Display program. (Refer to 1.1.2.7.)

*3 System installation and application installation may initialize the user data,
service data, Study No., etc. Be sure to take a backup copy of the service data and
user data, and also keep a record of Study No.

Location of CPU0 hard disk

(Right and back side)

FD drive

Location of CPU1 hard disk

(Left and back side)
CD-ROM drive

1-1 L4E-BW1360
 The flow chart of the installation is shown below.

START

*1, *2, *3
Save the service backup, user data and 3D
display program user data, and check < CAUTION >
Study No. Be sure to carry out the system
installation in both CPU0 and CPU1.
System installation only in CPU1 will
not result in normal operation.
Yes
Do you install system
software in CPU0 and CPU1?

No
Start up application installation
on Service menu.
< 2.1 >
CPU0 installation

< 2.2 >

CPU1 installation

Automatic startup of
application software

Load the service backup, user data and

3D display program user data, and
register Study No. For System
installation, reset the image table.

END

1-2 L4E-BW1360
1.1.2 Installation procedure

1.1.2.1 Installation procedure of CPU0

Install the CPU0 system software by using the hardware environment in the CPU1.
Use the boot FD (DOS) and system installation CD-ROM.

(1) Connect the CPU0 disk drive unit to the CPU1. Do not connect anything to the
CPU0.

(2) Insert the boot FD.

(3) Power up the OC.

(4) DOS is started up and installation of the CPU0 is started.

*** Startup Menu ***

1. CPU0 (Measurement)

2. CPU1 (Image Display)

3. END

After the above message is displayed, type “1”. Then, when the following message
is displayed, type “1”.

*** CPU0 Install Menu***

1. DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTTEM INSTALL

2. SYSTEM INSTALL

3. END

• Select “1. DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL” when an unused disk is
used or partition is destructed.

• Select “2. SYSTEM INSTALL” when there is no problem in partition of the

target disk and the software is to be installed by keeping the disk partition
other than the basic partition as it is (by keeping the data in the raw data
area).

Insert System Install CD-ROM.

Strike a key when ready …

When the above message is displayed, set “CPU0 System Install CD-ROM” in the
drive, and then press Enter key. CPU0 installation starts.

1-3 L4E-BW1360
 CPU0 System has been installed.

When the above message is displayed, CPU0 installation has completed.

Eject the “Boot FD” and “System Install CD-ROM” disks and power down the
system.

(5) Connect the CPU0 disk drive unit to the CPU0.

(Do not connect yet the disk to the CPU1. Connection is made in the step (13).)

(6) Connect the CPU1 keyboard cable to the CPU0.

• Connect 83CN cable connector (CPU1 mother board) to 63CN connector (CPU0
mother board.)

(7) Power on the OC.

(8) Adjust the touch panel.

Use the task bar on the touch panel screen. (If the task bar is not displayed on
the screen, click Windows key to display the task bar.)
Pressing the arrow keys ↑↓ moves the focus up and down, while pressing ←→
keys moves the focus left and right. By pressing the return key “Enter”, an item
is selected. Following this operation, select Start → Programs →
Administrative Tools (common) → Touch.

• Press and hold down “+” mark at the upper left with your finger about 5 sec.
Releasing your finger moves “+” mark onto the upper center. (If it does not
move, you have pressed and held down too short. Press and hold down it a
little longer.)

• Pressing and holding “+” mark about 5 sec. and releasing it similarly moves
the mark to the upper right.
• Repeat the same operation to move it to the center left, center, center right,
lower left, lower center and lower right, 9 points in total.

• Press Enter key to determine them.

• Press Enter key to close the program.

If Task bar or other window appears on the touch panel, hide them. (Following
the above operation procedures can hide Task bar and windows.

(9) Log on to CT user.

① Double click “CT Log-on” shortcut on the desktop.

② Select Yes (to automatically log on to CT user).

(10) Shut down the CPU0.

① Press CTRL+ALT+DEL keys simultaneously.

② Press Shutdown (S) button with your finger.

1-4 L4E-BW1360
 ③ Select “Shutdown (S)” radio button.

④ Press OK button with your finger.

(11) After the message box displaying "Please turn off the CT system." appears, shut
down the power of the OC.

(12) Reconnect the keyboard cable to the original connector (CPU1).

Connect 83CN cable connector (CPU1 mother board) to the 83CN connector (CPU1
mother board).
Connect 63CN cable connector (CPU0 mother board) to the 63CN connector (CPU0
mother board).

(13) Connect the disk unit of the CPU 1 to the CPU 1.

1.1.2.2 Installation procedure of CPU1

Use the Boot FD (DOS) and CPU1 System Install CD-ROM.

(1) Insert the Boot FD.

(2) Power on the OC.

(3) The DOS is started up and installation of the CPU 1 is started.

*** Startup Menu ***

1. CPU0 (Measurement)

2. CPU1 (Image Display)

3. END

After the above message is displayed, type “2”. Then, when the following message
is displayed, type “1”.

*** CPU1 Install Menu***

1. DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL

2. SYSTEM INSTALL

3. END

• Select “1. DISK INITIALIZE AND SYSTEM INSTALL” when an unused disk is
used or partition is destructed.

• Select “2. SYSTEM INSTALL” when there is no problem in partition of the

target disk and the software is to be installed by keeping the disk partition
other than the basic partition as it is (by keeping the data in the image data
area).

1-5 L4E-BW1360
 Insert System Install CD-ROM.
Strike a key when ready …

When the above message is displayed, set “CPU1 System Install CD-ROM” in the
drive, and then press Enter key. CPU1 installation starts.

CPU1 System has been installed.

There is a floppy disk inserted in drive A:, remove it.

Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to restart.

When the above message is displayed, CPU1 installation has completed.

Eject the “Boot FD” and “System Install CD-ROM” disks and press
“CTRL+ALT+DEL” to restart the system.
After the system has been restarted, set system environment in the following
procedures.

(4) Set Serial No. of the system.

• Start Serial No. setting program.

(Start → Programs → Input Serial No. of main unit)

• Input Serial No. (4 digit number) printed on the label placed on the back panel
of the OC unit.

• Make sure that the input No. is correct. (Start up the Serial No. setting
program and check the number displayed as default.)

(5) Log on to CT user.

① Double click "CT Log-on" shortcut on the desktop.

② Select "Yes" (to automatically log on to the CT user.)

1.1.2.3 Installation procedure of application software

For installation of application software,

There are two entries, that is,

• Entry immediately after installation of CPU1 system software (for installation

of full software)

• Entry from Service menu after normal start-up (for installation of only
application software)

(Entry from Service menu can be done by selecting Start → Programs → 2. Service
→ Install the application program (Default password is “medico”.).
Judging the system status, the installation program executes either STEP1
program or STEP2 program suitable for each entry.

1-6 L4E-BW1360
 Use the application installation CD-ROM.

(1) STEP 1 process (to make entry from Service menu)

For installation of full software, directly jump to STEP 2.

Do you install the application program?

STEP1 After this process is completed, the system is restarted.

After the above message is displayed, select Yes. The system automatically starts
and moves to STEP 2.

(2) STEP 2 process

Do you install application software?

Set STEP2 Installation CD-ROM.

After the above message is displayed,

• Set “Application Installation CD-ROM”.

• Upon checking that the CPU0 system has started, select Yes. Application
installation starts and the copies are processed on DOS window.

Installation has completed.

• Eject “Application Installation CD-ROM”.

• Click “OK” button.

The installation operation of application software has completed and the system
automatically restarts.

1.1.2.4 Registration of Study No.

Before starting the system installation operation, register No. that is Study No.
recorded in Precaution *1 in 1.1.1 “+ 1”. In case the recorded Study No. is missing,
register Study No. that is Study No. appearing in ID of the latest image “+ 1”.
To register Study No., click Start → Programs → 2. Service → Study No. Setting,
and then register No. that is the recorded Study No. “+ 1”. For detailed registration
procedures, refer to “3.6 Study No. Registration”.

1.1.2.5 Also, load the user data of 3D display process. (Refer to 1.1.2.7.)

1.1.2.6 Miscellaneous

In the case “2. SYSTEM INSTALL” is selected in System Installation of the CPU0 or
CPU1, restart the system and then carry out Image Table Reset.

1-7 L4E-BW1360
1.1.2.7 Saving and writing user data of 3D Display process

This processing is used to prevent user data from being lost due to system software
or 3D processing software upgrading and to set individual user data in the system to
share a single unit among two or more operators.

(a) Opening Save/Load window

Click on the [File] and [Save user data...], the [Save user's data] window as shown
below will be displayed.

The data names saved on the floppy disk will be displayed in [FD contents list].
By clicking on the tab at the top of the dialog box, the MARP data and customized
data names saved on the floppy disk will be displayed.

(b) To save data set in the current system onto a floppy disk

(1) Click on the tab corresponding to the data you want to save (MARP data or
customized data).

(2) Click on the [Save to FD...] button. The dialog box as shown below will be be
displayed.

(3) Enter a data name in the [Data name:] input box and click on the [OK] button.
If the data of the same name as the data name entered have been saved onto the
floppy disk, the overwrite confirmation dialog box will be displayed.

1-8 L4E-BW1360
 Note : Up to 32 characters can be entered in the [Data name:] input box.
The eleven characters shown below cannot be used for data names:

\ / ; , : * ? " < > ￨

(c) To Load data saved on a floppy disk into the current system

(1) Click on the tab corresponding to the data you want to load MARP data or
customized data).

(2) Highlight the data you want to load in [FD contents list].

(3) Click on the [Load from FD...]button. The dialog box as shown below will be
displayed:

(4) Confirm that the name of the data to load is displyed in the [Data name:] box, and
click on the [OK] button.

Note : By closing [Save user’s data] window after loading the data from FD, 3D
Display program is closed.

1-9 L4E-BW1360
1.2 System Setting

For system setup, click [Start] and point [Program] [Service] [System config.] then point
each item and click its detailed setting.
When registering the system program, the system settings are those by default. Be sure to
perform system setup after registering the system program. If using the system without
performing system setup, heat unit (HU) calculation of X-ray tube may not be correctly
carried out, scan may not be effected due to inconsistency of correspondence between the
scanner and software. This can cause system failures due to system malfunction or broken
X-ray tube. Be sure to perform system setup matching to the system status.
Also, perform system setup matching to the system status including “With(Add on)” and
“Without” of each function.

System Config. Menu Screen

Pointing the arrow at each item displays detailed selection items or a list of candidate
setting values of each item. Click any value matching to the system.
Settings in this process are to match software to each item. Perform each setting after
confirming system parameters to be set since the system may not work correctly if no
hardware installed at the scanner side such as sub-second option, FOV500 and arcing
recovery.

When loading User Data into the system by using “Save User Data” function, make
sure to carry out it after having terminated System Setting.
If System Setting is carried out after User Data is loaded into the system, it is
likely to become an error.

1 - 10 L4E-BW1360
<Settings for X-ray tube assembly>
Depending on the type (HU) of X-ray tube to be mounted to the system, click an appropriate item
value referring to the table shown below.

Options displayed on Detailed

Tube shift Focal spot Remarks
the screen setting
Single focal spot 2000kHU Pronto-SE without tube
No tube
tube 3500kHU shift
shift
Double focal 3500kHU
provided No applicable system
1-sec machine with spots tube 4500kHU
shutter (SSD) Single focal spot 2000kHU Pronto -SE without tube
Tube shift tube 3500kHU shift
provided Double focal 3500kHU
No applicable system
spots tube 4500kHU
Single focal spot 2000kHU Pronto -VE without tube
No tube
tube 3500kHU shift
shift
Double focal 3500kHU
provided No applicable system
Sub-sec machine spots tube 4500kHU
(SSD) with shutter Single focal spot 2000kHU Pronto -VE without tube
Tube shift tube 3500kHU shift
provided Double focal 3500kHU
Robusto
spots tube 4500kHU
1500kHU
Without shutter(Xe) 2000kHU Pronto -XE
3500kHU

Example Screen Display while Setting X-ray Tube

1 - 11 L4E-BW1360
<Setting for detector>
The following three types are available for the detector. Click any value matching to the system.

Options displayed on Detailed

Remarks
the screen setting
1-sec machine with SSD FOV430 Setting for Pronto -SE
detector FOV500 No applicable system
Sub-sec machine with FOV430 Setting for Pronto -VE
SSD detector FOV500 Setting for Robusto
Xe detector Setting for Pronto -XE

Example Screen Display while Setting Detector

1 - 12 L4E-BW1360
<Setting of standard scan protocol value>
Click to set values while paying attention to the following points.
(1) The protocol to be set for the combination of each detector and X-ray tube is applied with
values when shipped from the factory. Therefore, the standard protocol has been set.
(2) Normally restore the old protocol data using user data having been saved.
(3) Only when the user requests because any change occurs especially relating to the detector
and X-ray tube or availability of sub-second feature and so on, use this system setting to
register the standard protocol.

List of detailed setting Remarks

FOV500 + 3500kHU Standard protocol value for 3500kHU X-ray tube of Robusto
FOV500 + 4500kHU Standard protocol value for 4500kHU X-ray tube of Robusto
1-sec machine + SSD
Standard protocol value for 2000kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-SE
+ 2000kHU
1-sec machine + SSD
Standard protocol value for 3500kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-SE
+ 3500kHU
Sub-sec machine + SSD
Standard protocol value for 2000kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-VE
+ 2000kHU
Sub-sec machine + SSD
Standard protocol value for 3500kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-VE
+ 3500kHU
Xe + 1500kHU Standard protocol value for 1500kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-XE
Xe + 2000kHU Standard protocol value for 2000kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-XE
Xe + 3500kHU Standard protocol value for 3500kHU X-ray tube of Pronto-XE

Example Screen Display while Setting Standard Scan Protocol

1 - 13 L4E-BW1360
<Setting for 1mm slice>
Click either of “Available” if the 1mm slice option is provided or “Unavailable” if it is not
provided.

List of detailed setting Remarks

Available When the 1mm slice is provided (Be sure to select this when the
1mm slice is provided regardless of the model). However, note
that Robusto is provided with the 1mm slice as a standard.
Unavailable When the 1mm slice is not provided (Be sure to select this when
the 1mm slice is not provided regardless of the model).

Example Screen Display while Setting “Available” or “Unavailable” of 1mm Slice

1 - 14 L4E-BW1360
<Setting for patient table>
For presence of the sub-second scan, click any item value with Pronto or Robusto as a standard.

List of detailed setting Remarks

Analog Analog table (Pronto-XE/SE/VE)
Digital Digital table (Robusto)

Example Screen of Table Setting

<Setting for model name>

For model name, refer to the table below to set a model name.
For Pronto, the model name needs not to be set. If setting it, an error may occur.

List of detailed setting Remarks

Pronto For Pronto-XE/SE/VE
Robusto For Robusto

Example Screen of Model Name Setting

1 - 15 L4E-BW1360
<Setting of arcing recovery>
The arcing recover function temporally halts operation of the X-ray high voltage unit when high
voltage discharge occurs in the X-ray tube assembly and restarts it after predetermined time.
This function allows scan to continue without being interrupted if the number of occurrence is
within the permissible range even when high voltage discharge occurs in the X-ray tube assembly
in the volume scan, dynamic scan and so on.
(However, if arcing recovery is activated during scan, any abnormal data may enter into the
image data. Therefore, a warning message is displayed.)
Set “Yes” if the scanner is applicable to the arcing recovery, while “No” if it is not applicable.

List of detailed setting Remarks

Applicable Recovery process is not effected when arcing occurs.
Unapplicable Recovery process is effected when arcing occurs.

Example Screen of Arcing Recovery

As a hardware revision of applicable scanner, the following scanner hardware after the following
revision is necessary.

PCB Applicable with Arcing Recovery Process at WB Side

Hardware name Revision
XCONT3 PCB at the WB side C/11 and up
XRAY4 PCB at the WB side A/3 and up
ROM KB411212A on XCONT1 PCB at the WB side 2 and up

1 - 16 18 L4E-BW1360
 Section 2 Check Program

The check program can be started by selecting "Start”, “Programs” and "1. Check" in this order.

Example of Window Display

Upon completion of the check operation, be sure to enable the password by Password setting for
Check program.

2.1 Preamp Check

2.1.1 Introduction

This program carries out check programs for data and route of the preamplifier, and
includes the following processes.

(1) BUS-LINE check

By loading the test pattern data from the ROM in the preamplifier, the program checks
if the data transfer route works normally.

(2) OFFSET DATA check

This program checks if leakage current from the detector and offset voltage of the
integrator in the preamplifier are within the specified values.

2-1 L4E-BW1360
2.1.2 Basic screen

(1) MENU

Check modes are displayed. Two modes of BUS-LINE

and OFFSET DATA are provided.

(2) THRESHOLD

This is displayed by selecting OFFSET DATA check. Input

threshold value to be used for check.

(3) CANCEL button

Click this button to re-input the threshold value defined in THRESHOLD entry.

(4) EXECUTE button

Click this button to start the check process.

(5) STOP button

Click this button to suspend the process being executed.

This button is enabled only in BUS-LINE check mode.

(6) EXIT button

Click this button to exit from the preamp check program.

2-2 L4E-BW1360
 (7) HELP button

Clicking on this button displays HELP window.

(8) MESSAGE

The operation procedure to be done in the next step is displayed.

In BUS-LINE check mode, the loop counter is also displayed.

(9) STATUS

The check result and error list are displayed.

2.1.3 Description of operation

(1) BUS-LINE check

Selecting this menu enables the EXECUTE button.

Clicking on the EXECUTE button starts the check program.
While the program being executed, any operation related to the
menu is disabled.

Upon starting the BUS-LINE check, the EXECUTE button is

disabled and the STOP button is enabled.
Also, number of looping is displayed in the window.
The check operation is looped until any error is detected or the
STOP button is pressed.
When any error is detected, the error list is displayed in the status
area.

When either an error is detected or the check program is stopped by the STOP button,
the EXECUTE button is enabled, and operations related to the menu are also enabled.

2-3 L4E-BW1360
(2) OFFSET DATA check

Selecting this menu displays the dialog box to input the threshold
value. Input the desired value and press ENTER key.
The average value obtained by the last OFFSET DATA check is
also displayed in this dialog box. Note that this average is not
displayed in the first OFFSET DATA check operation after the
Preamp Check program is started.

Pressing ENTER key enables the CANCEL button and EXECUTE

button. Clicking the CANCEL button returns to display of the
threshold entry dialog box. Clicking the EXECUTE button starts
the check process. While the process being executed, operations
related to the menu are disabled.

Upon starting the check process, the EXECUTE button is disabled.

This check process cannot be suspended during execution of the
program.

Use the following threshold values for OFFSET data

check in the standard operation check.

Pronto-SE : 700
Pronto-XE : 700
Pronto-VE : 50

Upon completion of the check process, the result is displayed in the status area, and
then the threshold entry dialog box is displayed. The operations related to the menu
are now enabled.

To carry out the check again, follow the operations from entry of the threshold value.
When time out error is detected, the EXECUTE button is enabled, and the operations
related to the menu are now enabled.

To carry out the check again, click the EXECUTE button.

Clicking the CANCEL button returns to display of the threshold entry dialog box.

2-4 L4E-BW1360
2.2 Scanner Check

2.2.1 Introduction

The scanner check performs checking of the major functions of the scanner unit and
patient table and includes the following processes.

(1) Communication check

Communication between the scanner unit and patient table and between the scanner
unit and X-ray control unit are checked.

(2) Scanning time check

The scanner is rotated in CW direction for the specified scan time, and the required
time is measured.

(3) Timing pulses generation

Generation and stop of timing pulse are controlled.

(4) LED lighting check

LEDs on the scanner control panel are sequentially lighted up.

(5) Gantry switch read check

The switch on the scanner control panel is read and the switch No. is displayed on the
control panel.

(6) Moving speed check

The table is moved and the required time is measured.

(7) Rectifier operation check

Only the rectification circuit is operated at output DC voltage 200V.

2-5 L4E-BW1360
2.2.2 Basic screen

(1) MAIN MENU

Check modes are displayed, which are scanner check, table

check and X-ray controller check modes.

(2) SUB MENU

Check items of the check mode selected in MAIN MENU are

displayed.

Scanner check includes three check modes, that are

communication check, scanning time check and timing pulses
generation check.

Table check includes three check modes, that are LED lighting
check, gantry switch read check and moving speed check.

X-ray controller check carries out rectifier operation check.

2-6 L4E-BW1360
(3) General box

According to the item selected on Sub Menu, the parameter entry box and small menu
are displayed.

Selecting the communication check displays the entry box for

number of checking.

Selecting the scanning time check displays the scan time selection
menu.

(4) PROGRESS

This is displayed in the case of the process to designate number of

checking, and its progress status is displayed.

(5) CANCEL button

Click this button to reenter the parameters defined in the general box.

(6) EXECUTE button

Click this button to start the check operation.

(7) STOP button

Click this button to suspend or stop the check operation being executed.

(8) EXIT button

Click this button to exit from the scanner check program.

(9) HELP button

Clicking this button displays HELP window.

(10) MESSAGE

Message such as operation to be executed in the next step is displayed.

(11) STATUS

Status such as check result is displayed.

2-7 L4E-BW1360
2.2.3 Operation procedure

(1) Communication check

Selecting this menu displays the entry box for number of checking
under the SUB MENU. Input a desired number of checking and
press ENTER key.

Pressing ENTER key displays the PROGRESS bar to show the

progressing status and at the same time enables CANCEL button
and EXECUTE button.

Clicking CANCEL button returns to display of the entry box for

number of checking. Clicking EXECUTE button starts the check
operation. During execution of the check operation, operations
related to the menu are disabled.

As the check starts, CANCEL button and EXECUTE button are

disabled, and STOP button is enabled.

Clicking this STOP button during checking operation suspends the

check process, and CANCEL button and EXECUTE button are
enabled. Operations related to the menu are also enabled.

Clicking CANCEL button returns to display of the entry box for

number of checking.

Unless STOP button is clicked during check operation, the check operation for the
specified number of checking is completed, and a message showing normal completion
of the operation is displayed in the status display area.
If any error is detected during check operation, the error message is displayed in this
area and the check operation is suspended.

If the check operation is normally completed or is suspended by error detection,

CANCEL button and EXECUTE button are enabled, and operations related to the
menu are also enabled.

2-8 L4E-BW1360
(2) Scanning time check

Selecting this menu displays the scanning time selection box under
the SUB MENU. Click the time to be checked.
Clicking any of the options enables EXECUTE button. Clicking
EXECUTE button starts the check operation.
During executing the program, operations related to the menu are
disabled.
Care must be exercised as the scanner rotates.

As the check operation starts, EXECUTE button is disabled.

During executing this check operation, this process cannot be
suspended.

Upon completion of the check operation, the time required for

actual scan and the result showing if the scan time is normal or not
are displayed in the status area.

Upon completion of the check operation, EXECUTE button is

enabled and operations related to the menu are also enabled.

NOTE: It takes more than the selected scan time (CW) at least until the result is
displayed.
(3) Timing pulses generation

Selecting this menu enables EXECUTE button.

Clicking EXECUTE button generates timing pulses such as View
TRIGGER signal. Then, operations related to the menu are
disabled.

2-9 L4E-BW1360
 As generation of timing pulses starts, EXECUTE button is disabled,
while STOP button is enabled. Clicking STOP button during check
operation suspends generation of the control signal.

As the process is suspended, EXECUTE button is enabled and

operations related to the menu are also enabled.

NOTE: Unless STOP button is clicked while control signals are being generated,
the process is not completed.

(4) LED lighting check

Selecting this menu enables EXECUTE button.

Clicking EXECUTE button lights up LED and 7-Seg. LED on the
scanner control panel. Operations related to the menu are then
disabled.

As LED lighting check operation starts, EXECUTE button is disabled,

while STOP button is enabled. Clicking STOP button during check
operation, the check operation is suspended.

As the process is suspended, EXECUTE button is enabled and

operations related to the menu are also enabled.

NOTE: Unless STOP button is clicked during the check operation, the process is not
completed.

2 - 10 L4E-BW1360
 The lighting sequence of the LEDs is repeated from (a) to (d) as follows.
(a)

(b) TILT 7Segment

TILT CENTER LED+0.00→ +01.1→+02.2→…+09.9→+10.0→+20.0→-20.0

(c) POSITION 7Segment

+001.1→+002.2→…+009.9→+110.0→+220.0→…+990.0 →+1000.0→-1000

(d) HEIGHT

011→022→…099→100→200

(5) Gantry switch read check

Selecting this menu enables EXECUTE button.

Clicking EXECUTE button displays switch No. on the scanner
control panel every time the operation switch is pressed. Operations
related to the menu are then disabled.

As the check operation of control switches starts, EXECUTE button

is disabled, while STOP button is enabled. Clicking this STOP
button during check operation suspends the check process.

As the process is suspended, EXECUTE button is enabled, and

operations related to the menu are also enabled.

NOTE: Unless STOP button is clicked, the process is not completed.

2 - 11 L4E-BW1360
 No. of each switch is shown below.

No. Switch No. Switch No. Switch No. Switch

1 5 9 13 SET *

2 6 10 14 START *

3 7 11

4 8 12

* mark indicates switch on the control console.

Switches without any mark are on the scanner control panel.

NOTE 1: If more than one switch are pressed, priority is given to the switch with
smaller No.

NOTE 2: Do not operate EMERGENCY switch. If this switch is operated by mistake,

closes the scanner check, and after releasing EMERGENCY restart the
process.

(6) Moving speed check

Selecting this menu enables EXECUTE button.

Clicking EXECUTE button starts the check operation.
Operations related to the menu are then disabled.
Care must be exercise as the table moves.
Actual check process is operated from the gantry side.
For operation procedure, refer to the following description.

As the check operation starts, EXECUTE button is disabled, while

STOP button is enabled.
This check operation is suspended if this STOP button is clicked
during check operation.

If the process is suspended, EXECUTE button is enabled and

operations related to the menu are also enabled.

NOTE: Unless STOP button is clicked, the process is not completed.

2 - 12 L4E-BW1360
 Operation procedures

Moving speed check is operated from the gantry side as follows.

Upon start of the moving speed check program, check to see that “1” and “1.5” are
respectively displayed in the indicator HEIGHT and TILT located on the upper part of
the gantry.

The set table speed and actual moving speed are displayed in TILT and POSITION
indicators respectively.
Press the table backward move button or forward move button together with high speed
move button to move the table backward or forward.
In this case, actual moving speed is displayed in POSITION indicator. If this value is
correct within the range shown in the following table, it is normal, while it is out of the
range, judge it as error and adjust the table move speed.

Next, press RESET button several times and display “12” in HEIGHT indicator and
“20.0” in TILT indicator. Then, check if the moving speed by the above operation is
within the value shown in the table or not.

Repeating the above operations, check the actual speed for each of the 4 moving speeds.

NOTE: Other values are displayed while pressing RESET button to display the
specified values in HEIGHT and TILT indicators, but those values are not
subjected to the check.

Moving speed Display in HEIGHT Display in TILT Allowance

1.5mm/s 1 1.5 1.5±0.1mm/s
20.0mm/s 12 20.0 20.0±1.0mm/s
60.0mm/s 13 Blank 60.0±3.0mm/s
12.4mm/s 14 12.4 12.4±0.6mm/s

(7) Rectifier operation check

Selecting this menu enables EXECUTE button.

Clicking this EXECUTE button allows only the rectification circuit to
operate for 20sec. under the condition that the output of the
rectification circuit is 200Vdc.
Operations related to the menu are then disabled.

2 - 13 L4E-BW1360
 As the check operation starts, EXECUTE button is disabled, while
STOP button is enabled.
Clicking this STOP button during check operation, the check
operation is suspended.

Upon completion of the check operation, the message of operation

end is displayed in the status area.
When the operation is completed or suspended, EXECUTE button is
enabled and operations related to the menu are also enabled.

NOTE: It takes at least 25sec. until completion of the check operation.

2.3 Board Check

2.3.1 Introduction

Board check is to check the high speed computing unit, memories and data transfer, and
includes the following check modes.

• FR PCB1 DSP1 check

• FR PCB1 DSP2 check
• FR PCB2 DSP1 check
• FR PCB2 DSP2 check
• FR PCB3 DSP1 check
• Back Projector check

NOTE: The table showing correspondence between each item and actual hardware is
provided in the 2.3.3 Reference.

2.3.2 Operation procedures

(1) Operation on Menu

Two modes are available for selection of check item and operation of start/stop .
One is operation on Menu Bar displayed on Windows and the other is operation on Sub
window displayed from Menu. Selection of either mode is made on Display menu to be
described later.

(2) Menu bar

As shown in the Menu bar shown left, five menus of

File, Check, Display, Window and Help are
available.

(3) File menu

Filing operation and closing operation of this check program are

performed.

2 - 14 L4E-BW1360
 NOTE: This version does not include the filing operation function.
Therefore, only Exit is available in the pull-down menu.

① Exit

This closes Board Check program.

(4) Check menu

Selection of the check to be carried out and Start/Stop of the

selected check program are operated on this menu.

Check program includes FR PCB1 DSP1 check, FR PCB1 DSP2

check, FR PCB2 DSP1 check, FR PCB2 DSP2 check, FR PCB3
DSP1 check and BACK PROJECTOR check.

Every time each item is clicked, a check mark alternately

appears and disappears. More than one check program can be
selected. The check programs with check mark are
sequentially processed.

NOTE: When Menu window is displayed, operation is disabled. For selection of

Display/Undisplay of Menu window, refer to the next clause (5).

① Start

The programs with check mark are sequentially processed. Check operation is
looped until the operation is stopped or an error is detected. In case more than
one program are selected and an error is detected during operation, the check
operation is stopped after the last one of the selected processes is completed.

The name of the check program in operation, loop count and status of in-operation
or stop are displayed in the status bar.
This menu is disabled only during execution of the check program.

② The check process is terminated after the check operation being executed is
completed.
The result of the check operation being executed when Stop is clicked is displayed.
This menu is disabled while the check process being operated.

(5) Display menu

This menu is used to select Display/Undisplay of the operation

window.

NOTE: Only this menu window is available in this version for such selection.

① Menu

Either Display or Undisplay of the menu window is selected

on this menu.
While the menu window being displayed, Hide is enabled,
while not displayed View is enabled.

2 - 15 L4E-BW1360
 NOTE: The menu operation is disabled while the check operation being executed.

(6) Window menu

This menu is used to arrange the displayed windows

and to display the list. It is also used to make the
hidden window active.

① Tile

Tile display of the displayed menu window and check result window are made
The windows are adjusted to the same size so that the whole window can be seen.

② Cascade

Cascade display of the displayed menu window and check result window are made.
Windows are adjusted to the same size and arranged so that they are overlapped.

③ Arrange Icons

Minimized check result windows are arranged in equal intervals without

overlapping each other.

④ Window list

The list of the windows being opened is displayed. The active window among them
is shown with a check mark.
Clicking the window without a check mark can make it active.
This is also used to display the hidden window on the top.
If the window is made active by clicking the displayed window, the check mark in
the list also moves to the active window.

(7) Help menu

Help window for Board check process is displayed.

① Help Topic

Help window for Board check is opened.

② About

Version information of Board check program is displayed.

2 - 16 L4E-BW1360
 (8) Operation on window

Every time each of items is clicked, the check mark alternately appears or disappears.
More than one items can be selected, and the check processes with the check mark are
executed. The check process being executed changes its color.
The check operation is executed in loop until the check operation is stopped or an error
is detected.

In case more than one item are selected and an error is detected during check operation,
the process is terminated after the last check operation is completed.

① Start button

The processes with the check mark are sequentially executed.

This button is disabled only while the check process being executed.

② Stop button

The process operation is stopped after the check operation being executed is
completed.
The result of the check operation being executed when Stop button is pressed is
displayed.
This button is disabled while the check operation is stopped.

2.3.3 Reference information

Correspondence between Menu and hardware is shown below.

① FR PCB 1
② FR PCB 2
③ FR PCB 3
④ Back Projector

CPU0 CPU1

① ② ④ ③

FR-MK2 FR-MK2 PC-BP FR-MK2

-RV

Slot3 Slot5 Slot9 Slot11

2 - 17 L4E-BW1360
2.4 Ideal reconstruction check

2.4.1 Introduction
Ideal reconstruction check is the function to check reconstructed image by using the
dedicated raw data.

2.4.2 Operation procedures

(1) Menu bar
As shown in the left Fig., 3 menus of File, Check and Help
are available.

(2) File menu

This menu is used to operate file and close the check program.
Note: This version does not include file operation, therefore, only Exit is
displayed in the pull-down menu.

① Exit
Ideal Reconstruction Check program is closed.

(3) Check menu

Check program is started and stopped.

① Start
The check program is executed. The check program is looped until it is stopped or an
error is detected. While the program being executed, statuses of loop count and
Executing/Stop are displayed in the status bar. This menu is disabled only during
execution of the check program.

② Stop
The program is stopped after the check program being operated finishes.
The result of the check being executed when Stop is clicked is displayed.
This menu is disabled when the check program is stopped

(4) Help menu

Contents in Help for Ideal Reconstruction Check program are
displayed.

2 - 18 L4E-BW1360
 ① Help Topic
Help for Ideal Reconstruction Check is started.

② About
Version information of Ideal Reconstruction Check is displayed.

(5) Operation by Tool bar

Tool bar consists of buttons to allow for one-touch operation of Start/Stop of the Check
program.

① Start button
This button has the same function as that of Start menu.
This button is disabled only while the check program being executed.

② Stop button
This button has the same function as that of Stop menu.
This button is disabled while Check program is stopped.

(6) Result
As check result, the reconstructed image and data check result
are displayed.
Each display is altered by the tab.

(7) Changing W/W and W/L

W/W and W/L of the image to be reconstructed can be changed in
the following 3 modes.

① Direct input
Move the focus to each of the boxes and directly input a value from the keyboard.
By pressing Enter key on the keyboard, the image reconstructed with the input
values is displayed again.
Inputting any character other than numeral causes an error.

2 - 19 L4E-BW1360
② Changing by spin button
Move the mouse cursor to each of the spin buttons and press the left mouse button.
Then, value in the box can be changed up and down. When the left mouse button is
released, the image is displayed again.
Numeral can be changed in two steps. Pressing and holding down the spin button
change the value by 1 each up to the first 30 counts and then in 10 steps up to the
next 30 counts. Pressing and holding down the button change the value in 100 steps
from the next 30 counts.

③ Changing by arrow key

Value can be changed by Up arrow key and Down arrow key. The key on which the
focus is placed (with flashing caret in the box) is enabled for change.
Pressing the arrow key makes the status same as the spin button is pressed by the
mouse button. However, the value changes only by 1 each. Without pressing Enter
key, the image is not displayed.

2 - 20 L4E-BW1360
 2.4.3 Contents to be checked and description of error displays
Ideal Reconstruction Check program executes image reconstruction process based on the
data prepared in advance. The image reconstruction process for check is executed as
shown in the following flow chart.

Starting Check Program

Setting raw data and filter required for Check program and preparation
of software within the calculation PCB.

Image reconstruction process step ①:

Conversion from fan beam data to parallel beam data. (Arrangement)

Image reconstruction process step ②:

Reconstruction process Filtering process and Back projection process
(FFT/BP process)

Image reconstruction process step ③:

Adjustment of image for Back projection result
(Image post-process)

Checking reconstruction result ①: Process PCB: FR-MK2(2)

The reconstruction result of Image reconstruction process step ① is
compared with the correct value.
(Checking Arrangement result)

Checking reconstruction result ②: Process PCB: PC-BP-RV(3)

The reconstruction result of Image reconstruction process step ② is
Check process compared with the correct value.
(Checking FFT/BP result)

Checking reconstruction result ③: Process PCB: FR-MK2(4))

The reconstruction result of Image reconstruction process step ③ is
compared with the correct value.
(Checking Image post-process result)

Display of reconstructed image and check result

2 - 21 L4E-BW1360
A display example of check result is shown below.
(As it is an example with an error found, correct value, contents of error data, and type of
error vary depending on occurrence condition of the actual error.)

Note: (1) One hundred errors at maximum can be registered in an error list.
(2) Total number of errors on the screen is the total number of data that were
found error in the check process.

Error data
Total number of errors CPU data Board data

Address Display of data integer Display of data floating decimal

(Starting from 0) (In order of error and correct value) (In order of error and correct value)

CPU data
CPU data Description
CPU0 Error possibly related to the environment in CPU0 side
CPU1 Error possibly related to the environment in CPU1 side

2 - 22 L4E-BW1360
 Board data
Board data Description
FR-MK(2) PCB mainly executing Image reconstruction process
step ① in the above-mentioned flow chart
PC-BP-RV(3) PCB mainly executing Image reconstruction process
step ② in the above-mentioned flow chart
FR-MK(4) PCB mainly executing Image reconstruction process
step ③ in the above-mentioned flow chart

Error data
Type of error Description
“NO ERROR DETECTED” When the check process has finished normally.
“TIME OUT ERROR” When the system hangs up because a response from
the other cannot be obtained within the specified time
during processing. Possibility of the error due to the
hanged up process related to the CPU No. and board
data displayed at that time is high.
“DSP BOARD NOT FOUND” When any image process board to execute
reconstruction process cannot be found.
When the board displayed in the board data is not
found mainly by software.
“PARAMETER INSUFFICIENT” When any of parameters to execute Ideal
reconstruction check is not found in the system disk.
“DSP BOOT ERROR” When program loading has failed even if the program
is tried to be loaded in the hardware for reconstruction.
“ILLEGAL RESULT” Error displayed when illegal reconstruction result is
obtained in comparison of the reconstruction result
with the correct value.
Board data for error display:
FR-MK2(2): Error occurred in Reconstruction result
check ① in the flow chart.
PC-BP-RV(3): Error occurred in Reconstruction result
check ② in the flow chart.
FR-MK2(4): Error occurred in Reconstruction result
check ③ in the flow chart.
“SYSTEM ERROR” Error occurred due to other causes than the above
occurred in execution of Check program.

Cautions:
(1) If the image of Ideal reconstruction check is displayed with a smaller window width,
faint ring pattern can be seen, but such pattern appears even in normal image
reconstruction process. In case of abnormal image reconstruction result, it is judged as

2 - 23 L4E-BW1360
 check error in the reconstruction result check, therefore, make a judgment of normal
image or abnormal image in the check result.
(Although it is not caused usually, if a displayed image is mixed with very faint streak
artifact, it may not be judged as check error, therefore be sure to check the displayed
image.)
(2) If an “ILLEGAL RESULT” error is found, the data is displayed in both integer type and
floating decimal type in the error list display. In such case, for each board data,
refer to:
FR-MK2(2) : Floating decimal point display part (part with Real display)
PC-BP RV(3) : Floating decimal point display part (part with Real display)
FR-MK2(4) : Integer type (part with HEX display)
(The displayed contents in the other part mean nothing.)
(3) When this Check program has been executed (including only startup), the system must
be rebooted. To start scan operation or other check service programs thereafter, reboot
the system.

2 - 24 L4E-BW1360
Image display example:

Image display Number of checking process

Check result display Program status

Window level adjustment

2 - 25 43 L4E-BW1360
 Section 3 Service Program

The Service program can be started by selecting "Start"," Programs" and "2. Service" in this order.

After Service work is completed, be sure to enable Password by “Setting Password” program.

3.1 Raw Data Analysis

3.1.1 Introduction

Raw Data analysis is the function to display raw data acquired by the CT scanner
system and to analyze the image. The following processes are available.
(1) PTD

Value at any specified point on the displayed raw data is displayed.

(2) PLD

Value for any specified single projection on the displayed raw data is displayed.

(3) CHD

Value for any specified single channel of the displayed raw data is displayed.

(4) PLP

Profile of the data for any specified single projection of the displayed raw data is
displayed.

(5) CHP

Profile of the data for any specified single channel of the displayed raw data is
displayed.

3-1 L4E-BW1360
 (6) PLC

The maximum value, minimum value, difference (maximum value - minimum value),
mean value, variance and standard deviation for each projection in the range of all
projections of the displayed raw data are calculated and displayed.

(7) CHC

The maximum value, minimum value, difference (maximum value - minimum value),
mean value, variance and standard deviation for each channel (data for all displayed
projections) in the range of any channel of the displayed data are calculated and
displayed.

(8) CLB

This is used for center alignment of the compensator. Deviations of the compensator
toward left and right are shown with the difference in outputs between the first half
channels and second half channels.

(9) VCK

After threshold values are set for the difference (max. value - min. value) and standard
deviation, the difference (max. value - min. value) and standard deviation for each of all
channels (all scanned projection data) are calculated, and if the result exceeds the set
threshold, the channel No. and calculated result are displayed. These data are usually
used for vibration check.

(10) FCE

This is used for registration and deletion of defective channel.

(11) CACK

This is used for position alignment of the X-ray tube unit. After raw data obtained by
scanning the adjustment rod supplied with the system is displayed, this process is
started up.

3.1.2 Operation description

(1) Basic operation

Basic operation for the displayed raw data is described here.

Display operation of the raw data is explained for each of the following items.
The raw data is displayed as shown in the following screen.

3-2 L4E-BW1360
 NOTE: Number of channels and number of views of raw data described in this
instruction manual differ depending on model of the scanner system.

① Adjustment of W/W and W/L

Direct input

Placing the focus on each of the entry boxes and input a value directly from the
keyboard.
Pressing ENTER key displays the image reconstructed with the newly input W/W
and W/L.
Inputting any character other than numeral causes an error.
Adjustment by spin button

Placing the mouse cursor on each of the spin buttons, click the left mouse button to
change the value up and down. When releasing the left mouse button, the
reconstructed image is displayed.
The value can be adjusted in 2 modes. By pressing and holding down the spin
button, the value changes up to 30 counts in 1 steps and it changes up to the next
30 counts in 10 steps. Further holding down the button, it changes in 100 steps
from the next 30 counts (that is, it advances by 300 counts).

NOTE: With PTD selected on Main window, adjustment by from the keyboard is
disabled.

② Data display

As moving the mouse cursor on the displayed image, the coordinates (channel and
view) at the pointer of the mouse cursor and data value are displayed under the
menu bar.

3-3 L4E-BW1360
(2) Basic menu

As shown in the left Fig., the window contains 4 menus

of File, Analysis, Window and Help. The Analysis
menu is enabled while raw data being displayed.

(3) File menu

This menu functions to open and close raw data and Cal. data to be
analyzed. As shown in the left Fig., it contains 3 menus of Open,
Close and Exit.
Close menu is enabled while raw data being displayed.
While raw data being displayed, Open menu is disabled.

① Open

The submenu to open Raw data or Cal. data to be

analyzed. This menu is disabled while Raw data or Cal.
data being displayed.

Raw data

Raw data to be analyzed are opened.

Selecting this menu displays the message of "Patient table reading" is displayed
and then the following open dialog box containing the patient data table and slice
data table is displayed.

Clicking a line on the patient data table displays the slice data table of the selected
patient in the line.

Clicking the desired line on the slice data table and then clicking OK button
displays the raw data of the selected slice.
Pressing Cancel button closes the dialog box without displaying any data.

3-4 L4E-BW1360
 NOTE: The above Fig. is one of examples and it may be different from the one
actually displayed.
Cal. data

The Cal. data to be analyzed is opened.

Selecting this menu displays the dialog box to

select types of Cal. data and tube voltage as shown
below.
Selecting a type of Cal. data and tube voltage to be
displayed and clicking OK button display all the
data related to the selected conditions.

NOTE: 1) "All the data related to the selected conditions" means, for example,
all the files of the slices corresponding to the tube voltage in case of
Phantom Cal. data, and data of all the phantoms with different
diameter in one file.

2) The above Fig. is one of examples and it may be different from the
one actually displayed.

② Close

The currently displayed Raw data or Cal. data is closed. In case other analysis
windows are displayed, they are also closed at the same time.
On this menu, the Raw data analysis process cannot be closed.
This menu is not enabled unless Raw data or Cal. data is displayed.

③ Exit

This menu is used to closes the Raw data analysis process. The Raw data, Cal.
data or Analysis window being analyzed is automatically closed.

(4) Analysis menu

This menu is used to open and close the windows for various types
of analysis.
The menu contains analysis processes of PTD, PLD, CHD, PLP,
CHP, PLC, CHC, CLB, VCK, FCE and CACK.
Every time each item is clicked, the check mark alternately
appears or disappears. Simultaneously the corresponding window
is opened or closed.

This menu is not enabled unless either Raw data or Cal. data is
displayed.

The left Fig. is an example of the opened PLP.

① PTD

Even if PTD is checked, its sub-window is not displayed.

3-5 L4E-BW1360
The status bar is displayed under the image. As the mouse cursor moves onto the
image the cursor changes to a cross mark. Clicking the left mouse button at any
position displays values of that coordinates (channel and view) in the status bar.
And, a red cross caret flashes at the clicked position.
To close PTD, click the PTD menu again.

NOTE: 1) Note that if other processes such as PLD, PLP, CHD and CHP which
are described later are simultaneously displayed the caret may be
hidden by the line on the image drawn in each process and not
displayed.

2) Key entry operation for W/W and W/L is disabled during PTD
operation.

3-6 L4E-BW1360
② PLD

Checking PLD displays the blank sub-window of PLD in the lower half of the
window. Clicking any position on the image displays values in the view direction
in the PLD sub-window, and a red line appears on the view displayed on the image.
To close the PLD window, click either the PLD menu again or the × button at the
upper right of the PLD sub-window.

③ CHD

3-7 L4E-BW1360
 Checking CHD displays the blank sub-window of the CHD in the right half of the
window. Clicking any position on the image displays values in the channel
direction on the CHD sub-window. Also, a red line appears on the displayed
channel on the image.

To close the CHD window, click the CHD menu again or click the × button at the
upper right of the CHD sub-window.

④ PLP

Checking PLP displays the blank sub-window of the PLP in the lower half of the
window. Clicking any position on the image displays the profile of the data in the
view direction in the PLP sub-window. A red line is displayed on the displayed
view on the image.

By moving the mouse cursor onto the profile image in the sub-window and pressing
the left mouse button, a red line appears in the vertical direction on the profile, and
its channel No. and data are displayed in the status bar.
By moving the mouse in the horizontal direction with the left mouse button pressed
and held down, the red line moves along the mouse movement and the values in the
status bar changes accordingly in real time. As the left mouse button is released,
the red line disappears.

Four buttons are provided in the sub-window, of which functions are as follows.
DEFAULT

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the ordinate is set
from -32768 to 32767.

3-8 L4E-BW1360
 MAX/MIN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the ordinate is set
between the minimum value and maximum value in the displayed profile.
KEY IN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the ordinate is freely
set.

Clicking this button opens the dialog box for entry of

the min. value and max. value. Enter values and click
OK button. Clicking CANCEL button closes this
dialog box without setting any value.

Redisplay

If the size of the sub-window is changed, the scale of the ordinate is adjusted
according to the length of the window and the profile is redisplayed.

To close the PLP window, click either the PLP menu again or the × button at
the upper right of the PLP sub-window.

⑤ CHP

Checking CHP display the blank sub-window of the CHP in the right half of the
window. Clicking any position on the image displays values in the channel
direction in the CHP sub-window. A red line is displayed on the displayed channel
on the image.

3-9 L4E-BW1360
By moving the mouse cursor onto the profile image in the sub-window and pressing
the left mouse button, a red line appears in the view direction on the profile, and its
view No. and data are displayed in the status bar.
By moving the mouse in the vertical direction with the left mouse button pressed
and held down, the red line moves along the mouse movement and the values in the
status bar changes accordingly in real time. As the left mouse button is released,
the red line disappears.

Four button are provided in the sub-window, of which functions are as follows.
DEFAULT

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the abscissa is set
from -32768 to 32767.
MAX/MIN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the abscissa is set
between the minimum value and maximum value in the displayed profile.
KEY IN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the abscissa is freely
set.

Clicking this button opens the dialog box for entry of

the min. value and max. value. Enter values and click
OK button. Clicking CANCEL button closes this
dialog box without setting any value.

Redisplay

If the size of the sub-window is changed, the scale of the abscissa is adjusted
according to the width of the window and the profile is redisplayed.

To close the CHP window, click either the CHP menu again or the × button at
the upper right of the CHP sub-window.

3 - 10 L4E-BW1360
⑥ PLC

Checking PLC displays the sub-window, and max. value,. min. value, difference
(max. value - min. value), mean value, variance and standard deviation are
calculated for each projection in the range of all projections of the displayed raw
data (data for all channels) and displayed in the table.

To close the PLC window, click either the PLC menu or the × button at the upper
right of the PLC sub-window.

⑦ CHC

3 - 11 L4E-BW1360
 Checking CHC displays the sub-window, and max. value,. min. value, difference
(max. value - min. value), mean value, variance and standard deviation are
calculated for each channel in the range of all channels of the displayed raw data
(data for all displayed projections) and displayed in the table.

To close the CHC window, click either the CHC menu or the × button at the upper
right of the CHC sub-window.

⑧ CLB

Checking CLB displays the CLB sub-window in the lower half of the window and
the profile of averaging all views of the displayed raw data is displayed.

In the status bar are displayed the average value of 10 channels each of the left side,
center part and right side and the difference between the data of the left side and
right side.

Four buttons are provided in the sub-window and their functions are as follows.
DEFAULT

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the ordinate is set
from -32768 to 32767.
MAX/MIN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the ordinate is set
between the minimum value and maximum value in the displayed profile.
KEY IN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value on the ordinate is freely
set.

3 - 12 L4E-BW1360
 Clicking this button opens the dialog box for entry of
the min. value and max. value. Enter values and click
OK button. Clicking CANCEL button closes this
dialog box without setting any value.

Redisplay

If the size of the sub-window is changed, the scale of the ordinate is adjusted
according to the length of the window and the profile is redisplayed.

To close the CLB window, click either the CLB menu again or the × button at the
upper right of the CLB sub-window.

⑨ VCK

Checking VCK displays the sub-window, and the difference between the max. value
and min. value, profile of standard deviation, channel No. exceeding the default-set
threshold and table showing the calculated results of all channels for the displayed
raw data are displayed.
Also, the set threshold is shown with dotted line on each of the profiles.

The following buttons and input boxes are available at the top of the sub-window.
Diff Profile

This button is of toggle operation type, and every time it is clicked, On and Off are
alternately selected.
With this switch pushed in, the profile of the difference (max. value - min. value) is
displayed in the VCK sub-window. With the switch not pushed in, the profile is
not displayed.

3 - 13 L4E-BW1360
SD Profile

This button is of toggle operation type, and every time it is clicked, On and Off are
alternately selected.
With this switch pushed in, the profile of standard deviation is displayed in the
VCK sub-window. With the switch not pushed in, the profile is not displayed.
Error List

This button is of toggle operation type, and every time it is clicked, On and Off are
alternately selected.
With this switch pushed in, channel No. of which data exceed the set threshold
and calculation results are displayed in the VCK sub-window. With the switch
not pushed in, the list is not displayed.
MAX-MIN

The threshold value of the difference (max. value - min. value) is designated.
SD

The threshold value for standard deviation is designated.

CHECK

Based on the difference (max. value - min. value) and the value input in the
threshold entry area for standard deviation, Error List is displayed. The dotted
line showing the threshold displayed in each profile is also updated.

The following buttons are available in each profile.

DEFAULT

A width from the minimum value to the maximum value in the ordinate range is
set to 0 ~ 65535.
MAX/MIN

A width from the minimum value to the maximum value in the ordinate range is
set between the min. value and max. value in the displayed profile.
KEY IN

A width between the minimum value and maximum value in the ordinate range is
freely set.

Clicking this button opens the dialog box for entry of

the min. value and max. value. Enter values and click
OK button. Clicking CANCEL button closes this
dialog box without setting any value.

Redisplay

If the size of the sub-window is changed, the scale of the ordinate is adjusted
according to the length of the window and the profile is redisplayed.

3 - 14 L4E-BW1360
 To close the VCK window, click either the VCK menu again or the × button at
the upper right of the VCK sub-window.

⑩ FCE

Checking FCE displays the sub-window. This sub-window contains a combo box,
and by clicking the downward arrow button at the right side the currently
registered defective channel is displayed.

Nothing is displayed if no data has been registered.

ENTRY

By inputting the channel to be registered in the combo box and clicking the
ENTRY button at the top, the input data is set.
DELETE

Click the downward arrow button at the right side of the combo box to display the
registered data, click and highlight the data to be deleted and click the DELETE
button at the top. Then, the highlighted data is deleted.

Upon completion of the registration or deletion operation, clicking OK button in

the window registers the set data and closes the window. Clicking CANCEL
button cancels the change being made and closes the sub-window.

3 - 15 L4E-BW1360
 ⑪ CACK

Before executing this process, display the raw data acquired by scanning the rod for
adjustment supplied with the system.
Clicking CACK displays the trace part of the path of the rod for adjustment in red,
and the check result is displayed in the adjustment data dialog box. According to
the displayed result, make adjustment of the X-ray tube unit position.
This dialog box can be closed by clicking CLOSE button.

NOTE: 1) Without display of the raw data acquired by scanning the rod for
adjustment, correct result cannot be obtained.

2) Set the rod for adjustment at the position 20 ~ 25mm off the scanner
rotation center.

(5) Window menu

On this menu, displayed analysis windows can be arranged, list of

the opened sub-windows for analysis can be displayed, and the
hidden window can be made active.

① Tile

The tile of the currently opened sub-windows for analysis is displayed.

3 - 16 L4E-BW1360
 Size of each of the sub-windows is adjusted to the same size so that all windows can
be seen. Tile display operation hides raw data or Cal. data window. To display Raw
data or Cal. data window, move its sub-window.

② Cascade

The currently displayed sub-windows for analysis are cascade displayed. Size of
each window is adjusted same and they are rearranged for cascade display.

3 - 17 L4E-BW1360
③ Arrange Icons

Icons of the minimized sub-windows for analysis are arranged in the same intervals
so that they are not overlapped.

④ Analysis windows list

List of the currently opened sub-windows for analysis is displayed.

The active sub-window in the list is displayed with a check mark. By clicking any of
the windows without a check mark, the sub-window for analysis can be made active.

3 - 18 L4E-BW1360
 The list is also used to display any hidden sub-window on the top.

If an opened sub-window is clicked to be made active, the check mark also moves to
the activated sub-window in the list.

(6) Help menu

Help information for Raw Data Analysis processes is displayed.

① Help Topic

Help window for Raw Data Analysis

processes is opened.

② About

A dialog of version information on Raw Data Analysis processes is displayed.

3 - 19 L4E-BW1360
3.2 CT Number Adjustment

(1) Click "Start" button and point “Programs” and "2. Service".
Then, click "CT Number Adjustment".

(2) The CT No. Adjustment Menu window is displayed.

(3) Calculation for CT number adjustment

(a) Clicking "Calculation" on the CT Number Adjustment Process Menu window displays
the following window.

Following contents are displayed in the Remark column of the list view depending on
calculation date and time and measurement date and time.

3 - 20 L4E-BW1360
 "Calculation impossible" : No scan data.

"Calculation required" : Data of which scan date and time is later than
calculation date and time.

"Calculated" : Data of which calculation date and time is later than

measurement date and time.

(b) By setting the parameters for calculation in the left part of the window, the items
corresponding to the selected calculation condition are displayed in the list view with a
check mark.
In the case more than one check mark are included in the list view, "Calc. Start"
button is enabled. However, the item marked with "Calculation impossible" in
Remarks column is displayed with a check mark, the "Calc. Start" button is
displayed in light color.
Clicking "Calc. Start" button starts the calculation.

(c) While the calculation being executed, the following window is displayed.

When an error is detected during calculation, the following window is displayed.

• In case an error occurred, retry the CT number adjustment scan with this
condition.

(d) Upon completion of the calculation or by clicking "Abort" button on the error display
window, the following Calculation Process window is displayed.

3 - 21 L4E-BW1360
 • The following contents are displayed in the Remarks for the items with a check
mark in Selection column in the list view.

"Completed" : Data for which calculation has normally completed.

"Scan data error" : Data in which an error occurred during calculation.

"Calculation aborted : Data for which calculation is suspended due to occurrence

of an error,

To make calculation again, click [Redo]. In this case the screen returns to the
window in the step (a). To close the calculation program, click [Close].

(e) Setting default parameters for calculation

To set default parameters for calculation, click "Default Parameter Setting" on the
"Settings" menu in the step (a).

3 - 22 L4E-BW1360
 The calculation parameters to be displayed as default on the window displayed in the
step (a) are set.
Checking "Use previous calculating parameters." displays the parameters used in the
previous calculation are displayed as default.
If "Set individually." is checked, check each parameter of tube voltage and slice
thickness. These parameters are displayed as default.

The data set here are saved even after the CT number adjustment process is closed.

(4) Confirmation of date and time of CT number adjustment

(a) Clicking "Date Check" on the CT Number Adjustment Process Menu window displays
the following window.

The following contents are displayed in Remarks of the List View depending on
calculation date and time and scan date and time.

"No use" : Parameter not to be used for calculation.

"Scan done" : Scan has been made with those parameters,

but no scan data for other phantom with the same
tube voltage and slice thickness is available

"Calculated" : Calculation date and time are later than the latest scan date
and time with the same tube voltage and slice thickness
including other phantoms.

"Calculation required, scan done"

: Scan date and time are later than calculation date and time
in the case other than the above.

"Calculation required"
: Scan date and time are earlier than calculation date and
time in the case other than the above.

3 - 23 L4E-BW1360
(b) Selection of list view display parameter

Scan and calculation date and time corresponding to each parameter of the tube voltage,
slice thickness and phantom diameter highlighted in the left side of the window are
displayed in the List View. By clicking any parameter in the list, the item to be
highlighted can be changed.

(c) Change of display order

Pointing the "Priority Order Selection" in "View(V)" menu displays the following menu.

Clicking the desired display order reflects on the display order in the List View.

Example: If [slice → kV → phantom] is clicked:

Tube voltage Slice thickness Phantom diameter

Low Thin Small

↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High ↓ Large
Low ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High ↓ Large
Low ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High ↓ Large
Low ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High Thick Large

3 - 24 L4E-BW1360
3.3 Error List Display

The error list stored in the magnetic disk is displayed.

(1) Click [Start] button, and point “Programs” and “2.Service”.

Then, click [Error List Display].

(2) The following Error List window is displayed.

• If none of error data has been registered, a message “Error data has not been
registered.” is displayed.

(3) Selection of display order (descending and ascending) of date and time and display of
second in ms steps

By either clicking [Date] in List View or pointing [Set display order] in [View] menu, the
following dialog is displayed.

To change display order of date and time (descending/ascending), select the desired
display order in setting display items. By checking [display down to msec], time can be
displayed down to in ms unit. After selection of a display order, click [OK] button.

3 - 25 L4E-BW1360
(4) Display of only the specified process name

By either clicking [Process Name] in List View or pointing [Set display order] in [View (V)]
menu and clicking [Process], the following dialog is displayed.

To display errors by process name where errors have been registered, select the desired
process name in setting display items. By selecting [All], the contents of all the process
names where errors have been registered are displayed. After selection, click [OK]
button.

(5) Display of only the specified message

By either clicking [Message] in List View or pointing [Set display order] in [View (V)]
menu and clicking [Message (M) …], the following dialog is displayed.

To display errors by message where errors have been registered, select the desired
message in setting display items. By selecting [All], the contents of all the messages
where errors have been registered are displayed. After selection, click [OK] button.

3 - 26 L4E-BW1360
(6) Setting information in Error Log file

Click [Setting error log…] in [Tool (T)] menu.

To change the set contents, check the desired information box and change the contents of
the desired item.

• Analysis side

• Folder to store error log files

The folder to store error log file is set by absolute path.

• Maximum size of a error log file (bytes)

The maximum size of error log file is set in byte unit.

• Folder in measurement side in view from analysis side

Path is set to refer the error log file to be registered in the computer in the scan side
in view from the analysis side.

• Measurement side

• Folder to store error log files

The folder to store error log file is set by absolute path.

• Maximum size of error log file (bytes)

The maximum size of error log file is set in byte unit.

After the contents is changed, click [OK] button.

3 - 27 L4E-BW1360
 ※ Caution about the maximum size (byte) of error log file

• Error log file is managed by process name, and if file size under a process name
exceeds the maximum size, the current file is stored as the file before one
generation and the current file is initialized. Because of this reason the file before
two generations is not stored, if errors occur frequently or old error information is
needed to store, make the file size larger.
With the default file size of 16384 bytes set, the current file + file for one previous
generation can store error data up to about 300 errors in total

3.4 Setting Service Scan

The button to carry out phantom calibration scan and CT number adjustment scan is
usually not on the touch panel. These scans are called Service scan. To enable these
scans, Service scan function must be set to ON.
However, after completion of the Service scan, be sure to set the Service scan function to
OFF to prevent the user from use of the function by mistake.

(1) Click [Start] button and point [Programs] and [2. Service].
Then, click "Service Scan Selection".

(2) Service Scan Selection window is displayed as follows.

Service Scan Selection

The window is displayed with the [OFF] checked if the service scan buttons (Phantom
Cal, Maintenance scan and CT Number Adjustment scan) are not currently displayed on
the touch panel, while it is displayed with the [ON] checked if they are displayed.

To display each of the buttons for Service Scan on the touch panel, check [ON] and click
[OK] button.
To erase each of the buttons for Service Scan on the touch panel, check [OFF] and click
[OK] button.

3 - 28 L4E-BW1360
3.5 Service Backup

3.5.1 Outline

This function is used to store CT number adjustment values, phantom calibration data
and phantom data for calibration stored in the magnetic disk into the FD cartridge, to
read those data from the FD cartridge and register them in the magnetic disk.
INITIALIZE FD CARTRIDGE
This function initialize FD cartridge. This operation is carried out to use a new FD
cartridge or using the used cartridge after initializing it.
VIEW FD CARTRIDGE
This function allows the data in the FD cartridge to be checked.
WRITE FD CARTRIDGE
This function writes various data in the FD cartridge.
READ FD CARTRIDGE
This function reads various data from the FD cartridge and writes them into the
magnetic disk.

3.5.2 Operation procedure

(1) Starting process

Click [Start] button and point “Programs” and "2. Service".

Then, click "Service backup".

(2) Service Backup Process Menu window is displayed.

3 - 29 L4E-BW1360
(3) INITIALIZE FD CARTRIDGE

Insert a formatted FD into the FD drive and click [INITIALIZE FD CARTRIDGE] on

Service Backup Process Menu window.
The INITIALIZATION window is displayed.

Clicking [Start] button starts initialization of the FD.

Initialization in operation Initialization has completed.

After completion of initialization process, click [Close] button.

(4) VIEW FD CARTRIDGE

Insert the service backup FD into the FD drive, and click [VIEW FD CARTRIDGE] on
Service Backup Process window. Then, the data stored in the FD cartridge are
displayed as follows.

The data with blank date column and message "No data." in the comment column
means that no data is stored in the FD cartridge.

After confirming the data, click [Close] button.

3 - 30 L4E-BW1360
(5) WRITE FD CARTRIDGE

Insert the FD for service backup into the FD drive, and click [WRITE FD CARTRIDGE]
on the Service Backup Process window. Then, Write Process window is displayed as
follows.

The check box for the data to be written into the FD is checked.

Checking the check box displays the current date in the date column and enables key
entry in the comment column. If necessary, enter comments.

Clicking [Start] button starts to write the checked data into the FD. While the process
being executed, the following window is displayed and Pause/Continue/Stop operation
are enabled.

After FD write operation is completed or clicking [Stop] button, the process returns to
display of the first window in the step (5).

3 - 31 L4E-BW1360
(6) READ FD CARTRIDGE

Insert the FD for service backup into the FD drive, and click [READ FD CARTRIDGE]
on the Service Backup Process Menu window. Then, the Read Process window is
displayed as follows.

• The data displayed in light color are not stored in the FD cartridge, and it shows that
they cannot be read.
The check box for data to read from the FD is checked.
The data displayed in light color cannot be checked.

Clicking [Start] button starts to read the checked data from the FD. While the process
being executed, the following window is displayed and Pause/Continue/Stop operation
are enabled.

After FD read operation is completed or clicking [Stop] button, the process returns to
display of the first window in the step (6).

3 - 32 L4E-BW1360
3.5.3 Error message dialog

FD is not ready.

With [Abort] clicked With [Ignore] clicked

FD has not been formatted.

FD is write-protected.

With [Abort] clicked With [Ignore] clicked

3 - 33 L4E-BW1360
FD has not been initialized for service backup.

Verify error

FD for service backup of which version is not compatible.

File access error

3 - 34 L4E-BW1360
3.6 Study No. Registration

Study No. that is one of image data to be affixed to DICOM-format image is set.

(1) Click [Start], and point [Programs], [2. Service], and then click [Study No. Setting].

An Example of Window Display

(2) On the following displayed window, input Study No. and click [OK] button.
(Input a value made by adding “+1” to the No. recorded before system software
installation.)

Because the above window is the one for Study No. 2, input “3” made by 2 “+1” and click
[OK] button. (The Study No. set here will be effective after rebooting the system next
time.)

CAUTION: If Password Entry Window is displayed, input “medico”.

3 - 35 L4E-BW1360
3.7 Setting Password
3.7.1 Introduction

The password setting is used to change or make the password effective that is requested
for entry in starting the Check and Service Process program.
By setting the password, a limitation is given to starting the Check and Service Process
program, and data tampering by the user or erroneous deletion of data are prevented.

3.7.2 Basic window

3.7.3 Operation procedure

(1) Changing password

To change the password, input all of three items: the old password, new password and
confirm, and click [OK] button.
For old password, input the password used before change.
For new password, input the password to be used newly.
For confirm, input the new password again for reconfirmation (to prevent erroneous
entry).

If all the entered data are correct, the new password is set.
If any error is found in the entered data, the error message is displayed and reentry of
the passwords is requested.
※ The password set at the factory before shipment is "medico".
(2) Taking effect

The setting is made to request entry of the password in starting the Check and Service
Process program.
Click the button to make the password effective.

(3) Cancellation of effective setting of password

Once the password is input in starting the Check and Service Process program, the
effective setting of the password is automatically cancelled, and entry of the password
is thereafter not requested until the operation "(2) Setting password effective" is
performed.
※ After the above work is done, be sure to carry out the operation "(2) Setting
password".

3 - 36 L4E-BW1360
3.8 Phantom Calibration

(1) Click [Start]button, and point “Programs” and "2. Service".

Then, click "Phantom Calibration".

(2) The following Phantom Calibration Process Menu window is displayed.

(3) Phantom calibration calculation

(a) Clicking [Calculation] on the Phantom Calibration Process Menu window displays the
following window.

3 - 37 L4E-BW1360
 • The above window is an example for Pronto-XE system.

• The window for Pronto-VE and SE systems is displayed as follows.

• A parameter of 410mm is added for phantom diameter.

• Selection of phantom diameter is not possible.

• Display in the phantom diameter column in List View is made in descending

order.

• The following contents are displayed in Remarks column in List View according to
calculation date and time and scan date and time.

"Impossible to Calc." : No scan data

"Calculation required" : Scan has been made without calculation yet.

"Scan has been made." : Data of which scan date and time are later than
calculation date and time.

"Calculated" : Data of which calculation date

and time are later than scan date
and time.

(b) By setting parameters for calculation in the left screen of the window, the items related
to the selected calculation parameters are displayed with a check mark in the Selection
column on the List View.

• When more than one check mark is in List View, [Calc. Start] button is enabled.
However, in case the condition "Impossible to Calc." in Remarks column is displayed
with a check mark, [Calc. Start] button is displayed in light color.

(c) Clicking [Calc. Start] starts calculation. While calculation being executed, the
following window is displayed.

When any error occurs during calculation, the following window is displayed.

• If any error occurred, retry the phantom calibration calculation with these
parameters.

3 - 38 L4E-BW1360
(d) Clicking [Abort] button after completion of the calculation or on Error Display window,
the calculation process window is displayed as follows.

• The following contents are displayed in Remarks column for the item with a check
mark in Selection column in List View.

"Completed" : Data for which calculation has been normally completed.

"Data Error" : Data for which an error occurred during calculation.

"Calculation aborted : Data for which calculation has not been completed due to
error.

To retry the calculation, click [Redo] button. Then, the screen returns to the step (a).
To close the calculation process, click [Close] button.

(e) Setting default parameters for calculation

To set default parameters for calculation, click [Calculating condition…] button on the
[Settings (S)] menu in the step (a).

3 - 39 L4E-BW1360
 • The above window is an example for Pronto-XE system.

• For Pronto-VE and SE systems, the window is displayed as follows.

• A parameter of 410mm is added for phantom diameter.

• Selection of phantom diameter is not possible.

On the window of the step (a), set the calculation parameters to be displayed as default.

• If [Use previous calculating parameters.] is checked, the parameters used for the
last calculation are displayed as default.

• If [Set individually.] is checked, check each parameter for phantom diameter, tube
voltage and slice thickness. These parameters are displayed as default.

The parameters set here are kept saved even if the phantom calibration process is
closed.

(4) Checking date and time of phantom calibration

(a) Clicking [Date Check] button on Phantom Calibration Process Menu window displays
the following window.

3 - 40 L4E-BW1360
 • The above window is an example for Pronto-XE system.

• For Pronto-VE and SE systems, the window is displayed as follows.

• A parameter of 410mm is added for phantom diameter.

• The following contents are displayed in Remarks column in List View depending on
calculation date and time and scan date and time.

"Impossible to Calc." : No scan data

“Calculation required : Scan has been made without calculation yet.

"Scan has been made." : Data of which scan date and time are later than
calculation date and time.

"Calculated" : Data of which calculation date and time are later

than scan date and time.

(b) Selection of display parameter in List View

Scan and calculation date and time corresponding to each parameter of tube voltage,
slice thickness and phantom diameter highlighted in the left screen of the window are
displayed in List View. By clicking each parameter list, the highlighted item can be
changed.
(c) Change of display order

Pointing the [Priority of display] in [View(V)] menu displays the following menu.

By clicking the desired display order, the display order is reflected in List View.

3 - 41 L4E-BW1360
Example: If [slice → kV → phantom] is clicked:

Tube voltage Slice thickness Phantom diameter

Low Thin Small

↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High ↓ Large
Low ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High ↓ Large
Low ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High ↓ Large
Low ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
↓ ↓ Large
↓ ↓ Small
↓ ↓ ↓
High Thick Large

3 - 42 L4E-BW1360
3.9 Phantom Position
This function is used to position the phantom for Phantom Cal and CT Number Adjustment
scan.
After setting the phantom, make a scan and start this program.

(1) Click [Start] button and point “Programs” and "2. Service".
Then, click [Phantom Position] button.

(2) If any latest scan CT image is available, the image is displayed. In this case, jump to the
step (5). If any newest scan CT image is not available, the following window is displayed.
To designate an image on the patient directory and slice directory, click [Yes(Y)] button.
To end the process, click [Abort(A)] button.

CAUTION
When the program is started within 1 or 2 seconds immediately after scan, the latest
scan image may not be displayed. In this case, restart the phantom position program .

3 - 43 L4E-BW1360
(3) The patient directory is displayed. Select a patient on the directory.

• Select a patient and click [OK] button.

3 - 44 L4E-BW1360
(4) The slice directory window for the selected patient is displayed. Select a desired slice.

• Select a slice and click [OK] button.

3 - 45 L4E-BW1360
(5) The selected image is displayed.

3 - 46 L4E-BW1360
(6) Clicking [Calculation] button displays the following values for phantom displacement.

Following the message, move the phantom by using a micro-gauge.

Clicking [OK] button returns to display of the step (5) window.

(7) To display another image, click [Open(O)] button in the [File(F)] menu to return to the
display of the step (3) window. Retry the operation from patient selection.

(8) To display the latest scan CT image, click [Open the latest scan image…] button in the
[File(F)] menu.
If any latest CT image is available, the image is displayed and the process moves to the
step (5).
If any latest CT image is not available, the following window is displayed. To select an
image on the patient and slice directories, click [Yes(Y)] button to return to display of the
step (3) window. Then, retry the operation from patient selection.

NOTE: If this operation is made within 1 ~ 2 seconds immediately after scan, the latest
scan image may not be displayed.

3 - 47 L4E-BW1360
3.10 Screen Copy

3.10.1 Introduction

The screen copy function is used to store the whole screen on the CRT or the selected
window as image file in the FD or MO disk.
As image file mode, bit map or JPEG image can be selected.

3.10.2 Basic screen

3.10.3 Operation procedure

(1) Basic operation

(a) Copying image

The image to be stored is copied from the screen.

The operation to make screen copy is available in the following two methods.

Press Ctrl + Print Screen keys together. : Copy of whole screen.

Press Alt + Print Screen keys together : Copy of only the selected window

The copied image is pasted onto the screen area.

3 - 48 L4E-BW1360
 To paste an image onto the screen area, select Edit(E)
and then Paste(P). (Pressing Ctrl + V keys
simultaneously makes the same operation.)

An example of copy of only the selected window

(b) Saving image

Open the Save dialog.

Select File(F) and Save As…(A) to open the Save dialog.

On the opened Save dialog, input the data for saving.

Designate the drive in which

the data is saved.

Either FD or MO can be
selected as the drive for saving
image.

(FD: A:\, MO: D:\)

3 - 49 L4E-BW1360
 Set in this item below the
destination drive to designate
directories. Insert the "/"
mark between directories in
setting.
(Example: Directory:
Date/image

Set the name of the image

file to be saved in this item.

(Example: Image001)

Designate the saving format.

There are two options: Bit
map (*.bmp) and JEPG
image (*.jpg) for this item.
The Bit map (*.bmp) saves
the bit map in the screen as
it is.

The JEPG image (*.jpg) converts the bit map in the screen to JEPG image and save
it. In the latter mode, image can be saved with a relatively smaller data volume as
compare with the former case.
(Example of Bit map (*.bmp))

Upon inputting all the data necessary for saving, click Save(S) button to start the
saving operation.
(2) To return to the basic screen

To return the screen area to the basic screen, select File(F)

and then New(N). (Pressing Ctrl + N keys together makes
the same operation.)

(3) To delete the image on the screen

To delete the image in the screen area, select Edit (E) and
then Clear (C). (Pressing Delete key makes the same
operation.)

3 - 50 L4E-BW1360
 (4) To cut the image on the screen

To cut the image in the screen area, select Edit(E) and then
Cut(C). (Pressing Ctrl+X keys makes the same operation.)

(5) To make copy of the image on the screen

To copy the image in the screen area, select Edit(E) and then
Copy(C). (Pressing Ctrl + C keys together makes the same
operation.)

3.10.4 Message/Confirmation Dialog

When closing the Create New or Screen Copy process and if unsaved bit map is in the
screen area, the following message is displayed.

If the directory designated in "Save as" does not exist, the following message is
displayed. To create the directory and save it, select [Yes(Y)], while not to save it,
select [No(N)].

If the file designated in "Save as" already exists, the following message is displayed.
To overwrite save the file, select Yes(Y), while not to save it select No(N).

(Display example)

3 - 51 L4E-BW1360
In the case Bit map is selected as saving format of the image file and the data volume of
the bit map image to be saved exceeds the file capacity of the drive, the following
message is displayed.
In this case, change the saving format to JPEG image (*.jpg) and retry the saving
operation.

To save the image file as bit map, change the disk of the saving drive to the one with a
larger memory capacity.

In the case JPEG image format is selected as the saving format of the image and the
data volume of the JPEG image to be saved exceeds the file capacity of the drive, the
following message is displayed. In such case, change the disk of the saving drive to the
one with a larger memory capacity.

After completion of the saving operation, be sure to carry out the operation "3.7.3 (2)
Setting Password Effective".

3 - 52 L4E-BW1360
3.11 Selection of Cu-Filter

3.11.1 Outline

The default software setting in Pronto system has been made without Cu-filter.
Unless any special instruction is given, do not change the setting.

3.11.2 Change of setting

Unless any special instruction is given, only check the set contents and do not change
the setting.

3.11.2.1 Checking set contents

Click [Start], and select [Programs], [2. Service] and [Cu-Filter Selection].

An Example of Window Display

Check that lower X-ray Energy is [Apply] in

the dialog shown right.

3.11.2.2 Change of setting responding to special instruction

According to the instruction, select either [Apply] or [Not apply] and click [OK]
button. If the setting is changed, reboot the system and then make scans.

3 - 53 L4E-BW1360
3.12 Entry of Hospital Name

Register the hospital name in the following procedure.

(1) Click [Start] button, and point “Programs” and "2. Service".
Then, click [Hospital Name Entry] button.

(2) The following Hospital Name Entry window is displayed.

The currently registered hospital name is displayed. To change it, input a new hospital
name within 26 half-size characters from the keyboard and click [OK] button.

(3) As the hospital name registered here becomes effective after rebooting the system, make
sure of the hospital name displayed on the image acquired by scan after reboot

3 - 54 97 L4E-BW1360
 Section 4 Error Codes List (Appendix)

Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure

SE08 "Invalid Message Command " Error occurred in scan control program. Retry the operation.
SE09 "Invalid Message SCode " Error occurred in scan control program. Retry the operation.
SE0A "Invalid Message DCode " Error occurred in scan control program. Retry the operation.
SE0B Error occurred in scan control program. Retry the operation.
SE10 "Parameter Error " Error occurred in scan control program. Retry the operation.
"Set RSFTable Error"
"RawData Parameter Setting Error"
SE18 System is busy. Retry the operation.
SE20 "Config Setting Error " Failed in starting program. Shut down the system and
"DSP Boot Error " reboot it
"Event Initialize Error"
"RawBufDisk Initialize Error"
"RawData Recover Error"
SE28 "File Read Error " Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
SE29 "File Write Error " Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
"Image Write Error "
"RawData Buffer Read Error"
"RawData Buffer Write Error"
"ITB File Read Error"
"RawData Disk Write Error"
"RawData Disk Reserve Release Error"
SE2A Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
SE2B "Memory Error " Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
SE2C "Communication Error " Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
"Communication Error :Post Recon"
SE2D "Process Timeover " Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
"Fatal Process Timeover "
SE2E "Image Format Error " Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
SE40 "DSP Driver Error " Error occurred in scan control program Shut down the system and
reboot it
SE41 "DSP Error " , Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
"Reconstructor Busy:Run" ,
"Reconstructor Busy: APR0",
"Recon Start Process Error ",
"DSP Busy:Run",
"DSP Busy:APR0"
"DSP Start Process Error "
"Scan Start Process Error "
SE42 "Recon RawData Read Error " Error occurred in scan control program Reset Image table.
"Recon RawData Format Error "
SE43 "RawData Pat-Slice DB Write Error" Error occurred in scan control program Reset Image table.
SE44 "Insufficient Disk Space" File space is insufficient. Erase images or raw data,
and then retry the operation.
SE45 "Recon Timeout" Error occurred in scan control program Retry the operation.
"PostRecon Timeout"
SE46 "CTNoCal Calculation Error " Error occurred in scan control program Shut down the system and
reboot it
OE 01 Gantry tilt angle is not 0º. Set the gantry tilt angle at 0º.
OE 02 Table height is not more than 0º. Set the table height at more
than 0.
OE 03 Time out error in waiting for Start button
occurred.

4-1 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
S 09 “Stationary SW is ON” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Contact Service
representative.
Service Office: Turn off
Stationary switch.
S 10 “Scanner is not Ready” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Retry the operation.
Service office: Retry the
operation. Check Stationary
switch.
S 11 “Scanner is not Ready” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Retry the operation.
Service office: Retry the
operation. Check Stationary
switch.
S 12 “Scanner is not Ready” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 15 “Relay Off of Invertor” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 16 “Relay OFF of Invertor” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 17 “22FFB OFF for Tilt” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 18 “21FFB OFF for Invertor” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 19 “Stationary SW is ON” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Retry the operation.
Service office: Turn off
Stationary switch.
S 1A “Over Heat Tube” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 1B “Servopack Power is OFF” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 1C “Over Heat L-Tilt” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Keep the system for a while
without operation with power
turned on.
S 1D “Over Heat R-Tilt” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Keep the system for a while
without operation with power
turned on
S 1E “Manual SW is ON” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Contact Service office.
Service office: Set Manual
switch to Normal.
S 1F “Emergency” Error occurred in the scanner unit. After making sure of safety,
release the switch.
S 20 “Brake Release is ON” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Contact Service office.
Service Office: Turn off Brake
Release switch.
S 27 “Tape SW is ON” Tape switch is actuated. After making sure of safety,
release the switch.
S 28(08) “Miss Sence code:08” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(09) “unresolved code:09” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(0A) “unresolved code:0A” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(0B) “unresolved code:0B” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(0C) “unresolved code:0C” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(0D) “unresolved code:0D” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(0E) “unresolved code:0E” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(0F) “unresolved code:0F” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(10) “unresolved code:10” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(11) “unresolved code:11” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(12) “unresolved code:12” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(13) “unresolved code:13” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(14) “unresolved code:14” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(15) “unresolved code:15” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(16) “unresolved code:16” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(17) “unresolved code:17” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(18) “unresolved code:18” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(19) “unresolved code:19” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.

4-2 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
S 28(1A) “unresolved code:1A” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(1B) “unresolved code:1B” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(1C) “unresolved code:1C” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(1D) “Over Speed Error:1D” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(1E) “Under Speed Error:1E” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(1F) “unresolved code:1F” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(20) “unresolved code:20” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(21) “unresolved code:21” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(22) “unresolved code:22” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(23) “unresolved code:23” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(25) “unresolved code:25” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(26) “unresolved code:26” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(27) “unresolved code:27” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(28) “unresolved code:28” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(29) “unresolved code:29” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(2A) “unresolved code:2A” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(2B) “unresolved code:2B” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(2C) “unresolved code:2C” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(2D) “unresolved code:2D” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(30) “unresolved code:30” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(31) “unresolved code:31” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(32) “unresolved code:32” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(33) “unresolved code:33” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(34) “unresolved code:34” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(35) “unresolved code:35” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(36) “unresolved code:36” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(37) “unresolved code:37” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(38) “unresolved code:38” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(39) “unresolved code:39” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(3A) “unresolved code:3A” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(3B) “unresolved code:3B” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(3C) “unresolved code:3C” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(3D) “unresolved code:3D” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(3E) “unresolved code:3E” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
“unresolved code:41” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
“unresolved code:42” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(43) “Invertor Thermal Relay ON:43” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Keep the system for a while
without operation with power
turned on.
S 28(44) “Invertor Trip ON:44” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Power up the system again.
S 28(45) “Front Cover Open:45” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Contact Service office.
Service Office: Close the
scanner cover.
S 28(46) “Side Cover Open:46” Error occurred in the scanner unit. User: Contact Service office.
Service Office: Close the
scanner cover.
S 28(54) “DPRAM Commu. Init Error:54” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(57) “Scan Seq. Timeout:57” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(58) “Timer Counter not Synchronize:58” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(59) “Bord Cover Open:59” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(60) “unresolved code:60” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(71) “Communication Error to IPU:71” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(72) “Illegal Command:72” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(73) “Illegal Seq. Number:73” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(74) “Parameter Error:74” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.

4-3 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
S 28(76) “The X-ray Abort:76” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(77) “1 Scan Timeout:77” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(78) “Move Table Timeout:78” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 28(79) “Parameter Error from IPU:79” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 30 “Command Error to Scanner CPU” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
S 50 “Check Seq. Now” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Check Sequence is in
operation. Do not execute
other operation.
S 60 “Communication Error to Scanner Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
CPU”
X 10 “Timing Error” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
X 11 “Rotor not Standby” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
X 14 “Commu.Error” Error occurred in the scanner unit. Retry the operation.
X 17 “Door Open” Door of The X-ray room is open. Close the door.
X 1A “Over Heat Tube” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Keep the system for a while
system. without operation with power
turned on
X 1F “Emergency” Emergency button was pressed. After making sure of safety,
release the button.
X 21 “Rotor Error Exposure” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 22 “Primary Error (REC or INV)” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 23 “Focus Error Miss Selection” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 24 “Breaker OFF Control Circuit” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Power up the scanner unit
system. again.
X 25 “Memory Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 26 “Arcing” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 27 “Filament Power OFF” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Power up the scanner unit
system. again.
X 28 “High Voltage Trans.r Bellows SW ON” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 29 “mA Error Neutral” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 2A “Tube Volt. Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 2B “Filament Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 2C “Backup Timer Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 2D “ADC Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 2E “Miss Radiation” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 30 “Command Error unresolved” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 32 “Command Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 3C “Collimator Error” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 3D “ADC Error (Turn plate)” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.

4-4 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
X 3E “Ref. Error (Turn plate)” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 3F “Command Error Emergency” Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
system.
X 60 “The X-ray Error not Commu.(Turn Error occurred in the X-ray generation Retry the operation.
plate)” system.
X 61 “The X-ray Error not Commu.(WB)” Error occurred in the X-ray generation
system.
T 00 “Table Error” Clear button was pressed during scan Retry the operation.
operation. Positional information may be
inaccurate.
T 02 “Index Move Now” Error occurred in the table control system. Retry the operation.
T 03 “Gantry Tilt Now” Error occurred in the table control system Retry the operation.
T 04 “Scan Seq. Now” Error occurred in the table control system Retry the operation.
T 0A “Table Limit Inward” Tabletop reached the limit in inward direction. Make sure of table move
direction and retry the
operation.
T 0B “Table Limit Outward” Tabletop reached the limit in outward Make sure of table move
direction. direction and retry the
operation.
T 0C “Tilt Limit AF/PH” Gantry tilt angle reached the limit of forward Make sure of the set gantry
tilt angle tilt angle and retry the
operation
T 0D “Tilt Limit AH/PH” Gantry tilt angle reached the limit of backward Make sure of the set gantry
tilt angle tilt angle and retry the
operation
T 0E “Table Error not run” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 10 “Irregular OP.” Table is in operation from the gantry. After making sure that the
operation from the gantry has
completed, retry the
operation.
T 14 “Manual OP. done in Scanning” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 1A “Latch & Table Limit Inward” Table is latched. Unlatch the table.
T 1B “Latch & Table Limit Outward” Table is latched. Unlatch the table.
T 1E “Table Latch Error” Table is latched. Unlatch the table.
T 1F “Emergency” Emergency switch was pressed. After making sure of safety,
release the switch.
T 20 “Table Speed Error” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 27 “Tape SW ON” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 30 “Command Error” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 50 “Check Seq. Now” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 60 “Table Error not Cummunicate(Main1)” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 61 “Table Error not Cummunicate(Main2)” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 62 “Scanner-Table Error Cummunicate” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 63 “Table CPU Error Cummunicate” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 64 “Scanner-Table Error Retry Over” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 65 “Table NACK Recv.” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 66 “Move Command Retry Over” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 67 “Table Reset Error Communicate” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 68 “Scanner-Table Error Cummunicate2” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
T 69 “Scanner-Table Error Retry Over2” Error occurred in the table. Retry the operation.
SD00 “Scanner Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system.
SD01 “Scanner Driver Open Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD02 “RS-232C Open Condition Read Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD03 “RS-232C Open Condition Set Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD04 “RS-232C Open Timeout Set Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.

4-5 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
SD05 “Status Read Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD06 “Status(Table) Read Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD07 “Scanner Driver Init Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD08 “Scanner Driver Close Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD09 “RS-232C Close Timeout Set Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD0A “Scanner Abnomal” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD11 “ENQ Recv Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD12 “ENQ Recv Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD13 “ENQ ClearCommError” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD14 “1st ACK Send Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD15 “1st ACK Send Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD16 “Body Recv Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD17 “Body ClearCommError” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD18 “Body ClearCommError Timeout (3 Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
char)”
SD19 “Body Recv Timeout (3 char)” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD1A “Body ClearCommError Timeout (N Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
char)”
SD1B “Body Recv Timeout (N char)” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD1C “2nd ACK Send Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD1D “2nd ACK Send Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD21 “ENQ Send Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD22 “ENQ Send Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD23 “1st ACK Recv Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation. Make
sure if the gantry is not
powered down.
SD24 “1st ACK Recv Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD25 “1st ACK ClearCommError” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD26 “Body Send Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD27 “Body Send Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD28 “2nd ACK Recv Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD29 “2nd ACK Recv Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD2A “2nd ACK ClearCommError” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD2B “NACK Recv 3 times” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD30 “Check Sum Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD31 “Scanner Invalid Code” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD32 “Gantry power is OFF” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation. Make
sure if the gantry is not
powered down.
S 1F “Emergency” Emergency switch was pressed. After making sure of safety,
release the switch.
SD34 “Abnormal Table Position” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD35 “Table Pos. is not expected” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD36 “Gantry Ang. is not expected” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD37 “Table not Move” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD38 “TapeSW ON Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD39 “In Scanner Wakeup” Scanner unit is being started up. Wait for a while.
SD40 “Parallel Port Open Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD41 “Parallel Port Close Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD42 “Set LED Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD43 “Set LED Para. Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD44 “Start LED Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD45 “Start LED Para. Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD46 “DeadMan Set Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD47 “DeadMan Unset Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.

4-6 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
SD48 “The X-ray Soft Switch On Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD49 “The X-ray Soft Switch Off Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD4A “LED Flick Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD4B “LED Flick Para. Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD4C “CPU Ready On Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD4D “CPU Ready Off Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD4E “Scanner ResetOn Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD4F “Scanner ResetOff Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD61 “Send Command Parameter Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD62 “Send Command Device Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD63 “Send Command Scanner Ready Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
Error”
SD64 “Send Command Other Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD65 “Recv Command Device Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD66 “Recv Command NoData” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD67 “Recv Command Other Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD68 “Recv Command Open Event Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD69 “Recv Command Clear Event Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD6A “Recv Command WaitObject Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD6B “Send Command Timeout Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD6C “Invalid TableData Code” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
SD6D “Invalid TableData Data” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT01 “Process Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT02 “Offset Scan Timeout” Error occurred in the data acquisition system. Retry the operation.
OT03 “Scan Start Timeout” Error occurred in the data acquisition system. Retry the operation.
OT04 “Scan End Timeout” Error occurred in the data acquisition system. Retry the operation.
OT05 “HU Exceeded” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT06 “Generator Overload” .
OT07 “HU calc Error” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT08 “Scanner Commu. Check Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT09 “Scanner Rot. Time Check (CW) Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
Timeout”
OT0A “Scanner Rot. Time Check (CCW) Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
Timeout”
OT0B “Table Moving Speed Check Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT0C “Status Read Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT0D “Move Table Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT0E “Tilt Gantry Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT0F “Emergency Release Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT10 “Tube Return Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT11 “Standby Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT12 “Raw Data Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT13 “Image Recon Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT14 “RotStop Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OT15 “SeqStart Timeout” Error occurred in the scanner control system. Retry the operation.
OP01 File space is insufficient. Reset appropriate parameter.
OP02 Generator is overloaded. Change scan Reset appropriate parameter
parameter.
OP03 Gantry tilt angle has exceeded the limit value. Reset appropriate parameter
OP03 Set gantry angle at 0º. Reset appropriate parameter
OP04 Heat storage has exceeded the max. HU. Reset appropriate parameter
Change scan parameter.
OP05 Number of scans is too many. Reset appropriate parameter
OT20 “AvScanPn.DB Open Error 1” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT21 “AvScanPn.DB Open Error 2” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.

4-7 L4E-BW1360
 Error code Message Description Recovery Procedure
OT22 “AvScanPn.DB Open Error 3” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT23 “AvScngmPn.DB Open Error 1” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT24 “AvScngmPn.DB Open Error 2” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT25 “AvScngmPn.DB Open Error 3” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT26 “AvVd.DB Open Error 1” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT27 “AvVd.DB Open Error 2” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT28 “AvVd.DB Open Error 3” Auto-voice data file cannot be opened. Retry the operation.
OT29 “Scan PnNo. Error” Error occurred in auto-voice data. Retry the operation.
OT2A “Scngm PnNo. Error” Error occurred in auto-voice data. Retry the operation.
OT30 “Scan StandPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT31 “Scan StandPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT32 “StandPh not Exist” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT33 “StandPh Open Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT34 “StandPh Play Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT35 “StandPh Close Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT36 “StandPh Wait Timeout” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT37 Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT38 “Scan StartPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT39 “Scan StartPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT3A “StartPh not Exist” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT3B “StartPh Open Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file Retry the operation.
OT3C “StartPh Play Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT3D “StartPh Close Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT3E “StartPh Wait Timeout” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT3F Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT40 “Scan XoffPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT41 Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT42 “XoffPh not Exist” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT43 “XoffPh Open Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT44 “XoffPh Play Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT45 “XoffPh Close Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT46 “XoffPh Wait Timeout” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT47 Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT48 “Scan IntSeqPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT49 Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT4A “IntSeqPh not Exist” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT4B “IntSeqPh Open Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT4C “IntSeqPh Play Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT4D “IntSeqPh Close Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT4E “IntSeqPh Wait Timeout” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT4F Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT50 “Scan EndPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT51 “Scan EndPh No. Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT52 “EndPh not Exist” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT53 “EndPh Open Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT54 “EndPh Play Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT55 “EndPh Close Error” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT56 “EndPh Wait Timeout” Error occurred in access to voice data file. Retry the operation.
OT60 “FileRead Error” Error occurred in reading file. Retry the operation.

4-8 105 L4E-BW1360

 Section 5 Handling Password for Administrator Log-on

In accordance with the agreement between Hitachi Medical Corporation and Microsoft Corporation,
the password for administrator log-on must be disclosed when it is required by the Pronto system
administrator.
However, for the purpose of preventing both surreptitious use and malfunction of the system, the
disclosure must not be for all the users but should be limited to only the administrator.

If any system administrator has not been appointed, the user is requested to appoint the system
administrator and to disclose the password only to the administrator.
Then, thoroughly explain the following responsibilities to the administrator:

1. The password should not be disclosed to any unspecified third parties.

2. Hitachi shall in no event be liable for malfunction of the system which may be caused by
operation of the system software (including installation of commercially available software).

3. Any work to correct such malfunction (including reinstallation of the system software) shall
be born by the user.

Password: ct3g1g

5-1 106 L4E-BW1360

 Section 6 Event Viewer

6.1 Introduction
Event Viewer is the program for monitoring system events which are incorporated in
Windows NT as standard.
Using the Event Viewer, detailed data of system startup and errors occurred during booting
the Pronto system can be analyzed.

6.2 Startup
After booting the system, select [Start] of the task bar → [Programs] → [Administrative
Tools] → [Event Viewer] to start up the Event Viewer program. The list of the events that
have occurred is displayed.

6-1 L4E-BW1360
6.3 Detailed View of Event
Select the event of which details is to be displayed, and double-click the mouse or [View] →
[Detail].
Then, the following window displaying detailed data is displayed.

6.4 Closing Event Viewer

Select [Log] → [Exit].

6.5 Notes
For details of Event Viewer, refer to the commercially available Instruction Manual of
Windows NT.

6-2 108 L4E-BW1360

 Section 7 Warming-up

7.1 Warming-up Time

Table 7-1 shows time required for warming-up.

Table 7-1 Warming-up Time (Approximate values)

Model XE SE With tube shift

HU (MHU) 1.5/2.0/3.0 2.0 3.5 2.0 3.5 4.5
Long warming-up 3 min 10 min 16 min 5 min 5 min 6 min
Short warming-up 3 min 3 min 2 min 3 min 3 min

7-1 109 L4E-BW1360